Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Welcome
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45056318
28 September 2006
3
WELCOME
WELCOME
This Welcome document provides system requirements and an overview of how to set up the
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000 so that you can begin printing. It describes the initial tasks
you must perform and points you to sections in the user documentation where the procedures
are described in detail. This document also provides a description of the user documents on
the User Documentation CD and instructions on printing them.
This document assumes that you have already installed the copier components. Details about
the copier, the network, remote computers, software applications, and Microsoft Windows
are beyond the scope of this document.
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
WELCOME
4
About the documentation
This document is part of a set provided to users and system administrators of E-5000/E-3000.
The documents are on the User Documentation CD and are in PDF (Portable Document
Format). These files can be viewed online or printed using Adobe Reader. When viewed
online, these files contain links and cross-references that allow you to quickly and easily locate
needed information. Use the most recent version of Reader to take advantage of advanced
search capabilities. For more information, see “Installing and using Adobe Reader” on page 5.
The following comprise the documentation set for your E-5000/E-3000:
• Welcome provides an introduction to the E-5000/E-3000 and the user documentation.
• Configuration and Setup explains configuration and administration of the E-5000/E-3000
for the supported platforms and network environments. It also includes guidelines for
providing printing services to users.
• Printing from Windows and Printing from Mac OS describe how to install the printer
drivers on Windows and Mac OS computers, establish printing connections for different
networks, and begin printing from users’ computers. Each document also describes the
installation and use of print-related utilities, such as Job Monitor and Printer Delete
Utility.
• Print Options provides information about print options for the E-5000/E-3000. This
document describes print options and features that you access from the printer driver,
Command WorkStation job overrides, and Hot Folders job properties.
• Utilities describes how to scan and how to install, configure, and use the software utilities
included on the User Software CD (Utilities).
• Color Printing explains how to manage color output on the E-5000/E-3000.
This document provides information about ColorWise Pro Tools, including how to
calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 and set ColorWise print options from Windows and Mac
OS computers.
• Fiery Color Reference provides an overview of color management concepts and workflows,
and describes how to manage color from various applications.
• Workflow Examples explains complicated printing scenarios and provides cross-references
to relevant information in the documentation set.
• Variable Data Printing supplements the information in Workflow Examples with reference
information about variable data printing (VDP). This document provides an overview of
FreeForm and explains where to set FreeForm options.
WELCOME
5
• Glossary provides definitions for popular color concepts, printing applications, and
printing terms used in the documentation set.
• Release Notes provide last-minute product information and workarounds for some of the
problems you may encounter.
About Help
Most of the user software, utilities, and printer drivers contain Help that is accessible from
Help buttons or the main toolbar menus. Help provides detailed procedures on using the
application and, in some cases, provides additional detail. The documentation refers you
to Help for more information, as appropriate.
Installing and using Adobe Reader
For your convenience, the current version of Adobe Reader for Windows and Mac OS X is
included on the User Documentation CD. This version features enhanced capabilities for
full rules-based search across the entire documentation set. We strongly suggest that you
install this version of Reader to take advantage of these capabilities, unless you have installed
the equivalent version of Adobe Acrobat.
TO INSTALL ADOBE READER
1 Insert the User Documentation CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2 Double-click the CD icon.
3 Open the Adobe Reader folder.
4 Open the folder for your platform and double-click the installer file within (.exe for Windows,
.dmg for Mac OS X).
5 Follow the on-screen installation instructions.
Using Adobe Reader
View or print the PDF files provided on the User Documentation CD using Adobe Reader
(or Acrobat). After you install Reader, you can double-click a PDF icon to open the file.
Note specifically the advanced search capability of the version of Reader that is provided on
this User Documentation CD. You can search for a word or phrase across the E-5000/E-3000
documentation set by examining all the documents within a specific language folder on the
User Documentation CD. For information about using this and other features of Reader,
see the Help that accompanies the application.
N OTE : You can view the documentation from the CD or copy the language folder to your
desktop. If you copy the files to your computer, keep all the files in the language folder.
Do not rename the files, or the cross-reference links will not work properly.
6
WELCOME
System requirements for user computers
To install the E-5000/E-3000 user software on a Windows or Mac OS computer,
the computer must be equipped with a built-in or external DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive.
The following table lists the minimum system requirements.
Minimum requirements for
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
Mac OS
Operating system
Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or later
Mac OS X v10.2.8 or later
Windows XP (recommended with Service Pack 2)
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition, Enterprise
Edition, or Datacenter Edition (any of these
must be the 32-bit version)
Memory for printing
and utilities
(Downloader and Job Monitor)
256MB of RAM for printing and to operate utilities (512 recommended)
Networking protocol
IPX/SPX or TCP/IP
TCP/IP (required for Mac OS X v10.2.8
or later)
Networking protocol
for Fiery utilities
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (EtherTalk supported)
(required for Mac OS X v10.2.8
or later)
WebTools
Java-enabled web browser:
• Internet Explorer v5.5 with SP2 (Windows 2000)
• Internet Explorer v6.0 with SP1 (Windows XP/Server 2003)
• Safari v1.2 or later for Mac OS X v10.2.8 or later
N OTE : Portions of WebTools require Java JVM v1.5 browser support.
N OTE : Microsoft releases updates to Internet Explorer. Because support cannot be guaranteed
for all versions, use the versions specified for best results.
N OTE : Configure WebTool is supported on Windows and Mac OS X v10.2.8 or later.
A monitor and video memory that supports 16-bit color at a minimum resolution of 800 x 600
A TCP/IP-enabled network and the IP address or DNS name of the E-5000/E-3000
Web Services enabled on the E-5000/E-3000
7
WELCOME
Minimum requirements for
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
Mac OS
Command WorkStation
Windows-based computer with a 1.0GHz or greater
Pentium processor
Mac OS X v10.2.8 or later
200MB available hard disk space for installation
80MB available hard disk space for
installation
333MHz or greater Macintosh G3
1GB is recommended for writing full
previews of raster files and handling large
PS or PDF files
256MB of RAM
A monitor that supports 16-bit color at a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768
Video adapter card with 2MB of video memory
TCP/IP networking protocol installed
CD-ROM drive
Impose on Command
WorkStation (Windows only)
Impose 2.6 is supported
as an option.
In addition to requirements for Command WorkStation:
• Windows-based computer with 333-MHz Pentium processor
• Dongle to be installed on USB port for every client workstation
• Acrobat/PitStop CD
N OTE : Impose is supported on Windows 2000/XP.
Other network requirements
UNIX (TCP/IP) workstation
Standard TCP/IP connectivity
TCP/IP printing software that conforms to RFC1179 (Berkeley lpd protocol)
Sun OS 4.1.3 or later
Red Hat Linux 9 or later
Turbolinux 7
Solaris 9 or later
IPX (Novell) network
Novell server
Novell NetWare v5.x or later
N OTE : The iPrint feature of NetWare 6.x is not supported.
NDPS gateway in NetWare 5.1 or later
Support for Ethernet SNAP, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, and Ethernet 802.3 frame types
8
WELCOME
Preparing to print
To set up your E-5000/E-3000 for printing, perform the following tasks:
Step
Task
Quick reference
1
Configure the network server
Configure network servers to specify
E-5000/E-3000 print queues and
E-5000/E-3000 users.
“Configuring the network server” on page 9
2
Connect the E-5000/E-3000
to a functioning network
Prepare a network node. Connect
the E-5000/E-3000 to the network.
“Connecting the E-5000/E-3000 to a
functioning network” on page 9
3
Set up the E-5000/E-3000
At the copier display panel, configure
at least Server Setup, Network Setup,
and Printer Setup.
“Setting up the E-5000/E-3000” on page 9
4
Prepare users for printing
At each computer from which
users print:
“Preparing user computers for printing” on
page 10
• Install the appropriate printer files
and connect to one or more print
connections.
• Install utilities and an Internet
browser on computers where
users will use them.
• Verify the E-5000/E-3000 in the
list of printers and print a test job.
Your E-5000/E-3000 is now available on the network and ready for printing.
WELCOME
9
Configuring the network server
If you require a network server, you must configure it to provide user access to the E-5000/
E-3000 as a networked printer before you configure E-5000/E-3000 network settings
in Setup. For more information, see Configuration and Setup.
Connecting the E-5000/E-3000 to a functioning network
When you add the E-5000/E-3000 to a network, it is assumed that a network administrator
has already installed a network cabling system and has connected computers and servers.
TO CONNECT THE E-5000/E-3000 TO A NETWORK
1 Prepare a network node for the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Attach the network cable to the network connector of the E-5000/E-3000.
For more information, see Configuration and Setup.
3 Print a Test Page to verify that the copier is functioning normally.
For more information, see Configuration and Setup.
Setting up the E-5000/E-3000
Setup configures the E-5000/E-3000 to communicate with other devices and manage print
jobs. You must perform Setup the first time you turn on the E-5000/E-3000 after new system
software is loaded, or any time Server software is reinstalled.
Configure the Setup menus in the following order:
Server Setup specifies system options.
Network Setup specifies all the active network systems that transmit print jobs to
the E-5000/E-3000.
Printer Setup specifies how print jobs and queues are managed.
This is the minimum configuration required to enable your E-5000/E-3000 so that users can
begin printing. To configure network settings in Setup, you need a live network connection
so that the E-5000/E-3000 can query the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues.
To perform Setup from the copier display panel, select one menu after another and enter
information about your E-5000/E-3000 and your network and printing environment. In each
Setup screen, the last line of the display shows the name of the current Setup menu.
WELCOME
10
TO PRINT THE CONFIGURATION PAGE FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
1 At the copier, press the “fierydriven®” button.
2 At the copier display panel, press the Menu button to access the Functions menu.
3 Choose Print Pages.
4 Choose Configuration page.
Print the Configuration page after you finish running Setup to confirm your settings.
For a complete list of pages you can print from the Control Panel, see Configuration and Setup.
Preparing user computers for printing
Before you print to the E-5000/E-3000, you must install the appropriate E-5000/E-3000
software printer files from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) and User Software CD
(Utilities) and connect users’ computers to the E-5000/E-3000 over the network.
Windows computers
To set up printing for the supported Windows operating systems, do the following:
• Install the printer drivers and corresponding printer driver files.
• Configure installable print options.
• Configure the print connection between the client and the E-5000/E-3000.
For more information, see Printing from Windows.
Mac OS computers
To set up printing on a Mac OS computer, do the following:
• Install the printer driver and PPD files.
• Set up the E-5000/E-3000 in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
• Configure installable print options.
For details, see Printing from Mac OS.
Utilities provides instructions for both Windows and Mac OS computers on the
following topics:
• Installing Fiery utilities
• Configuring the connection for Fiery utilities
• Using Fiery utilities
WELCOME
11
Shutting down and rebooting the E-5000/E-3000
You may have to shut down the E-5000/E-3000 for service. When you do, network access
to the copier is interrupted. Before you remove or attach any cables to the E-5000/E-3000
to perform service, shut down the E-5000/E-3000.
TO SHUT DOWN THE E-5000/E-3000 ONLY
1 Make sure that the E-5000/E-3000 is not receiving, processing, or printing any files.
If the system has just finished processing, wait at least five seconds after the system reaches
Idle before beginning the shutdown procedure.
N OTE : Before you remove the E-5000/E-3000 from the network, notify the network
administrator.
2 At the copier, press the “fierydriven®” button.
3 At the copier display panel, press the Menu button to display the Functions menu.
4 Use the down arrow to scroll to Shut Down.
5 Select Shut Down System.
Before you access internal components, make sure that all cables are disconnected from the
back of the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : For main power down instructions, see the documentation that accompanies
your copier.
TO REBOOT OR RESTART THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Make sure that the E-5000/E-3000 is not receiving, processing, or printing any files.
2 At the copier, press the “fierydriven®” button.
3 At the copier display panel, press the Menu button to display the Functions menu.
4 Use the down arrow to scroll to Shut Down.
5 Select Reboot Server or Restart Server, depending on the task that you want to perform.
WELCOME
12
Cleaning the E-5000/E-3000 display window
Clean the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel with a soft cloth moistened with isopropyl
alcohol or ethyl alcohol. Never use water or ketone, as these may permanently alter
the display.
Start Guide
1
Getting Started
2
Using the E-5000/E-3000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FCC Warning ..........................................................................................................1
Note to users in the United States of America ...........................................................1
Note to users in Canada ............................................................................................2
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada .....................................................2
Safety Information .................................................................................................3
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................3
Power Cord Precautions ............................................................................................4
Power Supply .............................................................................................................4
1. Getting Started
Checking the Contents..........................................................................................5
For the Site Administrator ..........................................................................................5
For the Service Technician ........................................................................................5
Guide to Components ...........................................................................................6
Where to Put the E-5000/E-3000 ...........................................................................7
Caution.......................................................................................................................7
Space Required for Installation ..................................................................................7
Dimensions and Weight .............................................................................................7
Environment ...............................................................................................................7
When Moving the E-5000/E-3000 ..........................................................................8
2. Using the E-5000/E-3000
E-5000/E-3000 Startup, Shutdown and Reboot ................................................... 9
To Start the Main Unit and the E-5000/E-3000 ..........................................................9
To Shut Down the Main Unit and the E-5000/E-3000 ................................................9
To Shut Down the E-5000/E-3000 only....................................................................10
To Reboot the E-5000/E-3000 .................................................................................10
Power Up Sequence ............................................................................................11
INDEX......................................................................................................... 12
i
ii
FCC Warning
Note to users in the United States of America
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designated to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
• Product Name: Color Controller
• Model Number: E-5000/E-3000
• Responsible party:
Ricoh Corporation
• Address:
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
• Telephone number:
973-882-2000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
1
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Caution:
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Caution:
A LAN cable with ferite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
2
Safety Information
Read this Safety Information carefully before you use this product and keep it
handy for future reference.
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are
not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to
property.
R WARNING:
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock, do not remove any covers or
screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
• You spill something into the machine.
• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
R CAUTION:
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
• While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
• Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
3
Power Cord Precautions
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
• Use the appropriate power cord which was set up by your manufacturer's authorized service provider.
• Do not place objects on AC power cords or cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them.
• Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord
by the plug.
• Do not disable the power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important safety
feature.
• Plug the power cord into a grounded (earthed) electrical outlet that is easily accessible at
all times.
Power Supply
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the product and shall be easily accessible.
R WARNING:
• This product relies on the buildings installation for short circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than
120VAC, 15A U.S. (240VAC, 10A international) is used on the phase
conductors (all current-carrying conductors).
4
1. Getting Started
Please read this document before installing or using the Color Controller E-5000/
E-3000.
Note
❒ Ricoh supplied and is responsible for all the material provided in this document. If you have questions regarding the material contained in this document,
please contact Ricoh Corporation.
Checking the Contents
For the Site Administrator
• Media Package
• 4 CDs(Utilities CD, PS Printer Driver CD,PCL Printer Drivers and Utilities
CD, Document CD)
• Welcome
• Release Note
• This document (Start Guide)
• PCL Printer Driver User Software License Agreement
• Gray Scale Kit
• Ferrite Core
• Ferrite Core Installation Guide
For the Service Technician
• Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
• AC power cable
• Installation Procedure
5
Getting Started
Guide to Components
1
ASR004S
1. Not used (USB-Type B port)
2. USB ports Type A
(for installing system software, activating
Fiery features, or printing from a prepared USB flash drive)
3. Not used (Serial port)
4. Not used (Monitor port)
5. Network connector 10/100/1000M
bps
6
6. Not used (network connector 10/
100Mbps)
7. Copier interface connector
8. Power switch
9. Power connector
10. Service switches (for service use
only)
11. LEDs (2-digit diagnostic display)
Where to Put the E-5000/E-3000
Where to Put the E-5000/E-3000
Caution
•
•
•
•
1
Insert firmly the plug in the outlet.
Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
Ground the E-5000/E-3000. Avoid using a 3-prong adapter in a 2-hole ungrounded outlet.
Do not put anything on the power cord.
Space Required for Installation
Place the E-5000/E-3000 near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
100 mm
(4 inch)
Back Panel
100 mm
(4 inch)
100 mm
(4 inch)
Front Panel
100 mm
(4 inch)
AAD016S
Dimensions and Weight
• E-5000/E-3000 weight: 5.8 Kg (12.5 lb.)
• E-5000/E-3000 dimensions:
Length: 344.5 mm (13.6 in)
Height: 294.6 mm (11.6 in)
Width: 124.3 mm (4.9 in)
Environment
Environmental specifications
Operating
Ambient temperature
5 °C to 40°C (41 °F to 104 °F)
Relative Humidity
10% to 90% (non condensing)
Altitude
3048 m (10,000 FT)
7
Getting Started
When Moving the E-5000/E-3000
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
1
Important
❒ When moving the machine, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Turn off the main power. See p.9 “To Shut Down the Main Unit and the E5000/E-3000” or p.10 “To Shut Down the E-5000/E-3000 only”.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When doing this, grip the
plug so as not to stress the cord, reducing the risk of fire or electric shock.
❒ Move the machine carefully. If you do not, the machine might be damaged or
data lost.
❒ Protect the machine from impact. Shock could damage the hard disk and result
in data loss.
8
2. Using the E-5000/E-3000
E-5000/E-3000 Startup, Shutdown and Reboot
The main unit and the E-5000/E-3000 have separate power switches. During
normal operation, turning on the E-5000/E-3000 is recommended. Powering off
the main unit shuts down the E-5000/E-3000 properly. Powering on the main
unit will start the E-5000/E-3000 properly.
To Start the Main Unit and the E-5000/E-3000
A Power the main unit on.
B Power the E-5000/E-3000 on.
Note
❒ Always turn the main unit on first. If the main unit is off (or disconnected
from the E-5000/E-3000), the E-5000/E-3000 will start but will shut down
automatically before it reaches Idle. This feature protects the E-5000/E3000 from improper shut down.
To Shut Down the Main Unit and the E-5000/E-3000
A Make sure the main unit On indicator is off. If not, press the operation
switch and wait until the On indicator is off.
B Power the main unit off.
Note
❒ Do not turn the main unit off when the On indicator is on or blinking. Doing
so could cause system problems such as hard disk drive or memory problems.
C Wait for the E-5000/E-3000 diagnostic LEDs to power off.
D Power off using the E-5000/E-3000 power switch.
9
Using the E-5000/E-3000
To Shut Down the E-5000/E-3000 only
A Press the {fierydriven} key on the main unit control panel to access to the
Fiery menu screen.
B Press [Main Menu/Cancel] to access to the menu list.
C Scroll through the list, and press [Shut Down].
D Press [Shut Down System].
E Wait for the diagnostic LEDs on the E-5000/E-3000 to power off.
F Power off using the E-5000/E-3000 power switch.
2
The Fiery will remain OFF even when the main unit is powered on or power cycled.
To Reboot the E-5000/E-3000
A Press the {fierydriven} key on the main unit control panel to access to the
Fiery menu screen.
B Press [Main Menu/Cancel] to access to the menu list.
C Scroll through the list, and press [Shut Down].
D Press [Reboot System].
E Wait for the E-5000/E-3000 to reach Idle.
Note
❒ Do not reboot the E-5000/E-3000 by powering the main unit off and on. Recycling power to the main unit does not reboot the E-5000/E-3000 properly.
10
Power Up Sequence
Power Up Sequence
The following sequence describes the E-5000/E-3000 initial configuration. If system software is reinstalled, language, password, and Setup will need to be
reconfigurated.
2
11
12
GB
GB
EN
USA
G878-6723
Copyright © 2006
Start Guide
GB GB
EN USA G878-6723
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Configuration and Setup
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45056382
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
7
Terminology and conventions
7
About this document
8
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
9
E-5000/E-3000 on the network
9
Stages of installation on the network
Summary of E-5000/E-3000 network installation
Network server setup requirements
10
11
12
Windows networks
12
NetWare networks
12
AppleTalk networks
13
UNIX networks
14
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
Levels of access and control
15
15
Users and Groups
15
E-5000/E-3000 print connections
17
WebTools
17
Additional security features
18
Controlling E-mail access to the E-5000/E-3000
18
Restricting IP addresses and ports
19
Secure Printing
19
LDAP authentication
19
CONTENTS
Connecting network cable to the E-5000/E-3000
4
20
Back view of the E-5000/E-3000
20
Ethernet connection
20
About Setup
21
Setup from the copier display panel
21
Setup from a network computer
21
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
22
E-5000/E-3000 Setup from the copier display panel
22
E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel
23
Buttons
23
Display window
24
Functions menu
25
Accessing Setup options
28
About the copier display panel Setup interface
28
Types of Setup screens
29
Server Setup options
30
Network Setup options
32
Port Setup options
33
Protocol Setup options
33
Service Setup options
41
Printer Setup options
60
PostScript/Color Setup options
61
Administrative functions in the Setup menu
61
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER
62
Accessing Configure from a network computer
62
Using Configure
63
CONTENTS
SETUP OPTION REFERENCE
Setup options
CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS
Configuring the E-5000/E-3000 and clients for WebTools
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
5
64
64
67
67
68
Administrator functions
68
Setting passwords
69
Passwords from the copier display panel
69
Passwords from a network computer
69
Configuring the Job Log from the copier display panel
69
Clearing the E-5000/E-3000
71
Backing up and restoring fonts
72
USB printing
73
Managing e-mail address books
74
Printing the Configuration page
77
Maintaining optimal E-5000/E-3000 performance
77
Understanding power save considerations
78
Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the E-5000/E-3000
79
Shutting down the E-5000/E-3000
79
Rebooting or restarting the E-5000/E-3000
79
Copier settings
80
General Features tab
80
Tray Paper Settings tab
80
Timer Settings tab
81
Administrator Tools tab
81
CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting the E-5000/E-3000
INDEX
6
82
82
Runtime error messages
82
Confirming the copier connection to the E-5000/E-3000
83
Cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with utilities
84
Cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with Command WorkStation
84
85
7
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This document describes how to set up network servers and user computers to use the Color
Controller E-5000/E-3000 so that users can print to it as a high-performance networked
printer. For general information about using the copier, your computer, your software, or
your network, see the documentation that accompanies those products.
Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of
the network administrator. Detailed instruction on configuring networks is beyond the scope
of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network
system.
For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome.
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical harm
to you or others
INTRODUCTION
8
About this document
This document covers the following topics:
• Network connectors on the E-5000/E-3000
• Information specific to the E-5000/E-3000 about setting up network servers
N OTE : For information about network servers, see the documentation that accompanies your
network system.
• System security through access levels and passwords
• Setup of the E-5000/E-3000 from the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel
• Setup of the E-5000/E-3000 from a network computer
• Setup the E-5000/E-3000 to allow users to use WebTools
• Administration of the E-5000/E-3000
• Troubleshooting
Administrator functions described in other documentation are summarized on page 68.
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
CONNECTING
TO THE
9
NETWORK
This chapter summarizes the stages in setting up the E-5000/E-3000.
E-5000/E-3000 on the network
When the E-5000/E-3000 is connected to a network, it behaves as a networked printer.
The E-5000/E-3000 supports the following network protocols (rules that enable computers
on a network to communicate with each other):
• AppleTalk
• TCP/IP, which also includes the BOOTP, DHCP, FTP, HTTP, IMAP, IPP, IPv4, IPv6,
LDAP, LPD, NBT, POP3, Port 9100, SMB, SMTP, SNMP, SNTP, and SSL/TLS
protocols
• IPX/SPX (Novell)
These protocols can run concurrently on the same cable. Computers that use other protocols
can print through a server that uses one of the supported protocols. The E-5000/E-3000 is
auto-sensing, and handles all connections simultaneously.
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
10
Stages of installation on the network
Installation can be performed by a network or printing administrator. The stages of a
successful installation are:
1 Configuring the network environment
Configure network servers to provide users with access to the E-5000/E-3000 as a networked
printer. For information about configuring network servers in Windows and UNIX network
environments as they relate specifically to the E-5000/E-3000, see page 12. For information
about using your network, see the documentation that accompanies your network system.
2 Physically connecting the E-5000/E-3000 to a functioning network
Prepare a network node for the E-5000/E-3000. Obtain cable, route it to the location where
the E-5000/E-3000 is to be installed (near the copier), and attach the cable to the network
connector of the E-5000/E-3000. For details, see page 20.
3 Setting up the E-5000/E-3000
Configure the E-5000/E-3000 for your printing and network environment (see Setting up the
E-5000/E-3000 from the copier display panel).
4 Preparing user computers for printing
Install the files needed for printing, install user software, and connect the user computers to
the network. The software installation is described in Printing from Windows and Printing
from Mac OS.
5 Administering the E-5000/E-3000
Monitor and maintain system performance and troubleshoot problems that may arise
(see Administering the E-5000/E-3000).
11
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
Summary of E-5000/E-3000 network installation
Network server configuration
Configure network servers to specify E-5000/E-3000 print
queues and E-5000/E-3000 users.
Network server
Connection
Prepare a network node. Connect the E-5000/E-3000
to the network.
E-5000/E-3000
E-5000/E-3000 Setup
On the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel, configure, at a
minimum, Server Setup, Network Setup, and Printer Setup.
Later, configure the remaining Setup menus.
Client computer Setup
At computers where users print to the E-5000/E-3000:
• Install the appropriate printer files and connect to one
or more print connections.
• Install utilities and an Internet browser on computers
where users will use them.
• Verify the E-5000/E-3000 in the list of printers.
E-5000/E-3000 available on the network
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
12
Network server setup requirements
This section provides basic information about configuring the E-5000/E-3000 and using it on
the network. It does not explain network functions for printing in general. Only information
specific to the E-5000/E-3000 is presented. Setting up the network environment correctly
requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed
instructions for configuring networks is beyond the scope of this manual. For information,
see the documentation that accompanies your network system.
Configure the network and servers, and ensure that there is a live network connection before
you configure E-5000/E-3000 network settings in Setup. This allows the E-5000/E-3000 to
query the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues.
Whenever you change the configuration of the E-5000/E-3000, copier, or network at your
site, alter the settings to correspond to the changed environment. Changing network or port
settings may require that you make changes to other Setup options, as well.
Windows networks
• The E-5000/E-3000 requires a valid IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address.
Enter these addresses manually or use DHCP or BOOTP protocols to assign them
dynamically. Make sure that the E-5000/E-3000 name and address are listed in a domain
name server (DNS) or hosts name database used by your system.
If more than one E-5000/E-3000 print connection is published (for example, if both the
Print queue and the Hold queue are published), consider creating a printer for each print
connection, so that users can print to each connection directly.
• Configure the E-5000/E-3000 with the correct Windows domain name.
This is especially important for Windows printing, also known as SMB printing.
To use Microsoft Active Directory, you must assign the E-5000/E-3000 to a domain.
If you assign the E-5000/E-3000 to a workgroup, you cannot use Active Directory.
NetWare networks
• You must have administrator privileges on the network to create new NDS or bindery objects.
For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your network server.
• You can configure a single directory tree and up to eight bindery servers simultaneously.
• The E-5000/E-3000 looks for print jobs on one NetWare print server per bindery server.
NetWare file servers support the creation of print queues, which are storage areas for print
jobs. When a client on a remote computer decides to print, the job is directed to a Print queue
on the NetWare file server and spooled to the NetWare server disk, freeing up the client
workstation.
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
13
To the end of the NetWare queue names, append one of the following suffixes that
corresponds to the E-5000/E-3000 print connection, as follows:
_print
_hold
_direct
N OTE : These suffixes must be in English and in all lowercase letters.
You do not need to perform Setup when you add or remove a NetWare queue. However,
always restart the E-5000/E-3000 after you create or remove a queue that will be connected to
the print server used by the E-5000/E-3000.
When the E-5000/E-3000 is configured to connect to a NetWare server, it polls the NetWare
server for jobs in each of its queues. If jobs are found, they are automatically transferred over
the network to the matching connection on the E-5000/E-3000. For example, jobs from the
NetWare queue with the _print suffix are sent to the E-5000/E-3000 Print queue.
• You can connect up to eight bindery servers to the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : The NetWare bindery server you select must not be in the same tree as the one you
selected in NDS Setup, if both NDS and bindery are used by the E-5000/E-3000.
AppleTalk networks
AppleShare servers require no special configuration.
CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK
14
UNIX networks
• When you configure a UNIX workstation with the lpr protocol and connect to the E-5000/
E-3000 over a TCP/IP network, you can print directly to the E-5000/E-3000.
• Setting up UNIX workstations requires an administrator with root privileges. After the
initial configuration, UNIX users submit print jobs to a named printer.
• The E-5000/E-3000 is a printer controller that understands lpr protocols.
• The E-5000/E-3000 has a remote printer name that you must use in order to communicate
with it successfully.
Regardless of the UNIX system you use, the name you use for the remote printer (or rp in the
/etc/printcap file) in configuring the network for the E-5000/E-3000 must be one of the
following:
print
hold
direct
Workstations on a TCP/IP network can print directly to the E-5000/E-3000 as a remote
printer, or can print to a Windows 2000/Server 2003 server or UNIX workstation acting as a
print server.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
PREPARING
FOR
15
E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
To prepare for printing at your site, you must do some initial E-5000/E-3000 configuration
(or “Setup”) to specify the network environment and the types of printing you do. Before you
perform Setup, decide the levels of access to implement, such as passwords and other security
features that the E-5000/E-3000 offers. Because many of these security features are
interconnected, review the information in this chapter to plan for an effective security system,
and then perform Setup accordingly.
Levels of access and control
When you configure the E-5000/E-3000 during Setup, you (as system administrator)
implement a particular level of control by configuring these elements:
• Users and Groups
• Print connections
• Access to WebTools
Users and Groups
With the Configure WebTool, you create users, assign passwords to users, create groups with
particular privileges, and assign users to the groups. Several groups are provided by default,
and you can create new groups. All users in a group have the same privileges.
In addition to assigning the users that you have created to a group, you can add users from
your organization’s global address list if you have LDAP services enabled on the E-5000/
E-3000. For more information, see Configure Help.
Passwords
When you create new users, you assign passwords to them. In addition, you can also set
passwords for these areas:
• Default admin user in Administrators group
• Default operator user in Operators group
By default, the default Administrator password is set on the E-5000/E-3000. Change the
Administrator password periodically to protect the E-5000/E-3000 from random or
accidental changes to Setup. For more information, see “Setting passwords” on page 69.
Users in the Administrators and Operators groups have privileges in addition to the explicit
ones that you set when you create groups. Examples of these privileges are provided below.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
16
Administrator privileges
Users in the Administrators group have the highest level of control. Administrator privileges
include:
• Configuring the E-5000/E-3000 from the Configure WebTool or from the E-5000/
E-3000 copier display panel
• Adding and deleting groups
• Adding and deleting users
• Setting and changing passwords for users
• Deleting, printing, exporting, and viewing the Job Log
• Deleting, viewing, and modifying users’ print jobs
• Clearing the E-5000/E-3000 of all job data
• Printing black-and-white or color jobs
• Publishing print connections
• Deleting fonts
• Controlling print jobs from the job management tools
• Overriding job settings
• Setting default settings for print options
• Calibrating the E-5000/E-3000
Operator privileges
Users in the Operators group control print jobs from the job management tools, including
the following:
• Viewing the Job Log
• Deleting, viewing, and modifying other users’ print jobs
• Printing black-and-white or color jobs
Guest privileges (no password)
A user does not need a password to log on as a guest from the job management tools. A guest
can view the status of active jobs, but cannot make changes to jobs or to the E-5000/E-3000
state.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
17
E-5000/E-3000 print connections
The E-5000/E-3000 supports three print connections: Hold queue, Print queue, and Direct
connection. You enable or “publish,” these print connections to users on the network when
you configure Printer Setup. All published connections are constantly checked for the
presence of jobs. The Print queue and Direct connection give remote users more direct access
to the E-5000/E-3000 than the Hold queue. Therefore, do not publish the Print queue and
the Direct connection in environments where maximum control is required.
In addition, you can enable the Printed queue, which is a storage area for the most recent jobs
from the Print queue. The Printed queue allows you to reprint those jobs. In Setup, enable the
Printed queue and specify the maximum number of jobs to retain in the queue. To reprint
jobs in the Printed queue, use the job management tools (Command WorkStation).
N OTE : To use the utilities and WebTools, you must enable at least one print connection.
Hold queue
Jobs sent to the Hold queue are spooled to the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk for printing at a later
time, or for reprinting. Because the Hold queue is a storage area, jobs sent to it cannot
proceed through the printing process until the operator intervenes using the job management
tools.
Print queue
The Print queue is the standard E-5000/E-3000 queue. Jobs sent to the Print queue are
processed and printed in the order in which they are received. Jobs prioritized by an operator
with the job management tools and jobs sent via the Direct connection take priority over jobs
sent to the Print queue.
Direct connection
The Direct connection transmits jobs directly to the E-5000/E-3000, but only when the
E-5000/E-3000 is Idle. If the E-5000/E-3000 is busy, the job remains at the user workstation
until the E-5000/E-3000 is ready. The job is then processed as soon as the previous job is
finished and before the next queued job is processed.
Jobs sent to the Direct connection are not stored on the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk, and
cannot be selected for reprinting, moving, or deletion. Therefore, the Direct connection
provides a measure of security for sensitive files. Jobs sent to the Direct connection do appear
in the Job Log, for accounting purposes.
N OTE : To download fonts to the E-5000/E-3000, you must publish the Direct connection.
WebTools
The E-5000/E-3000 supports Internet or intranet access with WebTools from Windows and
Mac OS computers. To enable use of WebTools, see “Configuring WebTools” on page 67.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
18
Home
Home provides you with current information about the jobs processing and printing on the
E-5000/E-3000. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information,
see Utilities.
Downloads
Downloads allows users to download installers for printer drivers and other software directly
from the E-5000/E-3000. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more
information, see Printing from Windows, Printing from Mac OS, and Utilities.
Docs
Docs allows users to access, manage, and modify jobs in their mailboxes on the E-5000/
E-3000, and submit jobs to the E-5000/E-3000. For more information, see Docs Help.
Configure
Configure allows you to view and modify E-5000/E-3000 options from a network computer.
This function requires an Administrator password. For more information, see page 62.
Additional security features
In addition to the traditional security features, such as passwords, you can use these features to
keep the E-5000/E-3000 secure:
• E-mail access
• IP addresses and ports
• Secure Printing
• LDAP authentication
Controlling E-mail access to the E-5000/E-3000
Because you can allow users to print file attachments in e-mail messages sent to the E-5000/
E-3000, the E-5000/E-3000 accepts only valid attachments (for example, PostScript or PDF
files). Typically, viruses transmitted via e-mail require execution by the receiver. Attachments
that are not valid files are discarded by the E-5000/E-3000. Because file types such as .BAT,
.VBS, and .EXE could launch harmful virus activity, the E-5000/E-3000 does not process
these file types. The E-5000/E-3000 also ignores e-mails in RTF (Rich Text Format) or
HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) format, and any included JavaScript code.
You can define a list of authorized e-mail addresses on the E-5000/E-3000. Any e-mail that
the E-5000/E-3000 receives from an e-mail address not in the authorized list is deleted.
For more information, see page 74.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
19
Restricting IP addresses and ports
To restrict unauthorized connections to the E-5000/E-3000, you can permit only users whose
IP addresses are within a defined range. You can also close unnecessary ports to reject inbound
access from the network. Commands or jobs sent from unauthorized IP addresses or ports are
ignored by the E-5000/E-3000.
Secure Printing
This option allows the printing of highly sensitive or confidential files. A user printing a file
with the printer driver assigns a password to the job. The user must then enter the password at
the copier to print the job. For more information, see Print Options.
LDAP authentication
When you enable LDAP communication to retrieve names and other information for people
at your organization, you can specify the type of authentication. For more information, see
page 57.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
20
Connecting network cable to the E-5000/E-3000
This section includes an illustration of the E-5000/E-3000 back panel, and provides
information about connecting the E-5000/E-3000 to the network.
Back view of the E-5000/E-3000
1
2
USB connectors
10/100/1000BaseT
connector
1
2
ON
1 2
Ethernet connection
For Ethernet connections, the E-5000/E-3000 supports Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP
(Unshielded Twisted Pair) cabling for these network speeds:
• 10BaseT: Category 3 or higher
• 100BaseTX: Category 5 or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length)
• 1000BaseT: Category 5e or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length)
TO CONNECT TO THE NETWORK
• Connect the cable from the network to the appropriate network connector (RJ-45) on the
back of the E-5000/E-3000.
PREPARING FOR E-5000/E-3000 SETUP
21
About Setup
Setup configures the E-5000/E-3000 to communicate with other devices and to manage print
jobs. Perform Setup the first time you turn on the E-5000/E-3000 after new system software
is loaded, or any time Server software is reinstalled. When the network or user printing
environment changes, change the options accordingly.
N OTE : You cannot access Setup functions from Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition.
Setup from the copier display panel
The first time you perform Setup, you must use the copier display panel. Make settings for, at
a minimum, Server Setup, Network Setup, and Printer Setup, in that sequence. After the
initial Setup, you can change Setup options from the copier display panel (page 23) or a
network computer (page 62). Most Setup options can be set using either of these methods.
If you do not make settings in the remaining Setup menus, the E-5000/E-3000 uses default
settings. You must choose settings appropriate for the printing environment at your site.
Setup from a network computer
To set up the E-5000/E-3000 from a network computer, use the Configure application.
Access Configure from WebTools or Command WorkStation, Windows Edition.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
22
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE
COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
Setup is required the first time the E-5000/E-3000 is turned on after new system software
is loaded. In this initial Setup, you (or the service technician who loads the software) choose
the language for E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel menus and messages. If you do not
configure a particular Setup option, the E-5000/E-3000 uses default settings. Make sure
that the settings are appropriate for the printing environment at your site.
E-5000/E-3000 Setup from the copier display panel
Setup performed from the copier display panel configures the E-5000/E-3000 to
communicate with other devices and manage print jobs sent to it.
Setup provides these groups of options:
• Server Setup to specify system options
• Network Setup to specify all the active network systems that transmit print jobs to
the E-5000/E-3000
• Printer Setup to specify how print jobs and queues are managed
• PS Setup to specify PostScript settings
• Color Setup to specify color settings
• Job Log Setup to specify how the E-5000/E-3000 handles its log of printed jobs
The Change Password option in the Setup menu allows you to create and change the
Administrator password on the E-5000/E-3000.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
23
E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel
The copier display panel on the copier allows you to view status information about jobs
printed to the E-5000/E-3000, print system pages, and set up printing. It comprises the
following parts:
1
2
3
4
Menu
Up arrow
Down arrow
Line selection buttons
Item
Description
Menu button
Cancels without saving changes; also toggles to the Functions menu
Touch panel
Displays status information and options for setting up the E-5000/E-3000
Up and down buttons
Scroll menus, options, and settings
Idle
Print
(Server Name)
Scan
Processing
Idle
4
Printing
(Free) MB
(version)
Main Menu/Cancel
2
1
3
Bypass
Buttons
Up and Down, Left,
and Right arrow
buttons
Use these buttons to scroll to different screens in multi-screen
lists, select Setup options from a list of available options, and
scroll through alphanumeric characters.
Line selection buttons
Select a setting and proceed to the next option.
Menu button
Press this button to view other screens. Under normal
operation, the copier display panel displays the Info, RIP, or
Print Status screen with information about the status of the
E-5000/E-3000. If you press the Menu button, the Functions
menu is displayed and you can perform additional operations
(see page 25). If a job is processing or printing, press the
Menu button to cycle among the active screens.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
24
Display window
The display window provides information about the status of the E-5000/E-3000, displays
menu information, and allows you to view and edit information in the Setup menus.
The status area at the bottom of the display window displays the screen name and highlights
one of the icons to indicate what the E-5000/E-3000 is doing. Only the icons for the screens
currently available appear. The Menu button cycles through the active screens.
The screens are:
Alert Status
If a problem occurs while a job is processing, an error message
appears on the copier display panel.
Print Status
When the E-5000/E-3000 is printing a job, the Print Status screen
appears. This screen displays the following:
Cancel Job: Press the top line selection button to cancel the job
currently printing.
User name: The name of the user who sent the job currently processing.
Pages/Total: The number of copies of the current job printed and the
total number of copies of the job requested.
RIP Status
When the E-5000/E-3000 is processing a job, the RIP Status screen
appears. This screen displays the following:
Cancel Job: Press the top line selection button to cancel the job
currently processing. The E-5000/E-3000 cancels the job before
printing begins.
Job name: The name of the document currently processing.
User name: The name of the user who sent the job currently processing.
Kilobytes: The size (in kilobytes) of the job processed so far.
N OTE : This number is always displayed in kilobytes; for example,
10MB is displayed as 10000KB.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
Info Status
25
When the E-5000/E-3000 is not processing or printing a job, it
displays information about the current server and software:
Server Name: The E-5000/E-3000 name, as it is configured in Setup.
Status: The current status of the E-5000/E-3000. The E-5000/E-3000
status can be: Idle, Initializing, Busy, Processing, or Printing.
Megabytes: The space (in megabytes) available on the E-5000/E-3000
hard disk, for example, 756MB.
Version: The system software version running on the E-5000/E-3000.
Functions
You can press the Menu button to display the Functions menu. Use the
Up and Down arrow buttons to scroll through the list. Press the button
to the right of a command to select that command. For more
information, see page 25.
Network
The Network icon appears at the lower left of any of the other screens
when a job is being sent to the E-5000/E-3000 over the network.
When a remote utility is running, the Network icon appears, and the
green activity light flashes.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
26
Functions menu
The Functions menu provides many of the options available from Command WorkStation.
Choose the following commands from this menu:
Print Pages
Print system pages from the E-5000/E-3000. You can print the following pages from the
submenu that appears:
PS Test Page: A Test Page allows you to confirm that the E-5000/E-3000 is properly
connected to the copier, and provides color and grayscale samples to troubleshoot problems
with the copier or the E-5000/E-3000. Settings on the Test Page may include: Server Name,
color settings, printer model, and date and time the Test Page was printed.
Configuration: Prints the Configuration page, which gives the current server and device
configuration. This page lists general information about the hardware and software
configuration of the E-5000/E-3000, the current options for all Setup settings, information
about the current calibration, and the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000.
Job Log: Prints a log of the last 55 jobs.
Control Panel Map: Prints the Control Panel Map, which is an overview of the screens you
can access from the copier display panel.
Color Charts: Prints samples of the RGB, CMY, and PANTONE colors available from the
E-5000/E-3000.
Font List: Prints a list of all fonts currently on the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk.
E-mail Log: Prints a log listing recent e-mail activity. This E-mail log is useful to the network
administrator.
FTP Log: Prints a log listing recent FTP activity. This log is useful to the network
administrator.
N OTE : To print the E-mail or FTP log, you must first enable the appropriate service.
For E-mail Services, see page 52. For FTP printing, see page 55).
USB Media Server Print a file from a USB device to one of the published print connections.
Suspend Printing Suspend communication between the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier. Use this command if
you want to interrupt the current E-5000/E-3000 job and use the copier to make copies or
print another job first. Jobs continue to process on the E-5000/E-3000. After you make
copies from the copier or complete maintenance tasks, choose Resume Printing to continue
printing jobs from the E-5000/E-3000.
Resume Printing
Resume communication between the copier and the E-5000/E-3000 after you have selected
Suspend Printing.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
Secure Print
27
Allows users to control Secure Print jobs. To access Secure Print jobs, a password is
required. The user defines and enters the password in the Secure Print option from the
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 or Mac OS X printer driver. For more information, see
Print Options.
Select a Secure Print job from a list, and choose an action from the submenu that appears:
Print and Delete: Prints and deletes the Secure Print job immediately.
Print and Hold: Prints the Secure Print job immediately and holds a copy of the job as a
Secure Print job. To print or delete this copy, its password is required through this Secure
Print command.
Delete: Deletes the Secure Print job without printing.
N OTE : Secure Print jobs are not accessible from the job management tools.
N OTE : The Secure Print feature is supported on Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 and
Mac OS X only.
Shut Down
Shut down all E-5000/E-3000 activity in the correct manner and then restart. The following
options are available from the submenu that appears:
Restart Server: Resets the server software but does not reboot the entire system. Network
access to the E-5000/E-3000 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are
aborted and might be lost.
Shut Down System: Shuts down all E-5000/E-3000 activity properly.
Reboot System: Shuts down and then reboots the E-5000/E-3000.
Run Setup
Enter the Setup menu and change Setup option settings.
Tray Alignment
Adjust the placement of text and images on a page so that they are correctly aligned on the
sheet of paper and both sides of a duplex sheet have the exact same alignment. For more
information about this function, see Utilities.
Calibration
Calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 using ColorCal. For more information, see Color Printing.
If an Administrator password has been set, you must enter it to access Calibration.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
28
Accessing Setup options
When you access Setup options, make sure that no one is preparing to print to the E-5000/
E-3000.
TO ACCESS SETUP WHEN THE E-5000/E-3000 IS IDLE
1 On the copier, press the “fierydriven®” button.
2 Make sure that the information screen on the copier display panel reads Idle.
If Printing or RIPping appears, the E-5000/E-3000 is processing, and you must wait until the
system finishes and reaches the Idle state.
3 Press the Menu button.
4 Press the down arrow button to scroll, and select Run Setup.
5 At the main Setup window, press the button for the Setup that you want to access.
Use the down arrow button to view the remaining screens of the main Setup menu.
6 Perform Server Setup, Network Setup, and Printer Setup, in that order.
This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup
menus, either from the copier display panel or a network computer.
7 Change the Administrator password to protect your Setup from unauthorized changes.
For information, see page 69.
About the copier display panel Setup interface
When you perform Setup from the copier display panel, you can select one menu after
another and enter information about your E-5000/E-3000 and your network and printing
environment.
When you perform a function from the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel that prompts
you for the Administrator password, you must enter it promptly. Otherwise, the E-5000/
E-3000 copier display panel returns to Idle, and you must start over.
Some of the menus you see are shown on the Control Panel Map, a high-level guide to Setup
that you can print from the copier display panel.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
29
TO PRINT THE CONTROL PANEL MAP
1 Press the “fierydriven®” button.
2 At the copier display panel, press the Menu button.
3 Select Print Pages from the Functions screen.
4 Select Control Panel Map.
Types of Setup screens
There are two types of Setup options:
Multiple choice
questions
You are given choices that appear as buttons on the touch
panel (for example, Yes or No, or a list of settings from which
to choose). The currently selected value is highlighted. Press
the button for the desired option on the touch panel.
If the list of settings occupies more than one screen, use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll, and then choose the
setting.
As you proceed through the remaining options, make your
selections, and press the appropriate button to save the
changes when you are prompted.
Information
entry options
You must specify the information for your site (the printer
name or IP address, for example). Use the touch panel
window keyboard to enter information.
After you enter the settings, you must save the changes. You are usually prompted to do so.
If you choose Yes, your settings overwrite previous settings. If you choose No, your previous
settings are retained. If necessary, the E-5000/E-3000 restarts after you exit the Setup menu.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
30
Server Setup options
The Server Setup menu lets you specify system information that pertains to the E-5000/
E-3000 and all users. To access the menu, follow the instructions on page 28.
When you choose Server Setup, the options appear in sequence, as follows. Default values,
where applicable, appear in square brackets. Words shown in italics indicate that a product- or
site-specific value is displayed.
Server Name
Default server name
Enter a name for the E-5000/E-3000 (up to 15 characters long). This is the name by which
the E-5000/E-3000 appears on the network. When you change the Server Name with this
option, the new name is also applied to the Windows Printing Server Name (page 50).
N OTE : Do not use the device name (E-5000 or E-3000) as the server name. Also, if you have
more than one E-5000/E-3000, do not assign them the same name.
Time Zone
List of zones
Select the appropriate time zone from a list of supported zones.
System Date
Date
Enter the correct system date in the standard format for your use. The date appears on the
Job Log.
System Time
Time
Enter the correct system time. Enter the time based on the 24-hour clock in the format
HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). The time appears on the Job Log.
Print Start Page
Yes/No [No]
Specify whether the E-5000/E-3000 should print a start page every time it restarts. The start
page displays information about the E-5000/E-3000, including the server name, current date
and time, amount of memory installed in the E-5000/E-3000, network protocols enabled,
and connections published.
Use Character Set
Macintosh/DOS/Windows [Windows]
Specify whether the copier display panel and Command WorkStation should use the
Macintosh, DOS, or Windows character set for displaying file names. This is important if file
names include accented or composite characters (such as é or æ).
For mixed-platform networks, choose the option that gives the best overall representation of
the special characters you use.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
31
Allow Printing From
All users/Authorized users [All users]
Specify whether to verify whether users should be authenticated before they send jobs to the
E-5000/E-3000.
Enable Printed Queue
Yes/No [Yes]
Specify whether to enable the Printed queue, which creates a storage location on the E-5000/
E-3000 hard disk for recent jobs that were printed from the Print queue. Users with
Administrator or Operator access to the job management tools can reprint jobs from the
Printed queue without resending them to the E-5000/E-3000. If you select No, jobs are
deleted from the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk immediately after they are printed.
Jobs Saved in Printed Queue
1-99 [10]
This option appears only if Enable Printed Queue is set to Yes. Specify the number of jobs to
be stored in the Printed queue. Jobs in the Printed queue take up space on the E-5000/
E-3000 hard disk. If disk space is low, use a smaller value for saved jobs.
Clear Each Scan Job
After 1 day/Manually/After 1 week [After 1 day]
Specify how you want to remove scanned data sent to a mailbox on the E-5000/E-3000 hard
disk. If you select Manually, the scanned data remains on the hard disk until specifically
deleted, or until all scanned jobs are cleared by the Administrator.
Clear Scan Jobs Now
Yes/No [No]
Specify whether to clear scan jobs now.
Preview While Processing
Yes/No [No]
Specify whether a preview thumbnail should be displayed in Command WorkStation when a
job is being processed. If you select Yes, the preview thumbnail is always displayed in the
Processing section of the Activity Monitor.
Enable Secure Erase
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if you want to clear in a secure way the data stored on the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk
every time printing is complete.
Operational Mode
Idle Time/Run Time [Run Time]
If you enable Secure Erase, specify when jobs should be erased.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
32
USB Media Auto Print
Print All/Disabled [Disabled]
Specify whether to enable automatic printing of jobs from a USB device. Jobs are printed as
soon as the USB device is connected to the E-5000/E-3000. For more information, see
page 73.
Save Changes
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to activate any changes made in Server Setup. Select No to return to the main Setup
menu without making any changes.
Network Setup options
When you perform Network Setup, you configure the E-5000/E-3000 to receive jobs over the
network systems that are used at your site, including setting network addresses and names to
be used by workstations, servers, and the E-5000/E-3000 when they communicate with each
other.
Before performing Network Setup, confirm that the E-5000/E-3000 is connected to an active
network, because the E-5000/E-3000 queries the network for zones, servers, and server-based
queues. If you perform Network Setup without a connected and functioning network, default
settings are used that may not meet your needs.
The Network Setup menu includes submenus that allow you to configure port types,
protocols, and network services. Default settings, where applicable, appear in this document
with square brackets. Since Network Setup menus are nested, the names of higher-level
menus are shown in this chapter to the left of each menu heading.
Configure options only for the network systems that are currently used at your site. If your
network requirements change, you can change Network Setup at any time.
If the E-5000/E-3000 is configured to enable more than one protocol, it automatically
switches to the correct protocol when it receives a print job.
The available network types, and the Setup areas that pertain to them, are summarized in the
following table.
For this network or
connection type
Use this Port Setup
Use this Protocol Setup
Use this Service Setup
AppleTalk over Ethernet
Ethernet Setup
AppleTalk Setup
AppleTalk printing (PAP) is
enabled automatically
TCP/IP over Ethernet
Ethernet Setup
TCP/IP Setup: Ethernet Setup
See the items for “Service Setup
options” on page 41, except for
PServer Setup.
IPX/SPX over Ethernet
Ethernet Setup
IPX/SPX Setup
PServer Setup (NDS, Bindery,
or both)
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
33
Port Setup options
To configure the E-5000/E-3000, choose each port type you use and enter the settings for
that port. You must choose at least one port type.
Network Setup
Port Setup
Ethernet Setup
Enable Ethernet
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes if you have Ethernet cabling connected to the E-5000/E-3000.
Ethernet Speed
Auto Detect/1 Gbps/100 Mbps Full-Duplex/100 Mbps Half-Duplex/10 Mbps Full-Duplex/
10 Mbps Half-Duplex [Auto Detect]
Select an appropriate setting according to the settings of the network to which the E-5000/
E-3000 is connected. Select Auto Detect if your network environment is mixed or if you do
not know the network speed.
N OTE : The 1 Gbps (gigabit per second) setting is full-duplex.
USB Port Setup options
To print to the USB port, configure the appropriate settings.
Network Setup
Port Setup
USB Port Setup
Enable USB Port
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes if you want to print through the USB port. You can connect a Windows computer
to the USB port and print directly to the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : If you enable the USB port, you must also select the print connection to use for USB
port printing (see page 61).
Protocol Setup options
To configure the E-5000/E-3000, choose each protocol and enter the settings for that
protocol. You can enable AppleTalk, TCP/IP, and IPX/SPX communication simultaneously.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
34
AppleTalk Setup
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
Enable AppleTalk
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes if you have an AppleTalk network connected to the E-5000/E-3000. This setting
enables the E-5000/E-3000 to communicate over AppleTalk networks.
AppleTalk Zone
List of zones
The E-5000/E-3000 searches the network for AppleTalk zones in your network segment.
Scroll through the list to select the AppleTalk zone in which you want the E-5000/E-3000 to
appear. If your segment has only one zone, the E-5000/E-3000 is assigned to that zone
automatically.
The message “No AppleTalk zone found” may mean your network has no zones, or the
network cable is not connected.
IPv4 (TCP/IP) Setup
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
To configure the E-5000/E-3000 for TCP/IP, choose IPv4 Setup. You can also choose whether
to enable IPv6 (see page 40).
N OTE : To enable IPv6, you must first enable IPv4.
When you set an IP address, subnet mask, or gateway address for the E-5000/E-3000 during
Setup, you can allow the E-5000/E-3000 to get these addresses automatically from a DHCP
or BOOTP server. First, turn on or restart the E-5000/E-3000 and allow it to reach Idle.
Make sure the DHCP or BOOTP server is running, and then perform Network Setup.
Ethernet Setup (TCP/IP)
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
IPv4 Setup
Enable IPv4 for Ethernet
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes if you have a TCP/IP network connected to the E-5000/E-3000 over Ethernet
cabling.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
35
N OTE : If you are using TCP/IP for printing from Windows computers, enabling TCP/IP here
also enables you to use utilities from Windows computers using TCP/IP protocols.
Enable Auto IP Configuration
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to allow the E-5000/E-3000 to obtain its Ethernet IP address by searching the
network. Depending on your network and the protocol you select in the following option
(DHCP or BOOTP), the IP address can change. Select No to assign the E-5000/E-3000 a
static IP address.
Depending on your selection, the following options appear:
If you choose Yes
for Enable Auto IP Configuration
If you choose No
for Enable Auto IP Configuration
Select protocol
DHCP/BOOTP [DHCP]
IP Address
[127.0.0.1]
Select the protocol over which the E-5000/
E-3000 searches for its IP address. Both DHCP
and BOOTP allow the E-5000/E-3000 to
obtain the Ethernet IP address and subnet
mask automatically.
Enter the E-5000/E-3000 IP address for Ethernet.
This IP address, unlike an IP address set
automatically, remains the same if you restart the
E-5000/E-3000. You must change the default to a
valid address for your network. For information
about setting up printing with TCP/IP, see
Depending on your network, the E-5000/E-3000
page 12.
might be assigned a different address after you
restart the E-5000/E-3000. With the DHCP
Subnet Mask
setting, the E-5000/E-3000 can be assigned
[255.255.255.0]
a different address even if it is not restarted.
This option lets you modify the subnet mask for
Make sure the network is already configured
printing with TCP/IP over Ethernet.
properly for the protocol you select.
N OTE : DHCP option 81 is supported.
N OTE : Confirm the subnet mask setting with
your network administrator before proceeding.
Get Gateway Address Automatically
Yes/No [Yes]
Gateway Address
[127.0.0.1]
Choose whether to assign automatically the
gateway address for printing with TCP/IP.
If you choose No, enter the gateway address
in the following option.
Set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP
on your network.
Gateway Address
[127.0.0.1]
If you answered No to the previous option, set
the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP
onyour network.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
36
DNS Setup
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
IPv4 Setup
You can configure the E-5000/E-3000 so that it can access an appropriate DNS server.
With the DNS server, when connecting the utilities or WebTools from remote workstations
to the E-5000/E-3000, users need to remember only its Server Name, which is easier to
remember than an IP address.
Enable DNS
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if a DNS server is connected to your network and you want to allow the E-5000/
E-3000 to resolve a name to an IP address.
Get DNS Address Automatically
Yes/No [No]
This option appears only if you select Yes to Enable Auto IP Configuration (page 35).
Select Yes to get the DNS address automatically.
Depending on your selection, the following options appear:
If you choose Yes
for Get DNS Address Automatically
If you choose No
for Get DNS Address Automatically
Host Name
Primary DNS Server
IP Address
[0.0.0.0]
Enter the DNS host name of the E-5000/
E-3000.
Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS Server
IP Address
[0.0.0.0]
Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS
server.
Domain Name
Enter the DNS domain name.
Host Name
Enter the DNS host name of the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : When you change Host Name, the Server Name (page 30) and Windows Printing
Server Name (page 50) change also.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
37
Security Setup
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
IPv4 Setup
To help secure the environment for the E-5000/E-3000, you can control access to these items:
• IP addresses
Set controlled access to the E-5000/E-3000 by specifying IP addresses that the E-5000/
E-3000 permits or rejects. This prevents unlimited access to the E-5000/E-3000 over your
network and ensures network security in your environment.
• IP ports
Close unnecessary ports to help reject inbound access from the network.
IP Filtering
By default, the E-5000/E-3000 permits all IP addresses. To control access, you can filter an IP
address or a range of IP addresses.
N OTE : IP addresses 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255 are not valid addresses.
Enable IP Filter
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes to allow the E-5000/E-3000 to proceed to the subsequent IP filtering settings.
Default Policy
Accept/Deny [Accept]
Select Accept to accept IP addresses other than the IP addresses you specify at this Setup.
Select Deny to reject IP addresses other than the IP addresses you specify at this Setup.
Add Filter
Filter list
The number of available entries in the Filter list are displayed. Specify the IP Address/
IP Range. No list is displayed if you are entering the first IP address.
Delete Filter
Filter list
Select this to delete IP addresses from the list individually or by range.
Edit Filter
Filter list
Select to make changes to permitted IP addresses from the list, either individually or by range.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
38
IP Filter Type
IP Address/IP Range [IP Address]
Choose whether to enter IP addresses individually or by range. Depending on your selection,
the following options are presented.
If you select IP Address
If you select IP Range
IP Address
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 [0.0.0.0]
Start IP Address
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 [0.0.0.0]
End IP Address
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 [0.0.0.0]
Specify an IP Address to permit or reject
individual IP addresses.
Specify as many as 16 ranges of IP addresses
to permit or reject.
Filter Policy
Accept/Deny [Accept]
Select Filter Policy for the IP Address/IP Range you just added.
IP Port Setup
All ports not listed in the following options are closed. Supported protocols are listed in
parentheses after the port number.
Configure IP Ports
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes to improve security for your system. Proceed to the subsequent IP Port settings.
20-21 (FTP)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enable to enable the 20-21 (FTP) port. To perform FTP printing on the E-5000/
E-3000, this port must be opened.
80 (HTTP)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enable to enable the 80 (HTTP) port. (WebTools and IPP printing)
123 (SNTP)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enabled to enable the 123 (SNTP/NTP) port.
137-139 (NetBIOS)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enabled to enable the 137-139 (NetBIOS) ports. (SMB printing)
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
39
161-162 (SNMP)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enabled to enable the 161-162 (SNMP) ports. (Command WorkStation)
445 (SMB/IP)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enabled to enable the port 445 for SMB printing over Windows.
515 (LPD/Fiery Tools)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enabled to enable the 515 (LPD) port. (WebTools and LPD printing over Windows)
631 (IPP)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enable to enable the 631 (IPP) port. (IPP printing over Windows)
9100-9103 (Port 9100)
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enable to enable the 9100-9103 (Port 9100) ports. (Port 9100 printing over Windows
2000/Server 2003)
EFI Ports
Enabled/Disabled [Enabled]
Select Enabled to enable EFI ports 8021-8022 and 9906. (Command WorkStation and
printer driver Two-Way Communication feature)
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) Setup
If users’ computers support IPsec, you can enable the E-5000/E-3000 to accept encrypted
communications from users.
Enable IPsec
Yes/No [No]
Choose Yes to enable IPsec on the E-5000/E-3000.
Preshared key
If you previously defined a preshared key, enter it here. All incoming communication that uses
IPsec must contain this key.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
40
IPv6 Setup
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
Enable IPv6 for Ethernet
Yes/No [No]
Choose Yes to allow the E-5000/E-3000 to retrieve an IPv6 address from the network.
N OTE : To enable IPv6, you must first enable IPv4.
IPX/SPX Setup
Network Setup
Protocol Setup
To specify the frame types the E-5000/E-3000 uses for IPX/SPX protocols, choose IPX/SPX
Setup from the Protocol Setup menu. You must choose at least one frame type to enable
IPX/SPX protocols. The E-5000/E-3000 supports the following frame types for IPX/SPX:
Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet II, and Ethernet SNAP.
For protocols other than IPX/SPX, the frame type is automatically enabled and does not
require Setup, as follows:
With this protocol
And these printing services
This frame type is
automatically enabled
AppleTalk
PAP (Printer Access Protocol)
Ethernet SNAP
TCP/IP with Ethernet
LPD (Line Printer Daemon)
Ethernet II
Select Frame Types
Enable IPX Auto Frame Type
Yes/No [No]
Specify whether the E-5000/E-3000 should try to bind to all available frame types
automatically. The E-5000/E-3000 does so whether or not all frame types are appropriate.
To determine whether any frame types were successfully bound, save your changes, exit Setup,
restart the E-5000/E-3000, and print a Configuration page. The Configuration page lists only
one of the frame types that were successfully bound.
If you answer No to this option, you can select frame types manually. You must choose at least
one frame type to enable IPX/SPX protocols.
Select each frame type used on your IPX/SPX network. An asterisk (*) appears beside each
selected frame type. Press the line selection button again to cancel a selected frame type.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll to additional frame types. The E-5000/E-3000
binds to each frame type as you select it.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
41
Clear Frame Types
Clear IPX/SPX Frame Type?
Yes/No [No]
To clear all frame types at once, choose Yes.
Service Setup options
With the following options, you can configure services such as LPD, PServer, and E-mail
services.
LPD Setup options
Network Setup
Service Setup
LPD Setup
Enable LPD
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to allow LPD printing.
Default LPD Queue
Print Queue/Hold Queue [Print Queue]
Select the default connection for LPD printing if it is not set by the user.
PServer Setup options
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
If you do not use PServer Setup, continue with the remaining Service Setup menus starting
with “Windows Setup options” on page 49.
PServer is a program in the E-5000/E-3000 software that services the Novell print queues
assigned to the Novell print servers set up for printing to the E-5000/E-3000. When you
choose PServer Setup and enable PServer, you can set up NDS (Novell Directory Services),
Bindery Services, or both. NDS is used with NetWare; Bindery Services are used with
NetWare in bindery emulation mode.
Before you can configure options for PServer, you must enable frame types automatically or at
least one frame type manually (page 40).
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
42
Enable PServer
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if you have a Novell network connected to the E-5000/E-3000.
In the menu that follows, choose NDS Setup if your network uses NetWare in native mode.
Choose Bindery Setup if your network uses NetWare in bindery emulation mode.
If your network uses both NDS and Bindery, set up NDS first. If you set up NDS after
Bindery, you will overwrite Bindery Setup.
N OTE : If your network uses both NDS and Bindery, and uses NetWare servers in bindery
emulation, the E-5000/E-3000 cannot service NDS and bindery emulation servers on the
same NDS tree.
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
NDS Setup
Before entering NDS settings, make sure the E-5000/E-3000 is connected to the network and
that you have configured an NDS directory tree with a Printer, Print Server, and one or more
Print Queue objects for E-5000/E-3000 jobs (see page 12). To perform NDS Setup, you may
need permission to browse the NDS tree. If access to the Print Server is restricted, you must
have a login password.
The main objective of NDS Setup is to specify the Print Server object. In addition, you can
indicate the location of the E-5000/E-3000 print queues.
N OTE : The terms NetWare server, Novell server, and IPX server are in common use and are
used here interchangeably to mean the server on an IPX network running Novell NetWare
networking software.
Enable NDS
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if the NetWare servers you will use to print to the E-5000/E-3000 are running
NetWare in native mode.
Select NDS Tree
List of trees
Use the up and down arrow buttons to browse the list of NDS trees available to the E-5000/
E-3000. Choose OK when you have displayed the tree that contains the Printer, Print Server,
and Print Queue objects you previously defined for the E-5000/E-3000.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
43
Your new NDS tree selection automatically overwrites any previous tree selection. If you
change the NDS tree selection and there are also current Bindery settings, you are alerted that
they will be deleted. If you continue with NDS Setup, you can replace Bindery settings later.
If you do not want to continue, press Cancel to exit NDS Setup.
Is user Login needed to browse NDS tree?
Yes/No [No]
Select No if no password is required to browse the tree. Proceed to navigate the NDS tree to
the NetWare Print Server object.
Select Yes if network permissions require that you log on to browse the NDS tree and see the
Print Server object that you want to select. If you select Yes, you are prompted to navigate to
the User Login object.
Navigate the NDS tree to the User Login object.
This message is displayed if you selected Yes for the previous option. Choose OK and browse
the NDS tree, as described in the following paragraphs.
NDS tree name that you selected
Object list, “..”
Browsing to find the User Login object begins with the NDS tree that you selected previously
(with Select NDS Tree). Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through a list of objects
in the tree beneath the [Root] in the hierarchy, or use the navigation symbol “..” to go up one
level at a time.
In each subsequent browse screen, the top line represents your current location. The second
line contains:
• A list of objects in the current container directly below your current location
• The symbol “..” to go up one level
With an object selected, choose OK to travel down the tree, or choose “..” to go up the tree.
When you select an object and choose OK, that object is displayed on the top line, and the
second line lists objects directly below it.
Continue to browse the NDS tree until the User Login object is displayed in the second line.
Choose OK.
Enter Password
Enter the login password for the NDS tree, using the up and down arrow buttons to select
characters, and the left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor. Choose OK.
Navigate the NDS tree to the Print Server.
Choose OK to browse the NDS tree to the Print Server object.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
44
Browsing to find the Print Server object begins with the NDS tree that you selected previously
(with Select NDS Tree). In each subsequent browse screen, the top line represents your
current location. The second line contains:
• A list of objects in the current container directly below your current location
• The symbol “..” to go up one level
With a container object selected, choose OK to travel down the tree, or choose “..” to go up
the tree. When you select an object and choose OK, that object is displayed on the top line,
and the second line lists objects directly below it.
When the Print Server is displayed in the second line, choose OK.
Enter Print Server Password
Enter the Print Server password, using the up and down arrow buttons to enter characters,
and the left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor. Choose OK. (If no password is
required, choose OK.)
Server should look for print queues in:
Entire NDS Tree/Specified Subtree [Entire NDS Tree]
By default, the E-5000/E-3000 searches the entire NDS tree for E-5000/E-3000 print
connections. This option lets you restrict the search for E-5000/E-3000 print jobs to a subtree
(the Print Queue root) in which the E-5000/E-3000 print connections have been defined.
This makes the search more efficient. Select Entire NDS Tree if the tree is small. Select
Specified Subtree to restrict the search and specify the subtree.
If you select Entire NDS Tree, return to PServer Setup. Proceed with Bindery Setup (see
page 45), set the Polling Interval (see page 49), or return to the Service Setup menu.
Browse to the root of the Print Queue Subtree.
This message is displayed if you selected Specified Subtree in the previous option. Choose OK
to browse the NDS tree to the Print Queue subtree.
Browsing to find the container object begins with the NDS tree that you selected previously
(with Select NDS Tree). In each subsequent browse screen, the top line represents your
current container. The second line contains:
• A list of objects directly below your current location
• The symbol “..” to go up one level
• The symbol “.” to select the current container object (displayed in the top line) without
traveling down the tree
With an object selected, choose OK to travel down the tree, or choose “..” to go up the tree.
When you select an object and choose OK, that object is then displayed on the top line, and
the second line lists objects contained within.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
45
When the container that contains Print queues is displayed in the second line, choose OK. In
the next screen, choose “.” and choose OK to select the object in the top line.
When the E-5000/E-3000 displays the container name, choose OK to return to
PServer Setup.
Proceed with Bindery Setup (see page 45), set the Polling Interval (see page 49), or choose
Done to return to the Service Setup menu when prompted.
Bindery Setup options
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
Bindery Setup
Bindery Setup
Use Bindery Setup if you have already configured one or more bindery servers (file servers
running NetWare in bindery emulation) with a Print Server and a Print Queue for E-5000/
E-3000 jobs. Before entering bindery settings, be sure the E-5000/E-3000 is connected to the
network and the NetWare file server is running. If Guest Login is not supported, you must
have a valid user name and password.
N OTE : The terms NetWare server, Novell server, and IPX file server are in common use and
are used here interchangeably to mean the server on an IPX network running Novell NetWare
networking software.
Bindery Setup menu
Because you can set up more than one Novell server to handle E-5000/E-3000 print jobs, an
additional menu is displayed for this purpose. The options are as follows:
• Add File Server creates a new file server connection to the E-5000/E-3000. You can set up
a maximum of eight file server connections. After you have finished adding a new server,
you return to the Bindery Setup menu, where you can set up another server.
• View Server List displays the list of file servers that have already been selected to
communicate with the E-5000/E-3000.
• Edit Connection allows you to change the NetWare Print Server that will print to
the E-5000/E-3000.
• Remove File Server allows you to disconnect the E-5000/E-3000 from a file server to
which it is currently connected. Remove a file server when you want to reduce the number
of connections to the E-5000/E-3000 or reassign the connection to a different NetWare
file server.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
46
N OTE : If you change your mind about any of the menus you have selected, use the Menu
button to escape and return to the main Bindery Setup menu. To cancel all changes, exit
Network Setup and select No to Save Changes.
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
Bindery Setup
Add File Server
This option gives you two ways to add a Novell NetWare file server.
Select File Server
From List/Search by Name [From List]
You can select the file server from a scrollable list or by a name search.
Choose From List if your network does not have a large number of file servers.
Choose Search by Name if the number of file servers is so large that scrolling through
the list takes a long time.
If you selected From List:
If you selected Search by Name:
Add Server
List of all servers
Enter First Letters of Server Name
The E-5000/E-3000 obtains a list of
NetWare file servers by querying the IPX
network. Use the up and down arrow
buttons to select a NetWare file server
from the list. Choose the server on which
you have configured a print server and
print queue to handle E-5000/E-3000
print jobs.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to enter
the first letters of the name of the file server
you want to use, and then choose OK.
Add Server
List of servers matching the search
This option is displayed if you entered letters
to search. Scroll through the list to select the
server you want.
After you choose a file server, the E-5000/E-3000 immediately tries to log on as a guest
without a password. If it succeeds, it skips to the NetWare Print Server option.
If you try to add a file server but all E-5000/E-3000 connections are already in use, you are
prompted to remove a file server (see “Remove File Server” on page 48).
File Server Login
administrator/supervisor/Enter Login Name [supervisor]
This option appears only if a password is required for login, or if there is no guest account, or
the guest account is restricted. Choose Enter Login Name to enter your own login name and
password or log in as a guest. Choose administrator or supervisor if you have those privileges.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
47
Enter Your Login Name
[guest]
This option appears only if you selected Enter Login Name for the File Server Login. Enter
your login name or select guest.
Enter Your File Server Password
Enter the password for logging in to your NetWare file server.
NetWare Print Server
Print Server Name
Select the name of the print server that you configured in the NetWare utility PCONSOLE.
This print server will route print jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 from computers on IPX
networks.
Enter Your Print Server Password
This option appears only if your NetWare print server is set up to require you to log in with a
password. Enter your print server password.
Choose Add Server again until you have connected each NetWare file server you have
configured for printing to the E-5000/E-3000. When you have added all the IPX file servers
for your site, choose To Exit Bindery Setup.
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
Bindery Setup
View Server List
Supported servers
This option allows you to view the list of file servers currently connected to the E-5000/
E-3000 (that is, servers you have added in Bindery Setup). You are notified if there are none.
When you choose OK, you return to the Bindery Setup menu.
Edit Connection
On each connected NetWare file server, you have defined a print server to handle E-5000/
E-3000 print jobs. Choose this option to change the print server assigned to the E-5000/
E-3000.
Choose File Server
File server name
From the list of connected NetWare file servers, choose the file server whose print server you
want to change.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
48
NetWare Print Server
List of print servers on selected file server
Choose the name of the print server to use. This is the print server that will route print jobs to
the E-5000/E-3000 from computers on IPX networks.
If you do not want to make any changes, press the Menu button to return to the Bindery
Setup menu.
Enter Your Print Server Password
This option appears only if your NetWare print server is password protected. Enter your print
server password.
The Bindery Setup menu is displayed again. You can edit other connections, choose another
Bindery Setup option, or choose Exit Bindery Setup.
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
Bindery Setup
Remove File Server
Remove support for
File server name
This option allows you to select a NetWare file server from a list of connected file servers and
remove the connection to it. You are notified that you have removed the connection, and the
Bindery Setup menu is displayed again. If you change your mind and do not want to remove
any of the file servers, press Cancel.
You can choose another Bindery Setup option (such as adding another file server) or choose
Done and proceed to set the polling interval.
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
Bindery Setup
Exit Bindery Setup
Press Done to exit Bindery Setup after you view a list of IPX file servers, remove a file server
from the list, or connect all the configured NetWare file servers. After you exit Bindery Setup,
you return to the PServer Setup menu.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
49
Polling Interval options
Network Setup
Service Setup
PServer Setup
Polling Interval
Whether you use NDS or Bindery services, choose Polling Interval from the main PServer
Setup menu. If you do not reset the interval, the default value of 15 seconds is used.
NetWare Server Poll Interval in Seconds
1–3600 [15]
Specify the interval, in seconds, at which the E-5000/E-3000 communicates with the Novell
print server to see if there are print jobs waiting.
N OTE : If you select a short interval, the amount of network traffic increases. This may slow
down other network jobs.
Windows Setup options
Network Setup
Service Setup
Windows Setup
For setting up the Windows printing service, these characters are allowed in the text fields:
uppercase letters, numerals, spaces, and the following characters:
-_.~!@#$%^&(){}\',
Enable Windows Printing
Yes/No [No]
Enabling Windows Printing enables Server Message Block (SMB), the file and printer sharing
protocol built into Windows. Enabling SMB allows the E-5000/E-3000 to be listed on the
network so that Windows clients can print to a particular print connection (Hold, Print, or
Direct) on the E-5000/E-3000 without any other networking software. For information
about setting up a Windows computer for Windows printing, see Printing from Windows and
the documentation that accompanies Windows. Windows printing runs via TCP/IP, so you
must configure TCP/IP on the E-5000/E-3000 and on all computers that use Windows
printing.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
50
Use Automatic Configuration
Yes/No [No]
This option appears if you enabled Auto IP Configuration for automatically obtaining the IP
address of the E-5000/E-3000 (see page 35). Choose Yes if the E-5000/E-3000 uses a WINS
name server and automatically obtains its IP address. Depending on the answer, the following
options are presented in sequence.
If you select Yes:
If you select No:
Use WINS Name Server
Yes/No [No]
Broadcasts from SMB devices cannot pass
across a router without a WINS name server.
Setting up the WINS name server is outside
the scope of this manual. To find out if a
name server is available, contact your
network administrator. This option also
appears if you select No to Enable Auto IP
Configuration (page 35).
WINS IP Address
[127.0.0.1]
This option appears only if you choose Yes
for Use WINS Name Server. Change the
default address to the correct IP address for
the WINS Name Server. Obtain the correct
address from your network administrator.
Server Name
Default Name
Server Name
Default Name
The server name is the name that will
appear on the network for accessing the
E-5000/E-3000 via SMB. The default
name is the same as the server name
assigned in Server Setup (see page 30).
The server name is the name that will appear
on the network for accessing the E-5000/
E-3000 via SMB. The default name is the
same as the server name assigned in Server
Setup (see page 30).
Server Comments
Server comments (optional) can contain information about the printer. These comments are
listed in the E-5000/E-3000 Properties in Network Neighborhood and can be up to 15
characters.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
51
Set Domain Name
Select from list/Enter manually [Select from list]
This option provides two ways to specify the workgroup or domain in which you want the
E-5000/E-3000 to appear. The E-5000/E-3000 may need to reboot in order to display the
current settings.
If you select Select From List:
If you select Enter manually:
Choose Domain
List of domains
Workgroup or Domain
Select the workgroup or domain
from the list.
Enter the name of the workgroup or domain.
For more information about entering text
and characters, see “Types of Setup screens”
on page 29.
Web Services Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
Web Services Setup
Enable Web Services
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to make the WebTools available to users. TCP/IP must be enabled on the E-5000/
E-3000 and on user workstations. A Java-enabled Web browser and a valid IP address or DNS
host name are required for each user computer. For information about browser and computer
requirements, see Welcome.
IPP Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
IPP Setup
Enable IPP
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to enable printing with the Internet Printing Protocol (IPP). You must enable Web
Services. For information about setting up user computers to use IPP printing, see Printing
from Windows.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
52
Port 9100 Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
Port 9100 Setup
Enable Port 9100
Yes/No [Yes]
This option enables applications to open a TCP/IP socket to the E-5000/E-3000 at Port 9100
to download a print job.
Port 9100 Queue
Direct Connection/Print Queue/Hold Queue [Print Queue]
Specify the E-5000/E-3000 print connection for downloading jobs to Port 9100. Only the
print connections you have enabled in Printer Setup are available.
E-mail Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
E-mail Setup
Enable E-mail Services
Yes/No/Restore Settings [No]
This option enables the E-5000/E-3000 to use e-mail or Internet Fax as a means of
communication for a variety of purposes including printing PostScript, PDF, or TIFF files or
sending files through e-mail or Internet Fax. The E-5000/E-3000 serves as a messenger
between the copier and the e-mail recipient or Internet Fax recipient. Choose Restore Settings
to restore the previous settings.
Enable Print via E-mail
Yes/No [No]
Choose Yes to enable printing via e-mail and to print an E-mail Log.
Default E-mail Queue
Print Queue/Hold Queue [Print Queue]
Specify the default connection for printing jobs from E-mail Printing if it is not set by the
user.
Outgoing Server
[127.0.0.1]
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the server (SMTP) on your network that handles
outgoing e-mail.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
53
Incoming Server
[127.0.0.1]
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the server (POP3/IMAP) on your network that handles
incoming e-mail.
Server Type
POP3/IMAP [POP3]
Choose the type of mail server.
Fiery E-mail User Name
youremail
Enter the user name of the E-5000/E-3000 e-mail account, a maximum of 78 characters. This
is typically the part of the e-mail address that precedes the @ symbol. For example, in the
address pat@test.com, the user name is pat.
Fiery E-mail Domain Name
yourdomain.com
Enter the name of the domain in which the E-5000/E-3000 e-mail account is located, up to a
maximum of 19 characters. This is typically the part of the e-mail address that follows the @
symbol. For example, in the address pat@test.com, the domain name is test.com.
Account Name
youraccount
Enter the mailbox name specified on the mail server, up to a maximum of 78 characters. The
client mail service acknowledges e-mails sent to the E-5000/E-3000 E-mail Service using this
account name.
This is the internal name your network recognizes, which is not necessarily the same as User
Name. Use the following characters for the account name:
0-9 A-Z, ! # $ % & ‘ * + - / = ? ^ _ ‘ { | } ~
Password
Enter the password for the e-mail account, up to a maximum of 16 characters.
Administrator E-mail User Name
youremail
Enter the user name of the Administrator e-mail account, up to a maximum of 78 characters.
This is typically the part of the e-mail address that precedes the @ symbol. For example, in the
address pat@test.com, the user name is pat.
Administrator E-mail Domain Name
yourdomain.com
Enter the name of the domain where the administrator has an account, up to a maximum of
19 characters. This is typically the part of the e-mail address that follows the @ symbol. For
example, in the address pat@test.com, the domain name is test.com.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
54
Timeout (sec)
30-300 [60]
Enter the length of time, in seconds, that the E-5000/E-3000 should try to connect to each
e-mail server before determining that the connection is unsuccessful.
Polling Interval (sec)
5-3600 [15]
Enter the interval in seconds at which the E-5000/E-3000 automatically checks for
new e-mail.
Attachment Maximum Size
0–15000 [1000]
Specify the maximum file size (in KB) that the E-5000/E-3000 can send as an attachment
(for example, an attached scan file). If the file exceeds this maximum, the E-5000/E-3000
sends a message containing a link to where the file is saved on the E-5000/E-3000.
FTP Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
FTP Setup
FTP Setup includes options for Scan to FTP and FTP Printing. Scan to FTP enables you to
scan jobs from the E-5000/E-3000 to an FTP site and print an FTP Log.
Using FTP Printing options, you can enable the E-5000/E-3000 to serve as an FTP server.
N OTE : FTP printing is supported for Windows, Mac OS, UNIX, Linux and other operating
systems supporting the FTP protocol. The E-5000/E-3000 serves as an FTP server in
compliance with RFC959, although all the functionality described in RFC959 is not
supported.
Scan to FTP
Enable Scan to FTP
Yes/No [No]
Scan to FTP enables you to scan jobs from the E-5000/E-3000 to an FTP site and print an
FTP Log.
The FTP proxy that the E-5000/E-3000 supports uses the connection format
target_username@target_system_name / target_username@target_ip_address. Other connection
formats may not work properly. Ask your network administrator for details.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
55
FTP Printing
Enable FTP Printing
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes to enable FTP printing on the E-5000/E-3000.
Require Password for Printing
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes to specify a user password for FTP printing. From the E-5000/E-3000 copier
display panel, you can enter a maximum of 31 ASCII characters (no spaces in between) for
the password. This setting is available when you add a new user for FTP printing. By default,
no password is set for FTP printing. We recommend that you set one for security reasons.
Timeout (sec)
30-300 [30]
Specify the timeout. After you have finished making the selection, restart the E-5000/E-3000
for the settings to take effect. To confirm the settings, print a Configuration page.
Default FTP Queue
Print Queue/Hold Queue [Print Queue]
Specify the default connection for printing jobs from FTP Printing if it is not set by the user.
SNMP Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
SNMP Setup
Enable SNMP
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to enable SNMP communication over an IP connection.
Restore SNMP To Defaults
Yes/No [No]
Specify whether to restore the default SNMP settings.
Modify SNMP Settings
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes to modify SNMP information.
56
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
Security Level
Minimum/Medium/Maximum [Minimum]
Select the level of security provided by the E-5000/E-3000:
• Minimum: corresponds to functionality in SNMP version 1.
• Medium: offers more security for SNMP version 3.
• Maximum: most secure setting for SNMP version 3.
The following table describes the access for the different security levels:
User
Access
Minimum
Medium
Maximum
SNMP v1
Read
Yes
Yes
No
Write
Yes
No
No
SNMP v3
Unsecure
Read
Yes
Yes
No
Write
No
No
No
SNMP v3
Secure
Read
Yes
Yes
Yes
Write
Yes
Yes
Yes
N OTE : Some of the utilities require that you set the security level to Minimum in an SNMP v1
environment.
SNMP Read Community Name, SNMP Write Community Name
[public]
This option appears if you select Minimum or Medium for Security Level.
You can change the SNMP Community Name “public,” which is used for reading and
writing. When it is changed, the new community name must be entered to read and write any
information in the Configure WebTool. A maximum of 32 ASCII characters including spaces
can be used for the community name.
N OTE : A space at the beginning or end of the name is automatically deleted from the name
entered. When an invalid character is entered or no name is specified, the default “public” is
used for the community name. A name consisting only of spaces is invalid.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
57
LDAP Setup
Network Setup
Service Setup
LDAP Setup
The E-5000/E-3000 supports the following for LDAP servers:
• Lotus Domino 5.0.6a or later
• NetWare 5.x or later
• Windows 2000/Server 2003 with Active Directory service loaded
Enable LDAP
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if you want to use an LDAP server.
Server Name or IP Address
Type the server name or IP address of the LDAP server that you want to use.
Secure Communication
None/TLS/SSL [None]
Choose the method for verifying authentication. Choose TLS or SSL for certificate-based
authentication.
Authentication required
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if queries to your LDAP server require authentication. If you select Yes, you are
prompted to enter the User Name, Password, and Domain for the authentication. If you
select No, the authentication method is Anonymous and you proceed to setting the Timeout.
The E-5000/E-3000 supports the following authentication methods:
• Anonymous (for Lotus Domino, NetWare, and Windows 2000/Server 2003 servers)
• Simple (for Lotus Domino and NetWare servers)
• GSSAPI (for Windows 2000/Server 2003 servers)
If you use GSSAPI, note the following:
• A DNS server that supports Reverse DNS Lookup must be present on your network.
• The LDAP server IP address and host name must be registered on the DNS server.
• The time difference between the LDAP server and the System Time of the E-5000/E-3000
(see page 30) must be 5 minutes or less.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
58
Authentication selection
Automatic/Simple/GSSAPI [Automatic]
Choose the type of authentication.
User Name
Type the user name for access to the LDAP server. This information is used if the
authentication method is Simple or GSSAPI.
Password
Type the password for access to the LDAP server. This information is used if the
authentication method is Simple or GSSAPI. If you use GSSAPI authentication, the password
is encrypted when it is sent across the network.
Domain
Type the name of the domain in which the LDAP server exists. This information is used if the
authentication method is GSSAPI.
Timeout (sec)
1-9999 [60]
Specify the maximum amount of time to elapse before the E-5000/E-3000 stops attempting
to connect to the LDAP server.
Port
1-65535 [389]
Specify the port number for LDAP communication.
Search Base
Specify the search base to search an LDAP server. The E-5000/E-3000 will search the area of
the directory specified by the search base.
SNTP Setup
Locate the SNTP server that you use by entering the IP address or DNS name, or selecting it
from a list.
Enable SNTP
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes if you want to use the time synchronization function of the copier with an NTP/
SNTP server through SNTP. If you set this option to No, set the E-5000/E-3000 system date
and time manually (page 30).
Time Server
Set Time Server
Select from List/Enter DNS Name/Enter IP Address [Select from List]
Choose the method for identifying the time server.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
59
Time Server List
World/Asia/Europe/Oceania/North America [World]
If you chose Select from List, choose the region where the E-5000/E-3000 is located.
The E-5000/E-3000 is synchronized by an appropriate time server for that region.
Time Server DNS Name
Name
Enter the Host name of the NTP or SNTP server. You can enter up to 255 ASCII characters
for the host name.
Time Server IP address
[127.0.0.1]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or SNTP server on your network.
Polling Interval
Every 8 hours/Every Day/Every week [Every 8 hours]
Specify the interval at which the E-5000/E-3000 performs time synchronization with an
NTP or SNTP server.
Proxy Setup
If your FTP server uses a proxy server, enter the appropriate information in the following
options.
Enable Proxy Setup
Yes/No [No]
Select Yes to enable the following proxy server setup options for security purposes. Selecting
No returns you to the main Network Setup menu.
IP Address
[127.0.0.1]
Enter the IP address of the proxy server on your network.
Port Number
1-65535 [21]
Enter the port number of the proxy server on your network. This port number must be
entered at the E-5000/E-3000 when sending jobs to a secure FTP site.
The port number is required for sending jobs to an FTP server. When you change the port
number to send a job, you must enter the same port number used for sending that particular
job.
Timeout (sec)
1-999 [30]
Enter the length of time, in seconds, that the E-5000/E-3000 should try to connect to each
proxy server before determining that the connection is unsuccessful.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
60
User Name
Enter the user name for the proxy server.
Password
Enter the user password for the proxy server.
Printer Setup options
Printer Setup configures the connections and printing behavior associated with a particular
printing device. For more information about E-5000/E-3000 print connections, see page 17.
TO ACCESS PRINTER SETUP OPTIONS
1 In the main Setup menu, choose Printer Setup.
2 Enter the options appropriate to the printing requirements at the site.
3 When you have finished, save changes.
In the following list of options, default values, where applicable, appear in brackets.
N OTE : For users to access the utilities and WebTools or print to the E-5000/E-3000 over a
TCP/IP network, you must publish at least the Hold queue or the Print queue.
Publish Direct Connection
Yes/No [Yes]
This option allows users to print (or download) jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 without spooling.
Jobs printed to the Direct connection are not saved in the Printed queue.
If you plan to download fonts to the E-5000/E-3000, you must publish the Direct
connection.
Publish Print Queue
Yes/No [Yes]
This option allows users to print (or download) jobs to the Print queue. Jobs that are printed
to the Print queue are spooled to the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk and printed on a first-in, firstout basis. Only queues published in Printer Setup are available to users.
Publish Hold Queue
Yes/No [Yes]
Use this option to allow users to print (or download) jobs to the Hold queue. Jobs in the Hold
queue can only be printed by copying or moving the jobs to the Print queue with Command
WorkStation.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
61
USB Connection
Print Queue/Hold Queue/Direct Connection [Print Queue]
Use this option to determine where jobs printed to the USB port are sent. Only the print
connections that you published are displayed.
This option appears only if you selected Yes for the Enable USB Port option in Network
Setup. If only one of the print connections is published, this option does not appear and USB
jobs are automatically printed to that connection.
Shift Operation
None/Among Jobs/Sets and Jobs [Sets and Jobs]
Specify whether to shift jobs. With the setting Among Jobs, output is shifted per job. With
the setting Sets and Jobs, output is shifted per sets and jobs. For stapled jobs, choose None.
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Driver-Command/Panel Setting [Driver-Command]
Specify how the Bypass Tray handles jobs. Driver-Command sets the paper size and media
type according to the information from the printer driver. Panel Setting allows the preset
information on the copier to determine the paper size and media type.
Save Changes
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to activate any changes made in Printer Setup. Select No to return to the main
Setup menu without making any changes.
PostScript/Color Setup options
These Setup menus allow you to set defaults for the E-5000/E-3000. Users can override
most of these defaults on a job-by-job basis. However, users printing from UNIX or DOS
command lines cannot override defaults from their applications. Therefore, you must set
defaults in Setup. For information about these defaults, see “Setup options” on page 64.
Administrative functions in the Setup menu
The remaining choices in the Setup menu are intended to help you manage print jobs, but are
not required for printing.
For information about
See
Job Log Setup
page 69
Change Password
page 69
For other administration topics, see page 68.
62
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER
SETTING
UP THE
E-5000/E-3000 FROM A NETWORK
COMPUTER
After you perform initial Setup from the copier display panel, you can change most Setup
options from a network computer by using Configure. To use Configure from a network
computer, you must know the E-5000/E-3000 Administrator password.
Accessing Configure from a network computer
To set up the E-5000/E-3000 from a network computer, use Configure. You can access
Configure in these ways:
• WebTools from a supported Internet browser
• Command WorkStation, Windows Edition
TO ACCESS CONFIGURE FROM AN INTERNET BROWSER
1 Start your Internet browser and enter the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click the Configure tab on the E-5000/E-3000 home page.
3 Click Launch Configure.
4 Log on as Administrator with the appropriate password.
TO ACCESS CONFIGURE FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
1 Start Command WorkStation.
2 Log on as Administrator with the appropriate password.
3 Choose Setup from the Server menu.
Regardless of the method you use, the following dialog box appears.
SETTING UP THE E-5000/E-3000 FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER
Using Configure
Some Setup options cannot be accessed from Configure. Use the E-5000/E-3000 copier
display panel instead.
For information about using Configure and setting default options, see Configure Help.
63
SETUP OPTION REFERENCE
64
SETUP OPTION REFERENCE
This chapter describes the default settings that you can set for these groups of Setup options:
• PS (PostScript) Setup
• Color Setup
Depending on the Setup method that you use, not all options are available. For more
information about these options, see Print Options.
Setup options
To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Configuration page from Command
WorkStation.
Option
Settings
(default is underlined)
Description
Allow Courier
Substitution
Yes, No
Specify whether to substitute Courier for fonts that are unavailable when
you download files to the E-5000/E-3000, or when you print a
document for which you do not have the corresponding printer font.
If this option is set to No, jobs with fonts that are unavailable on the
E-5000/E-3000 hard disk generate a PostScript error and do not print.
This setting does not apply to PDF files; font substitution occurs
automatically in PDF files.
Black Overprint
Off, Text, Text/Graphics
With this option set to Text or Text/Graphics, the final text or text/
graphic portions of the page are overprinted, or combined with the
underlying colors. The quality of the output is improved since it will
not show artifacts near the edges of the text or text/graphics.
With this option set to Off, the border of the text or text/graphics is on
an edge that has cyan and magenta toners on one side (outside the text)
and black toner on the other side (inside the text).
CMYK Simulation
Method
Quick, Full (Source GCR),
Full (Output GCR)
Quick simulation assumes that the copier toners match the printer’s inks,
and all changes affect only one color (C, M, Y, or K) at a time. Full
(Source GCR) simulation allows for more flexibility in matching toner
to ink and all changes interact to maintain a better color balance. Full
(Output GCR) offers accurate proofing by providing a colorimetric
conversion of all four plates. In this simulation method, the black (K)
plate is mixed into the CMY plates, then reseparated based on the
Output profile.
SETUP OPTION REFERENCE
Option
Settings
(default is underlined)
CMYK Simulation Profile SWOP-Coated (EFI), DIC (EFI),
Euroscale (EFI), ISO Coated,
None
(default is SWOP-Coated (EFI) in
North America, Euroscale (EFI)
elsewhere)
65
Description
CMYK simulation allows color correction to simulate printed output on
a commercial press, so that the E-5000/E-3000 output can be used for
proofing. The SWOP-Coated standard is used in the United States, DIC
in Japan, and Euroscale in Europe. Custom simulations are user defined
and named. The simulations provided with the E-5000/E-3000 have the
designation “EFI” after their names.
If users create and load custom simulations on the E-5000/E-3000
with ColorWise Pro Tools, these also appear in the list of simulations.
A custom simulation can be selected as the default simulation. For more
information about custom simulations, see Color Printing.
Color Mode
CMYK, Grayscale
Specify whether to print color (CMYK) or Grayscale images to the
E-5000/E-3000 by default. CMYK gives you full color prints. Select
CMYK as the Color Mode before performing calibration on the E-5000/
E-3000. Grayscale converts all colors into shades of gray.
Convert Paper Sizes
No, Letter/Tabloid->A4/A3,
A4/A3->Letter/Tabloid
Converts paper sizes in documents automatically to the default paper
sizes specified. For example, if you select Letter/11x17->A4/A3, a letter
size document is automatically printed on A4 paper.
This option works in conjunction with the Default Paper Sizes option.
For example, if Convert Paper Sizes is set to Letter/11x17->A4/A3, and
Default Paper Sizes is set to US, then jobs are printed A4/A3 size.
This also includes E-5000/E-3000 system pages such as the Start Page,
Test Page, and Job Log.
Default Paper Sizes
US, Metric (default is US in the
United States, Metric elsewhere)
Prints on US paper sizes (for example, Letter, Legal, 11x17), or Metric
paper sizes (for example, A4 or A3) by default. When no page size is
defined within a PostScript file, jobs are printed on Letter paper if you
selected US; or A4 paper if you selected Metric.
Image Quality
Best, Normal
Specify the type of image quality to be used as the E-5000/E-3000
default. If you select Best, while image quality improves, processing time
may become longer, and the size of the processed job may be larger
Image Smoothing
Automatic, Off, On, Below
90 ppi, Below 150 ppi, Below
200 ppi, Below 300 ppi
Select On to minimize grainy output when printing low0resolution
images. When you select On, Image Smoothing is applied to all images.
Select Automatic to use smoothing only when it makes a visible
difference. When the image is below 150 ppi, image smoothing is
applied automatically.
Select one of the “ppi” choices (pixels per inch) to apply image
smoothing to those images whose effective resolution is below the
specified ppi value.
Page Order
Forward, Reverse
Select Forward to print the pages of your job from first to last.
Select Reverse to print the pages of your job from last to first.
SETUP OPTION REFERENCE
66
Option
Settings
(default is underlined)
Description
Print Master
On, Off
Select On to print a FreeForm master when created and printed to the
E-5000/E-3000. The master is retained on the E-5000/E-3000 after
printing unless deleted later. Select Off only to process and hold a
FreeForm master on the E-5000/E-3000.
Print to PS Error
Yes, No
Specify whether the E-5000/E-3000 should print the available portion of
a print job when it encounters a PostScript error. Select Yes to print the
portion of the job that was processed before the error occurred; select No
to cancel the print job entirely when a PostScript error is encountered.
Leave this option at No unless you encounter printing problems.
Rendering Style
Photographic, Presentation, Abs.
Colorimetric, Rel. Colorimetric
The color rendering dictionary (CRD) defines how colors are converted
from the RGB color space to device CMYK. Photographic, designed for
images, retains the relative balance between colors to maintain the overall
appearance of the image. Presentation, designed for bright colors,
produces the saturated prints needed for most business presentations, but
handles photographic images the same way as the Photographic CRD.
Absolute Colorimetric provides the closest match to the CMYK device
being simulated, including rendering the paper color as the background.
Relative Colorimetric provides a close match to the CMYK device being
simulated, regardless of the media used.
RGB Separation
Output, Simulation
This option defines how the E-5000/E-3000 processes RGB jobs. Select
Output for RGB jobs that you print to the final output device. Select
Simulation to simulate an output device that is not the device to which
you are printing.
RGB Source Profile
EFIRGB, sRGB (PC), Apple
Standard, Adobe RGB(1998),
None
The RGB source is the color space used to control color for conversion
from monitor to printed output. EFIRGB is based on the reference
points used in the creation of the E-5000/E-3000 software. sRGB is
based on an average of a large number of PC monitors. Apple Standard
is the standard reference point for Apple’s ColorSync software.
Scale to Fit
On, Off
Specify whether to scale a document size to a selected paper size if the
document size is different from the paper size. With the Off setting, if
the document size is larger than the selected paper size, the document
is cropped to the paper size when printed.
CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS
67
CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS
WebTools allow you to manage your E-5000/E-3000 remotely from the Internet or from your
company’s intranet. The E-5000/E-3000 has its own home page, from which you can select
the WebTool that you want to use.
For information about using WebTools, see Utilities.
Configuring the E-5000/E-3000 and clients for WebTools
WebTools provide access to many E-5000/E-3000 functions via the Internet (or intranet),
providing additional flexibility in remote management. After they are enabled, you can access
the WebTools from a network computer.
TO SET UP THE E-5000/E-3000 TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS
1 In Network Setup on the E-5000/E-3000, enable TCP/IP.
2 Set a valid, unique IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (if required) for the
E-5000/E-3000.
3 In Network Setup, enable Web Services.
If you want to use WebTools for printing, follow the remaining steps.
4 In Port Setup, make sure that port 515 (LPD/Fiery Tools) is enabled.
5 In Printer Setup, confirm that the Print queue is published.
TO SET UP A COMPUTER TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS
1 Enable TCP/IP networking.
2 Assign the workstation a valid, unique IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address,
if required.
3 Install an Internet browser that supports the Java language and frames.
Make sure Java is enabled. For more information about supported browsers and WebTools
requirements, see Welcome.
TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS
1 Start your Internet browser and type the IP address or DNS name of the E-5000/E-3000.
The E-5000/E-3000 home page appears.
2 Click the tab corresponding to the WebTool that you want to use.
68
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
ADMINISTERING
THE
E-5000/E-3000
This chapter provides tips on managing E-5000/E-3000 printing, performance, and security.
Administrator functions
Administration features are included with the user software and are built into the E-5000/
E-3000. The following table describes where to find information about these features.
For this information
See
Address books for E-mail Printing
page 74
Administrator and Operator passwords
page 69
Clearing the E-5000/E-3000
page 71
Configuration page
page 77
Connecting the E-5000/E-3000 to the network
page 20
Copier settings
page 80
Font backup and restore
page 72
Job Log Setup
page 69
Network servers, setting up to manage and share printing services
Documentation for
your network servers
Network servers, setting up with information specific to the E-5000/E-3000 page 9
Optimizing E-5000/E-3000 performance
page 77
Power save considerations
page 78
Printer default settings
page 64
Printing from Windows
Printing from Mac OS
Publishing the Direct connection, Print queue, or Hold queue to users
page 60
Setting up printing, installing printer drivers, installing user software
Printing from Windows
Printing from Mac OS
Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the E-5000/E-3000
page 79
Troubleshooting E-5000/E-3000 Setup
page 82
USB printing
page 73
WebTools
page 67
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
69
Setting passwords
You can set or change the passwords for users of the E-5000/E-3000. Anyone who is a
member of the Administrators group can modify the Setup options and control the flow and
order of print jobs with the job management tools.
To create users, assign passwords, and add users to groups, use the Configure WebTool.
For more information, see Configure Help.
To set the password for the user named “admin” in the Administrators group, you can use
either the Configure WebTool or the copier display panel.
Keep track of the passwords that you set.
Passwords from the copier display panel
From the copier display panel, you can change only the Administrator password. To change
the Operator password, use remote Setup (Configure WebTool or Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition).
TO CHANGE THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD
1 Scroll the Setup menu and choose Change Password.
2 Type and confirm the password, as follows.
New Password
Use the copier display panel window to enter information (see “Types of Setup screens” on
page 29). The password can be any combination of letters and numbers up to 19 characters.
Verify New Password
Retype the new password, exactly as you typed it initially. The new password is in effect after
you save changes and restart the E-5000/E-3000.
Passwords from a network computer
You can change the Administrator and Operator passwords from remote Setup, using the
Configure WebTool or Command WorkStation, Windows Edition. For more information,
see Configure Help.
Configuring the Job Log from the copier display panel
The Job Log is a record of all jobs processed or printed on the E-5000/E-3000, whether they
originate from a user workstation, a network server, or the E-5000/E-3000. You can print the
Job Log from the copier display panel or from the job management tools.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
70
The printed Job Log lists accounting information about each job, including user name,
document name, time and date printed, and number of pages. Windows and Mac OS users
can enter job-specific notes that appear in the Job Log.
Default values for the following options, where applicable, appear in square brackets.
TO SET JOB LOG OPTIONS FROM THE E-5000/E-3000 COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
1 Choose Job Log Setup in the Setup menu.
2 Enter the options, as described in the following section.
3 After you finish, save changes.
Auto Print Job Log Every 55 Jobs
Yes/No [No]
Use this option to specify whether the E-5000/E-3000 prints the Job Log after every 55 jobs.
Setting the Job Log for automatic printing is useful if accounting for each printed page is
important at your site.
Auto Clear Job Log Every 55 Jobs
Yes/No [No]
Use this option to specify whether to clear the Job Log after every 55 jobs. If you do not
enable this option, and do not clear the Job Log from the E-5000/E-3000 or from a remote
workstation, the E-5000/E-3000 saves a record of all jobs.
N OTE : If Auto Print Job Log is set to No, setting this option to Yes has no effect.
Job Log Page Size
Tabloid/A3 Letter/A4 [Letter/A4]
Select the paper size for printing the Job Log. Regardless of page size, 55 jobs are listed on
a page. The paper size used depends on the Default Paper Sizes setting in PS Setup. If the
Default Paper Sizes setting is US, the Job Log is printed on 11x17 or Letter size paper.
Secure Job Log
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to print or delete the Job Log with the Administrator password.
Save Changes
Yes/No [Yes]
Select Yes to activate any changes made in Job Log Setup. Select No to return to the main
Setup menu without making any changes.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
71
Clearing the E-5000/E-3000
The Clear Server command allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the E-5000/E-3000
Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Jobs can also be deleted, either individually or as a group,
using Command WorkStation. Clear Server also clears all jobs archived on the E-5000/
E-3000 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and all FreeForm masters.
TO CLEAR THE E-5000/E-3000
• In Command WorkStation, choose Clear Server from the Server menu.
For more information, see Command WorkStation Help.
Be sure to back up your original data on your own media at the same time you store and save
data on the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk. Never damage or reset the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk,
and do not turn off the system while accessing the hard disk. For instructions on how to turn
on and turn off the E-5000/E-3000, see page 79.
If the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk or system software experiences technical difficulties, data
stored and saved on the E-5000/E-3000 hard disk may be irretrievably lost. If problems with
the hard disk occur, extended storage of the following data cannot be assured:
• Third-party fonts
• Print jobs
• Color profiles, including profiles downloaded or edited with Spot-On
• Job notes and instructions
• Scanned image data
• Jobs edited with Impose
• Variable data documents
• E-mail Service Address Book
• E-5000/E-3000 configuration information (list of all the settings in effect for the
current Setup)
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
72
Backing up and restoring fonts
With Command WorkStation, you can back up and restore fonts. Observe these guidelines
before backing up or restoring fonts:
• You can back up and restore only PostScript fonts.
• All fonts are backed up or restored. You cannot select individual fonts.
• Do not back up fonts to an internal hard drive that also contains the E-5000/E-3000
system software
• You must restore fonts only to the same E-5000/E-3000 from which the fonts were
originally backed up.
TO BACK UP OR RESTORE FONTS
1 Start Command WorkStation and log on as Administrator with the appropriate password.
2 Choose Manage Fonts from the Server menu.
3 Click Backup or Restore.
4 In the window that appears, navigate to the folder where you want to back up the fonts or
restore them.
5 Click OK.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
73
USB printing
You can save PS, EPS, TIFF, and PDF files to a USB device and print those files on the
E-5000/E-3000. To print files automatically when you connect the USB drive to the E-5000/
E-3000, save the files to specific folders or to the root level on the USB drive.
You can also print from the copier display panel. For more information about printing, see
Printing from Windows and Printing from Mac OS.
TO SET UP THE USB DRIVE FOR AUTOMATIC PRINTING
1 Configure the USB printing options in Setup (see page 32).
2 Create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named Print, Hold, and Direct.
3 Save the files from the user’s computer to the USB drive.
Files copied to the Print, Hold, and Direct folders are downloaded to the corresponding print
connection on the E-5000/E-3000 automatically when you connect the USB drive to the
E-5000/E-3000. Files copied to the root level of the drive are downloaded to the Print queue.
For information about enabling print connections, see page 60.
4 Remove the USB device from the user’s computer and connect it to the USB port on the
E-5000/E-3000.
For the location of the USB port, see page 20.
Make sure the USB device is properly stopped before you disconnect it from the computer.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
74
Managing e-mail address books
The E-mail Service feature allows you to import a list of e-mail/Internet Fax addresses to the
E-5000/E-3000. To import the list of addresses, send e-mail messages in a particular format to
the E-5000/E-3000.
The list is added to the address books. Users use the address books to send attachment files
to a particular e-mail/Internet Fax address, and the administrator uses the address books to
control access to E-mail Services.
N OTE : E-mail messages can be sent only from an administrator account.
The E-5000/E-3000 supports the following address books:
Admin includes users with administrative access. Administrative access allows you to modify
the address book, get the current address book from the E-5000/E-3000, and cancel or status
any print job.
Print includes users who have print access. Only users whose e-mail addresses are in the Print
address book are authorized to submit jobs via e-mail to the E-5000/E-3000. Unauthorized
users receive an e-mail reply that their job was not accepted by the E-5000/E-3000 for
printing.
User includes users who have scanning access.
Fax is used for Scan to Internet FAX. This address book is used for sending scan files via
Internet FAX to the E-5000/E-3000. You cannot use addresses in the address book to send an
e-mail to the E-5000/E-3000.
Corporate is an LDAP address book used for Scan to E-mail. It allows users to send files with
Remote Scan to a list of addresses registered on an LDAP server.
N OTE : Perform LDAP Setup before setting this address book. For more information, see
page 57.
E-mail Service also allows the administrator to overwrite the address book, add new addresses,
remove addresses, and retrieve current addresses on the E-5000/E-3000.
When a print job is submitted via e-mail, the E-5000/E-3000 first checks the Print address
book. If the user’s e-mail address does not match any entry in the Print address book, the job
does not print. Instead, the user receives an e-mail stating that the print job was not accepted.
The default wildcard character “@” is stored in the Print address book. This allows any user to
print to the E-5000/E-3000 until the administrator adds the first entry in the Print address
book.
75
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
The administrator can manage the address books by sending an e-mail to the E-5000/E-3000
with command codes in the Subject and Message fields. The E-5000/E-3000 responds by
e-mail to these commands with information about each request. When managing address
books, see the following table.
To add or remove more than one address at a time, list the addresses on separate lines in the
message field of the e-mail.
Task
Administrator
subject field
To retrieve a
specific
address book
#GetAddressBook
name of address book
Address Book name of
address book
For example:
#GetAddressBook Admin
For example:
Address Book Admin
To add an address #AddAddressTo
to an address book name of address book
Administrator
message field
name@domain
or
“display name” <name@domain>
For example:
#AddAddressTo Print
To clear an address #ClearAddressBook name of
book
address book
Fiery e-mail response Fiery e-mail response
subject field
message field
Added to Address Book List of addresses added
name of address book
to the address book
The E-5000/E-3000
also lists any addresses
For example:
that cannot be added
Added to Address Book
and includes the reason
Print
Address Book name of
address book cleared
or
For example:
#ClearAddressBook User
List of addresses in the
specified address book
If the address book is
not cleared, the reason
is given
Address Book name of
address book not cleared
For example:
Address Book User
cleared
To delete an
address from an
address book
#DeleteAddressFrom name of name@domain
address book
or
“display name” <name@domain>
For example:
#DeleteAddressFrom User
To receive help for #Help
E-5000/E-3000
e-mail services
Removed from Address
Book name of address
book
For example:
Removed from Address
Book User
RE: Help
Deleted Address 1
Deleted Address 2
The E-5000/E-3000
also lists any addresses
that cannot be deleted
and includes the reason
Provides
troubleshooting
e-mail syntax
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
76
TO RETRIEVE AN ADDRESS BOOK FROM THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Start your e-mail application.
2 Open a new message window.
3 Type the e-mail address of your print server in the To line.
4 Type the command of a specified address in the Subject line.
For the User, type “#GetAddressBook User.” For the Administrator, type “#GetAddressBook
Admin” or “#GetAddressBook Print.”
5 Send the message.
The return message includes the addresses of the specified address book.
6 Copy the addresses as a text file or save the message for your record.
TO RESTORE AN ADDRESS BOOK TO THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Start your e-mail application.
2 Open a new message window.
3 Type the e-mail address of your print server in the To line.
4 Type the command of a specified address in the Subject line.
For the User, type “#GetAddressTo User.” For the Administrator, type “#GetAddressTo
Admin” or “#GetAddressTo Print.”
5 Copy the addresses retrieved and save it in the body of the e-mail.
You can include nicknames. However, when a nickname or address is longer than one line,
edit it to fit on one line.
6 Send the message.
7 Review the returned message of notification, and confirm that the addresses were restored
correctly.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
77
Printing the Configuration page
The Configuration page lists the settings in effect for the current Setup. After you perform
Setup, print a Configuration page to confirm your settings. Post the current Configuration
page near the E-5000/E-3000 for quick reference. Users need the information on this page,
such as the current printer default settings.
TO PRINT THE CONFIGURATION PAGE FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION
1 In Command WorkStation, choose Print Pages from the Server menu.
2 Click Configuration.
3 Click Print.
Maintaining optimal E-5000/E-3000 performance
The E-5000/E-3000 does not require maintenance. Beyond the obvious requirements of
servicing and maintaining the copier and replenishing consumables, you can improve the
overall performance of your system by doing the following:
• Make the best use of your network connections.
Publish only connections that will be used. The E-5000/E-3000 constantly checks all
published connections, even if they are inactive. Match the NetWare polling interval and the
number of queues or connections to the demand for printing.
Review the published connections by printing a Configuration page. Eliminate the
connections that are not being used. It is easy to re-establish them when needed.
• Leave less urgent jobs to times when there is less network traffic or printing.
You can print recurring print jobs or jobs that are not urgent to the Hold queue. At low-traffic
times, the administrator or a user of the job management tools with Operator privileges can
move (or copy) all the Hold queue jobs to the Print queue for printing.
• Reduce unnecessary network communication.
Large numbers of users running Fiery utilities, especially with frequent updates, may have a
significant effect on E-5000/E-3000 performance.
• Make sure that you have adequate disk space on the E-5000/E-3000.
Periodically review the list of jobs in the Hold queue and the number of jobs being retained in
the Printed queue.
An administrator can print or delete jobs that are in the Printed queue and Hold queue.
Consider printing or offloading inactive jobs. If disk space on the E-5000/E-3000 is
frequently low, you can disable the Printed queue (in Server Setup) and choose not to publish
the Hold queue (in Printer Setup).
To move or remove queued jobs, use the job management tools. When you free up disk space
by removing inactive jobs, new jobs are spooled and printed more quickly.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
78
Understanding power save considerations
The E-5000/E-3000 power save mode conserves power when the E-5000/E-3000 has been
inactive for a period of time. The following activities and Setup options, however, prevent the
E-5000/E-3000 from entering power save mode:
• Connecting to the E-5000/E-3000 with Downloader or ColorWise Pro Tools
• Enabling E-Mail Services on the E-5000/E-3000
• Enabling the E-5000/E-3000 to accept jobs from NetWare servers (PServer Setup)
In these cases, users can continue to connect to the E-5000/E-3000 and print jobs, but you
will not be able to benefit from the power save mode.
If the E-5000/E-3000 is already in power save mode, certain E-5000/E-3000 utilities and jobs
printed from certain types of network connections may prevent the E-5000/E-3000 from
immediately exiting power save mode, and causing a short delay in connecting to the E-5000/
E-3000. Connections will be made on subsequent retries.
If your network uses a DHCP server, renewing leases for the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000
while it is in power save mode is not guaranteed. If the lease for an IP address expires while the
E-5000/E-3000 is in power save mode, the E-5000/E-3000 may not have the proper address,
resulting in jobs that may not successfully reach the E-5000/E-3000.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
79
Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the E-5000/E-3000
Generally, you can leave the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier running all the time. This section
describes how to shut down, reboot, and restart the E-5000/E-3000 when necessary.
Shutting down the E-5000/E-3000
When you need to shut down the E-5000/E-3000, fonts downloaded to the E-5000/E-3000
are not deleted. Jobs in the Hold and Print queues and jobs that have been processed but not
printed are not deleted and are available for printing when you reboot or restart the E-5000/
E-3000.
N OTE : To turn off the power to the entire system (“Main Power Down”), see the Start Guide
that accompanies your copier.
TO SHUT DOWN THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Make sure that the E-5000/E-3000 is not receiving, processing, or printing any files.
If the system has just finished processing, wait at least five seconds after the system reaches
Idle before beginning the shutdown procedure.
2 At the copier, press the “fierydriven®” button.
3 At the copier display panel, press the Menu button to display the Functions menu.
4 Press the down arrow to scroll to Shut Down.
5 Choose Shut Down System.
Rebooting or restarting the E-5000/E-3000
Restarting the E-5000/E-3000 resets the E-5000/E-3000 system software, but does not
reboot the entire system. Network access to the E-5000/E-3000 is temporarily interrupted
and all currently processing jobs are terminated.
If you use a USB thumb drive, remove it before rebooting. Otherwise, the E-5000/E-3000
does not reboot.
TO REBOOT OR RESTART THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Make sure that the E-5000/E-3000 status displays Idle and that no jobs are being processed
or printed.
2 At the copier, press the “fierydriven®” button.
3 At the Control Panel, press the Menu button.
4 Choose Shut Down from the Functions screen.
5 From the Shut Down screen, select Reboot System or Restart Server.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
80
Copier settings
You must set up some features on the copier for them to work. For more information, see the
documentation that accompanies your copier.
General Features tab
• Output: Printer
Choose the default output tray from the printer driver.
• Function Priority
“Printer” is added as a setting. For more information, see the documentation that
accompanies your copier.
• Print Priority
“Printer” is added as a setting. For more information, see the documentation that
accompanies your copier.
Tray Paper Settings tab
• Printer Bypass Paper Size
Set the paper size for the Bypass Tray. Two printing modes for the Bypass Tray are available
from Printer Setup > Bypass Tray Setting Priority (see page 61).
– Driver/Command priority
The E-5000/E-3000 prints an SEF image for the print size requested by a host. Make sure
that SEF paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray. However, load these sizes as LEF: Com10,
Monarch, C6env, C5env, and DLenv.
– Panel priority
The E-5000/E-3000 receives information about the printing size from the setting of the
paper size and paper direction (SEF/LEF) of the Printer Bypass Paper Size. Make sure the
correct paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray.
• Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Choose the paper tray that has priority for being used to print jobs.
TO CONFIRM THE CURRENT STATE OF THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Print the E-5000/E-3000 Configuration page.
2 Confirm the tray condition on the copier screen.
In the case of Driver/Command priority, only Bypass is indicated. In the case of Panel
priority, paper size and paper direction are indicated as they were set in the Printer Bypass
Paper Size option.
ADMINISTERING THE E-5000/E-3000
81
Timer Settings tab
• Printer Auto Reset Timer (Off, 10-999 secs)
This timer is a printer function of the E-5000/E-3000. If an error occurs and user
intervention is required, you can resolve the error by using one of these methods:
– Stop the condition until the user clears the problem.
– After waiting the amount of time set for the timer, continue to process the job
automatically or cancel the job.
Administrator Tools tab
• User Authentication Management
This feature allows the user to choose the user authentication of the printer. When you
choose Off or other authentication, set Printer Job Auth. = Simple.
If you print a job from the E-5000/E-3000 with All as the chosen condition and an
authentication mode error occurs, the job is not printed.
• Key Counter Management
“Printer” is added as a setting. This feature does not support the scanner functionality of
the E-5000/E-3000. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your
copier.
• External Charge Unit Management
“Printer” is added as a setting. This feature does not support the scanner functionality of
the E-5000/E-3000. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your
copier.
82
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides troubleshooting tips.
Troubleshooting the E-5000/E-3000
Startup diagnostics are described in the documentation for service technicians. Contact your
authorized service/support center if you see startup error messages on Command WorkStation
or if the E-5000/E-3000 does not reach the Idle state.
Runtime error messages
For error messages related to canceling jobs and printing, including the Disk Full message and
alerts to load media, see Command WorkStation Help.
You can turn on PostScript error reporting as a print option from Mac OS applications.
Printer not found
Most failures to find a printer on the network are due to conflicting or missing name or
address settings for the E-5000/E-3000. You must enter names in specific places. The required
names are:
• TCP/IP host name (also known as the DNS name), which is defined by your organization.
Enter the host name as the Server Name in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
• Remote printer (internal machine) name. Use one of the following:
print
hold
direct
N OTE : If you change the DNS name (TCP/IP host name) of the E-5000/E-3000, you must
reconfigure one of the utilities on each workstation.
See the following table for the appropriate name.
In this location
For this item
IPX/SPX networks
TCP/IP networks
See
Server Setup
Server Name option
Administrator
defines name
Administrator
defines name
page 30
Windows hosts file
host name
DNS name
(TCP/IP host name)
page 9
83
TROUBLESHOOTING
In this location
For this item
Windows setup
for TCP/IP
IPX/SPX networks
TCP/IP networks
See
lpd host name
DNS name
(TCP/IP host name)
page 9
Name of printer on
lpd host machine
print, hold, or direct
UNIX /etc/printcap file
(BSD)
rp line
print, hold, or direct
Solaris
lpadmin queuename
print, hold, or direct
NetWare administration utility
print queues
(must be all lowercase
and in English)
_direct
page 14
page 12
_print
_hold
Add New Server dialog box,
when configuring a utility
New Device
Utilities are not
supported over IPX/SPX
E-5000 or E-3000
Server Name
Utilities are not
supported over IPX/SPX
DNS name
(TCP/IP host name)
Utilities
Confirming the copier connection to the E-5000/E-3000
TO CONFIRM THE COPIER CONNECTION TO THE E-5000/E-3000
1 Print a copier Test Page to verify that the copier is functioning normally.
2 Turn off the copier and connect the interface cable from the copier to the E-5000/E-3000.
3 To confirm this connection, turn on the copier, and print a Test Page from the E-5000/E-3000
copier display panel.
To print a Test Page, press the Menu button on the copier display panel to display the
Functions menu. Choose Print Pages, and then choose Test Page.
4 With the copier turned off, connect the network cable to the E-5000/E-3000.
For more information, see page 20. The network should already be installed and operational.
5 Turn on the copier.
TROUBLESHOOTING
84
Cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with utilities
If users cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000, check the following:
E-5000/E-3000 Setup: The appropriate network protocol must be enabled, with the correct
parameters (for example, for TCP/IP, the IP address), and you must publish either the Print
queue or Hold queue.
You can check these settings quickly by printing a Configuration page.
On the client computer: The appropriate network protocols must be loaded.
Cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with Command WorkStation
If there is a problem connecting to the E-5000/E-3000, an error message is displayed.
The problem can occur when:
• The E-5000/E-3000 is initially turned on
• The E-5000/E-3000 restarts
• You have changed settings affecting the server address and have not reconfigured the
connection to the server
If you experience this problem, try the following solutions, in this order:
• A remote workstation running utilities or WebTools may be interfering by obtaining status
information. If possible, close the remote application, and try to connect again.
• Restart the Command WorkStation software and try to connect again.
• Restart the E-5000/E-3000.
85
INDEX
INDEX
Numerics
C
1000BaseT 20
100BaseTX 20
10BaseT 20
Calibration command 27
Cancel Job command 24
changing
Administrator password 69
Bindery connection 47
host name or DNS name 82
Novell print server, Bindery 45, 47
characters, used in
Command WorkStation 30
Choose Domain option 51
Choose File Server option 47
choosing a Bindery Server
to connect 46
Clear Each Scan Job option 31
Clear Frame Types option 41
Clear Job Log Every 55 Jobs option 70
Clear Scan Jobs Now option 31
Clear Server command 71
clearing the Job Log 70
client setup
overview 10
WebTools 67
CMYK printing by default 65
CMYK Simulation Method option 64
CMYK Simulation Profile option 65
Color Charts 26
Color Mode option 65
Command WorkStation
Configuration page 77
problems connecting to server 84
Setup from 62
Comment option, Windows printing 50
Configuration page
determining IPX frame
types bound 40
printing 26, 77
troubleshooting connection
problems 84
Configure (WebTool) 18
Configure IP Ports option 38
configuring network servers 33
A
access levels, setting 15
Account Name option 53
Active Directory 12
Add File Server option, Bindery Setup
45, 46
Add Filter option, Security Setup 37
administrator
features of server 61
functions 68
installing the server 10
password 69
privileges 16
Administrator E-mail Address option 53
Alert Status screen 24
Allow Courier Substitution option 64
Allow Printing From option 31
anonymous, LDAP authentication
method 57
AppleTalk Setup 32, 34
AppleTalk Zone option 34
Attachment Maximum Size option 54
authentication, required for printing 31
Auto Clear Job Log Every 55 Jobs option 70
Auto Print Job Log Every 55 Jobs option 70
B
backing up fonts 72
Bindery Setup
adding Bindery connections 46
configuring 45 to 48
emulation mode 41
removing Bindery connections 48
requirements for NetWare server 45
viewing connected servers 47
BOOTP protocol 34, 35
buttons for accessing features 23
Bypass Tray Setting Priority option 61
86
INDEX
connecting
network cable 20
print device interface cable 83
to a Bindery file server 46
to multiple Bindery file servers 45
Control Panel Map 26
Convert Paper Sizes option 65
copier display panel
buttons 23
down button 23
Menu button 23
Setup interface 28
up button 23
Courier font, substitution with 64
D
date, setting 30
Default LPD Queue option 41
Default Paper Sizes option 65
Default Policy option 37
Delete Filter option, Security Setup 37
device name 30, 83
DHCP protocol 34, 35
Direct connection
described 17
publishing 60
required for downloading fonts 17
disconnecting a Bindery file server
45, 48
disk space 77
display window 24
DNS (Domain Name Server)
implications of changing 82
listing server name 12
Setup 36
Docs WebTool 18
Domain Name option 36
down button 23
downloading fonts, Direct connection
requirement 17
Downloads (WebTool) 18
E
E-mail Address option, E-mail Setup 53
E-mail Domain Name option 53
E-mail Log 26
E-mail Setup 52
Edit Connection, Bindery Setup 45, 47
Edit Filter option, Security Setup 37
Enable AppleTalk option 34
Enable Auto IP Configuration option 35
Enable DNS option 36
Enable E-mail Services option 52
Enable Ethernet option 33
Enable IP Filter option 37
Enable IPP option 51
Enable IPv4 for Ethernet option 34
Enable IPv6 for Ethernet option 40
Enable IPX Auto Frame Type option 40
Enable LPD option 41
Enable NDS option 42
Enable Port 9100 Print Services option 52
Enable Printed Queue option 31
Enable Proxy Setup option 59
Enable PServer option 42
Enable SNMP option 55
Enable SNTP option 58
Enable USB Port option 33
Enable Web Services option 51
Enable Windows Printing option 49
enabling
client utilities 34
WebTools 51
Enter First Letters of Server Name option 46
Enter Password, for browsing NDS tree 43
Enter Print Server Password, NDS 44
Enter Your File Server Password, Bindery 47
Enter Your Login Name, Bindery 47
Enter Your Print Server Password,
Bindery 47, 48
error messages
“No AppleTalk zone found” 34
runtime 82
Ethernet
connector 20
Port Setup 33
speed 33
TCP/IP Setup 34
Exit Bindery Setup option 48
F
File Server Login, Bindery 46
File Server Password (Bindery) 47
fonts
archiving 72
printer fonts on server 26
printing font list 26
substitution 64
87
INDEX
frame types supported
AppleTalk 40
IPX/SPX 40
TCP/IP 40
FreeForm master 66
From List option (adding a file server) 46
FTP Log 26
FTP Setup 54
Functions menu 25
G
Gateway Address option 35
Get DNS Address option 36
Get Gateway Address Automatically
option 35
GSSAPI, LDAP authentication
method 57
guest login (Novell) in Bindery Setup 46
H
Hold queue
described 17
publishing 60
Home (WebTool) 18
host name 12, 82
database 12
Host Name option, DNS Setup 36
I
Image Quality option 65
Image Smoothing option 65
improving server performance 77
Incoming Server option, E-mail Setup 53
installing server on network 10
Internet
accessing server with WebTools 17
configuring server for WebTools 51
Internet Printing Protocol, enabling 51
IP address
assigning automatically 35
assigning manually 35
for Ethernet Setup 35, 36
IP Filtering 37
IP filtering 37
IP Port Setup 38
IPP Setup 51
IPSec Setup 39
IPv4, TCP/IP 34
IPv6, TCP/IP 40
IPX (Novell)
Bindery file server, connecting 45
NDS (Novell Directory Services) 41
overview of printing 12
terms used to describe 45
IPX/SPX
protocol setup 40
selecting frame types 40
Setup 40
Setup summary 32
J
Java to support Internet browser 67
Job Log 26
clearing automatically 70
clearing jobs from 71
defined 69
printing automatically 70
setting the page size used 70
Setup 69
job management tools
deleting jobs with 71
printing Job Log 69
Jobs Saved in Printed Queue option 31
L
LDAP Setup 57
Login needed to browse NDS tree? option 43
LPD (TCP/IP) 41
LPR (TCP/IP), UNIX 14
M
maintaining server performance 77
maximum server connections, Bindery 45
Menu button 23
Modify SNMP Settings option 55
multiple Bindery file servers, connecting 45
N
naming the server 30, 82
Navigate NDS Tree to the Print Server 43
Navigate NDS tree to User Login object 43
NDS (Novell Directory Services)
enabling 42
Setup 42
setup requirements 42
88
INDEX
NDS tree
browsing 42, 43
browsing to print queue root 44
browsing to Print Server 43
browsing to User Login object 43
password 43
print queue subtree 44
NetWare
Bindery and NDS on the same network 42
Bindery Services 41
NDS (Novell Directory Services) 41
print server poll interval 49
setting up network 42
NetWare File Server, Bindery
connecting 45, 46
finding available servers 46
removing connection 48
selecting for editing 47
setting up more than one 45
NetWare Print Server Poll Interval option 49
NetWare Print Server, Bindery
changing the selection 45, 48
connecting 47
password 47
network
cable 83
installation summary 10, 11
IPX (Novell) 11
protocols supported 9
TCP/IP 11
Network Setup 32
New Password option, Administrator
password 69
Novell, see NetWare
O
Operational Mode option 31
Operator password
changing 69
privileges 16
Outgoing Server option, E-mail Setup 52
P
Page Order option 65
PANTONE 26
paper size used by default 65
passwords
Administrator privileges 16
Administrator, changing 69
Bindery print server 47
E-mail Setup 53
NDS Print Server 44
NDS Tree 43
Novell file server, Bindery 47
Operator privileges 16
setting 15
PCONSOLE (NetWare utility) 47
PDF files, font substitution in 64
Polling Interval option
E-mail Setup 54
PServer Setup 49
SNTP Setup 59
Port 9100 Queue option 52
Port 9100 Setup 52
Port Setup, Ethernet Setup 33
PostScript error 66
PostScript Setup, see PS Setup
power save mode 78
Preview While Processing option 31
Primary DNS Server option 36
Print Job Log Every 55 Jobs option 70
Print Master option 66
Print Pages command 26
Print queue
described 17
publishing 60
reprinting jobs 31
print queues 31
NDS 44
NetWare server (Bindery) 46
Print Start Page option 30
Print Status screen 24
Print to PostScript Error option 66
Print via E-mail option 52
Printed queue 17, 31
printer
connection failure 82
not found 82
not in Chooser 82
Printer Setup 60
89
INDEX
printing
CMYK by default 65
Configuration page 26
connections 17
connections and queues 60
directly to parallel port 33
font list 26
Job Log automatically 70
reprinting previously printed jobs 17
server information pages 26
start page at startup 30
protocols
for assigning IP address automatically 35
network 9
setting up 33
See also AppleTalk, IPX, IPX/SPX,
TCP/IP
Proxy Setup, FTP
enabling 59
IP address 59
port number 59
timeout 59
user name 60
user password 60
PS (PostScript) Setup 61
PServer Setup (Novell) 41
Publish Direct Connection option 60
Publish Hold Queue option 60
Publish Print Queue option 60
publishing connections, overview 17
Q
queues
clearing all 71
publishing 60
R
Remove File Server option, Bindery
Setup 45, 48
Rendering Style option 66
reprinting jobs 17
Require Password for Printing (FTP) option 55
Restore SNMP To Defaults option 55
restoring fonts 72
Resume Printing command 26
RGB Separation option 66
RGB Source option 66
RIP Status screen 24
RJ-45 connector 20
Run Setup command 27
S
Save Changes
Job Log Setup 70
Printer Setup 61
Setup 32
Scale to Fit option 66
Search Name option (adding a file server) 46
Secondary DNS Server option 36
Secure Erase option 31
Secure Job Log option 70
Secure Print command 27
Security Level option (SNMP) 56
Security Setup
described 37
IP Filtering Setup 37
IP Port Setup 38
Select File Server option 46
Select Frame Types option 40
Select NDS Tree option 42
Select protocol option, for assigning IP
address 35
selecting
Bindery servers 47
default paper size 65
server
back view showing connectors 20
maintaining and improving
performance 77
naming 30
Setup, see Setup
status screens 24
touch panel display 23
Server Name option
Server Setup 30
Windows printing 50
Server Name option, Windows printing 50
Server Setup 21, 30
Server should look for print queues in
message 44
Server Type option, E-mail Setup 53
Service Setup 41
90
INDEX
Set Domain Name option, Windows
printing 51
Set Time Server (SNTP) option 58
Setup
accessing 23
administrative functions 61
from a network computer 62
Job Log Setup 69
Network Setup 32
Port Setup 33
Printer Setup 60
Protocol Setup 33
PS (PostScript) Setup 61
screen types 29
Security Setup 37
See also Server Setup, Network Setup,
Printer Setup, PS Setup, Job Log
Setup
Server Setup 30
Service Setup 41
summary 22
Shift Operation option 61
Shut Down command 27
simple, LDAP authentication method 57
SMB, see Windows printing
SNMP Community Name option 56
SNMP Setup 55
Start Page, printing 30
status screens, server 24
Subnet Mask option 35
Suspend Printing command 26
System Date option 30
System Time option 30
T
TCP/IP
Ethernet Setup 35
protocol setup 34
published connections 60
Setup summary 32
with UNIX workstations 14
terminology
general 7
Novell 45
Test Page, printing 26
Time Server DNS Name option 59
Time Server List option 59
Time Zone option 30
time, setting 30
Timeout option
E-mail Setup 54
FTP Setup 55
LDAP Setup 58
Proxy Setup 59
touch panel display
accessing Setup 23
illustrated 23
Tray Alignment command 27
troubleshooting
Command WorkStation
connection problems 84
connection to printer fails 82
Printer not found in the
selection
list of utilities 84
Printer not found on
TCP/IP or IPX networks 82
twisted pair cable 20
U
UNIX
on TCP/IP network 14
printcap file 83
remote printer name 83
up button 23
USB Media Auto Print option 32
USB Port Setup 33
USB printing 73
Use Automatic Configuration
option 50
Use Character Set option 30
Use WINS Name Server option 50
utilities
enabling protocol on
the server 34
required print connections 60
INDEX
V
View Server List option,
Bindery Setup 47
W
Web Services Setup 51
WebTools
Configure 18
Docs 18
Downloads 18
enabling 51
Home 18
Windows printing
domain issues 12
enabling 49
setting domain or workgroup 51
Windows Setup 49
WINS IP Address option 50
WINS name server 50
Workgroup or Domain option 51
91
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Printing from Windows
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45056541
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
5
Terminology and conventions
6
About this document
7
Setting up printing
8
User software
9
System requirements
9
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
10
Installing printer drivers by Point and Print
11
Downloading printer drivers using WebTools
13
Installing printer drivers
15
Installing and connecting to a virtual printer
18
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
19
Printing connections
19
Completing the SMB printing connection
20
Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections
21
Completing IPX (Novell) connections
24
Completing IPP connections
26
CONTENTS
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
4
28
Configuring installable options manually
29
Configuring installed options and updating print options settings automatically
31
PRINTING UTILITIES
33
Configuring the connection for Job Monitor
34
Installing printing utilities
35
Using Printer Delete Utility
35
Configuring the connection for Mail Port
36
Using E-mail Service
39
How E-mail Service works
40
Printing using an e-mail client
40
Job Control
42
Printing using Mail Port
42
Printing from a USB device
44
FTP Printing
46
PRINTING
Printing from applications
Setting options and printing
47
48
48
Using presets
55
Customizing the Basic icon
59
Defining and printing custom page sizes
61
Viewing the copier status
64
Saving files to print at a remote location
65
INDEX
67
INTRODUCTION
5
INTRODUCTION
This document describes how to install the printer drivers and printer description files for
the Color Controller E-5000/E-3000 and how to set up printing from Microsoft Windows
computers. It also describes several printing utilities and how to print to the Color Controller
E-5000/E-3000. For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup. For general information
about using the color copier, your computer, application software, or your network, see the
documentation that accompanies those products.
For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome.
6
INTRODUCTION
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
INTRODUCTION
About this document
This document covers the following topics:
• Installing printer files on Windows computers
• Setting up printing connections on Windows computers
• Installing E-5000/E-3000 printing utilities
• Printing from Windows computers
7
8
INTRODUCTION
Setting up printing
The following table lists the procedures for installing printer drivers and setting up the
printing connections for each Windows platform supported by the E-5000/E-3000.
Action
Reference
Installing printer drivers
“Installing printer drivers by Point and Print” on page 11
“Downloading printer drivers using WebTools” on page 13
“Installing printer drivers” on page 15
“Installing and connecting to a virtual printer” on page 18
Setting up SMB printing
“Completing the SMB printing connection” on page 20
Setting up TCP/IP printing
“Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing
connections” on page 21
Setting up IPX/SPX or IPX
(Novell) printing
“Completing IPX (Novell) connections” on page 24
Setting up IPP printing
“Completing IPP connections” on page 26
9
INTRODUCTION
User software
The following table lists the user software that you need for setting up basic printing on the
E-5000/E-3000. Other documents may describe other user software, depending on what you
are trying to accomplish.
User software
Description
PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) file and associated files
These files provide information about the E-5000/E-3000 and
your particular copier model to your application and printer driver.
These files are on the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
PageMaker PPD files
Allows you to print to the E-5000/E-3000 from Adobe PageMaker.
You must install the appropriate PPD in PageMaker. See the
PageMaker documentation for instructions. These files are on the
User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
Job Monitor
Monitor the status of connected E-5000/E-3000 servers and
print jobs sent to them. The Job Monitor is automatically installed
when the printer driver is installed on a Windows computer.
Job Monitor is on the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
For more information, see “Configuring the connection for Job
Monitor” on page 34.
Mail Port
Send jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 in the form of e-mail attachments
by adding the Mail Port software as a printer port.
For more information, see “Configuring the connection for Mail
Port” on page 36.
Printer Delete Utility
Uninstall the Windows printer driver. The Printer Delete Utility
is on the User Software CD (Utilities).
For more information, see “Using Printer Delete Utility” on
page 35.
N OTE : You can also download these files from the E-5000/E-3000 using the Downloads tab in
WebTools. For instructions, see “Downloading printer drivers using WebTools” on page 13.
System requirements
For detailed system requirements, see Welcome, provided in your media pack.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
10
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
This chapter describes the procedures for installing printer drivers on a computer using a
supported version of Windows. For the Windows versions supported, see “Terminology and
conventions” on page 6. Installing printer drivers and printer description files is the first step
in setting up the E-5000/E-3000 as a PostScript printer.
Install printer drivers as follows:
• From the E-5000/E-3000 through Point and Print using SMB printing.
• From WebTools, using the Downloads tab to download the printer driver files before
installing the printer driver. For instructions, see “Downloading printer drivers
using WebTools” on page 13.
•
From the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
N OTE : WebTools is available if the administrator has enabled Internet access to the E-5000/
E-3000.
If a E-5000/E-3000 printer driver is already installed, you must uninstall it before you install
a new one (see “Using Printer Delete Utility” on page 35).
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
11
Installing printer drivers by Point and Print
SMB printing (also known as Windows or WINS printing) allows you to install PostScript
printer drivers and printer description files on your computer from the E-5000/E-3000 using
Point and Print, and print to a particular connection (Print queue, Hold queue, or Direct
connection).
Each connection (Print queue, Hold queue, or Direct connection) requires a separate
installation. Repeat the procedure for each connection.
When you install the printer driver using Point and Print, you cannot configure installable
options manually. The installed options are displayed in the printer driver when you enable
Two-Way Communication. For more information, see Configuring Installable Options.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Ask your network administrator for the IP address or name of the E-5000/E-3000 on the
network.
• Configure the E-5000/E-3000 for SMB printing.
SMB printing is referred to as Windows Printing in Setup and on the Configuration page
(see Configuration and Setup).
TO SET UP SMB PRINTING ON WINDOWS COMPUTERS
1 Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places and select Find Computer or Search
for Computers.
2 Type the name or IP address of the E-5000/E-3000 and click Search Now.
If you cannot locate the E-5000/E-3000, contact your network administrator.
3 Double-click the name of the E-5000/E-3000 to display enabled print connections.
N OTE : For a description of each print connection, see Configuration and Setup.
You must now create a printer port and install the printer driver from the User Software CD
(PS Printer Drivers).
N OTE : You cannot use Point and Print to install the driver and configure the printing
connection to the E-5000/E-3000 in a single procedure.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
12
4 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
5 Windows 2000: Double-click Add Printer and click Next.
Windows XP: Double-click Add a printer and click Next.
Windows Server 2003: Choose Add a printer and click Next.
6 Click Local Printer and click Next.
7 Click Create a New Port, and choose Local Port from the menu. Click Next.
8 In the Port Name dialog box, type the name of the E-5000/E-3000, followed by the printing
connection, and click OK.
Enter the port name as follows: \\Aero\print where Aero is the name of the E-5000/E-3000
and print is the printing connection.
9 In the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers, click Have Disk.
You will now install the printer driver from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
10 Type the name of the CD-ROM drive and browse to the Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP folder.
11 Make sure “Oemsetup.inf” or “Oemsetup” is selected and click Open.
12 Verify that the path in the Install From Disk dialog box is correct and click OK.
13 Follow the on-screen instructions.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
13
Downloading printer drivers using WebTools
WebTools allows you to download installers for printer drivers to your computer directly from
the E-5000/E-3000.
Download the printer driver files from the E-5000/E-3000 using WebTools and then follow
the procedures on page 15. Before downloading the printer driver files, you must set specific
E-5000/E-3000 options in Network Setup and Printer Setup. You also must prepare each
client computer to communicate with the E-5000/E-3000 over the Internet or intranet.
For more information about Network Setup and Printer Setup, see Configuration and Setup.
For more information about setting up and starting WebTools, see Utilities.
TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES WITH WEBTOOLS
1 Start your Internet or intranet browser and type the DNS name or IP address of the E-5000/
E-3000.
2 Click the Downloads tab.
3 Click the link for the item that you want to install.
For Windows printer drivers, click the Printer Files link under the Windows heading.
4 If a dialog box prompts you to either open the file or save it to disk, choose to save it
to disk.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
14
5 Browse to the location where you want to save the PRNTDRVE.EXE file and click Save.
The file is downloaded from the E-5000/E-3000. This compressed file is an archive that
contains multiple files.
6 Double-click the PRNTDRVE.EXE file to extract the files.
Depending on your operating system, you might be prompted to select a location to extract
the files to.
Follow the instructions for your operating system to install the printer driver. The procedures
are the same as for installing from the CD, except that after you click Have Disk, you browse
to the location where you extracted the files, rather than to the CD.
For instructions on installing the Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 printer driver, see
“To install and complete the print connection for Windows” on page 15.
For more information, see WebTools Downloads Help.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
15
Installing printer drivers
The following procedures describe installing the printer driver from the User Software CD
(PS Printer Drivers).
To install the printer driver on a Windows Server 2003 computer, select the same PPD file
as for Windows 2000 and Windows XP, described in the following procedure.
N OTE : The following procedures use Windows 2000 illustrations.
This procedure describes the installation of a local printer (Port 9100). You can modify the
printing protocol later, according to your network type.
TO INSTALL AND COMPLETE THE PRINT CONNECTION FOR WINDOWS
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next.
Windows Server 2003: Choose Add a printer and click Next.
3 Specify printing using a Local printer, clear the “Automatically detect and install my Plug and
Play printer” box, and click Next.
4 Select Create a New Port, choose Standard TCP/IP Port from the Type of port menu, and then
click Next.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.
5 Type the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000.
6 Click Next.
7 Click Finish to close the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box.
N OTE : If the device is not found on the network, it is displayed instead of the Finish button.
If a device is not found on the network, it may be the result of one of the following:
• E-5000/E-3000 is not powered on
• Network is not connected
• E-5000/E-3000 is not configured properly
• IP address is not correct
You can continue to set up the port if you encounter one of the situations mentioned by
configuring the port manually. For information on how to configure the port manually, see
“To set up Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) for Windows” on page 21 and follow step 10
through step 13 before proceeding to step 8.
8 Click Have Disk in the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers.
The Install From Disk dialog box prompts you for the disk.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
16
9 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive of the computer,
type the name of the CD drive (for example, D:\), and click Browse. Browse to the
English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP folder.
If you are installing from the files you downloaded from the E-5000/E-3000 using the
Downloads tab in WebTools, browse to prntdrvr\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP and click Open.
10 Make sure that Oemsetup.inf or Oemsetup is selected and click Open.
The path is copied to the Install From Disk dialog box.
11 Verify that the path is correct and click OK.
12 In the Printers box, select the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver as your printer and click Next.
N OTE : The E-3000 printer driver is displayed in the dialog box.
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
17
13 Type a name for the E-5000/E-3000 in the Printer name field, indicate whether you want to
make it the default printer, and click Next.
This name is used in the Printers window and the queues window.
14 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Do not share the printer and do not print a Test Page at this time. Continue with the printer
driver installation, and at the last screen, click Finish.
The necessary files are installed on your hard disk. When installation is complete, the Printers
window appears with an icon for the newly installed printer.
You are ready to configure the installable options (see Configuring Installable Options).
To set up a connection other than port 9100, proceed to Setting Up Printing Connections.
To use the printer driver, you must select the following options on the Advanced tab of the
printer driver after installation is complete:
• Spool print documents
• Start printing immediately
• Print spooled documents first
Clear the following option:
• Enable advanced printing features
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
18
Installing and connecting to a virtual printer
A virtual printer allows you to print to the E-5000/E-3000 using a predefined set of job
settings. You do not have to set print options manually. Before you can print to a virtual
printer, the administrator must create and configure the virtual printer using Command
WorkStation. After the virtual printer is set up, you can install the printer driver and printer
description files on your computer from the E-5000/E-3000 using Point and Print.
For more information about setting up virtual printers, see Utilities.
When you install the printer driver using Point and Print, you cannot configure installable
options manually. Installable options are configured automatically. The installed options are
displayed in the printer driver when you enable Two-Way Communication. For more
information about configuring installable options, see Configuring Installable Options.
TO SET UP A VIRTUAL PRINTER ON WINDOWS COMPUTERS
1 Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places, and select Find Computer or Search
for Computers.
2 Type the name or IP address of the E-5000/E-3000 and click Search Now.
If you cannot locate the E-5000/E-3000, contact your network administrator.
3 Double-click the name of the E-5000/E-3000 to display enabled print connections.
Virtual printers are listed along with the Print queue, Hold queue, and Direct connection
(if those connections are enabled). The names of Virtual printers usually reflect the type of job
that they are set up for.
4 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
The virtual printer is displayed in the Printers or Printers and Faxes window.
You can print to a virtual printer as you would print to the E-5000/E-3000, as described in
Printing. Depending on how the virtual printer is configured, you may not be able to set some
print options.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
19
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
To print from Windows computers, you or the administrator must perform the following
tasks to set up a connection other than port 9100:
• Set up network servers, if any.
• Set up the E-5000/E-3000 to accept print jobs from your computer.
• Configure a port on each Windows computer for the network type.
Printing connections
The E-5000/E-3000 supports the following printing connections:
• SMB
• Standard TCP/IP (Raw or LPR)
• IPX/SPX or IPX (Novell)
• IPP or IPP over SSL
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
20
Completing the SMB printing connection
If your network does not have a Windows server, Windows computers can still print to the
E-5000/E-3000. This method of printing is SMB printing (also known as Windows or WINS
printing). When users send print jobs, computers running Windows operate in a peer-to-peer
environment and communicate directly with the E-5000/E-3000.
Enabling SMB printing allows the E-5000/E-3000 to be listed on the network, so that
Windows clients can print to a particular print connection (Print queue, Hold queue,
or Direct connection) on the E-5000/E-3000 without using other networking software.
Windows printing runs via TCP/IP. You must configure TCP/IP on the E-5000/E-3000
and on all computers that use SMB printing.
After you enable SMB printing on the E-5000/E-3000, you can set up the Windows or SMB
connection and install the printer driver from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
For more information, see “Installing printer drivers by Point and Print” on page 11.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
21
Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections
After you install the PostScript and printer driver files, you can configure the setup for the
Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) connection as follows:
• Prepare the E-5000/E-3000 to accept print jobs using Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or
LPR) protocols. For details, see Configuration and Setup.
• Enable LPD or Port 9100 on the E-5000/E-3000. For details, see Configuration and Setup.
• Configure the computer for the TCP/IP connection.
Before you complete the following procedure, contact your system administrator for the
IP address assigned to the E-5000/E-3000.
The TCP/IP protocol should be installed as a default on the Windows computer. For Port
9100, you can set up the connection and install the printer driver in one procedure.
N OTE : You can also set up the LPR connection by installing Print Services for UNIX, which is
supplied as an add-on Windows component with Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003. For more
information, see the documentation that accompanies Windows.
TO SET UP STANDARD TCP/IP PORT (RAW OR LPR) FOR WINDOWS
N OTE : The following procedures use Windows 2000 illustrations.
1 Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Properties.
3 Click the Ports tab.
4 Click Add Port if you want to add a new port.
To change the port settings, proceed to step 10.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
22
5 Select Standard TCP/IP Port from the list of Available port types and click New Port Type.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.
6 Click Next.
7 Type the E-5000/E-3000 IP address.
8 Click Next.
9 Click Finish to close the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box, and then click
Close in the Printer Ports dialog box.
To change the default setting, proceed to step 10.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
23
10 Click Configure Port on the Ports tab of the Properties dialog box.
The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box appears.
11 To use LPR printing, select LPR in the Protocol area and LPR Byte Counting Enabled in the LPR
Settings area.
N OTE : You can also proceed without selecting LPR Byte Counting Enabled.
To use Port 9100 printing, select Raw in the Protocol area.
The port number 9100 automatically appears in the Raw Settings area. This is the default
port number. You can print to the printer connection selected for Port 9100 printing on the
E-5000/E-3000.
To specify a specific port number, see the following step.
12 Type the name of the print connection.
For LPR, type print, hold, or direct for Queue Name.
For Port 9100, type the following port numbers for each print connection in the Raw Settings
area:
E-5000/E-3000 default: 9100
direct: 9101
print: 9102
hold: 9103
N OTE : Type the number exactly as shown.
13 Click OK to close the Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
24
Completing IPX (Novell) connections
Complete the setup for the IPX (Novell) connection as follows:
• Configure the Novell network and file server for handling E-5000/E-3000 print jobs.
Configure the file server with a print server and print connection for the E-5000/E-3000.
For details, see the documentation that accompanies NetWare.
• Prepare the E-5000/E-3000 for IPX printing.
• Set up the IPX connection on the computer.
Before you begin, install NetWare protocols (NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible Transport) and
NetWare client services on the Windows computer.
TO SET UP IPX (NOVELL) PRINTING FOR WINDOWS
1 Windows 2000: Double-click My Network Places.
Windows XP: Click Start and click My Network Places.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Explorer, and then click My Network Places.
2 Double-click NetWare or Compatible Network.
A list of NetWare servers appears.
3 Double-click the NetWare tree or file server for which the network administrator defined a
print connection for the E-5000/E-3000.
You may have to log on to the file server to see the print connections.
4 Double-click the print connection defined for the E-5000/E-3000.
5 If the NetWare server does not have a suitable driver for the E-5000/E-3000, you are asked if
you want to set up the printer on your computer. Click Yes.
6 Click OK to install the E-5000/E-3000 PostScript printer driver.
7 Follow step 9 through step 11 of the procedure “To install and complete the print connection
for Windows” on page 15.
When installation is complete, a new printer window appears, with the name of the print
queue on the NetWare server.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
25
8 Choose Properties from the File menu and click the Ports tab.
Verify that the connection to the NetWare queue is listed and selected as a port for
the E-5000/E-3000.
9 Click the General tab and click Print Test Page.
10 In the printer Job Notes field, type user and job identification information, and then
click OK.
The Test Page remains listed in the queue window until it is printed.
The E-5000/E-3000 polls the NetWare server for print jobs in the print connection defined
for the E-5000/E-3000. When you print, your PostScript files are spooled to that connection
and transmitted over the queue “port” to the E-5000/E-3000.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
26
Completing IPP connections
With Internet Printing Protocol (IPP), print jobs are sent to the E-5000/E-3000 over
the Internet.
Before you begin, perform the following tasks:
• Make sure the E-5000/E-3000 is configured for TCP/IP printing and IPP printing.
For more information, see Configuration and Setup.
• Specify the printing destination on your computer.
N OTE : IPP over SSL connections is supported.
TO SET UP IPP PRINTING WITH WINDOWS
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next.
Windows Server 2003: Choose Add a printer and click Next.
3 Select Network printer and click Next.
4 Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet. Type an IP address or
computer name in the URL field.
The path for the printer is the IP address or DNS name, followed by ipp/print for the
Print queue. Insert slashes between the elements, for example, http://10.10.10.150/ipp/print.
N OTE : The URL for the printer is not case-sensitive.
5 Click Next.
The Connect to Printer dialog box appears.
SETTING UP PRINTING CONNECTIONS
27
6 Click OK.
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.
7 If you are installing the PostScript printer for the first time, follow the procedure “To install
and complete the print connection for Windows” on page 15.
8 Indicate whether you want to make the E-5000/E-3000 the default printer and click Next.
9 Click Finish.
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
28
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
After you complete the printer driver installation, you must configure the E-5000/E-3000
for the options installed on the copier to allow the E-5000/E-3000 to take advantage of the
copier options. Configure the options manually, or for TCP/IP network connections, use
the Two-Way Communication feature to configure the options automatically.
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
29
Configuring installable options manually
The following procedures describe how to manually configure the E-5000/E-3000 for the
options installed on the copier. The procedures for all Windows platforms are similar.
Any differences are noted in the text..
The E-5000 installable options are:
• Auto Trapping
• Finisher SR3020
• Finisher SR3030
• Finisher SR790
• Internal Tray2
• Tray 3 (LCT)
• Lower Paper Trays
• Punch Unit 2 and 3 holes
• Punch Unit 2 and 4 holes
• Punch Unit 4 holes type NE
• Spot-On Option
The E-3000 installable options are:
• Auto Trapping
• Finisher SR790
• Finisher SR3000
• Finisher SR3010
• Internal Shift Tray
• Internal Tray2
• Tray 3 (LCT)
• Lower Paper Trays
• Punch Unit 2 and 3 holes
• Punch Unit 2 and 4 holes
• Punch Unit 4 holes type NE
• Spot-On Option
N OTE : For more information about the print settings that use these options, see Print Options.
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
30
When you configure installable options manually, be sure to match the actual configuration
of the E-5000/E-3000 and copier. Otherwise, the print options shown in the printer driver
might not match the print options actually available.
N OTE : The following procedures use Windows 2000 illustrations.
TO CONFIGURE OPTIONS MANUALLY
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 In the Printers window, select the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver icon.
3 Choose Properties from the File menu.
4 Click the Accessories tab.
5 Select an installed option from the Available Options list.
6 Click Add to move the option to the Installed Options list.
N OTE : The E-3000 installable options dialog box is shown.
7 Click OK.
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
31
Configuring installed options and updating print options
settings automatically
If you enabled a TCP/IP network, you can automatically update your printer driver to reflect
the options currently installed on the copier. When the printer driver is first installed, the
options reflect the default settings that were set up in E-5000/E-3000 Setup or ColorWise Pro
Tools. When you update the printer driver using the Two-Way Communication feature, you
allow the printer driver to retrieve the settings from the E-5000/E-3000.
The Two-Way Communication feature also updates the ColorWise print options in Expert
Color Settings to reflect the current color settings on the E-5000/E-3000. For more
information about ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
TO ENABLE TWO- WAY COMMUNICATION
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 In the Printers window, select the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver icon.
3 Choose Properties from the File menu.
4 Click the Accessories tab.
5 Select Two-Way Communication.
N OTE : The E-3000 Two-Way communications dialog box is shown.
6 Type the E-5000/E-3000 IP address or DNS name.
CONFIGURING INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
32
7 Select Update Fiery Driver When Opened to display the printer’s current default settings
when the printer driver is opened.
8 Click Update.
N OTE : To confirm that Two-Way Communication is enabled, click the About tab and check
that the E-5000/E-3000 name and other server information are displayed.
9 Select Enable E-mail Notification to receive e-mail notification after your job has been
printed, and type the e-mail address to which an e-mail notification is sent.
You will receive e-mail notification of any errors that occur during printing.
N OTE : Enable E-mail Notification is displayed only if E-mail Service is enabled at Setup.
For more information, see Configuration and Setup.
10 Click the Advanced tab and clear Enable Advanced Printing Features.
11 Click OK.
PRINTING UTILITIES
PRINTING UTILITIES
You can install the following printing utilities from the User Software CD (Utilities):
• Job Monitor
• Printer Delete Utility
• Mail Port
N OTE : Job Monitor is automatically installed when you install the printer driver on your
computer. To use Job Monitor, you must enable it in the printer driver. (For more
information, see page 34.)
Other methods that allow you to print to the E-5000/E-3000 are:
• USB device
• FTP Printing
33
34
PRINTING UTILITIES
Configuring the connection for Job Monitor
Use Job Monitor to monitor the status of E-5000/E-3000 servers and view information about
the print jobs sent to them.
For information about using Job Monitor, see Job Monitor Help.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION TO E-5000/E-3000 SERVERS
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 In the Printers window, select the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver icon.
3 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
4 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
5 Click the Printer icon.
6 Select the Monitor my print job option.
Job Monitor opens a utility window when you send your first print job to the E-5000/E-3000
and establishes a connection to the E-5000/E-3000. If you have installed and configured
printer drivers for more than one copier, Job Monitor automatically establishes connections
to all the E-5000/E-3000 servers.
1
Server
1
7 Click Update.
8 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences window.
The Job Monitor icon (
your computer.
) appears on the desktop and in the Windows taskbar of
PRINTING UTILITIES
35
Installing printing utilities
All installation of user software on a Windows computer is done through the Fiery User
Master Installer. The procedures in Utilities describe installing from the User Software CD
(Utilities).
Using Printer Delete Utility
Printer Delete Utility is installed and used locally, so you do not need to connect to the
E-5000/E-3000 before you use the software.
TO USE PRINTER DELETE UTILITY
1 Click Start, choose Programs, and then choose Fiery.
2 Click FieryPrinterDeleteUtility.
The Fiery Driver Uninstall Tool dialog box appears. Any E-5000/E-3000 printer drivers
found on your computer are listed.
3 To delete a printer, select the printer name and click Delete.
4 Click OK to delete the selected printer driver.
5 Click OK to restart, or, to delete another printer driver, click Cancel to return to the
Fiery Driver Uninstall Tool dialog box. When you finish deleting printer drivers, restart
your computer.
PRINTING UTILITIES
36
Configuring the connection for Mail Port
The Mail Port allows you to print to and control the E-5000/E-3000 remotely. Jobs are
sent to the E-5000/E-3000 in the form of e-mail attachments. Set up e-mail printing on
Windows computers by adding the Mail Port software as a printer port.
You must set up E-mail Service on the E-5000/E-3000 to use Mail Port. To set up E-mail
Service, see Configuration and Setup. After you set up E-mail Service, install the Mail Port
from the User Software CD (Utilities) onto your Windows computer, and then add a port.
N OTE : The following procedures are similar for all Windows platforms.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR MAIL PORT
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Windows 2000: In the Printers window, double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next.
Windows XP: In the Printers and Faxes window, click Add a printer and then click Next.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Add a Printer, and then click Next.
3 Specify printing using a Local printer and click Next.
4 Select Create a New Port, choose EFI Fiery Mail from the Type menu, and click Next.
PRINTING UTILITIES
37
5 In the Add Port dialog box, type the basic information required to set up the e-mail port.
• Fiery’s E-mail Address: Type the e-mail address of the E-5000/E-3000.
• Outgoing Mail Server: Type the name or IP address of the SMTP server for the port
to use.
6 Click Advanced.
The E-Mail Port Configuration dialog box appears.
7 Type the following information.
For Fiery Server:
• E-mail Address: The e-mail address you typed for the E-5000/E-3000 is shown here.
• Queue: The print connection on the E-5000/E-3000 that you want.
For Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP):
• Server Name: The SMTP server to use.
• From Address: The “from” address to insert in the e-mail.
PRINTING UTILITIES
38
For Options:
• Break apart messages larger than: If you select this option, specify the maximum size of
a single e-mail message. If a job exceeds this size, it is split into multiple messages, each
not to exceed this size, and then is sent to the E-5000/E-3000. The E-5000/E-3000
automatically combines all split messages into the original single print job for printing.
• Status messages from Fiery: If you select this option, the E-5000/E-3000 sends status
reports of jobs printed via e-mail.
8 Click OK.
The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.
9 Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions for installing the printer driver for your
Windows computer.
PRINTING UTILITIES
Using E-mail Service
E-mail Service allows you to control the E-5000/E-3000 using your current e-mail
infrastructure and print to remote locations and bypass firewalls. E-mail Service is not
application-specific. You can use any e-mail infrastructure.
With E-mail Service, you can submit jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 as e-mail attachments.
Use E-mail Service in the following ways:
• Print and manage print jobs using an e-mail client.
• Print using the Mail Port.
• Scan using Scan to E-mail.
39
PRINTING UTILITIES
40
How E-mail Service works
To set up E-mail Service, see Configuration and Setup.
To print with an e-mail client, you send a file as an e-mail attachment. E-mail Service extracts
the file and sends it to the E-5000/E-3000. The attachment can be in any format the E-5000/
E-3000 recognizes (PostScript, PDF, or TIFF).
N OTE : E-mail Service does not process files with .vbs, .exe, or .bat extensions.
To print through Mail Port, you must first set up Mail Port as described in “Configuring the
connection for Mail Port” on page 36. Then, when you print from an application and select
the printer connected to the Mail Port, the print job is sent to the E-5000/E-3000 via e-mail.
E-mail Service supports Scan to E-mail, a feature that allows you to scan a document and send
it to an e-mail address as an attachment or URL. For more information about Scan to E-mail,
see Utilities.
The E-5000/E-3000 supports internal address books. Administrators can retrieve, add,
delete, and clear addresses from the address books by sending requests via e-mail. For more
information about address books, see Configuration and Setup.
Printing using an e-mail client
You can submit print jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 in the form of an e-mail attachment using
your e-mail application. When you send an e-mail with an attachment, E-mail Service
extracts the file and sends it to the E-5000/E-3000 Print queue. The file format must be one
supported by the E-5000/E-3000.
By default, anyone can print with an e-mail client, unless the Print address book has been set
up by the administrator. If the Print address book has been set up and your e-mail address is
not in it, you cannot send files to the E-5000/E-3000 via e-mail. For more information about
address books, see Configuration and Setup.
N OTE : The Direct connection is not supported by the e-mail client feature.
N OTE : The following illustrations show the Microsoft Outlook e-mail application.
TO PRINT USING AN E-MAIL
CLIENT
1 Open your e-mail application.
2 Type the E-5000/E-3000 e-mail address in the To: line.
3 Type text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank.
4 Attach the file that you want to print.
The attachment can be in any format the E-5000/E-3000 recognizes (PostScript, PDF,
or TIFF).
PRINTING UTILITIES
41
N OTE : If your attachment exceeds the file size limitation set by your e-mail system
administrator, the e-mail is not sent.
5 Optionally, you can type text in the body of the message. That text is printed with the file.
N OTE : HTML-formatted e-mail messages are not supported, and they might not print as they
appear on the remote workstation. Send e-mail messages in plain text format.
6 Send the e-mail.
The file is sent to the E-5000/E-3000 and the job is printed. After the E-5000/E-3000
receives the job, you are sent an e-mail notification that the print job was accepted. The e-mail
provides a job identification (ID). Use the job IDs to manage jobs with Job Control (see the
following section). The e-mail notification indicates any current error at the copier.
After the job is printed, you are sent a second e-mail notification indicating that the job
printed successfully.
N OTE : If you send a TIFF file that was compressed using G3MH or G4MMR, the file is
printed correctly but no e-mail notifications are sent.
Use Job Control to find out if your job printed successfully.
PRINTING UTILITIES
42
Job Control
You can manage your print jobs by submitting commands to the E-5000/E-3000 via e-mail.
You can cancel a job, check job status, and get help on a job. After you send a command, the
E-5000/E-3000 returns an e-mail response.
TO MANAGE PRINT JOBS WITH JOB CONTROL
1 In your e-mail application, type the E-5000/E-3000 e-mail address in the To: line.
2 Type one of the following Job Control commands in the Subject line:
To check the status of a job, type #JobStatus<job id> in the Subject line.
You receive a reply to your job status query. You can only get the status of the job if you sent
the job or are an administrator.
To cancel a job, type #CancelJob<job id> in the Subject line.
You receive a notification indicating that the job has been cancelled and did not print to the
E-5000/E-3000. You can only cancel a job if you sent the job or are an administrator.
To get help, type #Help in the Subject line.
You receive an e-mail response that contains links that allow you to cancel jobs, check job
status, and search and manage address books. Click any of the links to perform a Job Control
command.
Printing using Mail Port
After you set up Mail Port, you can print via e-mail in the same manner as any other printing
method. No additional steps are necessary.
N OTE : The Direct connection is not supported when you print with Mail Port.
TO PRINT USING
MAIL PORT
1 Choose Print in your application.
2 Make sure that the E-5000/E-3000 is selected as your printer and that you have installed the
Mail Port for the E-5000/E-3000.
3 Click Properties.
PRINTING UTILITIES
43
4 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
5 Set the print options and click OK.
To set options using the printer driver, see “Setting options and printing” on page 48.
6 Click OK again to send your job to the E-5000/E-3000.
If the attachment exceeds the file size limitation set in your application, the attachment is
broken into several messages.
PRINTING UTILITIES
44
Printing from a USB device
You can print files on a USB device to the E-5000/E-3000. Files, including those that
originated on a Windows computer, can be saved to the USB device and downloaded directly
to the E-5000/E-3000.
You can print files automatically from a USB device to one of the standard print queues on
the E-5000/E-3000 (Print, Hold, or Direct) or to published virtual printers. Verify with your
administrator that these connections are published in Setup. Or you can print any of the files
on your USB device, specify where to send them, and also select some print options. For more
information about virtual printers, see Utilities.
Before you print files from a USB device, ask your administrator to configure the appropriate
options. For more information about configuring the appropriate options, see Configuration
and Setup.
Two methods of prining files from a USB device are available: automatic printing and manual
printing.
Automatic printing
To print automatically to Print, Hold, or Direct queues or to published virtual printers with
the Print All setting, set up folders on your USB device with the names Print, Hold, and
Direct and any published virtual printers. When you plug the USB device into a USB port on
the E-5000/E-3000, the files in those folders are sent automatically to the corresponding
queues.
TO PRINT FILES FROM THE USB DEVICE
1 Configure the USB printing options in Setup (see Configuration and Setup).
2 Create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named Print, Hold, and Direct.
3 Save the files (PS, EPS, TIFF, and PDF) from the user’s computer to the USB device.
Files copied to the Print, Hold, and Direct folders are downloaded to the corresponding print
connection on the E-5000/E-3000 automatically when you connect the USB device to the
E-5000/E-3000. Files copied to the root level of the USB device are downloaded to the Print
queue.
4 Remove the USB device from the computer and connect it to the USB connector on the
E-5000/E-3000.
Make sure that the USB device is properly shut down before you disconnect it from
the computer.
For the location of the USB port, see Configuration and Setup.
PRINTING UTILITIES
45
Manual printing
When USB Media Auto Print is disabled in Server Setup, you manually select the files you
want to print from the USB device and specify where you want to send them.
TO PRINT USING USB MEDIA SERVER
1 Insert the USB device into a USB port on the E-5000/E-3000.
2 On the copier display panel, select the Functions menu, and then select USB Media Server.
3 When the “Select File to Print”message appears, navigate to the file that you want to print
and press OK.
The files on the USB device are displayed on the copier display panel. Files at the root level of
the USB device and folders are displayed.
4 Select where you want to send the file.
• Send to Hold queue
• Print with Options
• Send to Direct
• Send to Print queue
• Send to published virtual printers
5 Click OK if you selected the Hold, Print, or Direct queues or a published virtual printer.
Proceed to step 7.
The copier display panel displays a message showing you when your job was sent, and asking
if you want to print another file.
6 If you selected Print with Options, specify the options and press OK after each selection.
The print options you can choose are:
• Number of Copies
• Simplex or Duplex printing
• Page Size
After you select the print options, you can select where to send the file. See steps 4 and 5.
7 Select Yes to print another job from the USB device. Select No to exit the USB Media server
interface.
8 Remove the USB device from the E-5000/E-3000.
PRINTING UTILITIES
46
FTP Printing
If FTP Services are enabled on the E-5000/E-3000, the E-5000/E-3000 is set up as an FTP
server. You can send jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 using FTP printing. For more information
on configuring FTP Services, see Configuration and Setup.
You can use any FTP client software. Before you use FTP printing, the FTP client software
requires the following information (see your administrator):
• IP address or DNS name for the E-5000/E-3000
• Directory or path to send the job to, such as the Print queue, Hold queue, or published
virtual printers (if supported)
N OTE : You cannot print to the Direct connection using FTP printing.
• User name and password (if required)
You can send PostScript (PS), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Portable Document
Format (PDF) files to the E-5000/E-3000. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are not
supported for FTP printing.
TO PRINT FILES TO THE E-5000/E-3000 USING THE FTP PROTOCOL
1 Connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with your FTP client software.
Folders corresponding to the Print queue and Hold queue are displayed. Folders for any
published virtual printer are also displayed.
2 Navigate to the folder representing the print connection or published virtual printer.
3 Upload your job to the folder that you want.
After the job is printed, it is deleted from the E-5000/E-3000.
PRINTING
47
PRINTING
This chapter describes printing to the E-5000/E-3000. You can print from a networked
Windows computer or a computer using Windows (WINS) printing. You can also print
to a file so that it can be printed at a remote location (see “Saving files to print at a remote
location” on page 65). In addition to these methods, you can download certain types of files
to the E-5000/E-3000 using the Docs WebTool (see Utilities) and Command WorkStation
(see Utilities), and print documents using Hot Folders (an option) (see Utilities) and E-mail
Services (see “Using E-mail Service” on page 39).
For information about setting up the Windows environment for printing with Windows
servers connected to the E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup. For information about
connecting to the E-5000/E-3000 over the network, see Setting Up Printing Connections.
For information about installing printer drivers, see Installing Printer Drivers.
N OTE : The following procedures use Windows 2000 illustrations unless specified.
PRINTING
48
Printing from applications
After you install the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver and configure the proper port, you can
print directly from most Windows applications. Set the print options for the job and choose
Print from your application.
To achieve optimal printing results from specific applications, see Color Printing and Fiery
Color Reference.
Setting options and printing
To print from Windows platforms, install the PostScript printer driver. For instructions, see
Installing Printer Drivers. The drivers are included on the User Software CD (PS Printer
Drivers) and on the E-5000/E-3000.
Be sure to configure the options in the Advanced tab of the printer driver after installation is
complete, as described on page 15.
After you install the printer driver, you can specify print settings for a particular job and print
it to the E-5000/E-3000. You can also set default print settings using the driver.
If you print to a virtual printer, you may not be able to set some print options, depending on
how the virtual printer is configured.
To print from Windows applications on a computer connected to a print server, the print
server must be a Novell NetWare, Windows 2000/Server 2003, or UNIX server. For more
information, see Configuration and Setup.
The following procedures explain how to use the printer driver to specify print options.
For information about specific print options, see Print Options.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR A SPECIFIC WINDOWS PRINT JOB USING THE PRINTER DRIVER
1 Choose Print in your application.
2 Select the E-5000/E-3000 as your printer and click Properties.
49
PRINTING
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Presets (Job Templates),
see Help
Print Option icons
Customize (Shortcuts),
see Help
Active area
Job View
Printer Status
2
1
3
4
5
6
The Fiery Printing tab serves as the control center for all frequently used printing functions.
N OTE : For a complete list of print options, see Print Options.
4 Click the Color icon and specify the color profile options for the job.
In the Print Mode area, select a color mode for the job. To use advanced color management
features, such as Rendering Style, click Expert Settings and proceed to step 5. Otherwise,
proceed to step 7.
PRINTING
50
5 In the Expert Color Settings dialog box, click Update to display the current E-5000/
E-3000 settings.
If the Update button does not appear, make sure that the Two-Way Communication option
is selected, as described in “Configuring installed options and updating print options
settings automatically” on page 31.
6 Specify the color settings for the print job and click OK.
7 Click the Job Info icon.
8 Type information in the Notes field.
Enter user and job identification information for managing purposes, or other information
that is required at your site.
The information that you type in this field can be viewed and edited by the operator in
Command WorkStation and also appears in the Job Log.
For more information about Command WorkStation, see Utilities.
PRINTING
51
9 Type instructions to the operator about the job in the Instructions field.
These instructions are displayed in Command WorkStation, but do not appear in the
Job Log. These instructions can be edited by the operator.
10 Type a user name and password in the User Authentication area.
The user name that you type in the User Authentication area can be your network
domain\user name or a local user name. Check with your system administrator about the
requirements for your system.
If you do not have a user name and password, select the I’m a Guest check box. The print
server must be configured to allow guest printing. Otherwise, clear the I'm a Guest check box.
If you are not using a network user name and password, you can type your domain\user name
and password in the fields provided. Click Validate to validate the user name and password.
When the Use Windows Login option is selected, the LDAP domain user name and password
are used as an authenticated user name. This is available only if the user has logged on to the
Windows computer as a domain user.
Select the Save User Information option to save your user name and password.
11 Type a password in the Secure Print field if you are sending a secure print job.
12 Type your User ID if required.
13 Click the remaining print option icons to specify the appropriate settings for the print job
and click OK.
These print options are specific to the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier. They override
settings specified in E-5000/E-3000 Printer Setup, but can be overridden from Command
WorkStation. For information about these options and overrides, see Print Options. For more
information about Command WorkStation, see Utilities.
Some print options are available only if a particular installable option has been configured.
For information about configuring installable options, see Configuring Installable Options.
If you choose Printer’s default, the job prints according to the settings specified in Setup.
For more information, see Print Options.
N OTE : If you specify incompatible print settings, the Conflict dialog box provides instructions
to resolve the conflict.
14 From your application, click OK to send your print job.
Make sure the E-5000/E-3000 is selected as your current printer.
N OTE : Some print options that are selectable from an application are similar to print options
that are specific to the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier. In these cases, use the print options
specific to the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier. These options appear on the Fiery Printing tab.
The application may not set up the file properly for printing on the E-5000/E-3000, resulting
in unexpected finishing, printing errors or longer processing time.
PRINTING
52
N OTE : With the E-mail Notification feature enabled in the printer driver as described in
“To enable Two-Way Communication” on page 31, you receive an e-mail notification after
your job is printed or when a printing error occurs.
TO SET DEFAULT PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS PRINT JOBS USING THE POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 If the Fiery Printing tab is not displayed, click it.
4 Specify the default settings for your print job, as described on page 48.
5 Click OK to close the dialog box.
53
PRINTING
Adding and editing watermarks
The Windows printer driver provides the watermarks feature. This feature allows you to select
from a list of available watermarks, to create new watermarks, to edit text, font (size and style),
color, position, and orientation of the watermark, to delete the currently selected watermark,
and to specify other settings.
The following procedure describes how to edit watermarks. For more information, see
Driver Help.
TO ADD AND EDIT WATERMARKS
1 On the Fiery Printing tab, click the Stamping icon.
1
Select an available
watermark
1
2 Select a watermark from the menu and click Edit.
The Edit Watermark dialog box appears.
1
Preview area
1
3 Specify Font, Size, and Style of the text in the Watermark Text area.
PRINTING
54
4 Specify an angle for the watermark text in the Angle area.
Alternatively, you can click and hold one end of the watermark text in the preview area and
drag it to an orientation.
5 Specify a color for the watermark text in the Color area.
6 Specify the position of the watermark text in the Position area.
Alternatively, you can click and hold the center of the watermark text in the preview area and
drag it to a position.
7 Click OK.
8 Specify how you want the watermark text to appear on the output in the Print Watermarks
area.
PRINTING
55
Using presets
Saving print option settings to your hard disk enables you to load specifically configured
settings for a particular job as a preset. You can also share presets over a network, using the
Import and Export features.
TO CREATE A PRESET
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Adjust the print settings on the Fiery Printing tab as desired.
5 Under Preset, choose Save current Job Template.
6 Enter a descriptive name for the preset (up to 32 characters long) and click OK.
The preset is added to the list of available presets.
The presets are available any time you access the Fiery Printing tab. They remain on your local
disk until you delete them.
TO CHOOSE A PRESET FOR PRINT JOBS
The Fiery Printing tab shows which, if any, presets are available for all print jobs.
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Under Preset, select a different preset.
The preset is used until you select another one.
PRINTING
56
N OTE : When you access the Fiery Printing tab from an application’s Print dialog box and
select a preset, the preset is used only for the current application session.
If the preset you want is not displayed, but you previously backed it up to a disk (exported it),
you can import it to use again.
TO DELETE PRESETS
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Under Preset, choose Save and manage list of Job Temp.
The Job Templates dialog box appears.
5 Select the preset you want to delete and click Delete.
6 Click OK to close the Job Templates dialog box.
TO REVERT TO THE DEFAULT PRESET
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Under Preset, choose Default Job Template.
PRINTING
57
TO EXPORT (OR BACK UP) A PRESET TO A HARD DISK
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Under Preset, choose Save and manage list of Job Temp.
5 Click a name to select the saved preset you want to export or back up.
6 Click Export.
7 In the Export Job Templates dialog box, browse to select a folder in which to save the preset.
8 Enter a short file name for the exported preset and click Save.
The file includes the long name you gave the preset when you created it and includes the
.sav extension.
PRINTING
58
TO IMPORT (RESTORE) A PRESET SAVED ON A DISK
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 In the Fiery Printing tab, under Preset, choose Save and manage list of Job Temp.
The Job Templates dialog box appears.
5 Click Import.
6 Browse to the disk and folder containing the preset you want to import.
7 Select the preset file and click Open.
8 Click OK to close the Job Templates dialog box.
N OTE : When you import presets, they appear in the Preset menu under the preset name, not
the file name. In the preceding examples, the file present.sav (file name) was imported, but it
appears in the Preset menu as Presentation (preset name).
59
PRINTING
Customizing the Basic icon
The Basic icon is under the Fiery Printing tab. You can customize it with the print options
you use frequently. This saves time because you do not have to open all of the other print
option icons if you only want to set the options in Basic. Basic initially contains a default
group of print options. You can remove these options and add others.
N OTE : When you place a print option in Basic, it still appears under its appropriate print
option icon. You can set the option from either location.
1
2
Basic icon
Customize (Shortcuts)
1
2
TO CUSTOMIZE THE BASIC ICON
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
PRINTING
60
4 Click the Basic icon and then click Customize.
The Customize Basic View dialog box is displayed. The dialog box contains the shortcuts
for print options. The print options that currently appear in Basic are listed under Current
Shortcuts.
5 To add an option to Basic, select the desired option in the Available Shortcuts list and
click Add.
6 To remove an option from Basic, select the desired option in the Current Shortcuts list and
click Remove.
7 To reorder the display of options in Basic, select an option in the Current Shortcuts list and
click Move Up or Move Down.
8 Click OK to save your changes.
N OTE : The Basic window cannot be empty. If you remove all options from the Basic window,
it reverts to the default group of options.
61
PRINTING
Defining and printing custom page sizes
With custom page sizes, you define the dimensions of a printed page. After you define a
custom page size, you can use it from within an application without redefining it each time
you print. When you create custom page sizes, specify Width dimensions to correspond with
the shorter side of your job and specify Height dimensions to correspond with the longer side
of your job. Set custom page sizes in this way, as well as specifying the orientation settings.
Portrait
Height
Landscape
Width
Height
Width
N OTE : Custom page sizes are not supported with Imposition jobs.
When you define or edit a custom page size, or print your job on a custom page size in the
Windows PostScript printer driver, use the following procedures.
N OTE : Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 have a similar interface when setting options and
printing. The following procedures use Windows 2000 illustrations with Windows XP/
Server 2003 differences noted.
TO DEFINE A CUSTOM PAGE SIZE WITH THE WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 PS icon and choose Printing Preferences.
PRINTING
62
3 Click the Media icon.
4 Choose PostScript Custom Page Size from the Document Size menu and then click Custom.
The PostScript Custom Page Size Definition dialog box appears.
5 Specify options to define the custom page size.
Custom Page Size Dimensions: Specify the width and height of the print job.
Unit: Select a unit of measurement for the print job.
6 Click OK to close the PostScript Custom Page Size Definition dialog box.
7 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
You can now specify the custom page size from an application.
PRINTING
63
TO EDIT A CUSTOM PAGE SIZE WITH THE WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Media icon.
4 Choose PostScript Custom Page Size from the Document Size menu and then click Custom.
The PostScript Custom Page Size Definition dialog box appears.
5 Edit the settings, as described on page 62, and click OK.
TO PRINT A CUSTOM PAGE SIZE WITH THE WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER
1 Choose Print from your application.
2 Select the E-5000/E-3000 as the printer and click Properties.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab and then click the Media icon.
4 From the Paper Source menu, choose the paper tray that contains the custom-size paper for
the job.
The Paper Source selection is valid for the current job only.
5 Select PostScript Custom Page Size from the Document Size menu.
6 Click the Layout icon.
7 Select a setting from Orientation, according to the way the custom size paper is loaded.
8 Click OK and then click OK again to print the job.
PRINTING
64
Viewing the copier status
If you enable Two-Way Communication for your printer, you can monitor the status of the
printer, including the levels of consumable materials, such as paper and toner. For more
information, see Driver Help.
For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see “Configuring installed
options and updating print options settings automatically” on page 31.
TO VIEW THE STATUS OF THE COPIER CONSUMABLES
1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers.
Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes.
Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the E-5000/E-3000 icon and choose Printing Preferences.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Click the Printer icon and click Update.
Printer status is displayed in two places on the Fiery Printing tab:
• Printer Status (on the left side of the window under the document thumbnail image):
Displays error conditions that can prevent you from printing.
• Under the Printer icon: Displays information about the level of both available paper in
each tray and available toner (if applicable), as well as a thumbnail image of the printer and
its installed options.
To update this status information, click Update.
PRINTING
65
Saving files to print at a remote location
If you do not have an E-5000/E-3000 onsite and are preparing files to take to a service bureau
or other location, print the final files to the File port (as opposed to one of the local ports).
You can also print to the File port to create a file to download using the Docs WebTool. For
instructions on printing to the File port, see the documentation that accompanies Windows.
67
INDEX
INDEX
A
J
Auto Trapping option 29
ColorWise print options 31
custom page size, see defining a custom
page size, printing a custom page size
Job Control 42
Job Info icon 50
Job Monitor
configuring server connection 34
installing 33
on User Software CD 9
D
L
C
default print options 52
defining a custom page size
Windows 2000/XP 61
Docs tab in WebTools 47
Downloads tab in WebTools 13
E
E-mail Notification 32
E-mail Service
about 40
Job Control 42
LCT option 29
Lower Paper Trays option 29
LPR connection 21
M
Mail Port
configuring 36
on User Software CD (Utilities) 9
managing print jobs 42
N
F
Notes field 50
Novell NetWare client setup 24
File port, saving files to 65
Finisher options 29
FTP Printing 46
O
I
P
installable options
configuring from printer driver 30
updating automatically 31
installing
Job Monitor 33
printer drivers using Point and Print 11
printing utilities 33
virtual printers using Point and Print 18
Internal Shift Tray option 29
Internal Tray2 option 29
IPP connection 26
IPX connection 24
Point and Print 11, 18
PostScript Printer Description file, see PPD
PostScript printer driver
deleting 35
download using WebTools 13
installing from User Software CD
(Drivers) 15
installing using Point and Print 11
PPD
overview 9
print options 48
overriding Printer Setup settings 51
68
INDEX
Printer Delete Utility 35
Printer’s default 51
printing
from an application 48
to File port 65
using an E-mail client 40
printing a custom page size
Windows 2000/XP 63
printing connections, supported types 19
printing utilities, installing 33
Prntdrve.exe file 14
Punch Unit options 29
S
SMB printing
completing connection 20
setup 11
Spot-On option 29
T
TCP/IP connection 21
Tray 3 (LCT) option 29
Two-Way Communication 31, 50
U
USB device 44
User Authentication 51
V
virtual printer
installing using Point and Print 18
setup 18
W
watermarks
adding and editing 53
WebTools
Docs tab 47
Downloads tab 13
Windows
IPP connection 26
IPX connection 24
LPR or Port 9100 connection 21
TCP/IP connection 21
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Printing from Mac OS
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45058963
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
5
Terminology and conventions
6
About this document
7
User software
8
Downloading printer drivers using WebTools
9
System requirements
9
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
10
Installing Mac OS X printer drivers and printer description files
11
Setting up the E-5000/E-3000 on Mac OS X
12
PRINTING UTILITIES
16
Printing from a USB device
17
FTP Printing
19
Installing fonts on Mac OS X computers
20
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
Printing from applications with Mac OS X
Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X
21
22
22
Defining custom page sizes from Mac OS X
27
Enabling Two-Way Communication
29
INDEX
31
INTRODUCTION
5
INTRODUCTION
This document describes how to install printer drivers and printer description files for
the Color Controller E-5000/E-3000 and how to set up printing from Apple Mac OS X
computers. It also describes how to print to the Color Controller E-5000/E-3000.
For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the Color Controller
E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup. For general information about using the color
copier, your computer, application software, or network, see the documentation that
accompanies those products.
For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome.
6
INTRODUCTION
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
INTRODUCTION
About this document
This document covers the following topics:
• Installing printer files on Mac OS computers
• Setting up printing connections on Mac OS computers
• Installing E-5000/E-3000 printing utilities
• Printing from Mac OS computers
7
8
INTRODUCTION
User software
The following table lists the user software that you need for setting up basic printing on the
E-5000/E-3000. Other documents may describe other user software, depending on what you
are trying to accomplish.
User software
Description
PostScript Printer
Description (PPD/Plugin)
files
Files used with the PostScript printer driver that allow the
E-5000/E-3000 to appear in the Print and Page Setup dialog
boxes of popular applications. The E-5000/E-3000 PPDs
provide information about the copier to your application
and printer driver.
PageMaker PPD files
Files that allow you to print to the E-5000/E-3000 from
Adobe PageMaker. You must install the appropriate PPD in
PageMaker. For instructions, see the documentation that
accompanies PageMaker.
PostScript screen fonts
PostScript/True Type screen fonts that correspond to the
printer fonts installed on the E-5000/E-3000. For a complete
list of PostScript/True Type fonts installed on the E-5000/
E-3000, print a font list. For more information, see
Command WorkStation Help.
INTRODUCTION
9
Downloading printer drivers using WebTools
You can install printer drivers and printer description files from the User Software CD
(PS Printer Drivers) or directly from the E-5000/E-3000 with WebTools.
For more information about setting up and starting WebTools, see Utilities.
TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVERS WITH WEBTOOLS
1 Start your Internet or intranet browser and type the DNS name or IP address of the E-5000/
E-3000.
2 Click the Downloads tab.
3 Click the link for the printer drivers that you want to install (Printer Files for Mac OS X).
A file named OSX.dmg is downloaded to your desktop. The file contains a folder named
Printer Driver in a BinHex-encoded, compressed format. If your Internet browser is equipped
with an expander utility, such as StuffIt Expander, the folder decodes and decompresses
automatically.
If the Printer Driver folder does not automatically decode and decompress, double-click the
file to start the utility that performs that function.
4 Install the appropriate printer driver for your operating system.
For instructions on installing the Mac OS X printer driver, see “Installing Mac OS X printer
drivers and printer description files” on page 11.
System requirements
For detailed system requirements, see Welcome, provided in your media pack.
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
SETTING UP PRINTING
ON
10
MAC OS X
To set up the E-5000/E-3000 as a PostScript printer on a Mac OS X computer, install
the printer files that correspond to your copier. The printer files are provided on the User
Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) or can be downloaded using WebTools. Printer drivers
provide a way to communicate information about print jobs between your applications, the
E-5000/E-3000, and the copier.
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
11
Installing Mac OS X printer drivers and printer description files
The User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) contains the following software for Mac OS X
(see the OSX:Printer Driver folder):
• OSX Installer: Installs the PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) and PPD plug-ins
required to print from Mac OS X.
• Language folders: Printer description files that are installed by OSX Installer. You do not
need to open these folders or install them manually on your computer. The appropriate
files are installed by OSX Installer.
TO INSTALL THE PRINTER DESCRIPTION FILES FOR MAC OS X
1 Quit all open applications.
2 Make sure that the Printer Setup Utility is not running on your computer.
Printer Setup Utility updates the list of available printers when it starts. If a printer description
file is added while Printer Setup Utility is running, you cannot select the associated printer
model until you restart.
3 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive.
4 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder on the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers).
5 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver.
6 Follow the on-screen instructions.
The OSX Installer installs the printer driver files that correspond to the E-5000/E-3000.
7 When copying is complete, click Quit.
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
12
Setting up the E-5000/E-3000 on Mac OS X
After you install the printer driver files on Mac OS X, you must set up the E-5000/E-3000
in the Printer Setup Utility. This section describes how to set up the E-5000/E-3000.
You must also configure the E-5000/E-3000 for the options installed on the copier to allow
the E-5000/E-3000 to take advantage of the copier options. Configure the options manually,
or for TCP/IP network connections, use the Two-Way Communication feature to configure
the options automatically.
The E-5000 installable options are:
Installable option
Selections
Auto Trapping Option
Not Installed, Auto Trapping
Finisher Option
Not Installed, Finisher SR3020, Finisher SR3030, Finisher SR790
Input Tray Option
Not Installed, Tray 3 (LCT), Lower Paper Trays
Internal Tray2
Not Installed, Internal Tray2
Punch Option
Not Installed, Punch Unit 2 and 3 holes, Punch Unit 2 and 4 holes,
Punch Unit 4 holes type NE
Spot-On Option
Off, On
The E-3000 installable options are:
Installable option
Selections
Auto Trapping Option
Not Installed, Auto Trapping
Finisher Option
Not Installed, Finisher SR790, Finisher SR3000, Finisher SR3010
Input Tray Option
Not Installed, Tray 3 (LCT), Lower Paper Trays
Internal Shift Tray
Not Installed, Internal Shift Tray
Internal Tray2
Not Installed, Internal Tray2
Punch Option
Not Installed, Punch Unit 2 and 3 holes, Punch Unit 2 and 4 holes,
Punch Unit 4 holes type NE
Spot-On Option
Off, On
N OTE : For more information about the print settings that use these options, see Print Options.
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
13
TO SET UP THE E-5000/E-3000 IN THE PRINTER SETUP UTILITY
1 Choose Utilities from the Go menu and start the Printer Setup Utility.
The Printer List dialog box appears.
2 Click Add.
3 Choose AppleTalk or IP printing from the menu that appears.
4 For AppleTalk, choose the AppleTalk Zone and choose the name of the E-5000/E-3000.
If the zone is not listed as the Default Zone, or one of the Recent Zones, select
AppleTalk Network, select the zone, and then click Choose. Proceed to step 5.
For IP Printing, type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Printer Address field
and the print connection (Print, Hold, or Direct) in the Queue Name field.
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
14
5 For Printer Model, choose the appropriate manufacturer name or model, and then select the
file for the E-5000/E-3000 PPD.
If the manufacturer or model is not listed, choose Other and browse to the location of
the PPD.
6 Click Add.
The E-5000/E-3000 is added to the list of printers.
7 (Optional) With the E-5000/E-3000 selected, choose Printers > Create Desktop Printer,
specify a name and location for the icon, and then click Save.
You can now print a file to the E-5000/E-3000 by clicking and dragging the file to the
E-5000/E-3000 Desktop Printer icon.
You are ready to configure installable options for the E-5000/E-3000.
SETTING UP PRINTING ON MAC OS X
TO CONFIGURE INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
1 Choose Utilities from the Go menu and start the Printer Setup Utility.
2 Select your printer in the Printer List.
3 Choose Show Info from the Printers menu.
4 Choose Installable Options.
N OTE : The E-5000 dialog box is shown.
5 Select the appropriate settings.
6 Click Apply Changes.
7 Close the window.
15
PRINTING UTILITIES
16
PRINTING UTILITIES
The following methods allow you to print to the E-5000/E-3000:
• USB device
• FTP Printing
You can install the screen fonts from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers). For more
information about installing screen fonts, see “Installing fonts on Mac OS X computers” on
page 20.
PRINTING UTILITIES
17
Printing from a USB device
You can print files on a USB device to the E-5000/E-3000. Files, including those that
originated on a Mac computer, can be saved to the USB device and downloaded directly to
the E-5000/E-3000.
You can print files automatically from a USB device to one of the standard print queues on
the E-5000/E-3000 (Print, Hold, or Direct) or to published virtual printers. Verify with your
administrator that these connections are published in Setup. Or you can print any of the files
on your USB device, specify where to send them, and also select some print options. For more
information about virtual printers, see Utilities.
Before you print files from a USB device, ask your administrator to configure the appropriate
options. For more information about configuring the appropriate options, see Configuration
and Setup.
Two methods of printing files from a USB device are available: automatic printing and
manual printing.
Automatic printing
To print automatically to Print, Hold, or Direct queues or to published virtual printers with
the Print All setting, set up folders on your USB device with the names Print, Hold, and
Direct and any published virtual printers. When you plug the USB device into a USB port
on the E-5000/E-3000, the files in those folders are sent automatically to the corresponding
queues.
TO PRINT FILES FROM THE USB DEVICE
1 Configure the USB printing options in Setup (see Configuration and Setup).
2 Create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named Print, Hold, and Direct.
3 Save the files (PS, EPS, TIFF, PCL, and PDF) from the user’s computer to the USB device.
Files copied to the Print, Hold, and Direct folders are downloaded to the corresponding print
connection on the E-5000/E-3000 automatically when you connect the USB device to the
E-5000/E-3000. Files copied to the root level of the USB device are downloaded to the Print
queue.
4 Remove the USB device from the computer and connect it to the USB connector on the
E-5000/E-3000.
Make sure that the USB device is properly shut down before you disconnect it from
the computer.
For the location of the USB port, see Configuration and Setup.
PRINTING UTILITIES
18
Manual printing
When USB Media Auto Print is disabled in Server Setup, you manually select the files you
want to print from the USB device and specify where you want to send them.
TO PRINT USING USB MEDIA SERVER
1 Insert the USB device into a USB port on the E-5000/E-3000.
2 On the copier display panel, select the Functions menu, and then select USB Media Server.
3 When the “Select File to Print” message appears, navigate to the file that you want to print
and press OK.
The files on the USB device are displayed on the copier display panel. Files at the root level of
the drive and folders are displayed.
4 Select where you want to send the file:
• Send to Hold Queue
• Print with Options
• Send to Direct
• Send to Print Queue
• Send to published virtual printers
5 Click OK if you selected the Hold, Print, or Direct queues or a published virtual printer.
Proceed to step 7.
The copier display panel displays a message showing you when your job was sent, and asking
if you want to print another file.
6 If you selected Print with Options, choose from the following options, pressing OK after
each selection.
• Number of Copies
• Simplex or Duplex printing
• Page Size
After you select the print options, you can select where to send the file. See steps 4 and 5.
7 Select Yes to print another job from the USB device. Select No to exit the USB Media server
interface.
8 Remove the USB device from the E-5000/E-3000.
PRINTING UTILITIES
19
FTP Printing
If FTP Services are enabled on the E-5000/E-3000, the E-5000/E-3000 is set up as an FTP
server. You can send jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 using FTP printing. For more information
about configuring FTP Services, see Configuration and Setup.
You can use any FTP client software. Before you use FTP printing, contact your administrator
for the following information:
• IP address or DNS name for the E-5000/E-3000
• Directory or path to send the job to, such as the Print queue, Hold queue or published
virtual printers (if supported)
N OTE : You cannot print to the Direct connection using FTP printing.
• User name and password (if required)
You can send PostScript (PS), Printer Control Language (PCL), Tagged Image File Format
(TIFF), and Portable Document Format (PDF) files to the E-5000/E-3000. Encapsulated
PostScript (EPS) files are not supported for FTP printing.
TO PRINT FILES TO THE E-5000/E-3000 USING THE FTP PROTOCOL
1 Connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with your FTP client software.
Folders corresponding to the Print queue and Hold queue are displayed. Folders for any
published virtual printer are also displayed.
2 Navigate to the folder representing the print connection or published virtual printer.
3 Upload your job to the appropriate folder.
After the job is printed, it is deleted from the E-5000/E-3000.
PRINTING UTILITIES
20
Installing fonts on Mac OS X computers
The Fonts on the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) include screen fonts that correspond
to the 136 built-in PostScript and True Type printer fonts on the E-5000/E-3000. To be
available to applications, the screen fonts must be installed on Mac OS X.
TO INSTALL SCREEN FONTS ON MAC OS X V10.2
1 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive of the Mac OS X
computer.
2 Open the OSX: Fonts folder.
3 Copy the fonts to the following location:
• For your personal use: Users/account name/Library/Fonts
• For shared use: Library/Fonts
TO INSTALL SCREEN FONTS ON MAC OS X V10.3 AND V10.4
1 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive of the Mac OS X
computer.
2 Start the Font Book application in Applications/Font Book.
3 Choose Add Fonts from the File menu.
4 Choose User Software/OSX/Fonts/Albertus MT.
5 Choose Select All from the Edit menu.
6 Choose one of the following from Install fonts:
• For your personal use: for your use only
• For shared use: for all users of this computer
• For Classic: for Mac OS X Classic
N OTE : For Mac OS X v10.4, you must select User, Computer, or Classic Mac OS in
Preferences/Default Install Location of Font Book beforehand.
7 Click Open.
8 Exit the Font Book application.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
PRINTING
FROM
21
MAC OS X
Print to the E-5000/E-3000 as you would print to any other printer from a Mac OS X
application. Select a printer and print the file from within the application. In addition to
this method, you can download files to the E-5000/E-3000 using Hot Folders (an option)
(see Utilities) and the Docs WebTool (see Utilities), and print documents using Command
WorkStation (see Utilities).
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
22
Printing from applications with Mac OS X
After you install the E-5000/E-3000 printer description files using the OSX Installer, you can
print directly from most Mac OS X applications. For more information about installing
printer description files with the OSX Installer, see page 11.
To achieve optimal printing results from specific applications, see Color Printing and Fiery
Color Reference.
Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X
In Mac OS X applications, print options are set from the Page Setup dialog box and the Print
dialog box. For information about specific print options, see Print Options.
N OTE : Some default print options are set by your administrator during Setup. For information
about the current server default settings, contact your administrator or the operator.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS AND PRINT FROM MAC OS X
1 Open a file and choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu.
2 For Settings, choose Page Attributes. For Format for, choose the E-5000/E-3000.
3 Select the Page settings for your print job.
4 Click OK.
5 Choose Print from the application’s File menu.
6 Choose the E-5000/E-3000 as your printer.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
23
7 Choose Owner Information from the drop-down list.
8 Type information in the Notes field.
Type user and job identification information for managing purposes, or whatever information
is required at your site.
The information you type in the Notes field can be viewed and edited by the operator in
Command WorkStation and also appears in the Job Log.
9 Type instructions to the operator about the job in the Instructions field.
These instructions can be displayed in Command WorkStation but do not appear in the
Job Log. These instructions can be edited by the operator.
10 Type your user name or domain\user name in the User Name field if User Authentication is
enabled on the E-5000/E-3000.
11 Type your local password or domain password in the Password field if User Authentication is
enabled on the E-5000/E-3000.
12 Type a password in the Secure Print field if you are sending a secure print job.
13 Type your User ID, if required.
14 Type values in the other fields, if required.
For information about these fields, see Print Options.
15 Choose ColorWise from the drop-down list.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
24
16 Specify color print options for the job.
17 To use advanced color management features, such as Rendering Style, click Expert Settings.
The Expert Color Settings dialog box appears.
N OTE : To display the ColorWise settings from the E-5000/E-3000 in this dialog box, make
sure that Two-Way Communication is enabled. To enable Two-Way Communication, see
page 29.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
25
To set the Output Profile option to Use Media Defined Profile, clear the Two-Way
Communication option, and then select Use Media Defined Profile from the drop-down list.
Select the Two-Way Communication option to select specific downloaded output profiles.
18 Specify the color settings for the print job and click OK.
19 To shift the position of the print image on the page, choose Image Shift from the drop-down
list and specify the shift distances.
You might need to shift the print image to allow for binding, for example.
20 To specify a margin value (millimeters or inches) at the folding line for imposition printing,
choose Center Margins from the drop-down list.
N OTE : Center Margins is only available with the Booklet print option.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
26
21 Choose Printer Features to specify printer-specific options. Specify settings for each
selection in the Feature Sets list.
These print options are specific to the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier. You must choose each
Feature Set to see all the options. These options override settings in E-5000/E-3000 Printer
Setup but can be changed from Command WorkStation.
If you choose Printer’s default, the job prints according to the settings specified in Setup.
For more information about these options and overrides, see Print Options.
Some print options that are selectable from an application are similar to the print options
that are specific to the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier. In these cases, use the print options
specific to the E-5000/E-3000 and the copier that appear in the Printer Features menu.
The application may not set up the file properly for printing on the E-5000/E-3000, resulting
in unexpected printing or finishing errors, or in longer processing time.
If you select an invalid setting or combination of settings when printing a document, no error
message appears. For example, you may be able to select duplex printing on transparency
media. Invalid settings and combinations are ignored by the E-5000/E-3000.
22 Click Print.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
27
Defining custom page sizes from Mac OS X
With custom page sizes, you define page dimensions and margins. After you define a custom
page size, you can use it from within an application without redefining it each time you print.
TO DEFINE A CUSTOM PAGE SIZE
1 Choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu.
2 Choose Custom Paper Size from the Settings menu.
1
Custom page names
1
3 Click New and type a name for the custom page size.
4 Enter the page dimensions and margins.
5 Click Save.
6 Click OK to exit.
The custom page size you defined is added to the list of Paper Size selections in the Page Setup
dialog box.
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
TO EDIT A SAVED CUSTOM PAGE SIZE
1 Choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu.
2 Choose Custom Paper Size from the Settings menu.
3 Select the Custom Page Size name.
4 Edit the page dimensions and margins.
5 Replace the existing Custom Page name by clicking it.
6 Click Save.
7 Click OK to exit.
TO DELETE A CUSTOM PAGE SIZE
1 Choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu.
2 Choose Custom Paper Size from the Settings menu.
3 Select the Custom Page Size name.
4 Click Delete.
5 Click OK to exit.
TO MAKE A COPY OF THE CUSTOM PAGE SIZE
1 Choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu.
2 Choose Custom Paper Size from the Settings menu.
3 Select the Custom Page Size name.
4 Click Duplicate.
5 Click OK to exit.
28
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
29
Enabling Two-Way Communication
If you enabled a TCP/IP network, you can use the Two-Way Communication feature to
retrieve copier status and ColorWise settings from the E-5000/E-3000 and display them in
the printer driver. The copier status includes the current paper and toner levels. ColorWise
settings can be set on the E-5000/E-3000 using ColorWise Pro Tools. For more information
about ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
TO ENABLE TWO- WAY COMMUNICATION
1 Open a file and choose Print from the application’s File menu.
2 Choose the E-5000/E-3000 as your printer.
3 Choose Printer Info, or select ColorWise and select the Two-Way Communication option.
A dialog box appears requesting an IP address or DNS name.
N OTE : If the dialog box does not appear automatically, click Configure.
4 Type the E-5000/E-3000 IP address or DNS name in the dialog box.
30
PRINTING FROM MAC OS X
5 Click OK.
6 To update the copier status in the Printer Info window, click Refresh.
1
2
3
Status light
Paper Tray information
Toner levels
1
2
3
• Status light: Displays the copier status, such as idle or printing, or error conditions
that can prevent you from printing.
• Paper Tray Info: Displays the tray name and the amount of paper remaining in the
specified tray as a percentage.
• Toner Levels: Displays amount of remaining toner as a percentage. The toner amount
displayed is roughly calculated and may not match the exact amount of toner remaining.
31
INDEX
INDEX
A
M
AppleTalk connection, in Printer Setup
Utility 13
Auto Trapping option 12
Mac OS X
PPD 22
print options 22
printer driver installation 11
printer driver setup 12
C
ColorWise 23
ColorWise options
updating automatically 29
Command WorkStation 21
copier/printer status 29
custom page size
defining for Mac OS X 27
D
default print options 22
Docs tab in WebTools 21
Downloads tab in WebTools 9
E
Expert Color Settings 24
F
Feature Sets 26
Finisher option 12
fonts
installing on Mac OS X 20
FTP Printing 19
H
Hot Folders 21
I
Input Tray option 12
installable options
specifying in Mac OS X 15
installing
printer driver for Mac OS X 11
Instructions field 23
Internal Shift Tray 12
Internal Tray2 12
IP Printing, in Printer Setup Utility 13
N
Notes field 23
O
OSX Installer 11, 22
Owner Information 23
P
Page Setup dialog box 22
PostScript fonts 8
PostScript Printer Description file,
see PPD
PPD
Mac OS X 22
overview 8
Print dialog box 22
print options
Mac OS X 22
printer driver
downloading 9
installation, Mac OS X 11
setup, Mac OS X 12
Printer Features 26
Printer Setup Utility 11, 12
Printer’s default 26
S
screen fonts, installing 20
Spot-On option 12
T
Two-Way Communication 29
INDEX
U
USB device 17
W
WebTools
Docs tab 21
Downloads tab 9
32
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Color Printing
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45058981
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
7
Terminology and conventions
7
About this document
8
Key features of ColorWise
9
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
10
About this chapter
11
Setting up ColorWise Pro Tools on a Windows computer
12
Installing ColorWise Pro Tools
12
Installing the ICC profiles
12
Configuring the connection
14
Editing the configuration
16
Setting up ColorWise Pro Tools on a Mac OS computer
17
Installing ColorWise Pro Tools on a Mac OS computer
17
Installing the ColorSync profiles
17
Configuring the connection
19
Editing the configuration
21
Using ColorWise Pro Tools
22
Using Calibrator
22
Using Color Editor
22
Using Profile Manager
27
Using Spot-On
32
Using Color Setup
33
CONTENTS
CALIBRATION
4
35
About this chapter
36
Calibrating with ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator
37
Starting Calibrator
37
Expert mode
38
Applying measurements to multiple calibration sets
39
Restoring default calibration measurements
40
Calibrating with ColorCal
40
Calibrating with the DTP32 or DTP32 Series II
44
Calibrating with the DTP41
45
Calibrating with the ED-100
48
Calibrating with the ES-1000
51
Calibrating from the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel
Calibrating with ColorCal
Understanding calibration
55
55
57
An overview of calibration
57
How calibration works
57
Scheduling calibration
59
Checking calibration status
59
SPOT-ON
Using Spot-On
60
60
Starting Spot-On
61
Spot-On main window
62
Working with existing colors
63
Creating custom colors
65
Downloading custom color groups
66
Uploading custom color groups
67
Editing color values
67
Using a measurement instrument to target colors
71
Reverting default colors to factory settings
72
Saving changes and exiting Spot-On
73
CONTENTS
Spot-On with Substitute Colors
5
74
Creating a color for substitution
74
Defining the color values for a substitute color
76
Printing a job with a substitute color
79
Substitute Color dialog box
80
Principles for Substitute Colors
81
Uploading and downloading a substitute color group
83
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
84
About this chapter
84
Managing color on the E-5000/E-3000
85
ColorWise print options
86
Auto Trapping
86
Black Overprint
86
Black Text/Graphics
87
CMYK Simulation Profile
88
CMYK Simulation Method
89
Combine Separations
90
Composite Overprint
90
Output Profile
91
Print Gray using Black Only
91
Rendering Styles
92
RGB Separation
93
RGB Source Profile
93
Spot Color Matching
95
Substitute Colors
96
Printer drivers and print options
96
Setting print options for Windows
96
Setting color management print options for Mac OS
98
Using Expert Color Settings to enable Device Link Profiles
100
CONTENTS
IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS
Simple ASCII Import File Format
INDEX
6
102
102
Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page
103
Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page
103
Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page
104
105
7
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This document explains how to manage color output on the Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
and provides information about calibration and color profiles.
This document is part of a set of documentation that includes documents for users and
system administrators. For a complete description of your Color Controller E-5000/E-3000,
see the other documentation available at your site.
For more information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see
Welcome.
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Command WorkStation
Command WorkStation, Windows Edition and
Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other books in this documentation set
Windows
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
INTRODUCTION
About this document
This document is organized to supply you with key information about managing the color
output of your E-5000/E-3000.
This document covers the following topics:
• Installing and configuring ColorWise Pro Tools
• Using Color Editor, Profile Manager, and ColorSetup Tools
• Overview of calibration and description of how to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 using
various ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator methods
• Setting ColorWise print options from Windows and Mac OS computers
• Overview of color measurement instruments, available as separately purchased options
• Descriptions of Simple ASCII File Format (SAIFF), which can be used to import toner
density measurements from measurement devices
N OTE : The Glossary defines color terms and concepts that appear in bold throughout this
document, for example, output profile. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms
are unfamiliar, see the Glossary.
8
INTRODUCTION
9
Key features of ColorWise
ColorWise is the color management system (CMS) built into the E-5000/E-3000 and
designed to provide both casual and expert users with the best color output for a variety
of purposes. The ColorWise default settings provide high-quality, out-of-box color from
many Windows and Mac OS applications. This allows casual users to achieve quality output
without knowing about or changing any color settings on the E-5000/E-3000.
For consistent color, calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 on a regular basis. ColorWise Pro Tools
includes an easy-to-use calibrator, which allows you to calibrate using either the scanning unit
that is part of the copier or an optional spectrophotometer or densitometer
(see “Calibration” on page 35).
ColorWise features allow you to modify printing results. Depending on your particular needs,
you can:
• Set the behavior of CMYK printing to emulate DIC, Euroscale, SWOP and other offset
press standards.
• Match PANTONE and other spot colors for the best match when printing using
four-color press conditions or presses with extra, custom plates.
• Select a color rendering dictionary (CRD), also called a rendering style, for RGB
printing. CRDs allow for rich, saturated printing of presentation graphics, smooth,
accurate printing of photographs, and relative or absolute colorimetric rendering for
specialized needs.
• Define the source of incoming RGB color data for better color conversion of RGB data
with no source information.
• Determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the copier or is first
converted into the gamut of another device, such as a press standard. This feature is useful
for making one device behave like another for RGB data. It also allows you to evaluate the
appearance of an RGB file under different printing conditions without having to convert
the RGB file to CMYK first.
ColorWise color management (ColorWise) offers an open color architecture, allowing
users to customize the E-5000/E-3000 to meet new printing needs as they arise. ColorWise
supports ICC profiles, which are industry standard color profiles that describe the color
behavior of a device. Note that ICC specification version 4 profiles (profile version 4.2.0.0)
are supported as well as version 2. Downloading ICC profiles to the E-5000/E-3000 enables
the E-5000/E-3000 to simulate a custom press (or another copier), as well as accurately print
colors from a particular monitor or scanner. In addition, you can create customized ICC
profiles for the copier.
ColorWise also allows you to use any Status T densitometer by importing data in a standard
file format (see “Importing Density Measurements” on page 102). In this case, it is important
to note that the quality of the instrument used determines the quality of the calibration.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
10
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
The ColorWise default settings provide high-quality out-of-box color from many Windows
and Mac OS applications. This allows casual users to achieve quality output without knowing
about or changing color settings on the E-5000/E-3000. The ColorWise color management
system (CMS) also allows expert users to obtain the best color output. ColorWise Pro Tools
allows users to customize settings to achieve the best output for a variety of purposes.
Designed to give flexible control of color printing, ColorWise Pro Tools includes the
following color management tools:
• Calibrator (calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 in various ways)
• Color Editor (customize simulation and output profiles)
• Profile Manager (manage profiles)
• Spot-On (define CMYK equivalents for spot colors)
Spot-On is offered as an option.
• Color Setup (set defaults for ColorWise print options)
11
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
About this chapter
This chapter describes the procedures for installing, configuring, and using ColorWise Pro
Tools on Windows and Mac OS computers.
Platform
To do this
See
Windows
Install ColorWise Pro Tools
page 12
Install the ICC profiles
page 12
Configure the connection
page 14
Modify the configuration
page 16
Install ColorWise Pro Tools
page 17
Install the ColorSync profiles
page 17
Configure the connection
page 19
Modify the configuration
page 21
Use Calibrator
page 22
Use Color Editor
page 22
Use Profile Manager
page 27
Use Spot-On
page 32
Use Color Setup
page 33
Mac OS
Windows and Mac OS
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
12
Setting up ColorWise Pro Tools on a Windows computer
The following sections describe how to install ColorWise Pro Tools and other files and
configure the connection on a Windows computer.
Installing ColorWise Pro Tools
All installation of user software on a Windows computer is done through the Fiery User
Software Installer. The procedures in Utilities describe installing from the User Software CD
(Utilities).
To use ColorWise Pro Tools on a Windows computer, you must install Sun Java 5. If this file
is not installed on your computer, the ColorWise Pro Tools installer automatically initiates the
installation process. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Installing the ICC profiles
You can copy additional ICC profiles from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) to your
computer. Use the ICC profiles with applications that support ICC standards, such as Adobe
Photoshop. For most ICC-aware applications, you must install the files in a folder named
Color. For use with ColorWise Pro Tools, copy the files to a folder of your choice.
TO INSTALL THE ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER
1 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive.
2 Open the ICC folder.
3 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile.
The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder
(Windows XP) or WINNT\System32\spool\drivers\color folder (Windows 2000) on your
computer.
Color files
You can copy additional color files from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers). Many of
the files are PostScript files that you can download and print using Command WorkStation.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
Windows Color
Files folder
13
CMYK Color Reference.ps: An 11-page, Letter-size PostScript file
used for reference when defining CMYK colors in applications.
PANTONE Book.ps: A 20-page, Letter-size PostScript file that
indicates the closest equivalent of PANTONE coated colors that
the E-5000/E-3000 and your copier model can produce. The
method used to print the PANTONE Book.ps file differs
depending on the Spot Color Matching setting. For more
information, see “ColorWise Print Options” on page 84.
RGB page 01.doc: A file you can print from Microsoft Word 97
or later to view available RGB colors.
RGB page 02.ppt: A file you can print from PowerPoint 6.0 or
later to view available RGB colors.
Color Bars folder
(inside the Windows
Color Files folder)
FieryColorBar.eps: A file you can use to print a color control bar.
PS Files folder
(inside the Windows
Color Files\
Calibration Files
folder)
Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps, and Standard34.ps:
PostScript files of color patches for obtaining measurements.
The numbers in the file names refer to the number of patches on
the page. The Custom files allow you to download measurement
patches that incorporate the current calibration set of the copier.
The Standard files allow you to download standard measurement
patches that bypass the current calibration set of the copier.
N OTE : These files are provided for expert users and should not be
used for day-to-day calibration.
Halftone Calibration
Files folder
(inside the Windows
Color Files\
Calibration Files
folder)
Images of measurement pages for various calibration instruments
and page sizes, used for calibrating the E-5000/E-3000 for
different halftone screens. Files are provided for Adobe
Photoshop and other applications.
N OTE : For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the
calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
14
Configuring the connection
The first time you start ColorWise Pro Tools, you must configure the connection to the
E-5000/E-3000.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Print the Configuration page from the E-5000/E-3000’s copier display panel and note the IP
address of the E-5000/E-3000.
or
Print the Configuration page from Command WorkStation and note the IP address of the
E-5000/E-3000.
The Configuration page contains information you need when configuring the connection,
such as the IP address. For TCP/IP installations, you can use the Domain Name Server
(DNS) name of the E-5000/E-3000 instead of the IP address. Make sure the E-5000/E-3000
is listed in a DNS used by your network. For more information, see the documentation that
accompanies your Windows system.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools.
2 If the Choose Printer Device dialog box appears, click Add.
3 Enter the appropriate information for the E-5000/E-3000.
Nickname: Type a name for the E-5000/E-3000. This name does not have to match the actual
Server Name of the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : The nickname cannot contain the following characters:
[ ] _ " ' <space> <tab>
Server Name or Server IP address: Type the IP address (or DNS name) of the E-5000/E-3000.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
15
New Device: Type the device name for the E-5000/E-3000: E-5000 or E-3000.
4 After you type all the information, click Add.
5 With the device name (E-5000 or E-3000) selected in the Devices list, click OK.
The E-5000/E-3000 appears in the list of Available Servers. The first line of the entry displays
the nickname you assigned the E-5000/E-3000, followed by the protocol. The second line
displays the device name.
6 With the device name selected in the list of Available Servers, click Select.
The ColorWise Pro Tools main window appears.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
16
Editing the configuration
Edit the configuration whenever a change to your E-5000/E-3000 or network occurs, such as
a server name or IP address change. Change the specific E-5000/E-3000 Setup information
before you configure the connection.
TO EDIT THE CONFIGURATION
1 To add a new E-5000/E-3000, click Add. Configure the Add New Server dialog box as outlined
in steps 3 through 5 in the previous procedure.
2 To remove a E-5000/E-3000, select the E-5000/E-3000 by its nickname and click Remove.
3 To modify information, select the E-5000/E-3000 by its nickname and click Modify. Edit the
information in the Modify Server Settings dialog box and click OK.
The list of Available Servers reflects your modifications.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
17
Setting up ColorWise Pro Tools on a Mac OS computer
The following sections describe how to install ColorWise Pro Tools and other files and
configure the connection on a Mac OS computer.
Installing ColorWise Pro Tools on a Mac OS computer
Before you begin each installation, determine where you want to install each item on your
hard disk. Otherwise, the software is placed in the “Fiery” folder by default.
TO INSTALL COLORWISE PRO TOOLS ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE CD (UTILITIES)
1 Insert the User Software CD (Utilities) into the CD-ROM drive.
2 Browse to the folder for your operating system.
3 Double-click the ColorWise Pro Tools installer icon.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
5 If prompted, click Quit to close the installer.
Installing the ColorSync profiles
You can copy additional ICC profiles from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) to your
computer, if desired. Use the ICC profiles with applications that support ICC standards, such
as Photoshop. For most ICC-aware applications, you must install the files in a folder named
Profiles in the Library : ColorSync folder. For use with ColorWise Pro Tools, you can copy the
files to a folder of your choice.
TO INSTALL THE COLORSYNC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER
1 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive.
2 Open the ColorSync folder.
3 Install the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles.
After you install the ColorSync files, see the ColorSync documentation for setting ColorSync
profiles, such as EFIRGB.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
18
Color files
You can copy additional color files from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers). Many of
the files are PostScript files that you can download and print using Command WorkStation.
Mac Color
Files folder
CMYK Color Reference.ps: An 11-page, Letter-size PostScript file to
use for reference when defining CMYK colors in applications.
PANTONE Book.ps: A 20-page, Letter-size PostScript file that indicates
the closest equivalent of PANTONE coated colors that the E-5000/
E-3000 and your particular copier model can produce. The method
used to print the PANTONE Book.ps file differs depending on the
Spot Color Matching setting. For more information, see “ColorWise
Print Options” on page 84.
RGB page 01.doc: A file you can print from Microsoft Word 97 or
later to view available RGB colors.
RGB page 02.ppt: A file you can print from PowerPoint 6.0 or later to
view available RGB colors.
Color Bars folder
(inside the Mac
Color Files folder)
FieryColorBar.eps: A file you can use to print a color control bar.
PS Files folder
(inside the Mac
Color Files:
Calibration Files
folder)
Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps, and Standard34.ps:
PostScript files of color patches for obtaining measurements.
The numbers in the file names refer to the number of patches on the
page. The Custom files allow you to download measurement patches
that incorporate the currently installed calibration set. The Standard
files allow you to download standard measurement patches that
bypass the currently installed calibration set.
N OTE : These files are provided for expert users and should not be
used for day-to-day calibration.
Halftone Calibration
Files folder
(inside the Mac
Color Files:
Calibration Files
folder)
Images of measurement pages for various calibration instruments
and page sizes, used for calibrating the E-5000/E-3000 for different
halftone screens. Files are provided for Adobe Photoshop and
other applications.
N OTE : For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the
calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
19
Configuring the connection
The first time you start ColorWise Pro Tools, you must configure the connection to the
E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : ColorWise Pro Tools is supported only over TCP/IP networks.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Print the Configuration page from the E-5000/E-3000’s copier display panel and note the IP
address of the E-5000/E-3000.
or
• Print the Configuration page from Command WorkStation and note the IP address of the
E-5000/E-3000.
The Configuration page contains information that you need when you configure the
connection. For TCP/IP installations, you can use the Domain Name Server (DNS) name of
the E-5000/E-3000 instead of the IP address. Make sure the E-5000/E-3000 is listed in a
DNS used by your network. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies
your Mac OS system.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
1 Double-click the ColorWise Pro Tools icon.
The Choose Printer Device dialog box appears.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
20
2 If the No Servers Configured dialog box appears, click OK. If the Choose Printer Device dialog
box appears, click Add.
3 Enter the appropriate information for the E-5000/E-3000.
Nickname: Type a name for the E-5000/E-3000. It does not have to match the actual server
name of the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : The nickname cannot contain the following characters:
[ ] _ " ' <space> <tab>
Server Name or Server IP Address: Type the IP address (or DNS or host name) of the E-5000/
E-3000.
New Device: Type the name of the device the E-5000/E-3000 is connected to: E-5000 or
E-3000. This device name appears in the Printer Setup section of the Configuration page.
4 After you type all the information, click Add.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
21
5 With the device name selected in the Devices list, click OK.
The E-5000/E-3000 appears in the list of Available Servers. The first line of the entry displays
the nickname you assigned the E-5000/E-3000, followed by the protocol. The second line
displays the device name.
6 With the device name selected in the list of Available Servers, click Select.
The ColorWise Pro Tools main window appears.
Editing the configuration
Edit the configuration whenever a change to your E-5000/E-3000 or network occurs, such
as a server name or IP address change. Change the specific E-5000/E-3000 Setup information
before you configure the connection.
TO EDIT THE CONFIGURATION
1 To add a new E-5000/E-3000, click Add. Configure the Add Server dialog box as outlined in
steps 3 through 5 in the previous procedure.
2 To remove a E-5000/E-3000, select the E-5000/E-3000 by its nickname and click Remove.
3 To modify information, select the E-5000/E-3000 by its nickname and click Modify. Edit
information in the Modify Server Settings dialog box and click OK.
The list of Available Servers reflects your modifications.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
22
Using ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools gives you flexible control of color printing by allowing you to calibrate
the E-5000/E-3000, customize simulation and output profiles, manage profiles on the
E-5000/E-3000, manage spot colors, and set default values for ColorWise print options.
Using Calibrator
ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator allows you to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 using one of a
number of measurement methods. For information about calibrating the E-5000/E-3000,
see page 35.
Using Color Editor
ColorWise Pro Tools Color Editor allows you to create custom profiles by editing existing
simulation or output profiles, and then saving the changes as a new profile. Use Color Editor
to fine-tune a profile on the E-5000/E-3000 to meet your exact specifications. Access Color
Editor directly, by clicking its icon in the ColorWise Pro Tools main window, or indirectly,
through the Profile Manager.
N OTE : You cannot edit source profiles. Only simulation and output profiles can
be customized.
TO USE COLOR EDITOR
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click Color Editor.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
23
Simulation lists the simulation profiles resident on the E-5000/E-3000. Output lists the
output profiles resident on the E-5000/E-3000.
3 Select a profile and click Select.
For more information about Color Editor, see ColorWise Pro Tools Help.
Adjusting gray balance
The AutoGray feature allows you to use the copier’s built-in scanner as a measurement device
for adjusting the gray balance of output profiles. Gray balance refers to the quality of neutral
gray tones in a profile. In many cases, gray tones may contain a bluish or reddish color cast.
AutoGray helps shift these tones back toward neutral grays. If you are satisfied with the gray
balance of the copier, you do not need to use AutoGray.
TO CORRECT THE GRAY BALANCE OF AN OUTPUT PROFILE
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and click Color Editor.
2 Choose Output from the View list.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
3 Select a profile to edit and click Select.
Or, you can open the Profile Manager, select a profile, and then click Edit, which starts
Color Editor.
4 Choose Custom from the Edit Mode menu.
5 Click AutoGray.
6 If the output profile contains no edit points, continue to step 8. If the output profile
contains edit points from a previous AutoGray session, choose Refine or New.
24
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
25
Refine reuses edits points from a previous session in an attempt to make them more accurate.
Refine is optional; use it only if the gray balance in your test document still needs
improvements after the first AutoGray session. If two Refine applications cannot fix the
situation, it is probably because your test document is not correctly addressing the output
profile, or because the output profile that you are editing does not adequately describe the
actual copier and printing conditions. Applying Refine more than twice is not recommended.
New starts a new AutoGray session by first removing all edit points from a previous session.
New is recommended when you have performed more than two Refine applications.
7 If the output profile contains edit points that were entered by a user, choose Proceed to
remove the points and continue with the AutoGray adjustment.
Proceed starts a fresh AutoGray session by first removing all user edit points. This is because
AutoGray cannot modify user-entered points.
8 In the Print Options dialog box that appears, choose the Input Tray to use for the
measurement page and click Print.
The Page Type is automatically set to AutoGray Measurement Page.
The Paper Size is automatically set to LTR/A4.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
26
9 Click OK to confirm printing of the measurement page.
10 Retrieve the page from the copier.
11 Follow the directions in the dialog box for placing the Kodak Gray Scale strip and the
AutoGray measurement page on the copier glass, and click Continue.
Messages display the progress of the gray balance adjustment.
12 When the adjustment is complete, click OK.
Color Editor displays the adjusted output profile curve. New edit points have been inserted by
AutoGray to modify the gray balance, in much the same way an expert user would have done
manually.
13 To make edits to the output profile curve, click AutoGray again.
14 Choose Refine to fine-tune the curve, or New to acquire a new curve for editing.
For more information about these steps, see page 25.
27
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
Using Profile Manager
ColorWise Pro Tools Profile Manager allows you to manage and edit ICC profiles.
TO USE PROFILE MANAGER
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click Profile Manager.
The Profile Manager window appears.
1
Output profiles
1
3 Click any profile to select it.
Information about the profile, such as its creation date and ICC specification version, appears
at the bottom of the window. Note that ICC specification version 4 profiles (profile version
4.2.0.0) are supported, as well as version 2.
For more information about Profile Manager, see ColorWise Pro Tools Help.
For information about the Use Media Defined Profile option, see the following section.
For more information about using Device Link Profiles, see page 28.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
28
Setting the default profiles
Use Profile Manager to set a default RGB source profile, simulation profile, or output profile.
The default RGB source and simulation profiles that you set are applied to all print jobs sent
to the E-5000/E-3000, unless you override them using print options. The same is true of the
default output profile that you set, unless you select the Use Media Defined Profile option.
The Use Media Defined Profile option indicates whether or not to automatically apply the
output profile associated with the media type used in a print job. For more information, see
the following section.
Using media-defined output profiles
Instead of having Profile Manager apply a default output profile to all your print jobs, you can
keep the Use Media Defined Profile option selected. This option automatically applies the
output profile predefined for the media type in your print job. If your job contains mixed
media, this option can apply different output profiles predefined for the different media.
The Use Media Defined Profile option in Profile Manager is selected by default. It is applied
to all print jobs sent to the E-5000/E-3000, unless a user overrides it for an individual job by
changing settings in the printer driver.
TO USE MEDIA-DEFINED OUTPUT PROFILES
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and click Profile Manager.
2 Select Use Media Defined Profile in the Output bar of Profile Manager.
Changing the setting for the Use Media Defined Profile option in Profile Manager
automatically changes the same setting in Color Setup. For more information, see
“Using Color Setup” on page 33.
About Device Link Profiles
The E-5000/E-3000 supports the use of Device Link Profiles. A Device Link Profile describes
the conversion from one color space to another. Device Link Profiles are restrictive because
they define the complete conversion from a source device to a destination device. When you
print using a Device Link Profile, you do not choose a source profile or an output profile
because the Device Link Profile specifies both. ColorWise supports two kinds of Device Link
Profiles: RGB source to CMYK destination and CMYK source to CMYK destination.
A Device Link Profile bypasses most ColorWise color management because the information
needed to convert from the source to destination is fully contained in a Device Link Profile.
N OTE : Depending on your job’s workflow, you may not need to use Device Link Profiles.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
29
Installing Device Link Profiles
If you are an administrator, you can download Device Link Profiles to the E-5000/E-3000
using Profile Manager. You must associate a Device Link Profile with the following settings:
• An RGB Source Profile or a CMYK Simulation Profile setting and
• An Output Profile setting
The Device Link Profile is enabled when these two settings are selected.
You can enable a Device Link Profile in three locations:
• In ColorWise Pro Tools Color Setup, select the default settings for RGB Source Profile,
CMYK Simulation Profile, and Output Profile. These settings apply to all jobs unless
overridden for a particular job.
• Use Expert Color Settings in the E-5000/E-3000 printer drivers to select the settings for
RGB Source Profile, CMYK Simulation Profile, and Output Profile when you print a job.
• Use Command WorkStation Job Properties to override the settings for RGB Source
Profile, CMYK Simulation Profile, and Output Profile for a specific job.
For more information about enabling Device Link Profiles using Color Setup, see page 34.
For more information about enabling Device Link Profiles using Expert Color Settings in the
E-5000/E-3000 printer driver, see page 100.
TO DOWNLOAD DEVICE LINK PROFILES USING PROFILE MANAGER
1 In Profile Manager, if you do not see the Device Link Profile in the Description list, select
the folder that contains the Device Link Profile by clicking Browse in the upper-left corner.
2 Click OK to add the folder contents to the Description list.
The Device Link Profile is added to the Description list.
30
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
3 To add the Device Link Profile to the Device Link panel, select the Device Link Profile in the
Description list and click the green arrow pointing to the Device Link panel.
1
Device Link Panel
1
The Device Link Profile Settings dialog box appears. To assign settings, see the following
procedure.
Assigning Device Link Profile settings
The following Device Link Profile Settings dialog box images depict an RGB Source profile
description. If you use a CMYK Simulation profile, the screen will reflect a CMYK
Simulation profile description instead of an RGB Source profile description.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
31
TO ASSIGN DEVICE LINK PROFILE SETTINGS
1 After you download the Device Link Profile using Profile Manager and add it to the Device
Link Profile panel, select the source and output profiles for this Device Link Profile in the
Device Link Profile Settings dialog box.
If the Device Link Profile already has a source and output referenced, the Output and Source
Profiles automatically appear.
If the source or output profile referenced in the Device Link Profile is not found on the
E-5000/E-3000, the source profile will show “Unassigned” and a message appears, stating that
the source or output profile cannot be found.
Click Information to find out more about the missing profile.
If you install the source or output profile to the E-5000/E-3000 that matches the missing
profile referenced in the Device Link Profile, the “Unassigned” setting is automatically
updated.
N OTE : If the source or output setting is unassigned, the Device Link Profile cannot be used.
You must assign settings.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
32
2 If the Device Link Profile does not have a source or output assigned, select a Profile
Description name, and the source and output profiles for the Device Link Profile.
3 After you finish assigning settings to the Device Link Profile, click OK.
Modifying Device Link Profiles
To modify the Device Link Profile settings, use the following procedure.
TO MODIFY DEVICE LINK PROFILE SETTINGS
1 Double-click the Device Link Profile in the Device Link panel.
The Device Link Profiles Settings dialog box appears.
2 Enter the new Source and Output profiles.
3 Click Apply and then click OK.
N OTE : You cannot edit the Device Link Profile in ColorWise Pro Tools. You must use the
application that was used to create the Device Link Profile.
Using Spot-On
Spot-On allows you to adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents.
The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as Spot Color Dictionaries.
Spot-On allows you to maintain multiple Spot Color Dictionaries for each output profile on
the E-5000/E-3000. For more information about Spot-On, see page 60.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
33
Using Color Setup
ColorWise Pro Tools Color Setup allows you to set the default values for the ColorWise print
options and print settings for the E-5000/E-3000.
These settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the E-5000/E-3000, unless a user overrides
them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver. These default settings
can also be overridden using Command WorkStation. In addition, the defaults set in Color
Setup are automatically reflected in other E-5000/E-3000 tools that list default settings.
The options in Color Setup are arranged in a pattern representing the flow of color processing
that takes place on the E-5000/E-3000. To reset the E-5000/E-3000 to its factory default
settings, click Factory Default in the lower-left corner of the Color Setup window.
TO USE COLOR SETUP
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click Color Setup.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS
34
Using Color Setup to enable Device Link Profiles
You can enable Device Link Profiles using Color Setup.
For information about installing and assigning Device Link Profiles, see page 29.
TO USE COLORWISE COLOR SETUP TO ENABLE DEVICE LINK PROFILES
1 Open Color Setup from ColorWise Pro Tools.
2 Select the RGB Source profile or the CMYK Simulation Profile and the Output Profile.
When you select a source and output combination that is defined as a Device Link Profile, the
Device Link Profile is automatically activated.
When the Device Link Profile is selected, the Color Process workflow updates and some of the
Fiery print options may not appear.
You will see the message “Device Link Profile in use” under the RGB Source Profile or CMYK
Simulation Profile.
1
Device Link Profile in use
1
3 Click OK to exit Color Setup.
35
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
Calibrating the E-5000/E-3000 ensures consistent and reliable color output. Calibrate
the E-5000/E-3000 using ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator with the copier’s built-in scanner,
a densitometer or a spectrophotometer.
This document uses the following terminology for color measurement instruments:
Term
Refers to
ColorCal with Calibrator
Calibration method that uses the copier’s built-in scanner
to measure toner density values. You can use Calibrator in
ColorWise Pro Tools to perform ColorCal calibration.
DTP32 or DTP32 Series II
X-Rite DTP32 or DTP32 Series II automatic densitometer
DTP41
X-Rite DTP41 automatic spectrophotometer
ED-100
Densitometer ED-100 hand-held densitometer
ES-1000
Spectrophotometer ES-1000 hand-held spectrophotometer
ColorCal from the
copier display panel
Calibration method that uses the copier’s built-in scanner to
measure toner density values. You can use the copier display
panel to perform ColorCal calibration.
36
CALIBRATION
About this chapter
This chapter describes the procedures for calibrating the E-5000/E-3000 using ColorWise
Pro Tools Calibrator with various color measurement instruments or calibrating from the
copier display panel. The following table provides the location of each procedure.
Calibration method
See
ColorCal with Calibrator
page 40
DTP32 or DTP32 Series II with Calibrator
page 44
DTP41 with Calibrator
page 45
ED-100 with Calibrator
page 48
ES-1000 with Calibrator
page 51
ColorCal from the copier display panel
page 55
This chapter also describes important concepts and suggestions for understanding calibration.
The following table provides the location of each description.
For more information about
See
An overview of calibration
page 57
How calibration works
page 57
Scheduling calibration
page 59
Checking calibration status
page 59
N OTE : The procedures described in this chapter are fundamentally the same for Windows and
Mac OS computers. Illustrations from a Windows computer are used in this chapter.
CALIBRATION
37
Calibrating with ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator
ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator allows you to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 using the
measurement method of your choice.
Changing calibration has the potential to affect all jobs for all users, so consider limiting the
number of people authorized to perform calibration. Set an Administrator password to
control access to calibration (see Configuration and Setup).
N OTE : Multiple users can be connected to one E-5000/E-3000 with ColorWise Pro Tools, but
only one user at a time can use Calibrator. If you try to calibrate when another user is using
ColorWise Pro Tools to calibrate, an error message appears.
Starting Calibrator
Start Calibrator from the ColorWise Pro Tools main window.
TO CALIBRATE THE E-5000/E-3000 USING CALIBRATOR
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
For information about configuring the connection to the E-5000/E-3000, see pages 14
and 19.
2 Click Calibrator.
CALIBRATION
38
3 Choose a method from the Select Measurement Method menu.
1
Calibration methods
1
Procedures for each calibration method are described in subsequent sections of this chapter.
Expert mode
Calibrator provides two modes: Standard and Expert. You can perform all essential calibration
tasks while in Standard mode. Expert mode offers two additional options: Print Pages and
View Measurements.
1
Calibration methods
1
39
CALIBRATION
With the Print Pages option, print Comparison Pages showing the results of the new
measurements with any profile associated with the currently selected calibration set. You can
create a custom Comparison Page and save it as a PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
file called CALIB.PS. Next, print the file to the Hold queue of the E-5000/E-3000 from your
application. You can also create a CALIB.PS file by renaming any job in the Hold queue using
Command WorkStation (see Utilities).
With the View Measurements option, you can view the current set of measurements as a table
or graph that shows both the measurements and the target curves.
1
Output profile name
1
When more than one profile uses the same target, an additional menu called Plot Against
appears in the upper-right corner of the dialog box. It lists all output profiles that use that
same calibration set. Selecting an output profile from this menu displays the target curves
associated with that profile. If each output profile contains a unique calibration target, the
curves displayed also change when you switch profiles.
Applying measurements to multiple calibration sets
The Apply to All Calibration Sets option in Calibrator allows you to copy the measurements
from the calibration you are currently performing to all calibrations sets on the server. This
option is only available if the E-5000/E-3000 has more than one calibration set. It is selected
by default.
CALIBRATION
40
If you clear the Apply to All Calibration Sets option, you can choose to apply the current
calibration to a selected subset of the calibration sets on the server. Specify which sets by
clicking Customize next to the Apply to All Calibration Sets option, which opens the Apply
To dialog box.
Select or clear individual calibration sets, and then click OK.
If any of the selected calibration sets are not associated with an output profile, a warning
appears, but you can choose to apply the calibration measurements to that set anyway.
The calibration measurements are copied to the specified calibration sets at the end of the
calibration process when you click Apply.
Restoring default calibration measurements
Use the following procedure to return to factory default calibration measurements.
TO RESTORE DEFAULT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENTS
1 In the Calibrator dialog box, click Restore Device.
2 Click OK to restore the preset default calibration set.
N OTE : If the Apply to All Calibration Sets option is selected, all calibration sets on the server
are restored. If Apply to All Calibration Sets is cleared, Restore Device applies only to the
calibration sets selected under Customize.
Calibrating with ColorCal
ColorCal allows you to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 without the use of an additional
spectrophotometer or densitometer. Instead, ColorCal uses the copier’s built-in scanner to
measure toner density values.
CALIBRATION
41
ColorCal has the following features:
• Scanner calibration: ColorCal lets you calibrate the scanner (copier feeder) using the
Kodak Color and Gray Scale strips.
• Measurement page: For ColorCal, square black-and-white and color patches are grouped
by color and printed on the ColorCal Measurement Page.
N OTE : To calibrate using ColorCal, use the Kodak Gray Scale strip included in the customer
media pack that came with your E-5000/E-3000. You also need the Kodak Gray Scale strip
and Kodak Color Control Patches strip to calibrate the scanner of the copier for ColorCal.
When you run ColorCal from ColorWise Pro Tools, you have the option to calibrate the
copier’s scanner before you calibrate the E-5000/E-3000. We recommend that you calibrate
the scanner for ColorCal when the copier output has been adjusted, such as after maintenance
or service.
TO CALIBRATE WITH COLORWISE PRO TOOLS AND COLORCAL
1 Start Calibrator.
For instructions, see page 37.
2 In the Select Measurement Method pane, choose ColorCal.
3 In the Check Print Settings pane, choose an appropriate calibration set.
If more than one option appears, choose the appropriate calibration set for the type of media
and quality mode you will use most often.
N OTE : For this calibration to take effect, the calibration set must be associated with one or
more output profiles. The default calibration set is already associated with the default output
profile, so there is no need to make any new associations.
4 Click Print in the Generate Measurement Page pane.
• ColorCal Measurement Page prints the ColorCal Measurement Page.
• Single Pattern prints a specific page by number. Type the page number in the Patch Page
Number field.
The Paper Size is automatically set to LTR/A4.
CALIBRATION
42
5 Choose the Input Tray to use for the measurement page and click Print.
A message appears stating the status of your print job.
6 Click OK to continue.
7 Retrieve the Measurement Page from the copier.
8 Click Measure in the Get Measurements pane.
An alert message appears, asking if you want to calibrate the copier’s scanner.
9 To calibrate the scanner, click Yes. To bypass the scanner calibration, select No and proceed to
step 17.
10 Choose the Input Tray to print the measurement page from and click Print.
The Page Type is automatically set to Scanner Measurement Page. The Paper Size is
automatically set to LTR/A4.
A message appears stating the status of your print job.
11 Click OK to continue.
12 Retrieve the measurement page from the copier.
CALIBRATION
43
13 Follow the instructions in the Scanner Calibration Setup dialog box for placing the Gray Scale,
Color Scale, and Scanner Calibration measurement page on the copier glass.
14 Click Continue.
15 When the measurement process completes, the information dialog box appears.
16 Click Continue to complete scanner calibration.
17 Follow the directions in the Place Patch Page dialog box for placing the Gray Scale strip and
ColorCal measurement page on the copier glass.
18 Click Continue.
19 When the measurement process completes, the Measurement dialog box appears.
20 Click OK to complete calibration.
21 Apply the ColorCal calibration by clicking the Apply button.
CALIBRATION
44
Calibrating with the DTP32 or DTP32 Series II
Using the DTP32 or DTP32 Series II densitometer, you can measure color patches
generated by the copier and automatically download the measurements to the E-5000/
E-3000.
N OTE : Before you use ColorWise Pro Tools to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000, set up and
calibrate the DTP32 or DTP32 Series II. For instructions, see the documentation that
accompanies the instrument.
TO CALIBRATE THE E-5000/E-3000 USING THE DTP32 OR DTP32 SERIES II
1 Start Calibrator.
For instructions, see page 37.
2 In the Select Measurement Method pane, choose X-Rite DTP32 or X-Rite DTP32 Series II.
3 In the Check Print Settings pane, choose a calibration set.
If more than one option appears, choose the appropriate calibration set for the type of media
and quality mode you use most often.
N OTE : For this calibration to take effect, the calibration set must be associated with one or
more output profiles. The default calibration set is already associated with the default output
profile. You do not need to make any new associations.
4 Click Print in the Generate Measurement Page pane.
The Print Options dialog box appears.
5 Choose the appropriate options and click Print.
Page Type: Choose 21 or 34 Sorted Patches. For your copier model, 21 Sorted Patches is
recommended.
Paper Size: Automatically set to LTR/A4 for 21 Sorted Patches. Choose 11x17/A3 or
12x18/SRA3 for 34 Sorted Patches.
Input Tray: Specify the paper source.
6 Retrieve the measurement page from the copier.
7 Click Measure in the Get Measurements pane.
CALIBRATION
45
The Measurement Options dialog box displays the specified Page Type and
Paper Size options.
8 Click Measure.
Follow the on-screen instructions to feed the measurement page through the DTP32.
N OTE : The DTP32 Series II does not have an edge guide for the page. Position the page so
that the strip to be measured is lined up directly under the alignment mark.
The Status field displays instructions for selecting the port and feeding the measurement page
through the DTP32 four times, once for each color strip.
DTP32
DTP32 Series II
9 When the Status field indicates that the measurements were read successfully, click Accept.
10 Click OK in the Measure dialog box.
11 Click Apply in the Calibrator dialog box to implement the new calibration set.
12 Click OK in the Information dialog box.
This completes the calibration process.
Calibrating with the DTP41
Using the DTP41 spectrophotometer, you can measure color patches generated by the copier
and automatically download the measurements to the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : Before you use ColorWise Pro Tools to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000, set up and
calibrate the DTP41. For instructions, see the documentation that accompanies the
instrument.
CALIBRATION
46
TO CALIBRATE THE E-5000/E-3000 USING THE DTP41
1 Start Calibrator.
For instructions, see page 37.
2 Choose X-Rite DTP41 as the measurement method.
3 In the Check Print Settings pane, choose a calibration set.
If more than one option appears, choose the appropriate calibration set for the type of media
and quality mode you use most often.
N OTE : For this calibration to take effect, the calibration set must be associated with one or
more output profiles. The default calibration set is already associated with the default output
profile. You do not need to make any new associations.
4 Click Print in the Generate Measurement Page pane.
The Print Options dialog box appears.
5 Choose the appropriate options and click Print.
Page Type: Choose 21 or 34 Sorted Patches. For your copier model, 21 Sorted Patches is
recommended.
Paper Size: Automatically set to LTR/A4 for 21 Sorted Patches. Choose 11x17/A3 or
12x18/SRA3 for 34 Sorted Patches.
Input Tray: Choose the paper source for printing the measurement page.
6 Retrieve the measurement page from the copier.
7 In the Get Measurements pane, click Measure.
The Measurement Options dialog box displays the specified Page Type and Paper Size
options.
8 Click Measure.
CALIBRATION
47
9 If necessary, choose the appropriate COM port for the DTP41 from the Available Ports menu,
and then click Start Measurements.
10 Feed the measurement page into the DTP41, starting with the cyan strip.
Align the page in the measurement page slot of the DTP41 so that the appropriate color
column is centered below the alignment mark. Insert the page about three inches, past
the front idler rollers, until it rests against the rear drive rollers and you feel resistance.
11 Click Read Strip.
The DTP41 pulls the measurement page through automatically.
After the measurement page is read, Calibrator instructs you to insert and align the page
again for the next color.
CALIBRATION
48
12 Repeat the measurement process for the magenta, yellow, and black strips.
A check mark appears on the circle of the color just read, and the Status field indicates the
color was measured successfully.
Use the Previous and Next buttons to reverse or advance to another step in the measurement
sequence.
13 When the Status field indicates that all four color strips have been read successfully, click
Accept Measurements.
14 Click OK in the Measure dialog box.
15 Click Apply in the Calibrator dialog box to implement the new calibration set.
16 Click OK in the Information dialog box.
This completes the E-5000/E-3000 calibration process.
Calibrating with the ED-100
You can use ColorWise Pro Tools in conjunction with the ED-100 to calibrate the E-5000/
E-3000.
N OTE : You need to calibrate the copier every time you use the ED-100.
TO CALIBRATE THE E-5000/E-3000 USING THE ED-100
1 Start Calibrator.
For instructions, see page 37.
2 Choose EFI Densitometer ED-100 as the measurement method.
3 In the Check Print Settings pane, choose a calibration set.
If more than one option appears, choose the appropriate calibration set for the type of media
and quality mode you use most often.
CALIBRATION
49
N OTE : For this calibration to take effect, the calibration set must be associated with one or
more output profiles. The default calibration set is already associated with the default output
profile, so there is no need to make any new associations.
4 In the Generate Measurement Page pane, click Print.
The Print Options dialog box appears.
5 Choose the appropriate options and click Print.
Page Type: Choose either 34 or 21 Sorted Patches, or 34 or 21 Randomized Patches. Sorted
patches are printed on the page in the order of their hue and saturation levels. Randomized
patches are printed on the page in random order, to help compensate for density
inconsistencies on different areas of the page.
Paper Size: Automatically set to LTR/A4 for 21 patches. Choose 11 x 17/A3 or
12 x 18/SRA3 for 34 patches.
Input Tray: Specify the paper source for printing the measurement page.
6 Retrieve the measurement page from the copier.
7 Click Measure in the Get Measurements pane.
The Measurement Options dialog box appears.
8 Choose the appropriate options, and then click Start.
Page Type is automatically set to the measurement page type that you printed in step 5.
CALIBRATION
50
Use the arrow buttons next to the Clicks Per Patch field to choose the number of
measurements that you want to take for each patch on the page. When you choose multiple
clicks, the average value of all measurements taken for the patch is returned to the E-5000/
E-3000. Multiple measurements are more accurate, but may require more time.
To hear a confirmation tone each time a measurement is recorded, select the Audio Feedback
option. A single tone indicates a successful measurement. Two tones indicate a measurement
error. If you specified multiple clicks per patch, the tone sounds after you take the final
measurement.
If necessary, choose the appropriate COM port for the ED-100 from the Port menu.
When you click Start, the Measurements window appears. The instructions for measuring the
patches appear in the Status area.
9 Place the ED-100 over the specified patch on the measurement page, making sure to center
the sample aperture over the patch. Press Measure to take the measurement.
N OTE : For a more accurate measurement, place several plain sheets of paper beneath the
measurement page to block underlying colors from being read by the instrument.
If you have specified multiple clicks per patch, continue pressing Measure to take the required
number of measurements. We recommend that you move the ED-100 slightly after each
measurement while keeping it within the patch circle.
CALIBRATION
51
When the patch has been measured successfully, a check mark appears in the patch preview
in the Measurements window. The window identifies and highlights the next patch to be
measured.
10 Repeat step 9 to measure each successive patch on the Measurement Page.
Start with A1 and continue down Column A. After you finish measuring all the patches in
Column A, proceed to Column B in the same manner until all columns are measured.
To retake a measurement, select the desired patch preview in the Measurements window and
measure the patch on the page using the ED-100.
N OTE : You must take the measurements in the order outlined in the Measurements window
and on the measurement page.
11 When all the patches have been read successfully, click Accept.
12 Click Apply in the Calibrator dialog box.
The new calibration measurement is implemented.
13 Click OK in the Information dialog box.
This completes the E-5000/E-3000 calibration process.
Calibrating with the ES-1000
Use ColorWise Pro Tools in conjunction with the ES-1000 spectrophotometer to calibrate
the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : Before you use ColorWise Pro Tools to calibrate the E-5000/E-3000, set up and
calibrate the ES-1000. For instructions, see the documentation that accompanies the
instrument.
CALIBRATION
52
TO CALIBRATE THE E-5000/E-3000 USING THE ES-1000
1 Start Calibrator.
For instructions, see page 37.
2 Choose ES-1000 as the measurement method.
3 In the Check Print Settings pane, choose a calibration set.
If more than one option appears, choose the appropriate calibration set for the type of media
and quality mode you use most often.
N OTE : For this calibration to take effect, the calibration set must be associated with one or
more output profiles. The default calibration set is already associated with the default output
profile. You do not need to make any new associations.
4 Click Print in the Generate Measurement Page pane.
The Print Options dialog box appears.
5 Choose the appropriate options and click Print.
Page Type: Choose 21 or 34 Sorted Patches or 21 or 34 Randomized Patches. Sorted patches
are printed on the page in the order of their hue and saturation levels. Randomized patches
are printed on the page in random order, to help compensate for density inconsistencies on
different areas of the page.
Paper Size: Automatically set to LTR/A4 for 21 patches. Choose 11x17/A3 or 12x18/SRA3
for 34 patches.
Input Tray: Automatically set to Auto Select.
6 Retrieve the printed measurement page from the copier.
7 Click Measure in the Get Measurements pane.
CALIBRATION
53
The Measurement Options dialog box appears.
Page Type is automatically set to the type that you selected in step 5.
8 Check the settings and click Measure.
The Information dialog box appears.
9 Place the ES-1000 in the calibration cradle.
When you place the ES-1000 in the calibration cradle, white point calibration is used to
calibrate the spectrophotometer and compensate for gradual drifts in the instrument. Make
sure the sample aperture is in full contact with the white tile on the calibration cradle. If you
do not place it correctly in the calibration cradle, the spectrophotometer does not return
accurate measurements.
10 Click OK.
The Measurements dialog box appears. Instructions for measuring the strips appear in the
Status field.
11 For a more accurate measurement, place several sheets of plain white paper beneath the
measurement page.
The extra sheets block underlying colors from being read by the instrument.
CALIBRATION
54
12 Orient the measurement page so that strips are horizontal and the scan direction (indicated
by the arrows at the beginning of each strip) is left to right.
13 Hold the ES-1000 with its length perpendicular to the scan direction, and place the sample
aperture in the white space at the start of the specified color.
14 Press and hold the Measure button and wait for a beep or wait for the background color in the
dialog to change from green to white.
N OTE : To hear a beep with a Windows compatible computer, you must install a sound card
and speaker(s). You may have to turn up the volume on your computer to hear the beep.
15 After you hear a beep or see the dialog background color change, slide the ES-1000 at a slow
but consistent pace across the strip.
Allow about five seconds to slide the length of the strip.
16 Release the button when all the patches in the strip have been measured and you reach the
white space at the end of the strip.
When a strip is measured successfully, the dialog background color changes to green, and the
cross hair moves to the next color. If the strip is not measured successfully, the dialog
background color changes to red, and a message directs you to try again.
17 Repeat steps 13 through 16 until all the strips are measured.
N OTE : You must measure in the order outlined in the Status field.
18 When all the patches have been read successfully, click Accept.
19 Click Apply in the Calibrator dialog box.
The new calibration measurement is applied.
20 Click OK in the Information dialog box.
This completes the E-5000/E-3000 calibration process.
CALIBRATION
55
Calibrating from the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel
You can calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 from the copier display panel using ColorCal, without
using ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator.
Calibrating with ColorCal
If an Administrator password has been set, you will need it to perform calibration from the
copier display panel. For instructions on using the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel, see
Configuration and Setup.
It is also possible to remove calibration measurements from the E-5000/E-3000. In general,
it is not necessary, because any new calibration replaces the existing one if the same calibration
set is selected.
TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
1 At the Idle screen, press Main Menu to enter the Functions menu.
2 Using the up and down arrow buttons and the line selection buttons, select Calibration.
3 If a password is set on the E-5000/E-3000, enter it and select OK.
4 Select Set Up Calibration.
5 For Calibration Mode, choose Standard or Expert, and then select OK.
With Expert Mode, you can print a Comparison Page (see page 38).
6 For Page Type, choose ColorCal Measurement and select OK.
ColorCal Measurement prints the ColorCal measurement page.
7 For Tray, choose the paper source (Auto Select or Bypass) for the patch page and select OK.
N OTE : If you print a measurement page from the Bypass tray, you must load the appropriate
paper in the tray and select the correct paper size from the copier display panel display.
8 Select Calibrate.
9 Choose the Quality Mode and select OK.
10 Choose the Media and select OK.
The calibration set that you create will be used when a job is printed with the Quality Mode
and Media settings you specify.
11 For Print Measurement Page, choose Yes and select OK.
This page is comprised of swatches of color that will be measured by the copier’s scanner and
then compared to the target color values.
12 For Measure Page, choose Yes and select OK.
56
CALIBRATION
13 When prompted on the copier display panel, place the Kodak Gray Scale strip face down on
the copier glass.
Place the strip along the top edge of the copier so that it is centered between the paper width
marks on the copier.
1
2
Place grayscale strip
face down
Place color measurement
page face down over
grayscale strip
1
2
14 Place the color measurement page face down over the grayscale strip.
Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches.
Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color
measurement page.
15 On the copier display panel, choose OK.
Status messages display the progress of scanning and calculating measurements.
16 When prompted to Print Comparison Page (Expert Mode only), choose Yes to print a preview
of the selected calibration.
Choose from a list of output profiles that use the same calibration set and press OK.
This option appears only in Expert Mode calibration.
17 When prompted to apply or overwrite the calibration, choose Yes.
18 Choose Yes to confirm.
Status messages display progress information. When calibration is complete, the copier
display panel display returns to the Functions menu.
TO REMOVE CALIBRATION FROM THE COPIER DISPLAY PANEL
1 From the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel, access the Calibration menu, as described
on page 55.
2 Select Remove Calibration.
3 Choose the Quality Mode and select OK.
4 Choose the Media and select OK.
The calibration set for the specified Quality Mode and Media settings will be removed.
5 When prompted, verify that you want to proceed with removing calibration.
The current measurements are removed and a default calibration is restored.
CALIBRATION
57
Understanding calibration
The following sections describe important concepts and suggestions for understanding
calibration.
An overview of calibration
Calibration generates curves that adjust for the difference between the actual toner densities
(measurements) and the response expected by the output profile.
• Measurements represent the actual color behavior of the copier.
• Calibration sets are sets of measurements that combine media and quality mode options
provided for Calibrator.
• Each output profile contains a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the
copier.
After you calibrate the E-5000/E-3000, a calibration set is stored. This calibration set is used
when it is associated with an output profile. Every output profile has an associated calibration
set. If you have not specified one, the calibration set associated with the default output profile
is used.
If you change the calibration after a saved job has been processed (RIPped), you do not have to
reprocess (reRIP) the job. The new calibration affects the job without reprocessing.
N OTE : Changing calibration has the potential to affect all jobs for all users, so consider
limiting the number of people authorized to perform calibration. Set an Administrator
password in E-5000/E-3000 Setup to control access to calibration (see Configuration and
Setup).
How calibration works
Although the needs of most users are met by the default calibration set, the E-5000/E-3000
allows you to choose a calibration set to customize calibration for specialized jobs.
Calibration allows you to:
• Maximize the color reproduction capabilities of the E-5000/E-3000.
• Ensure consistent color quality over time.
• Produce consistent output across E-5000/E-3000 servers.
• Achieve better color matches when reproducing spot colors, such as PANTONE colors or
other named color systems.
• Optimize the E-5000/E-3000 for using ColorWise rendering styles (CRDs), CMYK
simulations, and ICC profiles.
CALIBRATION
58
Success in obtaining satisfactory print quality from the E-5000/E-3000 depends on many
factors. Among the most important are establishing and maintaining optimal toner densities.
The density is the measure of the light absorbed by a surface. By carefully regulating toner
densities, you obtain consistent printed color.
Even with a calibrated system, toner density is affected by the settings of copier, humidity, and
temperature. Density also tends to drift over time. Uneven toner density on paper affects
calibration results. Regular measurement detects day-to-day variations in density, gradation,
and color reproduction, and calibration corrects them.
Calibration works by creating calibration curves on the E-5000/E-3000 that compensate for
the difference between actual (measured) and desired (target) density values. These calibration
curves are the graphic equivalent of transfer functions, which are mathematical descriptions of
changes that are made to the initial data. Transfer functions are often graphed as input or
output curves.
The E-5000/E-3000 generates calibration curves after comparing measured values to the final
target values for each of the four toner colors. The target values are based on the output profile
specified.
Measurements
Measurement files contain numerical values that correspond to the toner density produced by
the copier when it prints solid cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, and graduated tints of those
colors.
To create a measurement file, print a page of color patches. Measure the patches using a color
measurement instrument connected to a computer on the network, or if it is available, the
print device’s scanner. The new measurements are automatically downloaded to the E-5000/
E-3000.
Output profiles and calibration sets
Output profiles and calibration sets define desired calibration results. One or more output
profiles and calibration sets are provided with the E-5000/E-3000. When you calibrate the
E-5000/E-3000, select the calibration set that corresponds to the typical printing jobs at your
site. This same calibration set can be associated with one or more output profiles. For more
information about output profiles, see page 91.
CALIBRATION
59
Scheduling calibration
Calibrate the E-5000/E-3000 at least once a day, depending on the volume of print jobs.
If it is very important to maintain consistent color, or your copier is subject to wide
fluctuations in temperature or humidity, calibrate every few hours. For optimal performance,
calibrate whenever there is a noticeable change in print quality or printing results are not as
expected.
If you must split a print job into two or more batches to print at different times, it is
important to calibrate before you print each batch. You should also calibrate the E-5000/
E-3000 after copier maintenance. However, because the copier may be less stable immediately
after maintenance, wait until you have printed approximately 50 pages before you calibrate.
N OTE : Because printed output from the copier is very sensitive to changes in temperature and
humidity, do not install the copier near a window, in direct sunlight, or near a heater or air
conditioner. Paper is also sensitive to climate changes. Store it in a cool, dry, stable
environment, and keep reams sealed until they are used.
To monitor print quality, print the following color pages:
• Color Charts (from Command WorkStation or the copier display panel)
• Color reference pages included in the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) (see pages 12
and 18)
These pages include fully saturated color patches and pale tints of cyan, magenta, yellow,
and black. Images with skin tones offer a good basis for comparison. Save and periodically
compare the pages you print. If a noticeable change in appearance occurs, calibrate the
E-5000/E-3000.
When you examine the Test Page, all color patches should be visible, even though they may be
very faint in the five to two percent range. Each patch set should show uniform gradation from
patch to patch as the color lightens from 100% to zero.
If the solid density patches (100% cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) look less saturated over
time, show the pages to your copier service technician to determine whether adjusting the
copier can improve output.
Checking calibration status
To verify whether the E-5000/E-3000 is calibrated, which calibration set and output profile
were used, and when the copier was last calibrated, perform the following:
• Print a Configuration page or Test Page from the copier display panel or Command
WorkStation.
• Select a calibration set in Calibrator. The last calibration and the user who performed it
are displayed.
SPOT-ON
60
SPOT-ON
The Spot Color Matching print option automatically matches spot colors with their best
CMYK equivalents so that spot colors can be simulated using the CMYK toner of the copier.
However, you may want to adjust the default CMYK equivalents to achieve a better match for
your specific printing conditions. You can modify spot colors using Spot-On.
In addition to managing “named” colors, Spot-On allows you to create a list of “substitute”
colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values,
are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color
dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors.
Using Spot-On
Spot-On allows you to adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents.
The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as Spot Color Dictionaries.
Spot-On allows you to maintain multiple Spot Color Dictionaries for each output profile on
the E-5000/E-3000.
N OTE : To use the Spot-On features with named colors, you must enable the Spot Color
Matching print option. For more information about this option, see page 95.
N OTE : Spot colors identified by names are printed with their defined CMYK values. The edits
to the output profile made with Color Editor do not affect how spot colors print.
Some Spot-On features require that a job be displayed with correct colors on your monitor.
To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor display
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, and specify the correct monitor profile for
your monitor.
Specify the following settings for the monitor display:
• At the monitor: Brightness, Contrast, and Temperature
• From the control panel of the operating system: Resolution, Refresh rate, and Number
of colors
For more information about setting up your monitor and the monitor profile, see the
documentation that accompanies the monitor.
SPOT-ON
61
Starting Spot-On
To use Spot-On, you must specify the output profile associated with the Spot Color
Dictionary that you want to edit.
If you select Output profile X and redefine PANTONE 123 from 30%M to 50%M using
Spot-On, you will get 50%M when you print a job with Output profile X. If you print a job
with Output profile Y, you will get the original value. If you select Output profile X and create
a custom color named “My Purple” and define it as 80C 40M, ColorWise automatically
calculates the Lab values using Output profile X and creates new CMYK values for use with
Output profile Y.
N OTE : The E-5000/E-3000 allows only one user to connect to Spot-On at a time.
TO START SPOT- ON
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click Spot-On.
The Select Output Profile dialog box appears.
3 Choose an output profile and click OK.
1
2
Current output profile
Output profiles to link
1
2
The Spot-On main dialog box appears. The CMYK values displayed in the dialog box are
calculated with respect to the specified profile.
N OTE : When you print a job, choose the same output profile from the printer driver as the
one that is selected in the Select Output Profile dialog box. Otherwise, color adjustments
based on Spot-On have no effect.
62
SPOT-ON
Spot-On main window
The Spot-On main window list color groups that represent libraries of spot colors on the
E-5000/E-3000. Tool icons for working with colors appear at the top of the window.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Output profile
Save
Upload
Download
Cut
Copy
Paste
Close All
Print
Up
Down
Custom color group
Default color group
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
By default, the E-5000/E-3000 includes several PANTONE libraries along with a System
library. These factory default libraries appear marked with the default group icon (
).
The DIC, HKS, and TOYO libraries are also available with Spot-On.
You can add custom color groups and colors to the Spot-On window (see page 65). Added
groups appear marked with the custom group icon (
). Both default and custom groups
can be opened to display included colors.
SPOT-ON
63
TO OPEN AND CLOSE A COLOR GROUP
1 To open a color group, click the icon to the left of the group name.
When you open a group, all the colors in the group are displayed, and the group icon changes
appearance.
2 To close a color group, click the icon to the left of the group name.
3 To close all the color groups in the list, choose Close All from the Edit menu.
Working with existing colors
Spot-On allows you to view and manage existing groups of colors on the E-5000/E-3000 and
search for a particular color in the Spot-On list.
Color groups in the Spot-On window appear in order of their priority. Highest priority is
assigned to color groups at the top of the list. For instance, if two colors from two different
color groups have the same name, the E-5000/E-3000 uses the color from the higher group
and disregards the other color. By managing the priority of colors in this way, you can
maintain several CMYK variants for the same spot color.
SPOT-ON
64
TO REARRANGE THE PRIORITY OF COLORS
1 To rearrange an entire color group, select the desired color group.
To rearrange an individual color, select the desired color.
Individual spot colors are marked with circular color icons.
2 To move the selection up or down in the list, click the Up or Down icon in the toolbar.
3 To paste the selection in a different location in the list, click the Cut or Copy icon in
the toolbar.
N OTE : The Cut operation is available only for custom colors.
4 Click the location in the list where you want to paste the cut or copied selection, and then
click the Paste icon in the toolbar.
When you paste a default PANTONE color or group, a warning message appears asking you
to rename the selection because of the multiple prefixes and suffixes for the PANTONE colors
and groups. Use the menus to choose the desired prefix and suffix for the new name, and then
click OK. The pasted selection becomes a custom color or group with the specified name.
TO FIND A SPECIFIC COLOR
1 Choose Find from the Edit menu.
The Find dialog box appears.
2 Enter the name of the color that you want to find and click OK.
Spot-On searches for the specified color, starting from the top of the color list. Once located,
the color appears selected in the color list.
3 To find additional colors based on the same search criteria, choose Find Again from the
Edit menu.
SPOT-ON
65
Creating custom colors
Spot-On provides a number of default color groups in the color list. You can add your own
custom spot colors and groups to the list.
TO ADD A NEW COLOR OR COLOR GROUP
1 Select the location in the group or color list where you want the addition to be placed.
2 Choose New Group from the Edit menu to insert a new group, or choose New Color to insert
a new color.
A new color group entry or color entry appears as Untitled.
TO RENAME A CUSTOM COLOR OR GROUP
1 Select the specific color or group that you want to rename.
2 Double-click the name of the color or group.
3 Type the new name exactly as it appears in the job, including uppercase and lowercase
characters and spaces, as needed.
This new name is supplied by the source application (such as Adobe Illustrator or
QuarkXPress) to your PostScript job.
N OTE : Default groups or colors (such as PANTONE) cannot be renamed.
SPOT-ON
66
Downloading custom color groups
You can download custom color groups from your computer to the E-5000/E-3000.
Downloaded groups are added as custom groups to the Spot-On color list and are
immediately enabled for use on the E-5000/E-3000.
TO DOWNLOAD CUSTOM COLOR GROUPS
1 Select the location in the color list where you want to add the downloaded group.
2 Choose Download from the File menu.
The Select file dialog box appears.
N OTE : The supported file format for download is ICC Named Color Profile.
3 Locate and select the desired color group, and then click Open.
The downloaded group is added to the specified location in the Spot-On list. If you did not
specify a location, the group is added to the top of the list.
If the downloaded group has the same name as an existing group in the list, you are prompted
to rename the downloaded group.
SPOT-ON
67
Uploading custom color groups
You can upload custom color groups from the E-5000/E-3000 to your computer as ICC files.
The upload feature allows you to share a group by creating a local copy that can be
downloaded to another E-5000/E-3000.
You must save a color group to the E-5000/E-3000 before you can upload it to your
computer. To upload a factory default group, copy and paste the group as a new custom
group, and then upload the group as required.
TO UPLOAD CUSTOM COLOR GROUPS
1 Select the name of the color group that you want to upload.
2 Choose Upload from the File menu.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3 Browse to the location where you want to save the file, name the file, and then click Save.
Editing color values
If an existing spot color is not printing as intended, edit the color values as needed to achieve
your intended result. Edit color values by entering the exact CMYK values in the Spot-On
main window or in the Set Center Patch Color dialog box, or using the Spot-On Color Search
feature.
Use the following procedures to edit a named color by entering the exact CMYK values.
To target a color using Spot-On Color Search, see page 69.
SPOT-ON
68
TO EDIT A COLOR IN THE SPOT-ON MAIN WINDOW
1 Select the color that you want to edit.
2 Double-click the value under C, M, Y, and K, and enter a new number for each color channel.
The edited color appears in the color list.
N OTE : The edited color is not saved until you choose Save from the File menu.
TO EDIT A COLOR IN THE SET CENTER PATCH COLOR DIALOG BOX
1 Select the color that you want to edit.
2 Double-click the color icon.
The Spot-On Color Search dialog box appears with the selected color in the center.
3 Click the center patch.
The Set Center Patch Color dialog box appears.
4 Indicate whether you want to enter CMYK values as percentages or Device Codes.
The Percentages option allows you to enter color values between 0 and 100%, in increments
of 0.5. Values out of this range are rounded to the nearest whole or half percentage.
The Device Codes option allows you to enter color values between 0 and 255. This option
reflects the full range of color values that the E-5000/E-3000 can reproduce and provides finer
gradations of color than are possible with Percentages.
SPOT-ON
69
5 Enter the C, M, Y, and K values of your specific color in the appropriate fields.
Use the Tab key to move from field to field. As you enter each new value, the preview patch
updates to reflect the old and new colors.
6 Click OK.
The new color is displayed in the center of the Spot-On Color Search dialog box.
7 Click OK.
The edited color appears in the color list of the Spot-On main window.
Use the following procedure to target a color using the Spot-On Color Search dialog box.
Beginning with an approximate color in the Spot-On Color Search dialog box, adjust the hue,
saturation, and lightness of the color until you achieve an acceptable match.
TO TARGET A COLOR USING SPOT- ON COLOR SEARCH
1 Select the color that you want to edit.
2 Double-click the color icon.
The Spot-On Color Search dialog box appears with the current color in the center.
3 To update the center patch to a neighboring color that more closely matches the target, click
the corresponding neighbor patch.
Neighboring patches represent variations from the center patch and can be selected if they
offer a closer match to the desired color. Clicking one of these patches updates the center
patch to the new color and provides a new selection of neighboring colors. These patches are
either lightness or saturation neighbors, depending on the option you choose in the following
step.
N OTE : When you select certain colors, an exclamation point icon may appear in the
upper-right corner of the dialog box. This icon indicates that one or more colorants have
reached their maximum values.
SPOT-ON
70
4 Use the following techniques to control how neighboring color patches are generated:
Select Lightness or Saturation in the Color Directions Legend.
Lightness generates neighbor patches based on darker to lighter shades of the original color.
This variation is displayed from left to right, with the original color remaining in the center of
the middle group.
Saturation generates neighbor patches based on less saturated to more saturated variations
of the original color. This variation is displayed from left to right, with the original color
remaining in the center of the middle group.
Choose a setting from the Color Spacing menu to control the closeness of the neighbor
patches.
A higher setting generates neighbor patches that differ more noticeably from the center color.
As you get closer to your target color, reduce the color spacing to a smaller value.
Select Monitor Compensation to simulate how all the on-screen color patches will appear
when printed on paper.
This simulation depends on the monitor profile that has been configured for your monitor.
To specify the monitor profile, choose Preferences from the Edit menu in the Spot-On
main window.
Make sure that you set your monitor according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and
select the correct monitor profile for your monitor.
5 Continue adjusting the color patch controls and clicking neighbor patches until the color you
want appears in the center patch.
6 Click Print Pattern.
N OTE : It is very difficult to accurately match spot colors on a monitor. You should always test
print to get the proper color match.
7 Choose the appropriate settings from the Output Style, Paper Size, and Paper Tray menus.
For Output Style, choose Color Search Pattern or Color Neighbor Pattern. Color Search
Pattern prints patches with the same pattern as displayed in the Color Search dialog box.
Color Neighbor Pattern prints patches in a three column by eight row format.
For Paper Size, choose the size of the paper that you want to use for printing the patches.
For Paper Tray, specify the paper source for the paper that you want to use.
71
SPOT-ON
8 Click OK to print the patches.
The Print Pattern test page provides the following information:
• Center patch color CMYK value
• Color spacing
• Lightness or Saturation neighbors selected
• Output profile selected
The goal of Spot-On Color Search is to find the color values that make a printed color patch
match a target, not its screen simulation of it. Printing a Print Pattern of neighbor color
patches allows you to compare the printed patches to the color target. After you compare the
printed patches and find the one that matches most closely, you can select the corresponding
patch on-screen.
9 Select the desired target color in the Spot-On Color Search dialog box and click OK.
The edited color appears in the color list of the Spot-On main window.
Using a measurement instrument to target colors
If you have the Densitometer ED-100 or Spectrophotometer ES-1000, you can import
measured color values directly into Spot-On. This feature allows you to target matches based
on the actual colors of immediate objects, such as the red of a printed logo or the yellow of a
packaging envelope.
For best results, download and save any measurement data you have gathered with the
ED-100 in its offline state. Spot-On automatically clears stored data when it establishes a
connection with the instrument. For information about downloading stored data from the
ED-100, see the documentation that accompanies the instrument.
TO IMPORT COLOR MEASUREMENTS
INTO SPOT- ON
1 Install and set up the ED-100 or ES-1000 for use with your computer.
For installation and setup instructions, see the documentation that accompanies the
instrument.
2 Choose Start from the Instrument menu.
The Choose Port dialog box appears.
3 For Instrument, choose the instrument that you will use to take measurements. For Port,
choose the serial port connection of the instrument. Click OK.
For the ED-100, the indicator light on the instrument flashes for a few moments as the
connection to Spot-On is established. When the flashing stops, the instrument is ready to
read measurements.
SPOT-ON
72
4 Place the ED-100 or ES-1000 over the target color, making sure to center the sample aperture
over the color. Press Measure to take the measurement.
The measured CMYK values are imported into Spot-On as follows:
• If an individual color is selected in the color list, it updates to the measured color.
• If a group is selected in the color list, a new color with the measured values is created
within the group.
• If the Spot-On Color Search dialog box is open, the center patch updates with the
measured values, and the neighbor patches update accordingly.
• If the Set Center Patch Color dialog box is open, the measured values are imported into
the CMYK entry fields.
5 After you finish taking color measurements, choose Stop from the Instrument menu.
Spot-On closes the connection to the instrument.
Reverting default colors to factory settings
You can revert default colors to their factory default settings. Revert all colors within a default
color group, or revert one or more specific colors within a default color group, so that only
those colors are reset to the factory default settings.
TO REVERT ALL COLORS WITHIN A DEFAULT COLOR GROUP TO FACTORY DEFAULTS
1 Click the icon to the left of the name of the group that you want to revert.
2 Choose Revert Group from the File menu.
A warning message appears.
3 Click OK.
TO REVERT SPECIFIC COLORS WITHIN A DEFAULT COLOR GROUP TO FACTORY DEFAULTS
1 Click the icon to the left of the name of the group that contains the colors you want to revert.
2 Select the colors that you want to revert to the factory defaults.
To select more than one color, Shift-click to select an adjacent color or Control-click to select
a nonadjacent color.
3 Choose Revert Factory Color from the File menu.
A warning message appears.
4 Click OK.
SPOT-ON
73
Saving changes and exiting Spot-On
To enable your spot color matches for use with the E-5000/E-3000, save your edits before you
exit Spot-On. This ensures that all your changes to Spot-On color definitions are stored on
the E-5000/E-3000 and available for use when printing documents that contain spot colors.
The following edits do not require saving to take effect:
• Rearranging the priority level of a color group
• Downloading a color group
• Clearing or deleting a color group
TO SAVE THE SPOT- ON COLOR LIST
1 Choose Save from the File menu.
2 Click Close in the upper-right corner of the Spot-On main window to exit the utility.
SPOT-ON
74
Spot-On with Substitute Colors
The Substitute Colors workflow involves defining the substitute color values with Spot-On,
and then printing a document with the Substitute Colors print option set to On from the
printer driver. You can also override the print option setting using Command WorkStation.
N OTE : Color substitutions affect only text, vector, and line art. They have no effect on
raster images.
N OTE : When a color is defined as a substitute color, the settings for an RGB color (such as
RGB Source, Rendering Style, and RGB Separation) or CMYK color (such as CMYK
Simulation Profile and CMYK Simulation Method) have no effect. The color is converted
with a process similar to spot color conversion.
Creating a color for substitution
Use the following procedure to add a new substitute color in a substitute group and specify
the value-name for a color to substitute.
N OTE : A new substitute color can be added only to a substitute group.
75
SPOT-ON
TO ADD A NEW SUBSTITUTE COLOR AND SPECIFY THE VALUE-NAME FOR SUBSTITUTION
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
Start ColorWise Pro Tools from a stand-alone application or Command WorkStation, at your
computer or at the monitor connected to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click Spot-On.
The Select Output Profile dialog box appears.
3 Select an output profile and click OK.
The Spot-On main window appears.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Output profile
Save
Upload
Download
Cut
Copy
Paste
Close all
Print
Up
Down
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
4 Select the location in the group list where you want the addition to be placed.
5 Choose New Substitute Group from the Edit menu.
A new substitute group entry appears as Untitled.
6 Double-click Untitled and type a new name.
SPOT-ON
76
7 Select the substitute group and choose New Substitute Color from the Edit menu.
N OTE : If the substitute group already contains substitute colors, select the color above the
location where you want to add a new substitute color.
The Add Substitute Color dialog box appears.
8 Select a color mode for the substitute color.
9 Select a tolerance degree for the substitute color.
For information about Tolerance, see page 81.
10 Type the values for the color that you want to substitute.
11 Click OK.
The substitute color appears at the specified location.
Defining the color values for a substitute color
After you specify the original color to substitute, define CMYK values for the substitute color
by typing the exact CMYK values in the Spot-On main window or Set Center Patch Color
dialog box, or use Spot-On Color Search.
For instructions on defining a substitute color by typing the exact CMYK values, see the
following sections. To define a substitute color in the Spot-On Color Search dialog box,
see page 78.
TO DEFINE A SUBSTITUTE COLOR IN THE SPOT-ON MAIN WINDOW
1 Start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Click Spot-On.
The Select Output Profile dialog box appears.
3 Select an output profile and click OK.
The Spot-On main dialog box appears.
77
SPOT-ON
4 Select the color that you want to substitute.
1
1
Output profile
5 Double-click the value under C, M, Y, and K, and type a new number for each color channel.
The new values for the substitute color appear in the color list.
N OTE : The edited color is not saved until you choose Save from the File menu.
TO DEFINE A SUBSTITUTE COLOR IN SET CENTER PATCH COLOR
1 Select the color that you want to substitute.
2 Double-click the color icon.
The Spot-On Color Search dialog box appears with the selected color in the center.
1
Center patch
1
78
SPOT-ON
3 Click the center patch.
The Set Center Patch Color dialog box appears.
4 Type values for each C, M, Y, and K color channel.
For information about using Set Center Patch Color, see page 68.
5 Click OK.
The new color appears in the center in the Spot-On Color Search dialog box.
6 Click OK.
The new color appears in the color list of the Spot-On main window.
N OTE : The edited color is not saved until you choose Save from the File menu.
Use the following procedure to target a substitute color using the Spot-On Color Search
dialog box.
TO DEFINE A SUBSTITUTE COLOR USING SPOT- ON COLOR SEARCH
1 Select the color that you want to substitute.
2 Double-click the color icon.
The Spot-On Color Search dialog box appears, displaying the current color in the center.
1
Neighboring patch
1
SPOT-ON
79
3 Click neighboring patches until you find the color that you want to use for the substitution.
For information about using Spot-On Color Search, see page 69.
4 Click OK.
The new substitute color appears in the color list of the Spot-On main window.
N OTE : The edited color is not saved until you choose Save from the File menu.
Printing a job with a substitute color
After you define CMYK values for substitution in Spot-On, you can print a document with
the substitute color from the printer driver. You can also override the print option setting
using Command WorkStation.
N OTE : When you print a job, select the same output profile from the printer driver as the one
that was selected in the Select Output Profile dialog box. Otherwise, color substitutions that
are defined on Spot-On have no effect.
N OTE : The procedures for printing a job from a Mac OS and a Windows computer
are similar.
TO PRINT A JOB WITH A SUBSTITUTE COLOR
1 Open a document in your application.
2 Choose Print.
3 Click Copies & Pages and choose ColorWise from the menu.
The ColorWise pane appears.
4 Select Substitute Colors and click Print.
The job is printed with the substitute you defined in Spot-On.
SPOT-ON
80
Substitute Color dialog box
You can define the color mode and tolerance range for a substitute color in the Add Substitute
Color or Rename Substitute Color dialog box.
N OTE : The Add Substitute Color dialog box appears when you choose Edit>New Substitute
Color after selecting a substitute color group in the list. The Rename Substitute Color dialog
box appears when you double-click the bracketed section of a substitute color.
N OTE : The Add Substitute Color and Rename Substitute Color dialog boxes offer the same
control in defining a substitute color.
• Substitute Color: Select the following color modes for a substitute color:
– CMYK (0-100%)
– RGB (Device Code 0-255)
– RGB (0-100%)
• Tolerance: Select the following tolerance ranges for a substitute color:
– Small (indicated in lowercase)
– Large (indicated in uppercase)
To avoid entry errors, the Add Substitute Color and Edit Substitute Color dialog boxes
display the values in the following predefined formats. The dialog boxes also display uppercase
or lowercase characters and a “%” symbol, depending on the selections.
• CMYK (0-100%) mode
– Small: <“0”%c, “0”%m, “0”%y, “0”%k>
– Large: <“0”%C, “0”%M, “0”%Y, “0”%K>
• RGB (Device Code 0-255) mode
– Small: <“0”r, “0”g, “0”b>
– Large: <“0”R, “0”G, “0”B>
• RGB (0-100%) mode
– Small: <“0”%r, “0”%g, “0”%b>
– Large: <“0”%R, “0”%G, “0”%B>
81
SPOT-ON
Principles for Substitute Colors
In setting the values for Substitute Colors, keep in mind the following principles.
Tolerance range
The accuracy of the substitute color is affected by various elements, such as applications,
operating systems, printer drivers, and distilling processes. To accommodate the “errors” that
occur because of the rounding rules between the numbers entered by users and the numbers
received by the E-5000/E-3000, the options of the small and large tolerance ranges are
provided for color substitution.
The following table provides Small and Large substitution tolerance ranges for each
color mode.
Color mode
Small tolerance range
Large tolerance range
CMYK (0-100%)
+/- 0.25%
+/- 0.5%
RGB (Device Code 0-255)
+/- 0.25
+/- 1
RGB (0-100%)
+/- 0.25%
+/- 0.5%
N OTE : Values for tolerance ranges are approximate.
• CMYK (0-100%)
– Small: A substitute color replaces any color that falls within the nearest +/- 0.25% of
the color value entered.
– Large: A substitute color replaces any color that falls within the nearest +/- 0.5% of the
color value entered.
• RGB (Device Code 0-255)
– Small: A substitute color replaces any color that falls within the nearest +/- 0.25 of the
color value entered.
– Large: A substitute color replaces any color that falls within the nearest +/- 1 of the
color value entered.
• RGB (0-100%)
– Small: A substitute color replaces any color that falls within the nearest +/-0.25% of the
color value after scaling.
– Large: A substitute color replaces any color that falls within the nearest +/-0.5% of the
color value after scaling.
82
SPOT-ON
Color substitution
A color substitution takes place when a substitute color is defined with a different set of
CMYK values for the same value-name as the original color.
The following color examples show how a substitution works.
• Original color: <100, 0, 0, 0> for the CMYK values (cyan)
• Substitute 1: <0, 100, 100, 0> (red)
• Substitute 2: <100, 0, 100, 0> (green)
N OTE : In the examples, the extreme values and terms “red” and “green” are used for illustrative
purposes only. In practice, color substitution is not used for extreme color shifts.
The following table shows color substitution with different sets of CMYK values assigned to
the same original color.
Substitution
value-name
CMYK
values
Before
substitution
After
substitution
Original color
—
<100, 0, 0, 0>
—
—
Substitute 1
<100.0c, 0.0m, 0.0y, 0.0k>
<0, 100, 100, 0>
cyan
red
Substitute 2
<100.0c, 0.0m, 0.0y, 0.0k>
<100, 0, 100, 0>
cyan
green
Priority scheme
If two substitute colors are defined with the same value-names, but with different sets of
CMYK values and different tolerance ranges, Spot-On resolves the priority of substitution
according to the order of color in the group.
Spot-On process color substitution is based on the order of color in the group. The color
entries at the top of the list have priority over the colors at the bottom of the list. Spot-On
scans the list from top to bottom and processes substitution in linear order. When a color is
remapped, it is not overridden by any subsequent substitution call.
The following color examples show how the priority scheme works.
• Original color: <100, 0, 0, 0> for the CMYK values (cyan)
• Substitute 3: <0, 100, 100, 0> (red) with a small tolerance
• Substitute 4: <100, 0, 100, 0> (green) with a large tolerance
N OTE : In the examples, the extreme values and terms “red” and “green” are used for illustrative
purposes only.
Order of the colors
• Case 1: Substitute 3 (red) is higher than Substitute 4 (green) in the list.
• Case 2: Substitute 4 (green) is higher than Substitute 3 (red) in the list.
83
SPOT-ON
The following table shows the scheme of priority when the same value-names are assigned to
the original color with different sets of CMYK values and different tolerance ranges.
Color
order
Substitution
value-name
Original color
CMYK values
Before
substitution
After
substitution
<100, 0, 0, 0>
Case 1
Substitute 3
Substitute 4
<100.0c, 0.0m, 0.0y, 0.0k>
<100.0C, 0.0M, 0.0Y, 0.0K>
<0, 100, 100, 0>
<100, 0, 100, 0>
cyan
red
Case 2
Substitute 4
Substitute 3
<100.0C, 0.0M, 0.0Y, 0.0K>
<100.0c, 0.0m, 0.0y, 0.0k>
<100, 0, 100, 0>
<0, 100, 100, 0>
cyan
green
Substitute 3 and Substitute 4 have the same value-names, but depending on their order in the
list, Spot-On produces different results.
• In Case 1, Substitute 3, red, is given higher priority because it is higher in the list. All
occurrences of the original color, cyan, within the Small tolerance range are substituted
with red. Occurrences of cyan within the Large tolerance range but not within the Small
tolerance range are substituted with Substitute 4, green.
• In Case 2, Substitute 4, green, is given higher priority because it is higher in the list.
Substitute 3, red, can only substitute for occurrences of the original color, cyan, within the
Small tolerance range, and those occurrences have already been substituted with green.
Therefore, no substitution with red takes place.
Uploading and downloading a substitute color group
Like named color groups, you can upload or download a substitute color group as an ICC
profile. The substitute color definitions are saved with private tags as part of an ICC profile,
allowing you to export the Substitution Group definitions between multiple print servers.
84
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
The ColorWise color management system provides print options that affect the output of
objects in various color spaces. By specifying the appropriate settings for each print option,
you can obtain the expected results for your jobs.
About this chapter
This chapter provides an overview of the ColorWise management system, which controls
color on the E-5000/E-3000 (see page 85), and detailed explanations of each print option.
For the location of each print option, see the following table.
ColorWise print option
See
Auto Trapping
page 86
Black Overprint
page 86
Black Text/Graphics
page 87
Combine Separations
page 90
Composite Overprint
page 90
CMYK Simulation Profile
page 88
CMYK Simulation Method
page 89
Output Profile
page 91
Print Gray using Black Only
page 91
Rendering Styles
page 92
RGB Separation
page 93
RGB Source Profile
page 93
Spot Color Matching
page 95
Substitute Colors
page 96
This chapter also provides information about PostScript printer drivers and instructions for
setting the ColorWise print options for Windows and Mac OS computers. For information
about printer drivers, see page 96.
85
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
Managing color on the E-5000/E-3000
To modify E-5000/E-3000 printing behavior, do any of the following:
• Specify ColorWise options for an individual print job using the menus that appear in the
printer driver.
• Specify most ColorWise options as server defaults from Color Setup in ColorWise Pro
Tools (see page 33). You can also set default values from E-5000/E-3000 Setup, as
described in Configuration and Setup. The defaults apply to all subsequent print jobs unless
you override them.
• Specify ColorWise options, particularly default ICC profile settings and calibration
options, from ColorWise Pro Tools. These options include default Simulation Profile (see
page 88), Simulation Method (see page 89), default Source Profile (see page 93), RGB
Separation (see page 93), and associated calibration set (see page 37).
Applications allow you to generate color data for the E-5000/E-3000 in many different color
spaces. The most common type of color data produced from office applications is RGB,
while prepress applications generally produce CMYK data. Desktop applications also generate
spot colors, such as PANTONE colors. To complicate matters, a single page may contain a
mix of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. The E-5000/E-3000 allows you to control the printing
of mixed-color documents with features that apply specifically to RGB, CMYK, or spot color
data.
The following diagram illustrates the print options in the E-5000/E-3000 color management
process that affect color data conversions. You can access these print options when you send a
print job to the E-5000/E-3000. Most of these options and settings are described in
subsequent sections of this chapter.
RGB data
RGB Source Profile
Print Gray using Black Only
(RGB)
Rendering Style (CRD)
Brightness
Black Text/Graphics
RGB Separation
Output Profile
CMYK data
CMYK Simulation Profile
CMYK Simulation Method
Print Gray using Black Only
(CMYK)
Brightness
Black Text/Graphics
Combine Separations
Output Profile
Spot color data
E-5000/E-3000
color processor
Color data sent
to copier
Spot Color Matching
RGB Source Profile is the only color option that applies strictly to RGB color data. The other
options that affect RGB color also affect the more rarely used Lab, XYZ, and other calibrated
color spaces.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
86
N OTE : With PostScript 3 color, RGB Source Profile affects all CIEBasedABC color spaces
(if the source space is RGB). For example, if you send CMYK data to the E-5000/E-3000 in
CIEBasedDEFG format by choosing PostScript Color Management in Photoshop, the setting
for the Rendering Style print option, which normally affects only RGB data, also affects this
CMYK data.
ColorWise print options
The following sections provide detailed explanations of the ColorWise print options and how
these options affect print jobs.
Auto Trapping
Trapping is a technique where the size of objects is modified so that colors printed next to
each other overlap slightly, to prevent white spaces between two colors. These white spaces,
or “hollows,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the
toners, and the stiffness of the media. The following illustration shows the same image with
and without trapping.
If you enable the Auto Trapping option, trapping is applied to the objects in a job.
Black Overprint
The Black Overprint option allows you to specify whether or not black text, defined as
RGB=0, 0, 0, or as CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%, overprints colored backgrounds.
• Text: Black text overprints colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing the
halo effect or misregistration of colors. Choosing this setting automatically sets the Black
Text/Graphics option to Pure Black On.
• Text & Graphics: Black text and graphics overprint colored backgrounds, eliminating
white gaps and reducing halo effects or misregistration of colors. Choosing this setting
automatically sets the Black Text/Graphics option to Pure Black On.
• Off: Black text or text/graphics knocks out colored backgrounds.
N OTE : Before sending the print job to the copier, PostScript applications may perform their
own black overprint conversions.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
87
One example of how you might use this setting is a page that contains black text on a light
blue background. The background blue is CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. The black text is
CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%.
• With Black Overprint set to Text or Text & Graphics, the final text or text/graphic
portions of the page are overprinted, or combined with the underlying color. Black colors
generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are
printed using the black toner. This means that black text and line art does not exhibit
halftone artifacts (as long as the copier is calibrated correctly). No transition in cyan and
magenta toners occurs. The quality of the output is improved, because it does not show
artifacts near the edges of the text defined in the RGB color space (RGB=0, 0, 0).
• With Black Overprint Off, the border of the text or text/graphics is on an edge that has
cyan and magenta toners on one side (outside the text) and black toner on the other side
(inside the text). This transition may cause visible artifacts due to the practical limitations
of the copier.
N OTE : Setting Black Overprint to Text/Graphics allows black text or graphics to overprint
color backgrounds (see “CMYK Simulation Method” on page 89).
N OTE : The reproduction of CMYK components is affected by the CMYK Simulation setting
and calibration curve when CMYK is not 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%.
Black Text/Graphics
The Black Text/Graphics option affects black text and vector graphics. Under most
circumstances, set this option to Pure Black On. When Black Text/Graphics is set to Pure
Black On, black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%,
0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using black toner only. The black text and line art do not exhibit
halftone artifacts (as long as the copier is calibrated correctly) and are not misregistered, since
one toner is used. In addition, this setting eliminates blasting. This option is automatically set
to Pure Black On when the Black Overprint option is selected.
For some jobs, it is preferable to clear this option, for example, if the page includes gradient
fills that use black. The following table describes the behavior of the Black Text/Graphics
option with black data defined in different color spaces.
N OTE : Use the Black Text/Graphics option only when printing composites, not when printing
separations.
88
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
Color
Black Text/Graphics = Normal
Black Text/Graphics = Pure Black On
or Rich Black
RGB=0,0,0
RGB=0,0,0 is printed according to the definition
for RGB=0,0,0 in the output profile. This may
be a rich black using all toners if the output
profile specifies a rich black, or may be K-only
if the output profile specifies K-only for
RGB=0,0,0. The output is affected by the
calibration curve.
RGB=0,0,0 is printed as K-only, using the black
toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50%
Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan
toners. All other RGB values are unaffected by
the Black Text/Graphics setting.
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% may be printed as
K-only or as a rich black using all toners,
depending on the CMYK Simulation Profile
and CMYK Simulation Method settings.
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% is printed as K-only,
using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100%
K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black
and cyan toners, regardless of the CMYK
Simulation Profile and CMYK Simulation
Method settings. All other CMYK values are
unaffected by the Black Text/Graphics setting.
(all other RGB values are
unaffected by the Black Text/
Graphics setting)
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100%
(all other CMYK values are
unaffected by the Black Text/
Graphics setting)
For Quick and Full (Source GCR),
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as K-only
and the amount of black toner is limited by
the simulation profile and the calibration curve.
For Full (Output GCR),
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as K-only
and the amount of black toner is limited by
the simulation profile and the calibration curve.
Setting CMYK Simulation to ColorWise Off
disables the simulation profile and the
calibration curve. In this case, the black toner
is not limited by the calibration curve.
Setting CMYK Simulation to ColorWise Off
disables the simulation profile and the
calibration curve. In this case, the black toner
is not limited by the calibration curve.
Spot Colors
Standard spot color processing
Standard spot color processing
(unaffected by the Black Text/
Graphics setting)
N OTE : PostScript applications, such as QuarkXPress, may convert elements defined as
RGB=0, 0, 0 to four-color CMYK black before sending the job to the E-5000/E-3000.
These elements are not affected by the Black Text/Graphics option. For more information,
see Fiery Color Reference. Also, black text and line art defined as RGB=0, 0, 0 in office
applications, such as Microsoft Word, are converted to single-color black (CMYK=0%, 0%,
0%, 100%) by the Microsoft PostScript 3 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.
To print this single-color black at the maximum toner density of the copier, set Black Text/
Graphics to Pure Black On.
CMYK Simulation Profile
The CMYK Simulation Profile print option allows you to print press proofs or simulations.
This setting specifies the offset press standard or other color printing device that you want to
simulate. This option affects CMYK data only.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
89
With Windows printer drivers, you can also view an unlimited number of custom Full
simulations created using ColorWise Pro Tools. On Mac OS computers, you can view up to
10 Full custom simulations. The number of custom simulations is limited by the available
disk space on the E-5000/E-3000.
If you are printing with the PostScript driver and have Two-Way Communication enabled,
the name of each downloaded or custom profile appears in the CMYK Simulation Profile
menu. If Two-Way Communication is not enabled, downloaded or custom profiles appear
as Simulation-1 through Simulation-10. For more information about Two-Way
Communication, see Printing from Windows or Printing from Mac OS.
The None setting sends your original CMYK data to the copier in its calibrated state, without
conversions to simulate another printer. The ColorWise Off setting sends your original
CMYK data to the copier in an uncalibrated state, without conversions to simulate another
printer.
The CMYK Simulation Profile setting you specify depends on the press standard for which
the CMYK data was separated.
• For images that were separated using a custom separation (such as a separation produced
with an ICC profile), choose the corresponding profile on the E-5000/E-3000 with the
CMYK Simulation Profile setting.
• For images that were separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK Simulation Profile
setting.
To properly simulate a printed image that was separated using an ICC profile, the same profile
must be present on the E-5000/E-3000. For more information about downloading ICC
profiles to the E-5000/E-3000, see page 12.
CMYK Simulation Method
The CMYK Simulation Method allows you to define your preferred CMYK-to-CMYK
conversion technique.
• Quick applies one-dimensional transfer curves to adjust output densities in the cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black channels. This technique leads to eye-pleasing color output
from your copier because pure primary colors are not “contaminated” by other colorants.
While it is the fastest simulation method and perfect for drafts, avoid using it for final
documents that are used as press proofs. Other techniques offer the color simulation
accuracy required by proofing applications.
• Full (Source GCR) provides a complete and accurate simulation based on colorimetric
transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. The Gray Component
Replacement (GCR) level that was specified in the original (source) document is also
preserved for K-only text and graphics. Processed black expressed in CMY is reproduced
using CMY toner. Full (Source GCR) is recommended for the highest quality press
proofing applications.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
90
• Full (Output GCR) is a complete and accurate simulation method based on colorimetric
transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. With this method, the Gray
Component Replacement (GCR) level that was specified in the original document is not
preserved. Instead, all CMYK data is reseparated using the GCR level specified by the
output profile. This simulation technique is similar to traditional ICC color matching
methods and is more appropriate than Full (Source GCR) for full color printing designed
for the press, but reproduced on your copier.
N OTE : When you specify Pure Black On for Black Text/Graphics and Full (Output GCR) for
CMYK Simulation Method, the black text and graphics in your document are printed with
100% black-only toner.
Combine Separations
The Combine Separations setting specifies how to print separated CMYK data.
• Off prints each separation individually.
• On combines separations as a single, composite-color document, and automatically makes
the settings for the following print options: Color Mode (CMYK), Black Text/Graphics
(Normal), or Spot Color Matching (On).
For information about using the Combine Separations option with applications such as
Photoshop, see Fiery Color Reference.
Composite Overprint
When overlapping objects are printed, the foreground object can either overprint or knock
out the background object. With overprinting, the color of the background object shows
through the foreground object where they overlap, and the resulting color is a combination of
the colors of the two objects. With a knock-out, the foreground object hides the background
object where they overlap.
The Composite Overprint print option allows you to print overprinted objects as specified in
the source file. By default, the Composite Overprint print option is off and overlapping
objects print as knockouts.
The Composite Overprint print option is supported for PostScript and PDF jobs produced
by the following applications:
• Adobe Acrobat
• Adobe Illustrator
• Adobe InDesign
• Macromedia FreeHand
• QuarkXPress
• CorelDRAW
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
91
If Composite Overprint is enabled for a job that contains spot colors, Spot-On must be
enabled on the E-5000/E-3000.
A job with more than 32 spot colors may not print as expected.
Output Profile
Because the output profile is applied to all data in the print job, make sure that the profile you
select is the right one for your job. The default output profile consists of a profile for your
copier that describes its color characteristics and a calibration target that describes the
expected behavior of the copier.
Use the ColorWise Pro Tools Profile Manager to download your own output profile to the
E-5000/E-3000 (see “Using Profile Manager” on page 27). Downloaded output profiles are at
first associated with the calibration target that is tied to the default output profile. You can
edit calibration target D-Max values separately.
If you are printing with the PostScript driver and have enabled Two-Way Communication,
the name of each downloaded or custom profile appears in the Output Profile menu. If TwoWay Communication is not enabled, downloaded or custom profiles appear as Output-1
through Output-10. For more information about Two-Way Communication, see Printing
from Windows or Printing from Mac OS.
Select the Use Media Defined Profile setting to automatically apply the output profile
associated with the media type used in a print job rather than setting a specific output profile.
For more information, see “Using media-defined output profiles” on page 28.
Select the Use Server’s Default setting to use the default Output Profile set in Color Setup. For
more information about Color Setup, see “Using Color Setup” on page 33.
Print Gray using Black Only
When Print Gray using Black Only is selected, any gray (any color where R=G=B or C=Y=M,
or any K-only color) in a job is printed using only black toner instead of processed black.
You can choose to apply the Print Gray using Black Only option to either Text and Graphics
or to Text, Graphics, and Images.
The following limitations apply:
• The Print Gray using Black Only option has no effect on a job that is pre-separated, except
that if Print Gray using Black Only (CMYK) is off, each separation, which is a grayscale
image, is printed in a 4-color gray.
• If CMYK Simulation Method is set to Full (Source GCR) or Quick, the Print Gray using
Black Only (CMYK) setting does not affect the output.
92
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
• If RGB Separation is set to Simulation, the Print Gray using Black Only (RGB) option is
disabled. Likewise, if the Print Gray using Black Only (RGB) option is enabled, you
cannot set RGB Separation to Simulation.
• If Black Text/Graphics is set to Pure Black On or Rich Black On, it takes precedence over
Print Gray using Black Only for 100% black text and graphics.
• If a gray is specified as a spot color, the Print Gray using Black Only option does not affect
that gray.
Rendering Styles
The Rendering Style option specifies a CRD for color conversions. To control the appearance
of images, such as prints from office applications or RGB photographs from Photoshop, select
the appropriate rendering style. The E-5000/E-3000 allows you to choose from the four
rendering styles currently found in industry standard ICC profiles.
E-5000/E-3000
rendering style
Best used for
Equivalent ICC
rendering style
Photographic: Typically results
Photographs, including scans and
images from stock photography
CDs and digital camera images.
Image, Contrast,
and Perceptual
Presentation: Creates saturated
colors but does not match printed
colors precisely to displayed colors.
In-gamut colors, such as flesh
tones, are rendered well. This style
is similar to the Photographic
rendering style.
Artwork and graphs in
presentations. In many cases, this
style can be used for mixed pages
that contain presentation graphics
and photographs.
Saturation,
Graphics
Relative Colorimetric: Provides
Advanced use when color matching
is important, but you prefer white
colors in the document to print
as paper white. This style may
also be used with PostScript color
management to affect CMYK
data for simulation purposes.
Relative
Colorimetric
Situations when exact colors are
needed and visible borders are not
distracting. This style may also be
used with PostScript color
management to affect CMYK
data for simulation purposes.
Absolute
Colorimetric
in less saturated output than
presentation rendering when
printing out-of-gamut colors.
This style preserves tonal
relationships in images.
white-point transformation between
the source and destination white
points. For example, the bluish
white color (gray) of a monitor is
replaced by paper white. This style
avoids visible borders between
blank spaces and white objects.
Absolute Colorimetric: Provides
no white point transformation
between the source and destination
white points. For example, the bluish
white color (gray) is not replaced
by paper white.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
93
RGB Separation
The RGB Separation option determines how RGB colors (as well as Lab and XYZ colors) are
converted to CMYK. The name of this option is meant to be descriptive, because the option
defines the color spaces that are used by the E-5000/E-3000 to “separate” the RGB data into
CMYK values.
The two choices available for this option determine whether RGB data is converted into the
full gamut of the copier (output) or is first converted into the gamut of another digital printer
or press standard (simulation). This feature helps make one device behave like another for
RGB data. For example, if a high-quality ICC profile is available for another print device, the
copier can simulate the behavior of that device.
RGB Separation is also useful for prepress applications. For example, it allows you to
experiment with the appearance of an RGB scan under different press printing conditions,
without having to convert the RGB data to CMYK data for each condition. When the desired
printing condition is found, convert the file to CMYK, using the same CMYK simulation
profile that you used during the experimentation.
N OTE : Use the RGB Separation print option in conjunction with the Output Profile or
CMYK Simulation Profile print options.
• Output converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space of your copier (when set to the
printer’s default), or a customized CMYK color space for your copier (when set to
Output 1-10).
• Simulation converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space for a specified simulation
(select the desired simulation with the CMYK Simulation Profile print option).
RGB Source Profile
The RGB source profile setting allows you to define the characteristics of the RGB data in
your document so that the appropriate color conversion occurs on the E-5000/E-3000.
Commonly used monitor color spaces are available from the printer driver and the E-5000/
E-3000. For others, use ColorWise Pro Tools Profile Manager to download custom monitor
or scanner profiles.
When you specify a setting other than None for the RGB Source Profile, the E-5000/E-3000
overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may
have specified. For example, if you specified a ColorSync System Profile on your Mac OS
computer, the RGB Source Profile setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this
setting to override another specified source color space, choose None.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
94
When you specify a setting other than None, because the color space definitions are
overridden, the output from the E-5000/E-3000 is consistent across platforms. The E-5000/
E-3000 RGB Source Profile options are as follows:
• EFIRGB specifies an EFI-defined color space recommended for users who have no detailed
information about their RGB data.
• sRGB (PC) specifies the definition of a Windows computer monitor profile used as
the default.
• Apple Standard specifies the definition of a Mac OS computer monitor profile used as
the default.
• Adobe RGB (1998) is an Adobe-defined color space, used in pre-press as the default
working space in Photoshop 5.
• ECI-RGB is the European Color Initiative (ECI) recommended space for use as an RGB
working color space and color data exchange format for ad agencies, publishers,
reproduction and printing houses.
• Fiery RGB is an EFI-defined color space recommended for users of office applications.
This color space is similar to EFIRGB but is larger and can provide a more desirable
blue output.
• Sources 1-10 specify the definitions you download as RGB source profiles.
If you are printing with the PostScript driver and have enabled Two-Way Communication,
the name of each downloaded profile appears in the RGB Source Profile setting menu.
If Two-Way Communication is not enabled, downloaded profiles appear as Source-1
through Source-10. For more information about Two-Way Communication, see Printing
from Windows or Printing from Mac OS.
• None instructs the E-5000/E-3000 to allow the RGB sources you defined elsewhere, such
as in the application, to be used. When you set RGB Source to None, the appearance of
colors is not independent of the file type. For example, RGB EPS files looks different from
RGB TIFF files.
With RGB Source set to None, PostScript RGB data that contains a source color space
definition is converted using the CRD specified by the Rendering Style option (see
“Rendering Styles” on page 92). Non-PostScript RGB data and PostScript RGB data that
does not contain a source color space definition are converted using a general undercolor
removal (UCR) conversion method.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
95
Spot Color Matching
The Spot Color Matching option provides automatic matching of spot colors with their best
CMYK equivalents.
• On: The E-5000/E-3000 uses a built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of
spot colors your copier can produce. (New tables are generated when you add new output
profiles.)
With Spot-On, the E-5000/E-3000 uses the CMYK matches determined through
Spot-On (see page 60).
• Off: The E-5000/E-3000 processes the spot color as CMYK data and uses CMYK
equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer, such as PANTONE. These are the
same CMYK equivalents used by applications that include spot color libraries.
N OTE : Spot colors that are not included in the built-in table are treated as CMYK.
For jobs that include spot colors, set Spot Color Matching to On unless you are printing press
simulations. In that case, set Spot Color Matching to Off and choose the appropriate CMYK
Simulation setting (see page 88).
For a PDF job that includes spot colors that are not included in the built-in table, setting
Spot Color Matching to On retains the original spot colors. The E-5000/E-3000 references
the built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of the original spot color.
N OTE : Use Spot Color Matching only when printing composites, not when printing
separations.
Spot Color Matching and the PANTONE Coated Color Reference
The PANTONE Coated Color Reference prints differently depending on the Spot Color
Matching setting (see Fiery Color Reference).
• On: The E-5000/E-3000 uses a built-in table or, with Spot-On, the Spot-On color
dictionaries to generate the best matches for the PANTONE colors that your copier can
produce. The PANTONE number is displayed below each swatch.
For more information about Spot-On, see page 60.
• Off: The E-5000/E-3000 prints swatches using the CMYK values recommended by
Pantone, Inc. (and used by applications that provide PANTONE color libraries). The
CMYK values used to generate the color, as well as the PANTONE number of the color,
are printed below each swatch. These CMYK values are printed through the selected
CMYK Simulation and Output Profile settings.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
96
Substitute Colors
Spot-On allows you to create a list of substitute colors. These are colors that, when called for
in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having
the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and
overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors.
To enable substitute colors for a job, select the Substitute Colors option.
For more information about creating and using substitute colors, see “Spot-On with
Substitute Colors” on page 74.
Printer drivers and print options
The printer driver writes a PostScript file containing the instructions generated by your
application and the settings for the ColorWise print options you selected. The printer driver
then sends the PostScript file to the E-5000/E-3000. The E-5000/E-3000 performs PostScript
processing and color conversions and sends raster color data to the copier.
Setting print options for Windows
This section explains how to set color management print options with the Adobe and
Microsoft PostScript printer drivers for Windows, PostScript 3 printer drivers that take full
advantage of the color features of the E-5000/E-3000.
Before you proceed, do the following:
• Install the printer driver and the E-5000/E-3000 PPD (see Printing from Windows).
• Set up the E-5000/E-3000 for printing (see Printing from Windows).
N OTE : The following illustrations and instructions do not apply to all applications. Many
applications, such as Adobe PageMaker, Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, QuarkXPress, and
CorelDRAW, have other color management options in addition to those presented in the
printer driver. For information about specific applications, see Fiery Color Reference.
Use the following procedure to set the color options for Windows computers.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS COMPUTERS
1 Choose Print in your application.
2 Select E-5000/E-3000 as your printer and click Properties.
In the Properties dialog box, the Fiery Printing tab is displayed.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
97
3 Click the Color icon.
4 Specify the settings for the print options in the Color window.
For information about ColorWise print options, see page 86.
5 Click Expert Settings.
The Expert Color Settings dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays most of the ColorWise print options for the E-5000/E-3000.
6 Click Update to display the current E-5000/E-3000 settings.
If the Update button does not appear, make sure that Two-Way Communication is set up.
For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see Printing from Windows.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
98
7 Specify the settings for the main ColorWise print options.
For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about
individual print options, see page 86.
8 Click OK to exit Expert Color Settings.
9 Click OK to close the Properties window, and then click OK to send your job.
Setting color management print options for Mac OS
This section explains how to set color management print options with the printer drivers for
Mac OS.
Before you proceed, do the following:
• Install the E-5000/E-3000 PPD (see Printing from Mac OS).
• Set up the E-5000/E-3000 for printing (see Printing from Mac OS).
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR MAC OS X COMPUTERS
1 Choose Print in your application.
The Print dialog box appears.
2 For Mac OS X v10.3.x and later, choose ColorSync from the drop-down list.
The ColorSync pane appears.
3 Choose In Printer from the Color Conversion menu.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
4 Choose ColorWise from the drop-down list.
The ColorWise pane appears.
5 Select Two-Way Communication.
For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see Printing from Mac OS.
6 Specify the settings for the print options in the ColorWise pane.
For information about ColorWise print options, see page 86.
7 Click Expert Settings in the Print Mode pane.
The Expert Color Settings dialog box appears.
99
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
100
8 Choose settings for the main ColorWise print options.
For information about ColorWise print options, see page 86.
9 Click OK.
The ColorWise pane reappears.
10 Click Print.
Using Expert Color Settings to enable Device Link Profiles
When you print a job, you can enable Device Link Profiles by using the E-5000/E-3000
printer driver if you have Two-Way Communication enabled. When you enable a Device
Link Profile, you will be able to see the Device Link Profile in use in Expert Color.
N OTE : If you do not have Two-Way Communication enabled, and you select an RGB Source
Profile and Output Profile that corresponds to a Device Link Profile, the Device Link Profile
will be activated, although you will not see the Device Link Profile in use in Expert Color.
For information about installing and assigning Device Link Profiles, see page 28.
N OTE : The procedures for enabling Device Link Profiles using Expert Color Settings for
Windows and Mac OS X are similar. The following illustrations use Windows screens.
Any differences are noted.
TO USE THE E-5000/E-3000 PRINTER DRIVER TO ENABLE DEVICE LINK PROFILES
1 Enable Two-Way Communication.
For more information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see Printing from Windows
or Printing from Mac OS.
2 From your application, choose Print.
3 Select E-5000/E-3000 as your printer and click Properties.
4 Click the Color icon.
5 Click Expert Settings.
COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS
101
6 Select the Source Profile and the Output Profile.
When you select a Source Profile and Output Profile combination that is defined in a
Device Link Profile, the Device Link Profile is automatically enabled.
When the Device Link Profile is selected, the Color Process workflow updates and some
options may not appear. You will see the message “Device Link Profile in use” under the
RGB Source Profile or CMYK Simulation Profile.
1
Device Link Profile in use
1
7 Click OK to exit Expert Color Settings.
8 Click OK to close the Properties window, and then click OK to send your job.
IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS
102
IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS
This chapter describes Simple ASCII File Format (SAIFF), which you can use to import
density measurements from measurement devices. To use your own measurement data from
an alternate measurement instrument, record your individual readings in a text file, and then
structure the file as follows.
Simple ASCII Import File Format
This format describes Status T measurement data for import into the ColorWise Pro Tools
Calibrator. The three possible file formats are:
• 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page
• 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page
• 1D Status T density for other pages (maximum of 256 patches per ink)
The file format is ASCII and has no tabs. A single space or multiple spaces are used
as delimiters. Blank lines are not allowed. Each line in the file represents four patches
(C, M, Y, K) of a specific ink value. Comments may be on any line in the file. Comment lines
must start with a pound sign (#) followed by a space. (A line with a pound sign followed by
any character other than a space has been reserved.) Comments must be on a line by
themselves.
Each line of data contains five values. The first number is the sequential patch number (for
EFI 21 and EFI 34 pages) or the ink value percentage (for other pages). The four values that
follow are the density values of C, M, Y, and K of the corresponding patch. Lines are ordered
either by increasing sequential patch numbers, or by increasing the ink percentage.
For Windows computers, the file extension must be .cm1. For Mac OS computers, the file
type must be ‘TEXT’.
Measurement data in EFI 21 and EFI 34 are paper-relative. For other pages, if the first line
corresponds to zero ink value, the Calibrator assumes that the measurement data is absolute
and adjusts it to become paper-relative by subtracting the density values of the first line from
the remaining patches.
IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS
103
Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page
This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 21 patch
page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last
must be 21.
#!EFI 3
# EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data
type: 1DST21
# Cyan Magent Yellow Black
1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400
2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700
3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000
(…more data…)
20 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700
21 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500
Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page
This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 34 patch
page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last
must be 34.
#!EFI 3
# EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data
type: 1DST34
# Cyan Magent Yellow Black
1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400
2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700
3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000
(…more data…)
33 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700
34 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500
IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS
104
Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page
This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of a user-defined patch
page. The value in the first column is the ink/toner percentage of the patch. The first
percentage must be 0 and the last percentage must be 100. The percentages must increase
in between.
#!EFI 3
# EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data
type: 1DST
# percnt Cyan Magent Yellow Black
0.0000 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400
0.3922 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700
1.1765 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000
(…more data…)
98.0000 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700
100.0000 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500
105
INDEX
INDEX
A
Absolute Colorimetric rendering style 92
Apple Standard setting, RGB Source Profile
option 94
Auto Trapping option 86
AutoGray 23
B
Black Overprint option 86
Black Text/Graphics option 87
C
calibration
checking status 59
ColorCal 55 to 56
Comparison Page 39
curves 39, 58
DTP32 44
DTP41 46
ED-100 48
ES-1000 52
from copier display panel 55
importing density measurements 102
measurement page 58
measurements 57
overview 57
patches 58
restoring defaults 40
scheduling 59
targets 57, 58
viewing measurements 39
Calibration Files folder 13, 18
Calibrator
Expert mode 38
printing Comparison Page 39
restoring defaults 40
using 22, 37
viewing measurements 39
CMYK Color Reference.ps 13, 18
CMYK Simulation Method option 89
CMYK Simulation Profile option
88, 89
Color Chart 59
Color Editor 22
AutoGray 23
color management system (CMS) 9
color profiles 10
color reference files for Windows users 13
Color Reference pages 59
color rendering dictionary (CRD) 9, 92
Color Setup 33
color space 85
ColorCal calibration
from copier display panel 55
ColorWise
key features 9
print options 33
workflow diagram 85
ColorWise Pro Tools
Calibrator 22, 37
checking calibration status 59
Combine Separations option 90
Comparison Page 39
Composite Overprint option 90
composites, printing 87, 90, 95
Configuration page 14, 19, 59
connection, configuring
14, 16, 19, 21
Contrast ICC rendering style 92
copier display panel
calibration from 55
removing calibration 56
CRD 9, 92
custom simulations 89
Custom21.ps 13, 18
Custom34.ps 13, 18
D
densitometer
DTP32 44
ED-100 48
density 58, 59
importing 102
Device Link Profiles
about 28
106
INDEX
assigning settings 30
enabling using Color Setup 34
enabling using Expert Color
Settings 100
installing 29
device name 15, 21
DNS name 14, 19
Domain Name Server 19
DTP32, calibrating with 44
DTP41, calibrating with 46
M
E
output profile
Spot-On 32, 60, 61, 71, 75, 76, 79
Output Profile option 91
output profiles 58
ED-100
calibrating with 48
importing measurements with
71, 72
EFIRGB, RGB Source Profile option 94
ES-1000
calibrating with 52
importing measurements with
71, 72
Mac OS color management options 98
measurements page 58
monitor compensation
Spot-On 70
N
None setting, RGB Source Profile
option 94
O
P
ICC profiles 10
defined 9
downloading 28
editing 22
gray balance, correcting 23
rendering styles 92
Image ICC rendering style 92
PANTONE Book.ps 13, 18
PANTONE Coated Color
Reference 95
passwords, for calibration 37, 57
patches page 58
Perceptual ICC rendering style 92
Photographic rendering style 92
PostScript color issues 86, 88, 94
PowerPoint, RGB color reference
file 18
PPD 96, 98
Presentation rendering style 92
Print Gray using Black Only option 91
print options
Mac OS 98
setting defaults 33
Windows 96
printer drivers
Mac OS 98
two-way communication
89, 91, 94
Windows 96
Profile Manager
downloading profiles 28
using 27
profiles 10
L
Q
F
Fiery utilities, configuring the
connection for 16, 21
FieryColorBar.eps 13, 18
Full (Output GCR) setting, CMYK
Simulation Method option 90
Full (Source GCR) setting, CMYK
Simulation Method option 89
G
Graphics ICC rendering style 92
gray balance, correcting 23
I
Lightness, Spot-On 70
Quick setting, CMYK Simulation
Method option 89
107
INDEX
R
Relative Colorimetric rendering style 92
rendering styles 9, 86
Rendering Styles option 92
RGB images
defining source profiles for 93
PostScript and non-PostScript
conversion 94
RGB page 01 18
RGB page 01.doc 13
RGB page 02 18
RGB page 02.ppt 13
RGB Separation option 93
RGB Source Profile option 85, 93
S
SAIFF format 102
Saturation ICC rendering style 92
Saturation, Spot-On 70
separations
printing 87, 90, 95
target color space 93
simulations, custom 89
Source 1-10 setting, RGB Source Profile
option 94
spectrophotometer
DTP41 45
Spot Color Dictionaries 32, 60
Spot Color Matching option 95
spot colors, CMYK equivalents 95
spot colors, matching to CMYK
equivalents 32, 60
Spot-On 32, 60
adding color 65
Color Spacing 70
downloading color group 66
editing 67
Set Center Patch Color 68
Spot-On Color Search 69
Spot-On main window 68
ES-1000 71
factory defaults 72
Lightness 70
main window 62
monitor compensation 70
named colors 60
output profile 61, 75, 76
rearranging color group 64
renaming color 65
RGB or CMYK values 60
Saturation 70
Spot Color Matching 60
substitute colors 60
uploading color group 67
using measurement instruments 71
sRGB, RGB Source Profile option 94
Standard21.ps 13, 18
Standard34.ps 13, 18
Status T 102
Substitute Colors
accuracy 81
adding substitute colors 76, 80
CMYK (0-100%) mode 80
color substitution 82
defining 76
Set Center Patch Color 77
Spot-On Color Search 78
Spot-On main window 76
downloading substitute groups 83
new 74
new substitute group 75
principles 81
printing 79
priority scheme 82
renaming substitute colors 80
RGB (0-100%) mode 80
RGB (Device Code 0-255) mode 80
tolerance 80
tolerance range 81
uploading substitute groups 83
workflow 74
Substitute Colors option 96
SWOP 89
T
targets, for calibration 58
terminology 7, 35
Test Page 59
transfer functions 58
Two-Way Communication 89, 91, 94
U
undercolor removal (UCR) 94
W
Windows Color Files folder 13
Windows, print options 96
Word, RGB color reference file 18
Fiery® Color Server
Fiery Color Reference
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45055195
01 March 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
7
About this manual
7
For additional information
8
OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
Understanding color management systems
How color management works
Using ColorWise and application color management
Using ColorWise color management tools
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
9
9
10
11
12
13
Understanding workflows
13
Standard recommended workflow
15
Choosing colors
16
Understanding color models
17
Optimizing for output type
18
Maintaining color accuracy
19
MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS
Using office applications
Using color matching tools with office applications
Working with office applications
20
20
21
22
Defining colors
22
Working with imported files
22
Selecting options when printing
23
Output profiles
23
Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file
23
CONTENTS
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
4
24
Working with PostScript applications
24
Using color matching tools with PostScript applications
25
Using swatch color matching tools
25
Using the CMYK Color Reference
25
Using the PANTONE reference
26
Defining colors
27
Working with imported images
29
Using CMYK simulations
30
Using application-defined halftone screens
31
Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file
32
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
33
Loading monitor settings files and ICC device profiles in Photoshop 6.x/7.x
33
Specifying color settings
34
Configuring Photoshop color settings
Saving files from Photoshop
Choosing a file format
Selecting options when printing
Advanced tips for using PostScript color management
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
Adobe InDesign 2.0.1 and 1.5.2
34
37
37
39
41
44
44
InDesign color settings
44
Importing images
46
Selecting options when printing
47
CONTENTS
Adobe PageMaker 7.x and 6.5 for Mac OS and Windows
5
51
Windows version requirement
51
Installing the printer description files for Windows
51
PageMaker color settings
52
Importing images
53
Selecting options when printing
53
Using optional Color Management from PageMaker
54
QuarkXPress 5.x and 4.x for Mac OS and Windows
55
Importing images
55
Selecting options when printing
55
Optional Color Management from QuarkXPress
57
QuarkXPress 3.32 for Mac OS and Windows
57
Windows version requirement
57
Importing images
57
Selecting options when printing
57
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
Adobe Illustrator for Windows and Mac OS
59
60
Note about color models in Adobe Illustrator
60
Illustrator color settings
60
Specifying print options
61
Saving files for importing into other documents
62
Specifying print options
63
Using Illustrator color management
65
FreeHand 10.x, 9.x, and 8.x for Windows and Mac OS
66
Setting FreeHand color settings
66
Defining colors
66
Importing images
67
Saving files for importing into other documents
67
Specifying print options
68
Optional color management in FreeHand
69
CONTENTS
CorelDRAW for Windows and Mac OS
6
70
Defining colors
70
Importing images
70
Saving files for importing into other documents
70
Specifying print options
71
Optional color management in CorelDRAW
72
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
73
The properties of color
74
The physics of color
74
CIE color model
75
Hue, saturation, and brightness
75
Additive and subtractive color systems
77
Understanding color gamut
80
Printing techniques
81
Halftone and continuous tone devices
Using color effectively
81
82
General guidelines
82
Color wheel
83
Color and text
85
Raster images and vector graphics
86
Optimizing files for processing and printing
87
Resolution of raster images
87
Scaling
88
BIBLIOGRAPHY
89
INDEX
91
INTRODUCTION
7
INTRODUCTION
This manual provides a reference for information about optimizing color printing with the
Color Server and improving color quality and performance for all Color Server models.
Specific features and options may vary, depending on the Color Server model at your site.
N OTE : The term “printer” is used throughout this manual to denote a supported printer or
copier; the term “toner” refers to either toner or ink.
About this manual
This manual provides an overview of general color concepts, with a specific focus on color
management for print output. It describes multiple scenarios (called workflows) during
which color information can be specified. It also provides application notes that explain how
to print to the Color Server from popular Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac OS
applications.
Color terms and concepts, such as “color space,” “spot color,” “gamut,” and “source profile”
appear in bold throughout this manual. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms are
unfamiliar, see Glossary, which is a separate document in this set.
INTRODUCTION
8
For additional information
This manual is one in a set of documentation that includes manuals for both users and system
administrators. For a description of all the available documentation, see Welcome. All other
manuals should be available at your site. Refer to them for more information as directed in
this manual.
For additional information about the topics discussed in this manual, see:
• Color Printing: For detailed information about the color printing options and settings
available with your Color Server, as well as the ColorWise® color management system
built into your Color Server.
• Print Options: For information about how to set the ColorWise print options.
For information about performing color management tasks and using ColorWise Pro Tools™,
see ColorWise Pro Tools Help.
For general information about printing in color, see “Desktop Color Primer” on page 73 and
the sources in the “Bibliography” on page 89.
OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
OVERVIEW
OF COLOR
9
MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
To create successful color documents and presentations, you can take advantage of the features
of color management software as they are implemented by the Color Server and on your
desktop computer. This chapter is devoted to various elements of color management that
contribute to predictable color results.
Understanding color management systems
A color management system (CMS) is a “translator” between the color space of the source
device (for example, the monitor or a scanner) and the color space of the destination device
(for example, the printer). It compares the color space in which the source image was created
to the color space in which the job will be output, and adjusts the colors in the document to
maintain consistency across different devices. A CMS typically uses a device-independent
color space, such as CIELAB, as its intermediate color space. To perform its translation, a
CMS needs information about the color space of the source image and the gamut of the
printer. This information is provided through profiles, often created by the makers of the
computer monitor or printer. The end product of a CMS conversion is a printed document
or an image file in the gamut of a particular printer.
There has been progress toward standardization in the field of digital color management
systems. Both the Windows and Mac OS operating systems support an industry standard
format developed by the International Color Consortium (ICC). This ICC format is
implemented on Windows computers and on Mac OS computers. Other software developers
are also incorporating color management systems into high-end applications.
The Color Server color management system, ColorWise, supports this standard profile
format.
10
OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
How color management works
Before you can print a color document, the color data in it must be converted to the gamut of
the printer. Whether performed by the Color Server or a host-based CMS, the process of
converting color data for a printer is the same: the CMS interprets RGB image data according
to a specified source profile and adjusts both RGB and CMYK data according to a specified
output profile, also called a destination profile by some color management systems.
Color management system
Source
profile
Output
profile
Device-independent
color space
Input data
Printed data or file
The source profile defines the RGB color space of the image’s source: characteristics such as
the white point, gamma, and the type of phosphors used. The output profile defines the
gamut of an output device, such as a printer. The Color Server (or the host-based CMS) uses
a device-independent color space to translate between the source color space and the color
space of the output device.
The Color Server allows you to specify default and override settings for the source color space
information and the output profile information (see Color Printing). When you use these
settings, there is no need to use the features of other color management systems. Your
Color Server software includes ICC profiles for use with other color management systems,
although conflicts may arise when the Color Server CMS is used in conjunction with a host
CMS.
You can also use color management systems to adjust color data to the gamut of an output
device other than the one to which you are printing. This process of simulating another
output device is commonly used for proofing jobs that are printed on an offset press. For
more information about the Color Server simulation feature, see Color Printing.
The type of print job and the final output device, Color Server or offset press, determines the
workflow that provides the best results. For information about choosing workflows, see
“Using Color Management Workflows” on page 13.
OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
11
Using ColorWise and application color management
The Color Server color management system, ColorWise is designed to provide both casual
and expert users the best color output for a variety of purposes. Several applications also
provide their own color management system. This manual describes how to optimize print
output using both ColorWise color management and application color management.
The Color Server can intelligently manage the printed appearance of RGB, CMYK, and spot
colors. You can allow the Color Server to manage color for most color printing jobs without
adjusting any settings.
A desktop (host-based) color management system uses ICC profiles to convert colors from
one device gamut to another (see “Desktop Color Primer” on page 73). The color data is
converted when it passes from one application to another or when the job is sent to the
printer; thus, the processing occurs on your computer, as opposed to the Color Server.
Conventional color management systems typically address only color conversions, and they
occupy your computer processor. When you use ColorWise, jobs leave your computer and are
processed faster on the Color Server.
The advantages to ColorWise color management versus desktop (application) color
management include the following:
• Relieving your computer from performing additional processing. Delaying color
conversions until the color data reaches the Color Server frees your computer so that you
can continue working, and color conversions on the Color Server are, in most cases, much
faster than similar conversions on a host computer.
• Eliminating the potential for undesirable color management-related conflicts, such as
iterative color conversions and inconsistent color. The Color Server applies global
corrections to specific groups of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors to avoid such conflicts.
• Accepting RGB files in addition to larger CMYK files from applications, which minimizes
network traffic and enables jobs to print faster.
ColorWise uses ICC profiles to convert colors to the device gamut or simulate other devices,
such as an offset printing press. ColorWise manages color conversions for all users printing to
the Color Server from Windows and Mac OS computers. It allows users to follow a simple
workflow with minimal intervention using robust default settings, while giving advanced
users the control and precision they need.
OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
12
Using ColorWise color management tools
Your Color Server user software includes several types of color reference pages that allow you
to see the range of colors that can be printed on your printer. For predictable color, use the
color reference pages when defining the colors in your document.
The resources available are as follows:
RGB Color Reference: A Microsoft Word file and a Microsoft PowerPoint file that allow you
to view the colors available in the standard palettes of office applications and to see how those
colors print on the Color Server (see “Using color matching tools with office applications” on
page 21).
CMYK Color Reference: An 11-page downloadable PostScript file of CMYK color patches (see
“Using the CMYK Color Reference” on page 25).
Process Simulation of PANTONE Solid Coated Colors: A 19-page downloadable PostScript
file of color patches showing CMYK equivalents of PANTONE Coated colors. This file prints
differently depending on the setting of the Spot Color Matching option (see “Using the
PANTONE reference” on page 26).
In addition, you can print RGB, CMY, and PANTONE color charts from the Color Server.
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
13
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
A workflow is the path a print job follows from creation to destination. In the workflow of
any job, there are various points at which decisions are made about how to define, use, and
translate color. The choices made, and the point at which they are made, impact the color
output produced.
This chapter introduces issues with color management in specific desktop applications and
discusses the interaction between those applications and ColorWise color management.
Understanding workflows
The term “workflow” is used to describe the path a job follows from its creation in a desktop
application to final printed output. The Color Server supports a variety of workflows with
different levels of complexity. There are several points at which color management can be
performed on a job (see the illustration on page 14). The information provided at each step
(for example, the type of color used) impacts the workflow of the job.
Always consider the complexity of the workflow. Every time colors are converted,
performance and color accuracy are affected. A workflow with a minimum number of steps
minimizes the risk of error.
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
Application CMS: Off
DOCUMENT
Disable the color management options provided by the
application to ensure that the Color Server receives color
data properly and prints it accurately. For information, see
the documentation that accompanies your application.
Select colors based on the desired output (see “Choosing
colors” on page 16).
C M
Y K
Spot
R
G B
SAVE AS (File Format)
EPS recommended
PRINT
Set ColorWise print options
Select file format based on the desired output. EPS data is
not manipulated.
Use ColorWise Color Management as described in this
manual and Color Printing.
Printer driver color options: Off
Do not use the color management options provided by the
printer driver. For more information, see Print Options.
Calibration
Device maintenance
Color Server
Optimal output
Calibrate as described in Color Printing. Perform regular
maintenance as recommended by the printer manufacturer.
Use the paper stock, toner, and other materials
recommended by the printer manufacturer.
14
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
15
Standard recommended workflow
The Color Server is highly optimized for the specific printer it supports. ColorWise addresses
issues unique to your printer, including screens, individual toner response, interactions
among toners, natural smoothness of blends, and the capability to render spot and custom
colors. The Color Server distinguishes text and graphics from image elements, so that black
channel information is preserved while parameters used for CMYK color separations are
maintained.
The recommended standard color workflow uses ColorWise calibration and color
management. The Color Server comes into play near the end of the color workflow.
For this workflow:
• Bypass any color management in the applications and printer drivers.
This ensures that the colors you selected reach the Color Server and ColorWise in a
usable form. Consider, however, that ColorWise fully supports color management from
applications and printer drivers (see “Using ColorWise and application color
management” on page 11).
• Set the CMYK Simulation Profile option in ColorWise to match the CMYK color space
used in the application to select the colors. Any CMYK Simulation setting (except Match
Copy, if available) applies calibration, so the response of the printer appears stable.
The recommended values for CMYK Simulation are SWOP in the U.S., Euroscale in
Europe, and DIC in Japan—choices that reflect the color standard for each region.
If colors have been selected specifically for your calibrated Color Server, set CMYK
Simulation to None.
• Set other ColorWise print options as appropriate. For a list and descriptions of ColorWise
print options that affect CMYK, RGB, spot, and other colors, see Color Printing.
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
16
Choosing colors
When working with color materials, whether they are presentations, illustrations,
or complicated page designs, you make aesthetic decisions about the colors you use. After you
set a goal, you must make the best use of the capabilities of your Color Server to realize your
design in print. Your color printing system becomes an ally in this creative process to the
extent that results are predictable:
• If you designed a poster to print on the Color Server, you want the printed colors to match
the design specification.
• If you are printing presentations on the Color Server, you want to preserve the vivid colors
you see on your monitor.
• If you are working with color that is to be printed on an offset press, you want
the Color Server output to match other prepress proofs or PANTONE color swatch
books.
The colors that you define when creating a file in an application, and the color management
tools within the application that you use, impact how the file is processed (workflow) and the
final output you can expect.
Use color management to control color output by performing the following tasks:
• Select a color model: Different types of applications use different color models. The color
model you select, and whether or when data is converted from one color model to another,
influences the final color output.
• Optimize for output type: The type of final output influences your color and application
choices.
• Use color matching tools: The Color Server provides several tools to preview colors
available on a device and define them within an application.
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
17
Understanding color models
You can define colors in several different color models, most commonly RGB, CMYK, and
the spot color matching system (such as PANTONE). Depending on the application you use,
you may or may not have a choice of the color model.
RGB colors are used when you take output from an RGB device such as a digital camera or a
scanner. Another use of the RGB color model is for displaying colors on a monitor.
CMYK colors are what most printers use.
Spot colors, such as PANTONE, are special inks manufactured to run on an offset printing
press. Spot colors can be simulated using CMYK toners (also known as process color inks).
With the Spot Color Matching print option, you can determine how spot colors are printed
at the Color Server:
• Spot Color Matching On uses color tables built in the Color Server to simulate the spot
color with the closest equivalent available using the CMYK toners of the copier/printer
connected to the Color Server.
• Spot Color Matching Off instructs the Color Server to simulate the spot color using CMYK
equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer. These are the same CMYK values used
by applications that include spot color libraries. This CMYK combination is then printed
with the CMYK Simulation setting you choose, such as SWOP or DIC.
The color model used by your application determines the methods available for choosing
colors, as well as the way color data is transmitted to the Color Server:
• Office applications, such as presentation software, spreadsheets, and word processing
programs, use the RGB color model. They typically transmit only RGB data to the
Color Server.
• Illustration applications use both the RGB and CMYK color models, but typically
transmit only CMYK data to the Color Server.
• Pixel-editing applications use both the RGB and CMYK color models. They can transmit
either RGB or CMYK data to the Color Server.
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
18
Optimizing for output type
You can use the Color Server for on-demand color printing and for color proofing.
On-demand color printing refers to those jobs for which the Color Server is the final print
device. Printing jobs to the Color Server in preparation for printing on an offset press is
referred to as color proofing. Both types of Color Server print jobs can use RGB, CMYK, and
spot colors.
Characteristics of on-demand jobs
Characteristics of offset proofs
Bright, saturated colors are often desirable.
Require the printed colors to match
those from another set of CMYK
printing conditions.
Colors are achieved using the full range
of colors available, referred to as the full
gamut of the printer or, more simply, device
CMYK.
Colors that are specified for an offset press
require CMYK simulation that is optimized
for proofing on the printer.
N OTE : The term “on-demand” applies to producing printed output when it is needed. You
may be familiar with the term “short-run”, which usually applies to the volume of a printing
task. Although these terms do not mean exactly the same thing, “on-demand” in this manual
applies also to short-run printing scenarios. Because you can print as many pages as you need
and can reprint jobs quickly, the Color Server performs equally well in either environment.
The type of printing you plan for the document, on-demand color printing on the
Color Server versus color proofing for eventual printing on an offset press, determines the way
you define colors, as well as the print option settings you choose.
• For on-demand color printing on the Color Server, use any application and define colors
in either RGB or CMYK. If your application supports it, you can also choose colors from
the PANTONE color library. Choose the appropriate settings for print options affecting
color output (for descriptions of the print options, see Color Printing).
• For color proofing, use a PostScript-defined color in CMYK or choose colors from color
libraries, such as the PANTONE color library. Placed images can also be defined in RGB
or CMYK. Choose the appropriate settings for print options affecting color output (see
Color Printing).
N OTE : The Color Server allows you to use RGB or CMYK data when printing proofs for
an offset press run. However, sending data to an imagesetter usually requires CMYK data.
USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS
19
Maintaining color accuracy
For the colors you see on your monitor to match those on your printed output, they must go
through color management, including precise calibration of your monitor and Color Server.
If viewing colors on the monitor is critical, consider using a professional profiling software
package and instrument, such as the EFI Color Profiler, to create a monitor profile. A monitor
profile enables the application to compensate for the color behavior of the monitor when
displaying images. As a result, colors previewed on the monitor match the colors more closely
in your printed output.
If you are not equipped or inclined to maintain accurate monitor color management, you can
opt for an easier approach. Determine which is more important to you: printed colors or
on-screen colors.
• If displayed colors are more important, trust your eyes and your monitor. Visually select
colors on your monitor, but be aware that colors are optimized only for your monitor.
When the document is opened on other monitors, the colors may look different. And even
though printed colors may not match those on your monitor, they still print to the
Color Server with good results.
• If printed colors are your priority, choose colors from printed samples. By using sample
colors, you ensure your printed output remains consistent, regardless of how the
colors appear on different monitors. Print the palette of available colors from business
applications and select colors from the printed samples. Color reference files are included
on the User Software CD. (For more information, see“Using color matching tools with
office applications” on page 21 and “Using color matching tools with PostScript
applications” on page 25.) You can also print color charts from the Color Server and select
colors by name or number from the printed samples. Advanced applications allow you to
define colors in the easier-to-control spot and CMYK color spaces. For more information
about color selection, see “Choosing colors” on page 16.
MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS
20
MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS
The ColorWise color management system provides complete color management for jobs
printed from office applications and other applications that do not generate PostScript. This
chapter provides instructions for printing color documents from Graphics Device Interface
(GDI) and QuickDraw applications, such as presentation, spreadsheet, and word processing
applications. Use these instructions with the Microsoft Office applications.
Using office applications
The Color Server must receive PostScript instructions to print an image or a document. Many
applications do not create these PostScript instructions, relying on the printer driver to create
them. Included in this category are most word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation
graphics applications. These applications use Windows GDI to display and print when
running Windows, and Apple QuickDraw to display and print when running Mac OS.
The term “office applications” is used in this manual to refer to these GDI and QuickDraw
applications.
All office applications handle color similarly, using the same RGB color model used for the
color monitor. Most office applications allow you to choose colors from a palette of
preselected colors. Some allow you to add new colors to the palette using a color picker.
Although some applications allow you to specify color using the CMY, HSL, and HSV color
models, these applications always send RGB color data to the Color Server.
(An exception to this is a CMYK EPS file placed in the document, which is sent as
CMYK data.)
When working with color in office applications, consider the following:
• The range of colors that can be displayed in RGB on your monitor is much larger than the
range of colors that can be printed on your printer. When you print the document,
out-of-gamut RGB colors are mapped to the colors your printer can produce.
• Office applications send only RGB data to the Color Server. You control the rendering
style of the color conversion with your selection of a CRD.
Each CRD uses a different color rendering style and has a different way of mapping
unprintable colors to the color gamut of your printer. For more information about color
rendering styles, see Color Printing.
MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS
21
Using color matching tools with office applications
Your Color Server user software includes two RGB color reference pages, a Microsoft Word
file and a Microsoft PowerPoint file. You can print these files using different CRDs to see how
the colors appear when printed to the Color Server. For best results, print the color reference
page using the same print options you plan to use for your final document. Select the colors
you want to use from the printed version of the RGB color reference page and use those colors
in your document.
RGB Color Reference
(Microsoft PowerPoint)
MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS
22
Working with office applications
Before printing from these applications, make sure the appropriate printer driver and the
Color Server PPD are installed on your computer, as described in Printing from Windows or
Printing from Mac OS.
Defining colors
Office applications use the RGB color model. The only way to use CMYK or PANTONE
colors is to define them in EPS format files with an illustration or page layout application,
and then place these files in Microsoft Office documents. Colors in EPS files are preserved
until they reach the Color Server (assuming no PostScript Color Management information
was included).
Office applications use low resolution to display EPS files, but the EPS images are printed at
full resolution. In general, use EPS files only when RGB colors are impractical in your specific
workflow. EPS files are useful when using large or complex images that must be printed at full
resolution or exceed the memory allocation of some office applications.
Working with imported files
Your application may allow you to import a variety of file formats. If you encounter printing
problems when using other imported file formats, such as TIFF and PICT, EPS files are
recommended.
N OTE : If you cannot import EPS elements, it may be necessary to perform a “custom install”
of your office applications.
Even when there are no user-defined color management options within office applications,
color conversions do occur when you import images or page elements that were not defined in
RGB. To avoid such conversions with imported files, use the EPS file format for non-RGB
artwork that is to be imported into office applications.
All RGB images placed in a document are affected by the settings you choose for the RGB
Source and Rendering Style print options.
Mixing imported image types (Advanced color management)
If you place multiple RGB images, mixed non-photographic and photographic, into an office
application file, a single CRD may not optimize output for all the images. In this case,
you can have the photographic images to bypass the CRD altogether. To accomplish this,
open the photographic image in CMYK mode with a pixel-editing application, such as
Photoshop, and perform color correction. Save the image as a Photoshop EPS and import it
into the document.
MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS
23
Selecting options when printing
There are few differences among office applications with regard to Color Server printing. To
specify print options and color management settings, follow the instructions in Color Printing.
To specify these options, you must use a PostScript Level 2 (or later) printer driver, such as an
Adobe PostScript Printer Driver.
Because office applications send RGB data to the Color Server, your choice of RGB Source
and Rendering Style settings are important. Specify the appropriate CRD for the desired color
effect (see Color Printing).
Output profiles
All color data in the job is affected by the output profile on the Color Server. This profile may
be the one designed for your device and shipped with the Color Server, or it may be a custom
profile created at your site (see Color Printing). If necessary, print the Test Page to see which
profile is the active default on the Color Server.
Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file
Take the following steps to ensure color accuracy:
• When saving EPS files, do not include PostScript Color Management information. This
minimizes the risk of conflicting data and multiple color conversions. PostScript Color
Management causes your CMYK and RGB colors to be interpreted by the Color Server as
though they were supplied in the Lab color space and, as a result, processed by CRDs,
rather than your simulation settings.
• Include ICC color information in files. ColorWise does not conflict with this information,
and such data is useful for identifying the specific color space used by your files.
• Do not include halftone and transfer functions.
• Turn off color management in the printer driver.
On Windows computers, if the printer driver offers Image Color Matching options, select
Printer Image Color Matching.
On Mac OS computers, set the printer driver to include no color management commands
at print time (see Color Printing).
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
24
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
This chapter provides guidelines for using applications that have the ability to write their own
PostScript, such as some page layout, illustration, and pixel-editing applications. For
information about using specific applications, see “Managing Color in Adobe Photoshop” on
page 33, “Managing Color in Page Layout Applications” on page 44, or “Managing Color in
Illustration Applications” on page 59.
Working with PostScript applications
Most applications used for illustration, pixel editing, and page layout can create the
PostScript information they send to a PostScript printer or save in PostScript files. Illustrator,
Photoshop, PageMaker, QuarkXPress, and Macromedia FreeHand are all PostScript
applications.
PostScript applications work with color in many different ways. Most allow you to choose
process colors (by entering percentages for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black), as well as
named colors from a spot color system, such as PANTONE. When you print composites,
these applications send process-color equivalents for named spot colors to the Color Server.
In some applications, you can also choose colors using the RGB, HSB, HSL, or other color
models.
Generally, PostScript applications send color information to the Color Server as CMYK data.
An exception to this is an RGB image placed in a document, which is sent directly to the
Color Server (unless you specify special color management settings in the application). In
addition, some PostScript applications that allow you to define colors in RGB or other color
models also send data to the Color Server in those color spaces.
Color controls in PostScript applications are typically designed for printing on an offset press,
and some adjustments are required for printing to the Color Server. Displayed versions of
colors you choose in these applications may not match Color Server output exactly, and
named colors may not print accurately on the Color Server, since these colors typically require
custom inks.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
25
Using color matching tools with PostScript applications
With PostScript applications, you can work with colors created with any of the color models
supported by the application. All PostScript applications support CMYK. Some also support
RGB and other color models based on monitor display values. PostScript applications also
allow you to choose named colors using one or more color libraries, such as PANTONE (see
page 26).
Using swatch color matching tools
Your Color Server user software includes several color reference pages (see page 12). By
choosing colors from these reference pages, you ensure that you print the same color from
your device. For best results, calibrate the Color Server before printing the reference pages.
N OTE : We highly recommend that you use swatch color matching to ensure predictable color
printing results with the Color Server or match your Color Server output to colors produced
by other printers.
N OTE : Swatch color matching does not match monitor colors to printed colors. For this, you
must use a color management system and calibrate your monitor.
Using the CMYK Color Reference
Use the CMYK Color Reference included with your Color Server user software to see how
various cyan, magenta, yellow, and black combinations look when printed on your printer.
To print the CMYK Color Reference, download the file to the Color Server. The printed
pages display groups of color patches in graduated combinations of yellow, magenta, and
cyan, and smaller patches that include 25%, 50%, and 75% black. Refer to these pages to
pick colors and specify process color values in your application. For the location of the file on
the User Software CD, see Printing from Windows or Printing from Mac OS.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
26
Using the PANTONE reference
Use this reference (Process Simulation of PANTONE Solid Coated Colors) included with
your Color Server user software to help ensure predictable results with colors chosen from the
PANTONE color library.
The information printed by this reference depends on the Spot Color Matching setting.
Spot Color Matching On prints swatches that simulate the spot color with the closest equivalent
available using the CMYK toners of the copier/printer connected to the Color Server. The
equivalent PANTONE color name/number is printed below each swatch.
Spot Color Matching Off prints swatches of the CMYK equivalents of PANTONE colors as
defined by PANTONE. (These are the same CMYK values defined in applications that
include PANTONE libraries.) The CMYK values used to produce the color, as well as
the PANTONE color name/number, are printed below each swatch.
To print the reference, download the file to the Color Server. For the location of the file on
the User Software CD, see Printing from Windows or Printing from Mac OS. If the default Spot
Color Matching setting on the Color Server is not the setting you want to use for printing the
PANTONE colors, download the file to the Hold queue, and then override the Spot Color
Matching setting using a job management utility, such as Command WorkStation.
For more information about using Command WorkStation, see the Command WorkStation
Help.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
27
Defining colors
The methods and options available for defining colors depend on the type of PostScript
application that you are using.
Color
model
Application
type
Color definition notes
CYMK
Photoshop
Choose colors in Photoshop with various color models, including
HSB, CIE Lab, RGB, and CMYK.
Page layout
application
Page layout applications generally use the CMYK color model. Some
allow you to define colors with other color models and may be able
to send that data to the Color Server in those other color models.
Generally, however, CRDs (which affect only RGB data) do not
affect colors defined in page layout applications.
For predictable results with CMYK colors, use the CMYK Color
Reference when defining colors in page layout applications (see
“Using color matching tools with PostScript applications” on
page 25).
Illustration
application
All illustration applications use the CMYK color model. Although
you may be allowed to define colors using other color models, these
applications generally send only CMYK data to the Color Server.
For predictable results with CMYK colors, use the CMYK Color
Reference pages when defining colors (see “Using color matching
tools with PostScript applications” on page 25).
Different versions of Illustrator support color models slightly
differently (see “Note about color models in Adobe Illustrator” on
page 60).
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
28
Color
model
Application
type
Color definition notes
RGB
Photoshop
Choose colors in Photoshop with various color models, including
HSB, CIE Lab, RGB, and CMYK.
Page layout
application
If the application allows you to define colors in RGB, determine
whether it converts the RGB data to CMYK before sending it to the
Color Server. If it does, this will determine which ColorWise print
options affect your job.
For example, if the application converts RGB black (defined in the
document as R0%, G0%, B0%) to four-color CMYK black when it
sends the job to the Color Server, the option you select for the Pure
Black Text/Graphics print option has no effect when you print the
job.
Illustration
application
If you define colors in RGB and print directly from the application,
the application converts the RGB data to CMYK before sending it
to the Color Server. This conversion by the application determines
which ColorWise print options affect your job.
For example, if the application converts RGB black (defined in the
document as R0%, G0%, B0%) to four-color CMYK black when it
sends the job to the Color Server, the option you select for the Pure
Black Text/Graphics print option has no effect when you print the
job.
Spot
Colors
Photoshop
Page layout
application
Illustration
application
Choose named colors from the PANTONE color library (see
“Using the PANTONE reference” on page 26). For best results, use
the color definition methods described in “Using swatch color
matching tools” on page 25.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
29
Working with imported images
You can import images into documents created in illustration applications (such as Illustrator)
and page layout applications (such as QuarkXPress). The recommended formats for images
imported into page layout documents are EPS (or EPSF) and TIFF. If you encounter a
problem using a TIFF format image, use the EPS file format. Support for importing other file
formats may be provided by individual applications.
All RGB images placed in a document are affected by the RGB Source and Rendering Style
settings. The ColorWise color management system applies the specified RGB Source setting
to all RGB data and then uses the specified Rendering Style (CRD) to perform a color
conversion. An exception to this occurs if you assign ICC profiles to RGB images using the
application’s color management tools (see the following section). In this case, the application
performs the color conversion of the image and sends CMYK data to the Color Server.
N OTE : To take advantage of RGB Source and Rendering Style settings for images imported
into QuarkXPress, save images in the EPS format or use the Quark PrintRGB XTension,
which outputs RGB TIFF image files without converting them to CMYK.
Mixing image types (Advanced color management)
If you place multiple RGB images, mixed non-photographic and photographic, into a file,
a single CRD may not optimize output for all the images. In this case, you can have the
photographic images to bypass the CRD altogether. To accomplish this, separate the image
to CMYK data with a pixel-editing application, such as Photoshop, and perform color
correction. Save the file as EPS or TIFF format and import it into the document.
If your application supports this feature, you can save the RGB image in TIFF format and
assign it an ICC profile and rendering intent when you import it into the document.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
30
Using CMYK simulations
You can specify a CMYK Simulation profile and a CMYK simulation method for a job
using the CMYK Simulation Profile and CMYK Simulation Method print options (see Color
Printing). The CMYK Simulation setting affects all CMYK color data sent by the page layout
or illustration application. It can also affect RGB data sent to a page layout application if RGB
Separation is set to Simulation.
• If the document contains CMYK graphics that were separated for an offset press standard,
apply the corresponding CMYK Simulation setting. For example, for graphics separated
for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK Simulation setting.
If you print separations to the Color Server and choose to use the Combine Separations
feature in conjunction with Full Simulation, the result may not match that of the same
page printed as composite.
• If the document contains CMYK graphics that were separated according to the color
characteristics of a custom ICC profile (not a press standard profile), specify the
corresponding profile as the CMYK Simulation Profile setting on the Color Server.
For more information on downloading CMYK Simulation profiles to the Color Server with
ColorWise Pro Tools, see Color Printing.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
31
Using application-defined halftone screens
If your site has installed the Fiery Graphic Arts Package (not available for all Color Server
models), you can define halftone screens from several PostScript applications and use them
when printing. The results vary depending on the application.
To define a halftone screen, use the application to adjust the Frequency and Angle values of
the halftone screen. For applications that use the Color Server default (InDesign, FreeHand,
QuarkXPress, and Illustrator 10), the ink dots are round. For applications that define
their own shape and do not use the Color Server default (PageMaker, Photoshop, and
Illustrator 9),the halftone dots may be a different shape. When you print the job, choose
Application Defined for the Halftone Screen print option.
The Frequency and Angle settings in the Application Defined halftone screen are used
regardless of whether the setting for Combine Separations is set to On or Off. For special
instructions for printing separations with Photoshop, see “Selecting options when printing”
on page 39.
N OTE : In general, using halftone screens is not recommended because the print output will
have visible dots of toner rather than smooth blends. Use halftone screens only when
necessary to achieve a specific style of print output.
MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS
32
Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file
To ensure color accuracy, take the following steps:
• When saving EPS files, do not include PostScript Color Management information. This
minimizes the risk of conflicting data and multiple color conversions. PostScript Color
Management causes your CMYK and RGB colors to be interpreted by the Color Server as
though they were supplied in the Lab color space and, as a result, processed by CRDs,
rather than your simulation settings.
• Include ICC color information in files. ColorWise does not conflict with this information,
and such data is useful for identifying the specific color space used by your files.
• Do not include halftone and transfer functions.
• Turn off color management in the printer driver.
On Windows computers, if the printer driver offers Image Color Matching options, select
Printer Image Color Matching.
On Mac OS computers, set the printer driver to include no color management commands
at print time (see Color Printing).
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
33
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
This chapter covers features of Adobe Photoshop versions 6.x and 7.x for Windows and
Mac OS. The illustrations show Mac OS dialog boxes, but the information and instructions
apply equally to the Windows version of Photoshop.
Because Photoshop uses a sophisticated color management system, you should perform some
color management tasks before you use Photoshop.
Loading monitor settings files and ICC device profiles in
Photoshop 6.x/7.x
After you have installed the Efirgb.icc monitor settings file and the ICC device profile for the
Color Server, they can be loaded at the same time in Photoshop 6.x/7.x.
TO LOAD THE MONITOR SETTINGS FILE AND ICC DEVICE PROFILE IN PHOTOSHOP 6.X/7.X
1 Start Photoshop.
2 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu and select Advanced Mode in the Color Settings
dialog box.
3 Choose EFI RGB from the RGB menu.
4 Choose the profile that corresponds to the Color Server from the CMYK menu.
The Color Server ICC profile is provided as the factory default.
Additionally, the Color Server ICC profile is provided on the User Software CD. This is
designed for more faithful reproduction of RGB objects using black toner only when R, G,
and B have the same ratio. The profile is suitable for business documents that include
black-and-white tables and text. It will have no effect on documents that have color
gradation patterns (patterns which include black) or color photographic images.
5 Click OK.
For more information, see your application’s documentation.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
34
Specifying color settings
The following sections outline the recommended color settings for Photoshop in a
Color Server workflow. These color settings include:
Working Spaces: Default color spaces to use when working with RGB and CMYK
documents. ICC color profiles describe the gamut and color characteristics of these working
spaces.
Color Management Policies: Instructions that tell Photoshop what to do when it encounters
color data from a color space other than the specified working space.
Configuring Photoshop color settings
Photoshop uses a sophisticated color management system that handles document colors for a
variety of color-managed workflows. By customizing color settings, you specify the amount of
color management you want to use while working in Photoshop.
TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS FOR PHOTOSHOP
1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu.
The Color Settings dialog box appears.
2 Select Advanced Mode.
In Advanced Mode, a more extensive list of options is displayed.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
35
3 Choose the desired working space profile for each color mode in the
Working Spaces area.
A working space specifies the color profile for documents that have no color profile
associations or for documents that are newly created. It also defines color space of a document
converted to RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale color modes, and for spot colors in a document.
Choose an appropriate ICC profile to embed when saving a file for each color space. Use the
following guidelines for specifying working spaces:
• For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server. In
most cases, this is EFIRGB. (For information about installing the EFIRGB profile, see
“Loading monitor settings files and ICC device profiles in Photoshop 6.x/7.x” on
page 33.) Consider RGB if you usually view images on a generic computer monitor or rely
on a Windows operating system to manage color on your monitor. If you choose sRGB as
a working space, you must print with the ColorWise RGB Source option set to sRGB.
New RGB documents you create in Photoshop will use this working space.
N OTE : EFIRGB is set as the default RGB source color space on the Color Server. No matter
what RGB space you select, make sure it is available on the Color Server. For more
information about downloading RGB Source profiles to the Color Server, see Color Printing.
• For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP) if you are a
prepress user. If you are an user who prints final output, choose an output profile that
describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a device-specific output profile,
you must first upload the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Color
Printing). New CMYK documents you create in Photoshop will use the specified working
space.
• For guidelines on specifying Gray and Spot working spaces, see your Photoshop
documentation.
4 In the Color Management Policies area, choose policies for handling documents without
embedded profiles or with embedded profiles that differ from the working space.
Unless you are an advanced color user, choose Off from the RGB, CMYK, and Gray menus.
If you specify a color management policy and open a document in an environment with a
different working space than the one in which it was created, you may encounter problems.
The profile embedded in a document may be overwritten if it differs from the specified
working space (although the numeric color values in the document are preserved).
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
36
5 If you do not choose Off for the Color Management Policies, select the following:
Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting
Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening.
This option displays an alert message that allows you to override the specified policy behavior
(Off ) when opening documents or importing color data.
This is recommended so that you are notified before any application color management is
applied.
6 In the Conversion Options area, specify settings for converting between color spaces.
Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine
for Photoshop.
Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that optimizes the color quality of the
conversion. For guidelines on choosing the rendering intent, see your Photoshop
documentation.
Select Use Black Point Compensation and Use Dither (8-bit/channel images) to optimize the
quality of color conversions.
7 Clear the Desaturate Monitor Colors By and Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma options in the
Advanced Controls area.
Clearing these options helps to ensure a match between your monitor display and the
printed output.
8 Click Save to save the current group of color settings.
The Save dialog box appears.
9 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and click Save.
You can switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the
Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
37
Saving files from Photoshop
Before saving a file from Photoshop, perform any necessary rotating, cropping, and resizing.
This speeds processing when printing from the application in which the image is placed.
When saving a document from Photoshop 6.x, you have the option to embed a color profile
in the document. If you are sending the document to the Color Server, we recommend that
you disable this option.
Choosing a file format
We recommend that you use EPS or TIFF file formats to save RGB images that will be
imported into other documents and printed to the Color Server. You can import EPS and
TIFF files into virtually all page layout applications.
N OTE : Although TIFF files generally display better when imported into other applications,
their color and resolution characteristics may be altered by the application into which they are
imported. EPS files are not modified by the application into which they are imported.
N OTE : In the following procedures, only Photoshop 7.x (Mac OS version) dialog boxes are
shown. When applicable, differences between versions 7.x and 6.x, and the Windows and
Mac OS versions of Photoshop are noted.
TO SAVE A DOCUMENT FROM PHOTOSHOP
1 Choose Save As from the File menu.
The Save As dialog box appears.
2 Specify settings in the Save As dialog box.
• Specify a name, file format, and location for the document.
• Clear the Embed Color Profile option (Mac OS) or ICC Profile option (Windows).
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
38
3 Click Save.
If you chose Photoshop EPS as the format, the EPS Options dialog box appears.
4 Specify EPS options and click OK.
• Choose a TIFF preview option. A TIFF preview is compatible with both Windows and
Mac OS computers.
• Do not select the PostScript Color Management option. For more information about
PostScript Color Management, see the following section.
• Do not select Include Transfer Function or Include Halftone Screen.
N OTE : If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original image saved with binary
encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the compression
used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected results in the
printed output of a JPEG file, revert to a binary version.
If you experience problems printing the document in which you placed the image, substitute
an ASCII version of the same image and reprint the document. Binary encoding is much
more compact than ASCII encoding, but occasionally causes printing problems with some
system configurations.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
39
Selecting options when printing
You can print RGB or CMYK images from Photoshop.
• When you print an RGB image, you choose whether the conversion to CMYK is
performed by the Color Server (using a CRD), PostScript (using PostScript Color
Management), or Photoshop built-in color management.
• When you print a CMYK graphic, you can print composites or color separations.
N OTE : Make sure that the Color Server Combine Separations print option is set to Off. To
print separations, use the Separation option in the Photoshop pane of the print dialog box.
For instructions, see your Photoshop documentation.
TO PRINT IMAGES FROM PHOTOSHOP 7.X
1 Choose Print with Preview from the File menu.
The Print dialog box appears.
2 Select Show More Options.
3 Select Output.
4 Choose an Encoding method.
N OTE : If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original image with
binary encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the
compression used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected
results in the printed output of a JPEG file, revert to the binary version.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
40
5 Select Color Management.
6 Choose Same as Source from the Profile menu to specify the color space for printing the
image.
Any other setting causes Photoshop to convert image data to that color space before sending it
to the Color Server.
7 Click Print.
TO PRINT IMAGES FROM PHOTOSHOP 6.X
1 Choose Print from the File menu.
The Print dialog box appears.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
41
2 Choose the Color Server from the Printer menu, and then choose Adobe Photoshop from the
menu beneath the Printer menu.
3 Choose an Encoding method.
N OTE : If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original image with
binary encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the
compression used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected
results in the printed output of a JPEG file, revert to the binary version.
4 Choose Same as Source from the Profile menu to specify the color space for printing
the image.
Any other setting causes Photoshop to convert image data to that color space before sending it
to the Color Server.
5 Click Print.
Advanced tips for using PostScript color management
Use the following information to implement alternative, more complex, color workflows with
Photoshop.
N OTE : To use PostScript color management with Photoshop 6.x, choose PostScript Color
Management from the Profile menu in the Photoshop pane of the printer driver.
Saving EPS documents with PostScript Color Management
Selecting the PostScript Color Management option when saving either a CMYK or RGB EPS
file prompts Photoshop to embed PostScript color information—which is independent of
ICC profiles—in the resulting document. This information is intended for PostScript devices
like the Color Server.
Printing RGB EPS files saved with PostScript Color Management
When you print an RGB EPS file that contains an embedded profile to the Color Server, you
can use the working space information from the embedded RGB profile as an RGB source
definition for Color Server CRDs. To use this source color space information from the
embedded profile with Color Server CRDs, choose None as the ColorWise RGB Source
when you print. This applies when you print directly from Photoshop or when the same RGB
EPS file is output from another application.
To override the embedded profile in an EPS file using an RGB Source definition made
available by the Color Server, choose anything except None as the Color Server RGB Source
Profile.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
42
Printing RGB images with Photoshop PostScript Color Management
If you select an RGB color space and decide to use PostScript Color Management,
Photoshop sends RGB data to the Color Server along with PostScript color information
defining this RGB color space. When you select PostScript Color Management, a CRD is
used to perform color conversions to CMYK.
N OTE : The included RGB source color space information is overridden by the ColorWise
RGB Source option unless it is set to None. The ColorWise Rendering Style option specified
takes effect if the ColorWise RGB Source Profile option is set to None.
For fastest print times, choose JPEG encoding, but inspect printed output carefully
for unwanted artifacts that may appear as a result of JPEG compression. If you see unexpected
results in the printed output, reprint the job using Binary or ASCII encoding.
Printing CMYK EPS files saved with PostScript Color Management
If you select the Photoshop PostScript Color Management option when you save a CMYK
EPS image, Photoshop embeds PostScript color information that defines the CMYK source
color space of the image. When you print a CMYK EPS file that contains PostScript color
information to the Color Server, CRDs are used instead of ColorWise CMYK Simulation
and Simulation Method settings. Choose the appropriate setting for the Rendering Style
option.
MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
43
Printing CMYK graphics with Photoshop PostScript Color Management
If you select a CMYK color space and decide to use PostScript Color Management,
Photoshop sends CMYK data to the Color Server along with PostScript color information
defining this CMYK color space. When you select PostScript Color Management, a CRD is
used to perform color conversions to the CMYK color space of the Color Server.
The destination color space for the CRDs is determined by the RGB Separation print option.
If RGB Separation is set to Simulation, the CMYK graphic is printed according to all
specified CMYK Simulation Profile and CMYK Simulation Method settings. If RGB
Separation is set to Output, the CMYK graphic is converted to the CMYK color space of the
selected output profile.
Setting the Color Server print option Spot Color Matching to On has an effect only if you use
the Photoshop Multi-Channel feature to define spot channels and then save the image in EPS
format and open it in another application. For more information see your Photoshop
documentation.
Photoshop converts spot colors to CMYK values when you work in CMYK mode.
• If the graphic was separated for an offset press standard, apply the corresponding CMYK
Simulation setting. For example, if the graphic is separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as
the CMYK Simulation setting.
• If Photoshop is configured for a custom separation using a ICC profile, choose the
corresponding profile for the ColorWise CMYK Simulation option.
The previous custom simulation setting requires that the same profile used for separation in
Photoshop also resides on the Color Server. For more information about downloading
CMYK Simulation profiles to the Color Server with ColorWise Pro Tools, see Color Printing.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
44
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
This chapter provides instructions for printing color documents from Adobe InDesign,
Adobe PageMaker, and QuarkXPress.
Before printing from these applications, make sure the appropriate printer driver and the
Color Server PostScript printer description file (PPD) are installed on your computer, as
described in Printing from Windows or Printing from Mac OS.
Adobe InDesign 2.0.1 and 1.5.2
The following sections outline the recommended settings for using Adobe InDesign with the
Color Server.
InDesign color settings
When using ColorWise color management, turn off the InDesign color management features.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
TO DISABLE INDESIGN 2.0.1 COLOR MANAGEMENT
1 Choose Color Settings > Document Color Settings from the Edit menu.
2 Clear the Enable Color Management option and click OK.
TO DISABLE INDESIGN 1.52 COLOR MANAGEMENT
1 Choose Color Settings > Document Color Settings from the Edit menu.
2 Clear the Enable Color Management option and click OK.
45
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
46
Importing images
All RGB images placed in a document, except for RGB TIFF images, are affected by your
RGB Source and Rendering Style settings. For best results with placed images, use the
instructions in “Working with imported images” on page 29.
N OTE : InDesign converts placed RGB TIFF images to CMYK.
Disable InDesign color management when placing images in a document.
TO DISABLE INDESIGN 2.0.1 COLOR MANAGEMENT WHEN IMPORTING IMAGES
1 Choose Place from the File menu.
The Place dialog box appears.
2 Select the Show Import Options option.
3 Select the file that you want to import and click Open.
4 Choose Color Settings from the option menu. Make sure that the Enable Color Management
option is cleared and click OK.
TO DISABLE INDESIGN 1.5.2 COLOR MANAGEMENT WHEN IMPORTING IMAGES
1 Choose Place from the File menu.
The Place dialog box appears.
2 Select the Show Import Options option.
3 Select the file that you want to import and click Place.
4 Choose Color Settings from the option menu. Make sure that the Enable Color Management
option is cleared and click OK.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
Selecting options when printing
You can use the standard Color Server printer driver interface to select print options
from InDesign.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FROM THE WINDOWS VERSION OF INDESIGN 2.0.1
1 Choose Print from the File menu.
2 Choose the Color Server from the Printer menu.
3 Click Setup.
The Windows Print dialog box appears.
4 Click Properties.
5 Click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears.
The standard printer driver interface for the Color Server appears.
6 Select the desired print options.
For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
7 Click Print.
47
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FROM THE MAC OS VERSION OF INDESIGN 2.0.1
1 Choose Print from the File menu.
2 Choose the Color Server from the Printer menu.
3 Click Printer.
The AdobePS Print dialog box appears.
4 Choose Printer Specific Options.
The Color Server print options appear.
5 Select the desired options.
For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
6 Click Print.
48
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FROM THE WINDOWS VERSION OF INDESIGN 1.5.2
1 Choose Print from the File menu.
The Print dialog box appears.
2 Choose the Color Server from the Name menu.
3 Click Properties.
4 Click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears.
The standard printer driver interface for the Color Server appears.
5 Select the desired print options.
For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
49
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FROM THE MAC OS VERSION OF INDESIGN 1.5.2
1 Choose Print from the File menu.
The Print dialog box appears.
2 Choose the Color Server from the Printer menu.
3 Choose Printer Specific Options.
The Color Server print options appear.
4 Select the desired options.
For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
50
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
51
Adobe PageMaker 7.x and 6.5 for Mac OS and Windows
The Mac OS and Windows versions of PageMaker 7.x and 6.5 are essentially the same.
The illustrations in this section show only the Windows version, except where differences
exist between the two versions.
Windows version requirement
To use the Windows version of PageMaker 6.5, make sure that a copy of the Color Server
PPD file is in the following folders:
• PM65\RSRC\USENGLSH\PPD4
• Windows\System
For information about installing this file, see your PageMaker documentation.
Installing the printer description files for Windows
The User Software CD contains printer description files for popular Windows applications.
Adobe Pagemaker 6.5 and 7.x do not support automatic installation of printer description
files from the Printers or Printers and Faxes Control Panel. To make the Color Server available
in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes of this application, copy printer description files to
the appropriate location.
TO COPY THE PRINTER DESCRIPTION FILES
1 On the User Software CD, open the English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr folder. Select the folder that
corresponds to the system you are using.
For Windows 98/Me, select English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_9x_ME.
For Windows NT 4.0, select English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_NT4x.
For Windows 2000, select English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2000.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_XP.
2 Copy the printer description file for your Color Server to the appropriate location.
For PageMaker 6.5, copy the printer description file to \PM65\RSRC\USENGLSH\PPD4.
For PageMaker 7.x, copy the printer description file to \PM7\RSRC\USENGLSH\PPD4.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
52
PageMaker color settings
We recommend that you use ColorWise color management rather than the CMS options
built into Adobe PageMaker.
N OTE : Do not use both systems for the same print job.
TO DISABLE PAGEMAKER COLOR MANAGEMENT
1 Choose Preferences > General from the File menu.
2 Click CMS Setup.
3 Choose Off from the Color Management menu.
4 Click OK, and then click OK again to close the dialog boxes.
TO DISABLE COLOR MANAGEMENT FOR A BITMAPPED IMAGE
1 Select the bitmapped image in the document.
2 Choose Image > CMS Source from the Element menu.
3 Choose None from the This Item Uses menu and click OK.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
53
Importing images
All RGB images placed in a document are affected by your RGB Source and Rendering Style
settings. For best results with placed images, use the instructions in “Working with imported
images” on page 29.
Selecting options when printing
All print settings are specified from the various Print dialog boxes in PageMaker 7.x or 6.5.
N OTE : The Print dialog box for PageMaker differs from the Print dialog box for other
applications that print to the Color Server. Follow the instructions in this section rather than
the print instructions in Color Printing.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS WHEN PRINTING FROM PAGEMAKER
1 Choose the Color Server printer description from the PPD menu in the Print Document
dialog box.
2 Click Options.
3 Choose Normal from the “Send image data” menu in the Print Options dialog box and
click Features.
To ensure that TIFF images print at their full resolution, do not choose the Optimized
Subsampling default from the Send image data menu.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
54
4 If a document contains RGB placed images or colors defined in RGB that will not be separated
to process colors, choose RGB Source and Rendering Style settings in the Print Features
dialog box.
If the document contains PANTONE colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color
Matching setting.
5 Click Print from any of the PageMaker dialog boxes to send the job to the Color Server.
Using optional Color Management from PageMaker
If you have additional color management requirements not offered by ColorWise, such as
managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the PageMaker
color management features. For more information, see your PageMaker documentation.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
QuarkXPress 5.x and 4.x for Mac OS and Windows
Importing images
With the exception of RGB images that are saved in EPS format or use Quark PrintRGB
XTension, QuarkXPress converts all RGB data into CMYK, even when Quark CMS
XTension is disabled.
Only RGB images saved in EPS format are affected by RGB Source and Rendering Style
settings. For best results with placed images, follow the instructions in “Working with
imported images” on page 29.
Selecting options when printing
The following procedure provides instructions on printing files to the Color Server.
55
56
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN QUARKXPRESS 5.X OR 4.X
1 Choose the Color Server printer description name from the Printer Description menu in the
Print dialog box.
Mac OS
1
2
3
Choose the Color Server
Choose an output paper size
Click to specify printer
settings
1
2
3
Windows
1
2
3
Choose the Color Server
Choose the Color Server
printer description
Click to specify device
settings
1
3
2
2 If the document contains PANTONE colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color
Matching setting.
For information about setting print options, see Color Printing.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
57
Optional Color Management from QuarkXPress
If you have additional color management requirements not offered by ColorWise, such as
managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the
QuarkXPress color management features. For more information, see your QuarkXPress
documentation.
For QuarkXPress 4.02, consider using Quark CMS XTension. These features allow advanced
users to control RGB to CMYK color conversions. If you plan to use these features, make sure
that Quark CMS XTension is installed before starting QuarkXPress. If it is not installed, use
the Quark XTensions Manager to install it. For instructions, see your QuarkXPress
documentation.
N OTE : Quark CMS converts RGB TIFF, JPEG, and PICT images to CMYK before sending
color data to the Color Server. RGB Source and Rendering Style settings have no effect on
this data unless you use Quark PrintRGB XTension, which outputs RGB TIFF image files
without converting them to CMYK.
QuarkXPress 3.32 for Mac OS and Windows
Before starting QuarkXPress 3.32, make sure the EfiColor XTension is not loaded in the
XTensions folder. EFICOLOR profiles are not currently provided with Color Server
products. Without the correct EFICOLOR profile, the EfiColor XTension cannot perform
color conversions on placed images.
Windows version requirement
For the Windows version of QuarkXPress, make sure a copy of the Color Server PPD file is in
the \XPRESS\PDF folder.
Importing images
All RGB images placed in a document are affected by your RGB Source and Rendering Style
settings. For best results with placed images, follow the instructions in “Working with
imported images” on page 29.
Selecting options when printing
The following procedure provides instructions on printing files to the Color Server.
MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS
58
TO SELECT PRINT OPTIONS IN QUARKXPRESS 3.3
1 Choose the Color Server printer description from the Printer Type menu in the Page Setup
(Mac OS) or Printer Setup (Windows) dialog box.
Mac OS
1
2
3
Choose the Color Server
Choose an output paper size
Choose Binary
1
2
3
Windows
1
2
3
Choose an output paper size
Choose the Color Server
Choose Binary
1
2
3
2 If a document contains RGB-placed images or RGB colors that QuarkXPress will print without
converting to CMYK, choose RGB Source and Rendering Style settings.
If the document contains PANTONE colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color
Matching setting.
For information about setting print options, see Color Printing.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
59
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
You can print directly from an illustration application or use it to create and save files that will
be imported into a page layout document. To print from an illustration application, use the
printer driver and print settings recommended in Color Printing. As a general rule, use the
EPS file format when saving files with an illustration application. When an EPS file is
imported into another application, the color information in the imported image is not
changed by the application into which it is imported.
Before printing from illustration applications, make sure that the appropriate PostScript
printer driver and the Color Server PPD are installed on your computer, as described in
Printing from Windows or Printing from Mac OS. This chapter provides instructions for using
Adobe Illustrator, Macromedia FreeHand, and CorelDRAW for Windows and Mac OS.
N OTE : This manual provides instructions for printing composites only. For information about
printing color separations, see the documentation that accompanies your application.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
60
Adobe Illustrator for Windows and Mac OS
The following sections provide guidelines for working with Adobe Illustrator versions 10.x
and 9.x.
Note about color models in Adobe Illustrator
In Illustrator, you can set the Document Color Mode to either RGB Color or CMYK color.
All elements in that file are created in that color model. When you print the file, the data is
sent to the Color Server in the color model that you specified.
Illustrator color settings
Illustrator uses a sophisticated color management system that can handle both RGB and
CMYK colors for a variety of color-managed workflows. By customizing color settings, you
specify the amount of color management you want to use while working in Illustrator. These
color settings include the following:
Working spaces: Default color spaces to use when working with RGB and CMYK
documents. ICC color profiles describe the gamut and color characteristics of these working
spaces.
Color management policies: Instructions that tell Illustrator what to do when it encounters
color data from a color space other than the specified working space.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
61
Specifying print options
The following procedure outlines the recommended color settings for Illustrator in a
Color Server workflow.
TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS
1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu.
The Color Settings dialog box appears.
2 Select Advanced Mode.
In Advanced Mode, a more extensive list of options is displayed.
3 Choose the desired working space profile for each mode in the Working Spaces area.
Use the following guidelines for specifying working spaces:
• For RGB, choose EFIRGB. This profile represents the default RGB color space used by the
Color Server. New RGB documents you create in Illustrator will use this working space.
• For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP) if you are a
prepress user. If you are an office user printing final output, choose an output profile that
describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a device-specific output profile,
upload the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Color Printing). New
CMYK documents you create in Illustrator will use the specified working space.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
62
4 Choose policies for handling documents without embedded profiles or with embedded
profiles that differ from the working space in the Color Management Policies area.
Choose Off from the RGB and CMYK menus. This option discards the original profile
embedded in a document if it differs from the specified working space.
In the Profile Mismatches area, select the Ask When Opening option. This option displays an
alert message that allows you to override the specified policy behavior (Off ) when opening
documents or importing color data.
5 Choose settings for converting between color spaces in the Conversion Options area.
Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine
for Illustrator.
Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that will optimize the color quality of the
conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see your Illustrator
documentation.
Select the Use Black Point Compensation option to optimize the quality of color conversions.
6 Click Save to save the current group of color settings.
The Save dialog box appears.
7 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and click Save.
You can switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the
Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box.
Saving files for importing into other documents
When saving files in Illustrator for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS file
format. Illustrator can save color information in both RGB and CMYK. The ColorWise RGB
Source and Rendering Style settings affect color output of RGB artwork saved in Illustrator
EPS and imported into other kinds of documents (even when both RGB and CMYK artwork
exists in the same file). In the case of Illustrator files imported into Photoshop, however,
vector data from the Illustrator file is rasterized into bitmaps in Photoshop, and the final color
space of the bitmap data is determined by the color mode you set in Photoshop.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
63
Specifying print options
The following procedure explains how to set print options when printing a document from
Illustrator to the Color Server.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN ILLUSTRATOR
1 Choose Print from the File menu in Illustrator.
The Print dialog box appears.
2 For the Windows version of Illustrator, specify appropriate print options.
• Choose the Color Server device from the Name menu.
• Choose Composite from the Output menu.
• Choose Level 3 from the PostScript menu. If you encounter problems, you can also use
Level 2.
Illustrator 10.x for Windows
1
2
3
Select the device name
Choose Composite
Click Properties to set
print options
1
2
3
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
64
Illustrator 8.x and 9.x
for Windows
1
2
3
4
Select the device name
Choose Composite
Choose PostScript Level 2
or 3
Click Properties to set
print options
4
1
2
3
3 For the Mac OS version of Illustrator, specify appropriate print options.
• Choose the Color Server device from the Printer menu.
• Choose Adobe Illustrator from the option menu below the Printer menu.
• Choose Composite from the Output menu.
• Choose Level 3 from the PostScript menu. If you encounter problems, you can also use
Level 2.
Illustrator 10.x for Mac OS
1
Choose Composite
1
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
65
Illustrator 8.x and 9.x
for Mac OS
1
2
Choose Composite
Choose PostScript Level 3
1
2
4 If necessary, click Properties (Windows) or choose Printer Specific Options from the option
menu (Mac OS) and choose RGB Source and Rendering Style settings for the Color Server.
You only must specify these settings if you have a CMYK document containing placed RGB
images, or an RGB document in Illustrator 9.x. In all other cases, colors remain unaffected by
the settings.
5 If the document contains PANTONE-named colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching
setting.
For information about setting additional ColorWise print options, see Color Printing.
Using Illustrator color management
If you have additional color management requirements not offered by ColorWise, such as
managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the Illustrator
color management features. For more information, see your Illustrator documentation.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
66
FreeHand 10.x, 9.x, and 8.x for Windows and Mac OS
The information in this section applies to both the Windows and Mac OS versions
of FreeHand. Only Mac OS dialog boxes are shown, but the information and instructions are
identical for the Windows version.
Setting FreeHand color settings
When using ColorWise color management, turn off the FreeHand color
management features.
TO DISABLE COLOR MANAGEMENT IN FREEHAND
1 Choose Preferences from the File menu.
2 Click the Colors category in the Preferences dialog box.
1
Click Colors to access the
color management settings
1
3 Choose None for the type of color management.
Defining colors
Any colors defined in FreeHand are sent to the device in CMYK, even those defined using
other color models. For best results, use the color definition methods described on page 25.
You can control the conversion of RGB colors defined in FreeHand by specifying settings in
the Preferences dialog box under the Colors category, or choosing Color Management from
the FreeHand menu on the Print dialog box.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
67
Importing images
A number of file types can be imported into FreeHand, but once imported, all are treated as
EPS images, TIFF images, or editable paths. For details, see your FreeHand documentation.
When you import an EPS image into a document, FreeHand inserts a link to the image rather
than embedding the original file, resulting in a smaller file size. If the image is a CMYK EPS
file, the colors print just as they would from the originating application.
N OTE : Before placing a CMYK EPS file, be sure the file was saved with Desktop Color
Separation (DCS) set to Off. If the file was saved with DCS activated, FreeHand prints
composites of the image at the low resolution used for screen viewing.
All RGB images placed in a document are affected by your RGB Source and Rendering Style
settings in the PPD. For best results with placed images, follow the instructions in “Working
with imported images” on page 29.
Saving files for importing into other documents
When saving files in FreeHand for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS file
format. FreeHand saves all color information in CMYK. The RGB Source and Rendering
Style print options have no effect on the color output of RGB artwork saved in FreeHand and
imported into other types of documents. In the case of FreeHand files imported into
Photoshop, however, vector data from the FreeHand file is rasterized into bitmaps in
Photoshop, and the final color space of the bitmap data is determined by the color mode you
set in Photoshop.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
68
Specifying print options
The following procedure explains how to set print options when printing a document from
FreeHand to the Color Server.
TO SET OPTIONS WHEN PRINTING FROM FREEHAND
1 Select the Use PPD option in the Print dialog box.
1
2
3
Choose Normal
Click to access
FreeHand Print Setup
Click to select a printer
description
(Name appears at right)
1
2
3
2 Choose Normal from the Print setting menu.
• If the Use PPD option is selected, a plus sign (+) appears in front of the word “Normal.”
• If the model name for your Color Server is not displayed, click the button labeled “…”
and choose the appropriate Color Server model from the menu that appears.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
69
3 To use ColorWise color management features, choose Output Options from the File menu.
The Output Options dialog box appears.
1
Clear option to use ColorWise
color management
1
4 Make sure that the “Convert RGB to process” option is cleared.
If this option is selected, FreeHand color management settings are used to convert RGB colors
and RGB TIFF, PICT, and JPEG images to CMYK.
5 If a document contains placed RGB images, choose RGB Source and Rendering Style settings.
With the exception of placed RGB images, these settings have no effect on colors printed with
FreeHand. If the document contains PANTONE-named colors, choose the appropriate Spot
Color Matching setting when you print the document.
For information about other FreeHand print options, see your FreeHand documentation.
Optional color management in FreeHand
If you have additional color management requirements not offered by ColorWise, such as
managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the FreeHand
color management features. For more information, see your FreeHand documentation.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
70
CorelDRAW for Windows and Mac OS
The following sections describe the recommended color settings for CorelDRAW 9.x and 8.x.
Defining colors
Any colors defined in CorelDRAW 9.x for Windows or CorelDRAW 8.x for Mac OS are sent
to the device in CMYK, even those defined using other color models. For best results, use the
color definition methods described in “Using color matching tools with PostScript
applications” on page 25.
You can control the conversion of RGB colors defined in CorelDRAW by specifying settings
in the Color Management dialog boxes. On Windows computers, the Color Management
dialog boxes are located in Tools > Color Management. On Mac OS computers, the Color
Management functions are located in Edit:Preferences:Global.
N OTE : If you do not want to use color management in CorelDRAW, choose None from the
composite printer menu under Color Management/Profiles. Do not select options under
Color Management and Color Management General.
Importing images
All RGB images placed in a document are affected by the RGB Source and Rendering Style
settings. For best results with placed images, follow the instructions in “Working with
imported images” on page 29.
Saving files for importing into other documents
When saving files in CorelDRAW for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS
file format. CorelDRAW saves all color information in CMYK, so RGB Source and
Rendering Style print options have no effect on color output of artwork saved with
CorelDRAW and imported into other kinds of documents. In the case of CorelDRAW files
imported into Photoshop, however, vector data from the CorelDRAW file is rasterized into
bitmaps in Photoshop, and the final color space of the bitmap data is determined by the color
mode you set in Photoshop.
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
71
Specifying print options
This section explains how to set print options when printing from CorelDRAW to the
Color Server.
N OTE : The following procedure uses Windows illustrations. The interface may vary
depending on whether you are using Mac OS or Windows. Major differences are noted.
TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN CORELDRAW
1 On Windows computers, click the General tab and then click Print.
2 Make sure that you have selected the correct device and printer description, and select the
Use PPD option.
3 Click Properties to specify ColorWise print options.
1
2
3
Print device name
appears here
Printer driver/PPD name
appears here
Click Properties to access
ColorWise print options
3
1
2
MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS
72
4 On Mac OS computers, click Printer in the General Print dialog box to select the device and
print options.
To use ColorWise color management, make sure that the “Use color profile” option on the
Misc tab of the Print dialog box is cleared. If this option is selected, CorelDRAW color
management settings are used to convert RGB colors and images to CMYK.
1
Clear this option to use
ColorWise Color Management
1
5 If a document contains placed RGB images, choose RGB Source and Rendering Style settings
for your device.
With the exception of placed RGB images, these settings have no effect on colors printed with
CorelDRAW.
6 If the document contains PANTONE-named colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching
setting.
Optional color management in CorelDRAW
If you have additional color management requirements not offered by ColorWise, such as
managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the
CorelDRAW color management features. For more information, see your CorelDRAW
documentation.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
73
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
This chapter covers concepts that are basic to printing in color, including:
• Properties of color
• Printing techniques
• Effective use of color
• Raster images and vector graphics
• File optimization for processing and printing
If you are already familiar with color theory and digital color printing, proceed to
“Optimizing files for processing and printing” on page 87 for information about optimizing
files for printing.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
74
The properties of color
This section introduces concepts that are basic to color theory. You will encounter some of
these concepts (such as hue, saturation, and brightness) when you work with color in
applications; others provide useful background information. Color is a complex topic, so
consider this a starting point for experimentation and further research.
The physics of color
The human eye can see electromagnetic radiation at wavelengths between 400 nanometers
(purplish blue) and 700 nanometers (red). This range is called the visible spectrum of light.
We see pure spectral light as intensely saturated or pure colors. Sunlight at midday, which we
perceive as white or neutral light, is composed of light from across the visible spectrum in
more or less equal proportions. Shining sunlight through a prism separates it into its spectral
components, resulting in the familiar rainbow of colors illustrated in the following figure.
Like the sun, most light sources we encounter in our daily environment emit a mixture of
light wavelengths, although the particular distribution of wavelengths can vary considerably.
Light from a tungsten light bulb, for example, contains much less blue light than sunlight.
Tungsten light appears white to the human eye, which, up to a point, can adjust to the
different light sources. However, color objects appear different under tungsten light than they
do in sunlight because of the different spectral makeup of the two light sources.
The mixture of light wavelengths emitted by a light source is reflected selectively by different
objects. Different mixtures of reflected light appear as different colors. Some of these mixtures
appear as relatively saturated colors, but most appear as grays or impure hues of a color.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
75
CIE color model
In the 1930s, the Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) defined a standard color
space, a way of defining colors in mathematical terms, to help in the communication of color
information. This color space is based on research on the nature of color perception. The
following CIE chromaticity diagram is a two-dimensional model of color vision. The arc
around the top of the horseshoe encompasses the pure, or spectral, colors from blue-violet to
red. Although the CIE chromaticity diagram is not perceptually uniform, some areas of the
diagram seem to compress color differences relative to others, it is a good tool for illustrating
some interesting aspects of color vision.
By mixing any two spectral colors in different proportions, we can create all the colors found
on the straight line drawn between them in the diagram. It is possible to create the same gray
by mixing blue-green and red light or by mixing yellow-green and blue-violet light. This is
possible because of a phenomenon peculiar to color vision called metamerism. The eye does
not distinguish individual wavelengths of light. Therefore, different combinations of spectral
light can produce the same perceived color.
Purple colors, which do not exist in the spectrum of pure light, are found at the bottom of the
diagram. Purples are mixtures of red and blue light—the opposite ends of the spectrum.
Hue, saturation, and brightness
A color can be described in terms of three varying characteristics, called the HSB color model:
• Hue: Tint (the qualitative aspect of a color—red, green, or orange)
• Saturation: The purity of the color
• Brightness: Relative position between white and black
76
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
While the CIE chromaticity diagram illustrated earlier conveys hue and saturation,
a three-dimensional color model is required to add the brightness component, as illustrated in
the following figure.
Brightness
Hue
Saturation
Many computer applications include dialog boxes in which you choose colors by
manipulating hue, saturation, and brightness. For example, some applications use a color
picker that can be reconfigured according to your preference (as illustrated in the following
figure).
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
77
Additive and subtractive color systems
Color devices used in desktop publishing and printing simulate the range of visible colors
using a set of primary colors that are combined to create other colors. There are two methods
for creating a range of colors from a set of primary colors. Computer monitors and scanners
are based on the additive color model. Printing technologies, including the Color Server and
offset presses, are based on the subtractive color model.
Additive (RGB) color
Color devices that use the additive color model create a range of colors by combining varying
amounts of red, green, and blue light. These colors are called the additive primaries
(illustrated in the following figure). White is created by adding the maximum amount of red,
green, and blue light available. Black occurs wherever all three colors are absent. Grays are
created by adding equal amounts of all three color together. Combining varying amounts of
any two of the additive primaries creates a third, saturated hue.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
78
A familiar device that is based on this color model is the computer monitor, illustrated in the
following figure. Monitors have red, green, and blue phosphors that emit varying amounts of
light to display a given color. Scanners create digital representations of colors by measuring
their red, green, and blue components through colored filters.
Subtractive (CMY and CMYK) color
The subtractive color model is the basis for color printing, color photographic prints, and
transparencies. While the additive color model simulates the visible spectrum of color by
adding light of three primary hues, the subtractive color model starts with a “white” or neutral
light source containing light of many wavelengths. Inks, toners, or other colorants are used to
selectively absorb (subtract) certain wavelengths of light that otherwise would be reflected or
transmitted by the media in use.
The subtractive primaries are cyan, magenta, and yellow; they absorb red, green, and blue
light, respectively (as illustrated in the following figure). Combining any two subtractive
primaries creates a new color that is relatively pure or saturated. For example, you can make
red by combining magenta and yellow, which absorb green and blue light, respectively. White
occurs when no colorant is applied. In theory, combining all three subtractive primaries yields
black, but due to deficiencies of cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants, combining these three
primaries actually yields a muddy brown. Black colorant is added to compensate for the
deficiencies of cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants. Consequently, color printing uses four
process colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK (CMYK). The use of black toner produces
rich, solid blacks and allows for improved rendering of black text.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
79
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
80
Understanding color gamut
Different color reproduction techniques have different color capabilities, or gamuts. Color
transparency films have comparatively large gamuts, as do color monitors. The color gamut
that can be produced using process inks or CMYK toners on paper is smaller. This is why
some colors that can be displayed on a color monitor, especially bright saturated colors,
cannot be reproduced exactly by your Color Server, nor can they be reproduced on a press
using process colors. Moreover, different printers have different gamuts. Some colors your
printer can produce cannot be reproduced on an offset press, and vice versa. The following
figure illustrates this concept of differing gamuts.
1
2
3
4
Color transparency film
RGB monitor
Offset press (white)
Other print device
1
2
3
4
You must account for the gamut of your printer when designing on a color monitor. When
printed, colors that fall outside the printer gamut are “mapped” to printable colors. This
process, referred to as gamut mapping, takes place when color data is converted or adjusted
to meet the gamut requirements of a printer.
The Color Server is specially designed to perform gamut mapping at high speed with
high-quality results. It provides these color management features automatically, using either
built-in default settings or settings you select for a particular print job. For added flexibility,
you can also use the Color Server color management system in combination with the color
management systems on Windows and Mac OS computers.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
81
Printing techniques
Until recently, most color printing was done on printing presses using one of several printing
techniques, such as offset lithography, flexography, or gravure. All traditional printing
techniques require lengthy preparation before a press run can take place. Short-run color
printing, including Color Server printing, eliminates most of this preparation. By
streamlining the process of color printing, the Color Server makes short print runs
economically feasible.
In contemporary offset lithographic printing, digital files from desktop computers are output
to an imagesetter, which creates film separations. The film is used to make a prepress proof,
which is an accurate predictor of the final print job and allows you to make corrections before
going to press. Once the proof is approved, the printer makes plates from the film and runs
the print job on the press.
With the Color Server, you simply print the file. The Color Server processes the PostScript
information in the file and sends four bitmaps (one each for cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black) to the printer. The ease of Color Server printing makes possible experimentation that
would be too costly on a press, allowing unlimited fine-tuning of color and design elements.
Halftone and continuous tone devices
Halftoning is used in offset printing to print each process color at a different intensity,
allowing millions of different colors to be reproduced using only the four process colors.
Depending on the required intensity of a given color, toner is placed on paper in dots of
different size. The grid of dots used for each toner color is called a screen. Halftone screens are
aligned to unique angles designed to eliminate interference patterns called moiré that can
arise with halftoning.
Some color printers are commonly referred to as continuous tone (contone) devices. They do
not use traditional halftone screen patterns and angles. Contone devices are capable of varying
the intensity of individual dots.
Even if your color printing is done exclusively on the Color Server, you will encounter
concepts from offset printing if you use high-end graphics applications. For example, color
controls in illustration applications, such as Adobe Illustrator, are geared toward specifying
color for offset printing using process and spot colors. Many applications allow you to specify
the screening used for each printing plate.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
82
Using color effectively
The ability to print in color can greatly increase the effectiveness of your message, whether
you are printing a presentation or newsletter (short-run printing), or proofing an ad concept
that will later be printed on a press (color proofing). Some potential benefits of using color
include:
• Conveying information rapidly by using color cues
• Making use of the emotive aspects of different colors
• Increasing impact and message retention
Color can also be a source of distraction and discord if it is used poorly. This section outlines
some guidelines and concepts to consider as you approach designing color materials.
General guidelines
To create successful color materials, consider the following:
• Use color to aid comprehension, rather than applying colors indiscriminately.
In presentations, graphs, and charts, use color to highlight patterns and
emphasize differences.
• Use color sparingly. In general, fewer colors work better than many colors.
• Use red as an accent color. Red is particularly effective when used in otherwise
monochromatic materials.
• Consider the tastes of your target audience when choosing colors.
• Keep a file of printed color pieces that appeal to you or strike you as effective. Refer to it
for ideas when designing your own documents.
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
83
Color wheel
A color wheel like the one in the following figure is a helpful tool for understanding the
interrelation of colors. The colors on one side of the color wheel, from magenta to yellow,
appear to most people to be warm colors, while those on the other side, from green to blue,
appear to be cool. The distance between two colors on the color wheel can help predict how
they will appear when seen side by side.
84
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
Colors opposite one another on the color wheel are called complements (see example a in the
following figure), and create a striking contrast side by side. This can be the basis for a bold
graphical design, but it is an effect you should use with discretion, since it can be visually
fatiguing. Other bold combinations to consider are split complements—a color and the two
colors adjacent to its complement (example b)—and triads (three colors evenly spaced on the
color wheel (example c). Colors adjacent to one another on the color wheel result in subtle
harmonies.
a
b
c
The color wheel simplifies color relationships for the purpose of clarity, showing only
saturated or pure colors. Adding the myriad variations of each hue to the palette (more or less
saturated, darker, or lighter) creates a wealth of possibilities. Taking a pair of complements
from the color wheel and varying the saturation and brightness of one or both colors produces
a very different result from the pure complements. Combining a light tint of a warm color
with a darker shade of its cooler complement often gives pleasing results. Combining a darker
shade of a warm color with a light tint of its cooler complement produces an unusual effect
that may appeal to you.
Once you have mastered the concept of the color wheel, you have a good framework for
experimenting with color combinations. Many books targeted at graphic designers show
groups of preselected color combinations. Some are organized by themes or moods, and some
are based on a custom color system, such as PANTONE. The more you develop a critical
facility for judging color combinations, the more you will trust your own eye for color. For a
selection of books about design, see the “Bibliography” on page 89.
85
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
Color and text
It is not a coincidence that the overwhelming majority of text you see is printed in black on
white paper. Text in black on white is highly legible and is not fatiguing to read for extended
periods. For many color materials, using black text on a white background and confining
color to graphic elements and headings is a good choice.
When used skillfully, color text can add flair to documents printed on paper. This technique is
widely used in presentations. When using color text, avoid dazzling text and background
combinations created from primary complements, especially red and cyan or red and blue.
They are visually fatiguing and hard to read. Color text is more legible when distinguished
from its background by a difference in lightness, for example, dark blue text on a light beige
background. In addition, using many different colors in a string of text makes for a confused
appearance and is hard to read. However, using a single highlight color is an effective way to
draw the reader’s eye to selected words. For color text samples, see the following figure.
STOP!
STOP!
De gustibus
non est
disputandum.
Exceptio probat
regulam de rebus
non exceptis.
When using color text, keep in mind that small font sizes typically do not print in color with
the same sharpness as in black. In most applications, black text prints exclusively in black
toner, while color text usually prints with two or more toners. Any misregistration between
the different toners on paper causes color text to lose definition. You can make test prints to
find the smallest point size at which color text prints clearly. When using high-end graphics
applications that allow you to specify color as percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, black, you
can create pure cyan or pure magenta text that prints with the same sharpness as black text.
(Pure yellow text is extremely hard to read on anything but a dark or complementary
background.)
86
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
Raster images and vector graphics
Two broad categories of artwork can be printed from a personal computer to a color printer:
raster images and vector graphics.
A raster image, also referred to as a bitmap, is composed of a grid of pixels, each assigned a
particular color value (as illustrated in example a in the following figure). The grid, when
sufficiently enlarged, resembles a mosaic made from square tiles. Examples of raster images
include scans and images created in painting or pixel-editing applications, such as Photoshop
and Corel Painter.
The amount of data found in a raster image depends on its resolution and bit depth. The
resolution of a raster describes the compactness of the pixels and is specified in pixels per inch
(ppi). The bit depth is the number of bits of information assigned to each pixel. Black and
white raster images require only one bit of information per pixel. Grayscale images require 8
bits per pixel. For photographic quality color, 24 bits of RGB color information are required
per pixel, yielding 256 levels of red, green, and blue. For CMYK images, 32 bits per pixel are
required.
When printing raster artwork, the quality of the output depends on the resolution of the
source raster. If the raster resolution is too low, individual pixels become visible in the printed
output as small squares. This effect is sometimes called “pixelation.”
In vector graphics, picture objects are defined mathematically as lines or curves between
points—hence the term “vector” (see example b). Picture elements can have solid, gradient,
or patterned color fills. Vector artwork is created in illustration and drawing applications, such
as Illustrator and CorelDRAW. Page layout applications, such as QuarkXPress, also allow you
to create simple vector artwork with their drawing tools. PostScript fonts are vector-based,
as well.
a
b
Vector artwork is resolution-independent. You can scale it to any size and resolution without
danger of pixels becoming visible in printed output.
87
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
Optimizing files for processing and printing
The following sections provide information about how to create image files that produce
the highest possible print quality while minimizing the processing time and disk space
they require.
Resolution of raster images
While a 72-ppi raster image appears sharp on a monitor, the same image would likely appear
pixelated when printed to the Color Server. Color printers are capable of much greater detail
than computer monitors, and require correspondingly higher resolution image files. However,
high-resolution files can be large and, therefore, cumbersome to transmit over a network,
process for printing, store on disk, and edit.
Beyond a certain threshold, a higher image resolution greatly increases file size while having a
minimal effect on output quality. The optimal image resolution depends on the resolution of
the final print device. Aim for the resolution that optimizes both file size and output quality.
The resolution of a raster image, along with its bit depth and physical dimensions, determine
its file size. The following table shows the file sizes of color raster images at different
dimensions and resolutions.
File size at
100 ppi
150 ppi
200 ppi
400 ppi
600 ppi
Image size
RGB/CMYK
RGB/CMYK
RGB/CMYK
RGB/CMYK
RGB/CMYK
3" x 4"
0.4/0.5 MB
0.8/1.0 MB
1.4/1.8 MB
5.5/7.3 MB
12.4/16.5 MB
5" x 7"
1.0/1.3 MB
2.3/3.0 MB
4.0/5.3 MB
16.0/21.4 MB
36.1/48.1 MB
8.5" x 11"
2.7/3.6 MB
6.0/8.0 MB
10.7/14.3 MB
42.8/57.1 MB
96.4/128.5
MB
11" x 17"
5.4/7.1 MB
12.0/16.1 MB
21.4/28.5 MB
85.6/114.1
MB
192.7/256.9
MB
In this table, the shaded areas indicate that 200 ppi is typically the best trade-off between
image quality and file size. However, higher resolutions (for example, 250 to 300 ppi) may be
necessary for offset printing, when quality is of the utmost importance, or for images
containing sharp diagonal lines.
To find the best image resolution for your purposes, make test prints of some raster artwork at
different resolutions. Start with a high-resolution image (400 ppi) and save versions at
progressively lower resolutions, down to 100 ppi, using a pixel-editing application, such as
Photoshop. Always save a copy of the original high-resolution version, in case you must revert
to it. The high-resolution data cannot be recreated from a lower resolution version.
88
DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER
Image quality
Print the files and examine the output. You will likely begin to see a marked deterioration in
output quality at resolutions below 200 ppi, while above 200 ppi the improvement may be
very subtle.
100 ppi
200 ppi
300 ppi
400 ppi
500 ppi
600 ppi
Image resolution
Raster images prepared for offset printing may need to be at higher resolutions than necessary
for proofing on your Color Server.
Scaling
Ideally, each raster image should be saved at the actual size, and it will be placed in the
document at the optimal resolution for the printer. If the image resolution is correct for the
printer, there is no quality advantage to be gained by scaling an image to a percentage of its
actual size. If you scale a large image to a percentage of its actual size, you incur unnecessary
file transfer time, because the image data for the entire large image is sent to the printer. If an
image is placed multiple times at markedly different sizes in a document, save a separate
version of the image at the correct size for each placement.
If you must place an image at greater than 100% in a document, remember that the output
image resolution is affected. For example, if you scale a 200 ppi image to 200%, the image is
printed at 100 ppi.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
89
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Books
Adobe Print Publishing Guide. Adobe Press, 1998. ISBN: 1568304684
Blatner, David and Fraser, Bruce. Real World Adobe Photoshop 7. Berkeley: Peachpit Press,
2002. ISBN: 0321115600
Bruno, Michael H., ed. Pocket Pal ®: A Graphic Arts Production Handbook. Eighteenth
Edition. GATFPress, 2000. ISBN: 0883623382
Hunt, R.W.G. The Reproduction of Colour. Sixth Edition. Surrey: Fountain Press, 2002. ISBN:
0863433685
Kieran, Michael. The Color Scanning Success Handbook. Toronto: DPA Communications
Corp., 1997. (Out of print)
Kieran, Michael. Understanding Desktop Color, Second Edition. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 1994.
Margulis, Dan. Professional Photoshop: The Classic Guide to Color Correction. John
Wiley & Sons, 2002. ISBN: 0764536958
Miller, Marc D. and Zaucha, Randy. The Color Mac. Second Edition. Hayden Books, 1995.
(Out of print)
X-Rite Color Guide and Glossary: Communication, Measurement, and Control for Digital
Imaging and Graphic Arts. X-Rite Incorporated, 1999. (Available from X-Rite dealers or via
the X-Rite web site, www.color.org <http://www.color.org/>.)
World Wide Web sites
International Color Consortium: www.color.org
Graphic Arts Information Network:
<http://www.gain.net/PIA_GATF/about_join/aboutgatf.html>
Seybold Seminars Online: www.seyboldseminars.com
Adobe Systems Incorporated: www.adobe.com
INDEX
91
INDEX
A
accent color 82
additive color model 77
additive primaries 77
Adobe
Adobe (ACE) conversion option
Illustrator 62
Photoshop 36
Adobe Illustrator, see Illustrator
Adobe InDesign, see InDesign
Adobe Photoshop, see Photoshop
B
bit depth, of raster images 86, 87
bitmaps, see raster images
Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma, Photoshop
setting 36
brightness 74, 75
C
charts, using color in 82
choosing color 16
CIE
chromaticity diagram 75, 76
color model 75
CIELAB color space 9
CMY color model 20
CMYK Color Reference 12, 25
CMYK EPS
FreeHand 67
Photoshop 42
CMYK simulation method 30
CMYK Simulation profile 30
color
accent color 82
additive model 77
CMY model 20
complements 84
controlling printing results 16
conversion by color management systems 10
custom color systems 24
defining in PostScript applications 27
HSB model 24, 75
HSL model 20, 24
HSV model 20
physics of 74
process colors 81
properties of 74
reference pages 12
RGB model 20, 24
split complements 84
spot colors 81
subtractive model 77, 78
subtractive primaries 78
swatch color matching 25
text 85
theory 74
triads 84
using effectively 82 to 85
wheel 83
color management
basics 9 to 10
ColorWise 11
Illustrator 60
monitor 19
QuarkXPress 57
color management system (CMS) 9
color matching systems, see custom color systems
color monitors, see monitors
color proofing 18
color space 75
color theory 74
color wheel 83
ColorSync 9
ColorWise 9, 11
Combine Separations, Photoshop 39
Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage, see
CIE
complements, color 84
compression, JPEG 38, 39, 41, 42
computer monitors, see monitors
continuous tone devices 81
92
INDEX
Conversion Options, Photoshop setting 36
Convert RGB to process, Freehand setting 69
CorelDRAW 70 to 72
CRDs
bypassing 22, 29
rendering intent 20
custom color systems 24, 84
D
defining color 27
Desaturate Monitor Colors By, Photoshop
setting 36
device profiles 9
Document Color Mode, Illustrator 60
documentation 8
E
EFICOLOR
profiles 57
XTension 57
EFIRGB
Illustrator 61
Photoshop 35
embedded profile, Illustrator 62
Encoding, Photoshop setting 39
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)
about 29
color accuracy 23, 32
defining colors 22
imported images 29
PostScript Color Management 41
with CorelDRAW 70
with FreeHand 67
with illustration applications 59
with Illustrator 62
with Photoshop 37
EPS CMYK
FreeHand 67
Photoshop 42
EPS RGB 41
Excel, see Microsoft Office
F
Fiery Graphic Arts Package 31
file size, of raster images 11, 87
flexography 81
font size, for color text 85
FreeHand 24, 66 to 69
G
gamma 10
gamut
mapping 80
of monitors 80
of photographic transparencies 80
GDI applications, using color in 20 to 24
Graphics Device Interface, see GDI
graphs, using color in 82
gravure 81
H
halftone screen 31
halftoning 81
HSB color model 24, 75
HSL color model 20, 24
HSV color model 20
hue, saturation, and brightness 74, 75
I
ICC profiles
about 35
included with user software 10
ICC standard for color management systems 9
illustration applications 59
Illustrator 24, 60 to 62
InDesign 44 to 50
International Color Consortium 9
J
JPEG 38, 39, 41, 42
L
light 74 to 75
line art, see vector images
M
Macromedia FreeHand, see FreeHand
metamerism 75
Microsoft Excel, see Microsoft Office
Microsoft Office 20 to 23
Microsoft PowerPoint, see Microsoft Office
Microsoft Word, see Microsoft Office
misregistration of colors 85
moiré 81
monitor color management 19
93
INDEX
monitors
color model 78
gamut of 80
phosphors 78
Multi-channel, Photoshop 43
N
named colors 24
O
Print Space, Photoshop setting 40
printing
raster images 86
techniques 81
prism 74
process colors 25, 78, 81
Profile Mismatches
Illustrator setting 62
Profile, Photoshop setting 40
profiles, device 9
proofing
color 18
prepress 81
office applications 17, 20 to 23
offset lithographic printing 81
offset press print jobs, workflow issues 18
offset press printing 81
on-demand printing 18
Output Options, FreeHand 69
output profile
color conversion 10
with office applications 23
Q
P
R
page layout applications 44
PageMaker 24, 51 to 54
PageMaker, see PageMaker
painting applications 86
PANTONE
color system 24, 25
reference 12
phosphors 10, 78
photographic prints 78
photographic transparencies 78, 80
Photoshop
color management with 24
importing CorelDRAW data 70
using 33 to 43
Photoshop Multi-channel 43
physics of color 74
pixel-editing applications 86, 87
pixels in raster images 86
PostScript applications
color handling 24
using color in 24 to 32
PostScript Color Management, Photoshop
option 38, 41
PostScript printer drivers 23
PowerPoint, see Microsoft Office
prepress proof 81
presentation print jobs, using color in 82
press simulation, see CMYK Simulation option
Quark CMS XTension 57
QuarkXPress 24, 55 to 58
QuarkXPress color management 57
QuickDraw applications, using color in 20 to 24
raster images
about 86 to 88
bit depth 86, 87
file size 87
for offset press printing 88
printing 86
resolution 87 to 88
scaling of 88
registration of colors 85
rendering styles 20
RGB color model 20, 24
RGB Color Reference 12, 21
RGB EPS 41
RGB source color space, see source color space
S
saturation 74, 75
scaling of raster images 88
scanners 77, 78
screens, used in halftoning 81
Separations, printing with Photoshop 39
short-run printing 18
simulation, see CMYK Simulation option
source color space 10
spectral colors 75
spectral components of light 74, 75
split complements 84
INDEX
Spot Color Matching option
with Photoshop 43
with PostScript applications 26
spot colors 24, 25, 81
sRGB 35
subtractive color model 77, 78
subtractive primaries 78
sunlight 74
swatch color matching 25
T
text
font size 85
using color with 85
TIFF images
assigning ICC profiles to 29
preview 38
printing at full resolution 53
recommended for imported images 29, 37
tint 75
transparencies (photographic) 78, 80
triads 84
V
vector images 86
visible spectrum of light 74
W
white point 10
Windows Graphics Device Interface, see GDI
applications
Word, see Microsoft Office
workflow, recommended 15
working space
Illustrator 60, 62
Photoshop 34
94
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Print Options
© 2005 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45058969
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
5
Terminology and conventions
5
About this document
5
PRINT OPTIONS OVERVIEW
6
About printer drivers and printer description files
6
Setting print options
7
Print option override hierarchy
PRINT OPTIONS
Print options and settings
7
8
8
Additional information
20
Auto Trapping
20
Booklet Maker
20
Centering Adjustment
22
Creep Adjustment
22
Duplex
23
Image Shift
24
Punch and Punch Holes
25
Scale
26
Scale to Fit
26
Staple
27
INDEX
29
5
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This document provides a description of the E-5000/E-3000 print options. This document
also briefly explains each print option and provides information on any constraints or
requirements.
For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome.
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS 9, Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
About this document
This document covers the following topics:
• Information about printer drivers, printer description files (PPD), and setting E-5000/
E-3000 print options.
• Descriptions of each print option including default settings and any constraints or
requirements.
PRINT OPTIONS OVERVIEW
PRINT OPTIONS
6
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes printer drivers, PPD files, and E-5000/E-3000 print options, and
indicates where to set print options.
About printer drivers and printer description files
The E-5000/E-3000 receives files from computers on the network, processes (RIPs) the files,
and then sends them to the copier. Windows and Mac OS computers communicate with the
E-5000/E-3000 by means of a printer driver and PPD files. The driver allows you to use
special features of the E-5000/E-3000 from the Print dialog box.
A printer driver manages printing communication between your application and the printer.
It interprets the instructions generated by the application, merges those instructions with
printer-specific options that you set, and then translates all information into Adobe
PostScript, a language the printer understands. In other words, the printer driver writes a
PostScript file based on your original file and the options that you set from the Print dialog
box.
A printer driver also allows you to select print options for your copier. To do this, the printer
driver must be matched with a PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file for your E-5000/
E-3000. A PPD file contains information about the features and capabilities of a particular
device (for example, what paper sizes and media types are supported). The printer driver reads
the information in the PPD file and presents that information to you in the form of options
you select in the Print dialog box. The PPD file for the E-5000/E-3000 includes information
about the features of both the copier and the E-5000/E-3000. For information about the
specific print options for the E-5000/E-3000, see the table on page 9.
PRINT OPTIONS OVERVIEW
7
Setting print options
Print options give you access to the special features of your copier and E-5000/E-3000.
You can specify print options using the following methods:
• During Setup
Some settings are specified during Setup by the administrator. For information about
the current default server settings, contact the administrator or the operator.
• From applications
With the Adobe PostScript printer drivers, you can specify job settings when you print
a job. For information about specifying job settings from Windows applications, see
Printing from Windows. For information about specifying job settings from Mac OS
applications, see Printing from Mac OS.
• From ColorWise Pro Tools
Set the default CMYK Simulation Profile, CMYK Simulation Method, RGB Source
Profile, RGB Separation, Output Profile, Rendering Style, Spot Color Matching, Pure
Black Text/Graphics, and Black Overprint settings. For more information about using
ColorWise Pro Tools, see Color Printing.
• From Hot Folders (optional)
Assign a group of print options to a Hot Folder. When you specify print options for
a Hot Folder, the print options are assigned to all jobs sent through that Hot Folder.
These print options override any default options.
For more information, see Hot Folders Help.
• Overrides from Command WorkStation
To change job settings from Command WorkStation, double-click a job to display the
Properties dialog box.
For more information about Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help.
Print option override hierarchy
The override hierarchy is as follows:
• A user’s printer driver settings override the E-5000/E-3000 Setup and ColorWise Pro
Tools settings.
• Settings made from the job management tools override the user’s printer driver settings.
PRINT OPTIONS
8
PRINT OPTIONS
This chapter explains the E-5000/E-3000 print options, default settings, and any constraints
or requirements. This chapter also provides more detailed descriptions of specific print
options, beginning on page 20.
Print options and settings
In the following table, underlined settings in the Option and settings column indicate default
printer driver settings (PPD defaults). If you do not use the printer driver interface to
configure a particular option, the E-5000/E-3000 prints the job with the underlined setting.
For options that you configure in Setup from FieryBar, Command WorkStation, WebSetup,
or ColorWise Pro Tools, choosing Printer’s default results in the E-5000/E-3000 printing the
job with the setting you specified in Setup. For options that cannot be configured in Setup,
the E-5000/E-3000 prints the job with a preconfigured Printer’s default setting. For more
information, see the Requirements, constraints, and information column in the table.
To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Configuration page from Command
WorkStation.
9
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Align front and back images
Off/On
Specify to align the front image to the back
image when using the Image Shift print
option.
For more information, see page 24.
Auto Trapping
Off/On
Specify whether the job should automatically For more information, see page 20
trap text and graphics independently of their and Color Printing.
application.
Set this option to On to ensure proper
registration and fit of adjacent colors.
Black Overprint
Printer’s default/Off/Text/
Text/Graphics
Specify the type of black overprint style.
Select Text to overprint black text.
Select Text/Graphics to overprint black text
and graphics.
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
To select this option, you must first enable
Pure Black On from the Black Text/Graphics
print option.
If this option is set to Text or Text/Graphics,
you must set the Combine Separations print
option to Off.
For more information, see Color Printing.
Black Text/Graphics
Normal/Pure Black On/
Rich Black On
Select Normal to print black text and
graphics as a four-color black using
C, M, Y, and K toner, and to use normal
PostScript rendering.
Select Pure Black On to print black text and
graphics as a one-color black, using 100%
black toner only.
Select Rich Black On to print black text and
graphics as a one-color black, using 100%
black toner plus some amount of Cyan, to
make the black darker.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
The Pure Black On option automatically
enables the Black Overprint print option.
For more information, see Color Printing.
10
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Booklet Back Cover Mode
None/Print on Front Only/
Print on Back Only/Print Both/Blank
Specify the content of the back cover.
This option is only available with the
Booklet Maker print option.
Select Print on Front Only to print content
on the front face of the back cover. The back
face will be a blank page.
Select Print on Back Only to print content
on the back face of the back cover.
Select Print Both to print content on the
front and back faces of the back cover.
Select Blank if you do not want any content
printed on the front and back faces of the
back cover.
N OTE : Blank pages may be inserted
depending on the original total page count
of the job.
Booklet Best Fit
On/Off
Specify when the original document size
is to be printed on the same paper size by
reducing the image size by one half.
This option is only available with the
Booklet Maker print option.
Booklet Cover Source
Same as Job/Auto Tray Select/
Bypass Tray/Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/
Tray 3 (LCT)/Tray 4
Specify the paper tray source for the
outside cover sheet.
This option is only available when the
Booklet Maker print option is set to Saddle,
Saddle (Right Binding), Gang-Up - Speed
Print, or Gang-Up - Double Print.
Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 3 LCT (Large
Capacity Tray) are available only if they are
installed on the copier.
Booklet Front Cover Mode
None/Print on Front Only/
Print on Back Only/Print Both/Blank
Specify the content of the front cover.
Select Print on Front Only to insert a blank
page before the second page of the job.
This option is only available with the
Booklet Maker print option.
Select Print on Back Only to insert a blank
before the first page of the job.
Select Print Both to print page 1 and page 2
on the front and back side of the front cover.
Select Blank to insert two blank pages before
the first page of the job.
Booklet Maker
Off/Saddle/Saddle (Right Binding)/
Perfect/Perfect (Right Binding)/
Gang-Up - Speed Print/
Gang-Up - Double Print
Specify how to arrange the pages of a job
in special layouts for folding or cutting
after printing.
For more information, see page 20.
11
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Brightness
85% Lightest/90% Lighter/95% Light/
100% Normal/105% Dark/110% Darker/
115% Darkest
Select 85% for a substantially lighter image,
115% for a substantially darker image, or use
one of the settings in between.
Center Margin
0-50 (mm)
0.00-1.97 (inches)
Specify a margin value (millimeters or
inches) at the folding line for imposition
printing.
Centering Adjustment
XY/Bottom X
Specify how you want the images positioned This option is only available with the
on the page for imposition printing.
Booklet Maker print option.
This option is only available with the
Booklet Maker print option.
This option is not available in Command
WorkStation, Spooler, or Adobe PageMaker.
For more information, see page 22.
CMYK Simulation Method
Printer’s default/Quick/
Full (Source GCR)/
Full (Output GCR)
Select Quick to use one-dimensional transfer Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
curves to adjust density output of individual in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
color channels.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
Select Full (Source GCR) for a more
complete and accurate simulation.
For more information, see Color Printing.
Full (Source GCR) applies colorimetric
transformations that adjust hue as well as
output density. This option produces output
that maintains the same amount of black
as the source document.
Select Full (Output GCR) to apply the same
simulation method as Full (Source GCR),
except that the output produced contains
a black amount determined by the Output
Profile.
CMYK Simulation Profile
Specify the simulation goal to be used for
Printer’s default/DIC (EFI)/Euroscale
the current print job.
(EFI)/ISO-Coated/ISO-Uncoated/
JMPA ver. 2 (EFI)/Japan Color 2001 type 1
(EFI)/SWOP-Coated (EFI)/TOYO Offset
Coated 2.0/Simulation-1/Simulation-2/
Simulation-3/Simulation-4/Simulation-5/
Simulation-6/Simulation-7/Simulation-8/
Simulation-9/Simulation-10/None/
ColorWise OFF
Collate
Off/On
Specify how to output multiple-page/
multiple-copy jobs.
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
For more information, see Color Printing.
12
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Color/Print Mode
Standard Color/Expert Color/
Grayscale
Specify the color mode for the current
print job.
The options differ, depending on which
operating system you use.
Select CMYK, Standard Color, or Expert
Color for a full-color document.
For more information, see Color Printing.
Select Grayscale for a grayscale or
black-and-white document.
Combine Separations
On/Off
When printing separations from supported
desktop publishing applications:
For more information, see Color Printing.
Select On to combine separations on a single
page. The result is one page of overprinted
colors that simulates printing on a press from
film separations.
Select Off to view separations as four
individual black-and-white pages, each
representing one color plate.
Composite Overprint
On/Off
Specify how to print the colors of
overlapping images.
For more information, see Color Printing.
Select On to print a combination of
background and foreground colors
where objects overlap.
Select Off to hide the background
object where images overlap.
Copies
1-(1-9999)
Specify the number of copies of a print job.
The maximum number of copies depends
on your operating system.
Create Master
None/1-15 (Up to 100)
To create a FreeForm master from this job,
specify a number to assign to the FreeForm
master file.
For more information, see Variable Data
Printing.
N OTE : To create more than 15 (up to 100)
FreeForm Masters, you must first enable
Two-Way Communication by entering
the IP Address or DNS name from the
Properties > Accessories tab.
Creep Adjustment
Off/Thick/Plain
Creep occurs when booklets have a large
number of pages or are printed on heavy
media. Use this option to adjust images
that may shift from the center of the sheet
in booklets.
Command WorkStation allows you to select
up to 100 FreeForm Masters. For more
information, see Command WorkStation
Help.
This option is only available with the
Booklet Maker print option.
This option is not available in Command
WorkStation or Spooler.
For more information, see page 22.
13
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Destination
Printer’s Default/Finisher Shift Tray/
Finisher Upper Tray/Internal Tray 1/
Internal Tray 2
Specify where to print the job.
Destination options vary according to the
accessories installed on the copier.
Dithering
Auto/Text/Photo
Select Auto if the file is a combination
of text, photographs, or illustrations
Select Text if the file contains small text.
Select Photo if the file is a photograph.
Document Server
Off/On
Specify a file to be saved to the hard disk,
and printed from the copier display panel.
This option is not available in Adobe
PageMaker.
Document Server print jobs can be
saved with a File name and Password. If a
Document Server job has been password
protected, it can only be printed when the
correct password is entered at the copier
display panel.
Document Server File Name
Enter a file name to distinguish a job from
other Document Server jobs.
The file name can contain up to 16
alphanumeric characters.
This option is not available with Adobe
PageMaker.
Document Server Password
Enter a password for a job to prevent the job The password can contain from 4 to 8
from being printed and read by others.
numerical digits.
This option is not available with Adobe
PageMaker.
Document Server User Name
Enter your user name to distinguish your
jobs from other user jobs.
The user name can contain up to 16
alphanumeric characters.
This option is not available with Adobe
PageMaker.
Document Size
Letter/A4/Legal/Executive/11x17/12x18/
5.5x8.5/A3/A5/B4 JIS/B5 JIS/B6 JIS/
8.25x13/8.5x13/8x13/8K/16K/
Com 10 Env./Monarch Env./C5 Env./
C6 Env./DL Env./PostScript Custom Page
Size
Specify the size of paper on which to print
the document.
14
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Duplex (Windows)
Off/Open to Left/Open to Top
Specify whether the job should print
For more information about duplex printing,
single-sided or double-sided (duplex), by
see page 23.
specifying the orientation of printed images.
Or
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Two-sided (Mac OS X)
Off/Long-edged binding/Short-edged
binding
First Page Input
Off/On
Select On if you want to specify printing the
first page of the print job using a different
media and input tray from the rest of your
print job.
First Page Input Tray
Auto Tray Select/Bypass Tray/Tray 1/
Tray 2/Tray 3/Tray 3 (LCT)/Tray 4
Specify printing the first page of the print job Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 3 LCT (Large
from the selected Input Tray.
Capacity Tray) are available only if they are
installed on the copier.
First Page Media Type
Plain & Recycled/Plain/Transparency/
Preprinted/Labels/Recycled/Color/Bond/
Cardstock/Thin/Middle Thick/Thick 1-3/
Letterhead/Special 1-3
Specify the media type for the first page of
the print job.
Image Quality
Printer’s default/Normal/Best
Specify the image quality for your job.
The Printer’s default setting reflects the
setting specified in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
Image Shift
On/Off
Select On to adjust an image for various
finishing options, such as stapling and holepunching.
For more information, see page 24.
Image Smoothing
Printer’s default/Off/On/Auto/
Below 90 ppi/Below 150 ppi/
Below 200 ppi/Below 300 ppi
Select On to minimize grainy output when
printing low-resolution images. When you
select On, Image Smoothing is enforced on
all images.
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
Select Auto to use smoothing only when it
makes a visible difference. When the image
is below 150 ppi, image smoothing is applied
automatically.
If you create an EPS file in Adobe
Photoshop, the settings specified in
Photoshop take effect. over those set with the
Image Smoothing option.
Select Below 90 ppi, Below 150 ppi, Below
200 ppi, or Below 300 ppi to apply image
smoothing to those images whose effective
resolution is below the specified ppi value
that you choose.
Input Tray
Auto Tray Select/Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/
Tray 3 (LCT)/Tray 4/Bypass Tray
Specify the paper tray to use for your job.
The Auto Tray Select setting automatically
selects the tray containing the paper size
specified for the job.
Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 3 (Large Capacity
Tray) are available only if they are installed
on the copier.
15
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Instructions
Type instructions for the operator about
the job.
This field has a 127-character (alphanumeric
and special characters) limit.
Media Type
Plain & Recycled/Plain/Transparency/
Preprinted/Labels/Recycled/Color/Bond/
Cardstock/Thin/Middle Thick/Thick 1-3/
Letterhead/Special 1-3
Specify the media type to use for the
entire job.
Mirror
On/Off
Select On to print the mirror image of
the job.
Mixed Media
Click Define to specify the media types
used for specific pages.
N-up Layout
1-up/2-up/4-up/6-up/9-up/16-up
Select a layout for your print job.
Notes
Type information about the job.
The Notes field has a 31-character limit.
Orientation
Portrait/Landscape
Specify Portrait or Landscape page
orientation for the document.
This option is available only from Windows
printer drivers.
Orientation Override
Off/Portrait/Landscape
Specify an orientation override.
Output Profile
Use Media Defined Profile/
Use Server’s Default/
Use Output Profile
Specify the output profile to use for the
current print job. You can associate a
downloaded ICC profile with one of the
five Output Profile settings to manage color
conversion on the E-5000/E-3000.
For more information, see Utilities.
Depending on the application you are
using, a landscape job might print with the
incorrect orientation. If this occurs, use this
option to specify the correct orientation
for your job.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
For more information, see Color Printing.
Use Media Defined Profile reflects the setting
you specified in ColorWise Pro Tools.
Use Server’s Default reflects the setting you
specified in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
If you specify Use Output Profile, select
one of the 10 output profiles.
Page Order
Printer’s default/Forward/Reverse
Select Forward to print the pages of your job Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
from first to last.
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
Select Reverse to print the pages of your job
from last to first.
16
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Preview Master
Click to preview
Click to generate a low-resolution image
of the selected FreeForm Master.
This option is available only if you enable the
Use Master print option.
For more information, see Variable Data
Printing.
Print by Color Selection
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow/Black
Specify the color channel for printing
variations in a multi-color document.
Print Gray Using Black Only (CMYK)
Printer’s default/ Text/Graphics /
Text/Graphics/Images
Enable this option to print a CMYK print
job using only black toner instead of
processed black.
Print Gray Using Black Only (RBG)
Printer’s default/ Text/Graphics /
Text/Graphics/Images
Enable this option to print an RGB print job For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
using only black toner instead of processed
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
black.
Print Master
Printer’s default/Yes/No
When you create a Master page from an
application and set this option to Yes, the
Master file prints.
Select this option to verify or confirm your
Master page.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
This option is available only if the Create
Master print option is enabled.
For more information, see Variable Data
Printing.
N OTE : Applicable click charges occur when
you print the Master.
Print Size
Same as Document Size/Letter/A4/Legal/
Executive/11x17/12x18/5.5x8.5/A3/A5/
B4 JIS/B5 JIS/B6 JIS/8.25x13/8.5x13/
8x13/8K/16K/Com 10 Env./Monarch
Env./C5 Env./C6 Env./DL Env.
Specify the print size of a document. If the
document’s size differs from the selected
print size, the document is scaled and printed
at the specified print size.
Print Size by Tray
Same as Document Size/Tray 1/Tray 2/
Tray 3/Tray 3 (LCT)/Bypass Tray
Specify the print size of the document
according to the input tray used.
Print Watermarks
First Page Only
Specify whether to print a watermark on
first page only.
Punch
Off/Left/Right/Top
Specify binder hole location.
Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 3 LCT (Large
Capacity Tray) are available only if they are
installed on the copier.
To use this option, the Finisher with the
Punch option must be installed.
For more information, see page 25.
Punch Holes
Printer’s default/Two Holes/Three Holes/
Four Holes/Four Holes Grouped
Specify the number and type of holes you
want punched when you have selected the
Punch option.
N OTE : The Printer’s default setting produces
the same result as Three Holes.
For more information, see page 25.
17
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Quality Mode
Super Fine/Fine/Coarse
This option controls bit level printing.
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Specify Super Fine to print with 4-bit data.
Specify Fine to print with 2-bit data.
Specify Coarse to print with 1-bit data.
Remove White PPT Background
Off/On
Select On when using Microsoft PowerPoint
to create variable data in conjunction with
FreeForm.
Setting this option to On allows for
processing PowerPoint print jobs effectively.
Rendering Style
Printer’s default/Photographic/
Presentation/Relative Colorimetric/
Absolute Colorimetric
Specify a default color rendering dictionary
(CRD) to use when you print RGB images,
objects, and text.
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
For more information, see Color Printing.
RGB Separation
Printer’s default/Simulation/Output
Select Simulation for RGB jobs for which
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
you want to simulate an output device other in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
than the device to which you are printing.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
For more information, see Color Printing.
RGB Source Profile
Printer’s default/EFIRGB/sRGB (PC)/
Apple Standard/Adobe RGB (1998)/
ECI-RGB/Fiery RGB v2/Source-1/Source-2/
Source-3/Source-4/Source-5/Source-6/
Source-7/Source-8/Source-9/Source-10/
None
Specify a source color space definition for
printing RGB images, objects, and text.
Rotate 180
On/Off
Specify to rotate the pages of a job
180 degrees.
Rotate 180 (Large Paper Only)
On/Off
Specify to rotate the pages of a large size
print job 180 degrees.
Save Fast Reprint
On/Off
Specify whether to save a job’s raster data to
disk after printing, so that the data is
available later for reprinting (without
reRiPping).
With this option set to On, all print option
settings remain with the saved raster data
each time the job is reprinted. To print the
job with new print option settings, you must
remove the raster data and reRIP the job.
Scale
100% (25-400%)
Specify a scaling size for the job.
The supported range is 25 to 400 percent.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
For more information, see Color Printing.
For more information, see page 26.
18
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Scale to Fit
On/Off
Specify whether to scale your job to fit a
particular paper size.
For more information, see page 26.
Secure Print
Enter an arbitrary password, and then enter
it again from the copier touch panel display
to print.
For more details, see the documentation that
accompanies your copier.
Slip Sheet Input Tray
Auto Tray Select/Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/
Tray 3 (LCT)/Tray 4/Bypass Tray
Specify the paper tray to use for the
slip sheet.
Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 3 LCT (Large
Capacity Tray) are available only if they are
installed on the copier.
Slip Sheet Media Type
Plain & Recycled/Plain/Transparency/
Preprinted/Labels/Recycled/Color/Bond/
Cardstock/Thin/Middle Thick/Thick 1-3/
Letterhead/Special 1-3
Specify the media to use for the slip sheet.
Spot Color Matching
Printer’s default/Off/On
Select Off to print specified PANTONE
colors in your job using the current
CMYK Simulation and CMYK Simulation
Method.
Printer’s default reflects the setting specified
in E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
For Windows, choose Expert Color as the
Color/Print Mode to access this option.
Select On to activate the PANTONE
For more information, see Color Printing.
Lookup Table. The E-5000/E-3000 prints
specified PANTONE colors in your job by
matching the CMYK print blend to the same
color from the PANTONE library.
Staple
Off/Top Left Auto/Top Right Auto/
Top Left Slant/Top Right Slant/
Top Left Horizontal/Top Right Horizontal/
Top Left Vertical/Top Right Vertical/
2 at Center/2 at Left/2 at Right/2 at Top
Specify the number of staples and their
positions.
Substitute Colors
Off/On
Select On to use the Substitute Color Values
defined in the ColorWise Pro Tools Spot-On
module.
Toner Reduction
Off/On
Specify to decrease the amount of toner used.
Tray Alignment
Printer’s default/Off/On
Specify to enable tray alignment.
For more information, see page 27.
If you enable tray alignment, the Paper
Source cannot be set to AutoSelect at the
copier.
For more information, see Command
WorkStation Help.
Units
mm/inches/points
Specify the measurement values when using
the Image Shift print option.
For more information about Image Shift,
see page 24.
19
PRINT OPTIONS
Option and settings
(default setting is underlined)
Description
Requirements, constraints,
and information
Use Master
None/1-15 (Up to 100)
For variable data print jobs, specify the
FreeForm master to use for the job.
For more information about FreeForm
Masters, see Variable Data Printing.
N OTE : To create and use more than 15
(up to 100) FreeForm Masters, you must
enable Two-Way Communication by
entering the IP Address or DNS name
from the Properties>Accessories tab.
Command Workstation allows you to select
up to 100 FreeForm Masters.
For more information about creating
FreeForm masters in Command
Workstation, see Command WorkStation
Help.
Use Slip Sheet
Off/Blank/Printed
Specify whether to insert a slip sheet between
copies of multiple-copy jobs.
User Authentication
If User Authentication is enabled in E-5000/ For more information about user
E-3000 Setup, enter Username and Password authentication and setting up users and
to allow printing.
groups, see Configure Help.
Select Use Windows Login to use your
Windows login for authentication.
Select Save User Information to save the user
name and password information for
subsequent sessions.
Select I’m a Guest to allow you to do guest
printing.
Watermarks
None/CONFIDENTIAL/COPY/DRAFT/
ORIGINAL/TOP SECRET
Specify to print a standard watermark.
To create your own watermark, select New.
To print a watermark on the first page only,
select First Page Only.
20
PRINT OPTIONS
Additional information
The following sections provide additional information about certain print options. For more
information about the settings, requirements, and constraints in effect for these options, see
the table that starts on page 9.
Auto Trapping
Trapping is a technique of printing some objects slightly larger or smaller than specified in
an application, in order to prevent white edges around the objects. These white edges, or
“hollows,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the
toners, or the stiffness of the media. The Auto Trapping feature provides you with advanced
trapping settings and gives you full control over their values.
For more information, see Color Printing.
Booklet Maker
Use this option to arrange the pages of your print job in special layouts for folding or cutting
after printing.
N OTE : Custom Paper Sizes, mixed media jobs, and variable data jobs are not supported when
using Booklet Maker.
The following booklet methods are supported:
Off: Choose this setting to print a job without any booklet imposition features.
Saddle: Choose this setting to print entire documents that are folded and stacked in booklet
order. Finished pages can be stapled or stitched across the center fold, or spine.
You can use the Image Shift option to allow for various finishing options. You can also use
Creep Adjustment to adjust the image shifting that may occur when you print booklet jobs on
heavy media. For more information, see “Creep Adjustment” on page 22 and “Image Shift”
on page 24.
Saddle (Right Binding): This option is the same as Saddle, except that the page order sequence
.
is from right to left.
Front
Back
Saddle booklet
21
PRINT OPTIONS
Perfect: Choose this setting to print separate folded pages that are stacked in booklet order.
Finished pages are stitched adjacent to one another for trimming or gluing.
Perfect (Right Binding): This option is the same as Perfect, except that the page order
sequence is from right to left.
Front
Back
Perfect booklet
Gang-Up - Double Print: Choose this setting to print a job so that the data on the first page is
duplicated on the first sheet. The next page duplicates the data on the second page, and
so forth. For example, when each of the printed copies is cut in half, the result is two complete
sets of the same document.
Single-sided
Front only
Double-sided (Duplex)
Front
Back
Gang-Up - Speed Print: Choose this setting to speed print a job so that when the sheets are
stacked and cut from the central position, the job is numbered in order and separated as two
stacks. The order of print is such that when they are cut in half, they can be combined to form
a single complete set of the document, in faster printing time.
Single-sided
Front only
Double-sided (Duplex)
Front
Back
22
PRINT OPTIONS
Centering Adjustment
Use this option to specify how you want the image positioned on the page.
N OTE : Centering Adjustment is available as an option only when Booklet Maker is selected.
The following table describes the Centering Adjustment settings:
Centering setting
Image position on page
XY
Positions the image in the center of the page.
Bottom X
Positions the image flush with the bottom of the page.
Creep Adjustment
Creep occurs in booklets that contain a large number of pages or when booklets are printed
on heavy media. Use this option to adjust images that may shift from the center of the sheet in
booklet jobs.
N OTE : To use this option you must set the Booklet Maker option to Saddle or Perfect, and the
Duplex option to Open to Left.
Off: Choose this setting to print booklet jobs without any adjustment.
Plain: Choose this setting when printing booklet jobs on plain media.
Thick: Choose this setting when printing booklet jobs on thick media.
N OTE : If you choose Thick from the Creep menu, your job still prints on Plain paper unless
you choose Thick from the Media Type menu.
23
PRINT OPTIONS
Duplex
Duplex (two-sided) printing features are only available when printing from specific trays.
TO PRINT DUPLEX PAGES
1 Choose Print in your application and locate the Duplex print option.
2 Choose one of the Duplex settings:
Open to Left: Prints the top of the image on Side 1, on the same edge of the page as the top of
the image on Side 2.
Open to Top: Prints the top of the image on Side 1, on the opposite edge of the page from the
top of the image on Side 2.
N OTE : On the Mac OS, the two-sided settings are Long-edged binding (Open to Left
equivalent) and Short-edged binding (Open to Top equivalent).
The following table shows how the Duplex settings correspond to printed output:
Open to Left (Win)/
Long-edged binding (Mac)
Open to Top (Win)/
Short-edged binding (Mac)
2
Portrait
1
2
1
2
Landscape
1
2
1
PRINT OPTIONS
24
Image Shift
Image Shift allows you to specify how much the image on each page should be shifted relative
to the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axis. Moving the job content in this manner enables you
to allow for various finishing options, such as stapling and binding. Image Shift prevents the
image from being clipped.
TO DEFINE IMAGE SHIFT FOR A PRINT JOB
1 Select Image Shift from the Finishing tab in the printer driver.
2 Select the unit of measurement.
3 Enter the Front image shift settings in the X and Y axis fields. You can also use the arrow
buttons to shift the image settings.
N OTE : The maximum value for both X and Y axes is 310.73 points/4.32 inches/109.62 mm.
4 To align front and back images proportionately, select Align front and back images.
25
PRINT OPTIONS
Punch and Punch Holes
The following table illustrates the number of holes and punch positions.
N OTE : Punch positions vary according to paper size, paper type, number of pages, and
feed direction.
Punch setting
Portrait
Left
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
4 holes, grouped
Landscape
Top
Left
Top
26
PRINT OPTIONS
Scale
This option allows you to set the scale value of an active job. The operator can specify a
scaling override from Spooler, but the override is applied to any scaling value already set in the
active job. For example, if a user sends a job with a scaling value of 50% and the operator
specifies a Scale override of 200%, the job is printed at 100% of the original document size,
that is, 50% of 200%.
Scale to Fit
This option allows you to scale a job to a paper size different from the image size. When you
set this option to On, the image is increased or reduced in size to fit a paper size you select
from the Page Size option.
When this option is set to Off, the original document size is printed without any scaling, even
if you print to a larger paper size.
Original size
Letter
Scale to Fit set to On
Scale to Fit set to Off
Print size
11"x17"
27
PRINT OPTIONS
Staple
The following table illustrates the staple positions (Top and Left) for Portrait and Landscape
print jobs. Top Left Auto and Top Right Auto are determined automatically, depending on
your choices of Input Tray, Destination, Document Size, and Orientation.
N OTE : Staple positions vary according to paper size, paper type, number of pages and feed
direction.
Staple setting
Top Left Slant
Top Left Horizontal
Top Left Vertical
2 at Left
2 at Top
2 at Center
Portrait
Landscape
29
INDEX
INDEX
A
F
Align front and back images 9, 24
Auto Trapping option 9, 20
First Page Input option 14
First Page Input Tray option 14
First Page Media Type option 14
FreeForm (Variable Data Printing)
Create Master option 12
Preview Master option 16
Use Master option 19
B
Black Overprint option 9
Black Text/Graphics option 9
Booklet Back Cover Mode option 10
Booklet Best Fit option 10
Booklet Cover Source option 10
Booklet Front Cover Mode option 10
Booklet Maker option 10, 20
Brightness option 11
C
Center Margin option 11
Centering Adjustment option 11, 22
CMYK Simulation Method option 11
CMYK Simulation Profile option 11
Collate option 11
Color/Print Mode option 12
ColorWise Pro Tools
job overrides 7
Combine Separations option 12
Composite Overprint option 12
Copies option 12
Create Master option 12
Creep Adjustment option 12, 22
D
Destination option 13
Dithering option 13
Document Server File Name option 13
Document Server option 13
Document Server Password option 13
Document Server User Name option 13
Document Size option 13
Duplex option 14, 23
G
Gang-Up booklet settings 21
H
Hot Folders
job overrides 7
I
Image Quality option 14
Image Shift option 14
aligning front and back images 9, 24
defining 24
Image Smoothing option 14
Input Tray option 14
Instructions field 15
J
job overrides 14
Auto Trapping option 9
Black Overprint option 9
Black Text/Graphics option 9
Booklet Back Cover Mode option 10
Booklet Best Fit option 10
Booklet Cover Source option 10
Booklet Front Cover Mode option 10
Booklet Maker option 10
Brightness option 11
Center Margin option 11
Centering Adjustment option 11
CMYK Simulation Method option 11
CMYK Simulation Profile option 11
Collate option 11
30
INDEX
Color/Print Mode option 12
Combine Separations option 12
Copies option 12
Create Master option 12
Creep Adjustment option 12, 22
Destination option 13
Dithering option 13
Document Server File Name option 13
Document Server option 13
Document Server Password option 13
Document Server User Name option 13
Document Size option 13
Duplex option 14, 23
First Page Input option 14
First Page Input Tray option 14
First Page Media Type option 14
Image Quality option 14
Image Smoothing option 14
Media Type option 15
Mixed Media option 15
Orientation option 15
Orientation Overrides option 15
Output Profile option 15
Page Order option 15
Preview Master option 16
Print by Color Selection option 16
Print Master option 16
print settings 7
Print Size by Tray option 16
Print Size option 16
Punch Holes option 16
Punch option 16
Quality Mode option 17
Remove White PPT Background option 17
Rendering Style option 17
RGB Separation option 17
RGB Source Profile option 17
Scale option 17, 26
Scale to Fit option 18
Slip Sheet Input Tray option 18
Slip Sheet Media Type option 18
Spot Color Matching option 18
Staple option 18
Substitute Colors option 18
Tray Alignment option 18
Use Master option 19
Use Slip Sheet option 19
L
Layout see N-up Layout option
M
Media Type option 15
Mirror option 15
Mixed Media
First Page Input 14
First Page Input Tray 14
First Page Media Type 14
Mixed Media option 15
N
N-up Layout option 15
Notes field 15
O
Orientation option 15
Orientation Override option 15
Output Profile option 15
overrides, of job settings 7
P
Page Order option 15
Perfect booklet setting 21
PostScript printer description files, see PPDs
PostScript printer drivers
explained 6
PPDs (PostScript printer description files)
options 7
Preview Master option 16
Print by Color Selection option 16
Print Gray using Black Only (CMYK) option 16
Print Gray using Black Only (RGB) option 16
Print Master option 16
Print Size by Tray option 16
Print Size option 16
printer default settings
where to set 7
printing
duplex pages 14, 23
Punch Holes option 16
Punch option 16
Punch print option 25
Q
Quality Mode option 17
INDEX
R
Remove White PPT Background
option 17
Rendering Style option 17
RGB Separation option 17
RGB Source Profile option 17
RIPping 6
Rotate 180 (Large Paper Only)
option 17
Rotate 180 option 17
S
Saddle booklet settings 20
Save Fast Reprint option 17
Scale option 17, 26
Scale to Fit option 18, 26
Secure Print option 18
Slip Sheet Input Tray option 18
Slip Sheet Media Type option 18
Speed Print booklet setting 21
Spot Color Matching option 18
Staple option 18, 27
Substitute Colors option 18
T
Toner Reduction option 18
Tray Alignment option 18
U
Units option 18
Use Master option 19
Use Slip Sheet option 19
User Authentication feature 19
W
Watermarks option 19
print first page only 16
31
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Variable Data Printing
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45058993
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
5
Terminology and conventions
5
About this document
6
OVERVIEW
Overview of variable data printing
Variable data job components
E-5000/E-3000 variable data printing
7
8
10
Compatible variable data printing languages
10
FreeForm and FreeForm 2
10
E-5000/E-3000 core features for variable data printing
11
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
Printing variable data documents using FreeForm
12
13
How FreeForm works
13
Creating the master document
14
Creating the variable document
14
Combining the FreeForm master with the variable document
15
Guidelines
17
Previewing master documents in the Windows printer driver
21
Imposing variable data jobs
INDEX
7
21
Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose
22
Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose
22
23
5
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This document provides information about variable data printing (VDP) and describes
the variable data printing features supported by the E-5000/E-3000, including:
• Compatible variable data printing languages such as FreeForm and FreeForm 2
• Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose
For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome.
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
INTRODUCTION
About this document
The document covers the following topics:
• Basic concepts of variable data printing.
• Supported E-5000/E-3000 features and compatible variable data printing languages.
• Instructions for printing variable documents with FreeForm and FreeForm 2.
• Instructions for printing and submitting other variable data job formats.
N OTE : For detailed information about printing variable data jobs using third-party variable
data printing applications, see the documentation that accompanies the application.
For example scenarios of popular variable data printing workflows, see Workflow Examples.
6
OVERVIEW
7
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes variable printing technology and discusses the supported components
that allow you to create variable data print jobs.
For specific variable data printing scenarios and workflows, see Workflow Examples.
Overview of variable data printing
Variable data printing is typically used for personalized mailings, such as direct-mail
advertising. It involves combining a set of master elements that are common across copies
of a document (reusable data) with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy.
When you use variable data printing, you create personalized communications with elements
that have special appeal to your targeted audience.
An example of variable data printing is a brochure that greets customers by name and may
include other personal information about the customer obtained from a marketing database.
Background elements, illustrations, and text blocks that do not change across copies of the
brochure are master elements. The customer’s name and other customer-specific information
are variable elements.
In its simplest form, you can use variable data printing as a basic mail merge. However,
you can also dynamically assemble charts, text, and other objects to create attractive, highly
customized documents.
Variable data printing uses digital printing technology that customizes communication by
linking databases that contain the content for printed documents to a print device, such as the
copier. The customized communication includes rules that specify the selection of content
from the database and the placement of that content in the document.
The following two variable data printing technologies describe how reusable data is specified
within a variable data printing language.
Page-based technology describes static, reusable data (the master element) in terms of entire
pages. Each page element is called a master page. Page-based languages are more suitable for
simple, predictable layouts. FreeForm is a page-based language. For more information about
FreeForm, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12.
Element-based technology describes static, reusable data in terms of elements or objects.
Element-based technology allows you to use many separate objects within a page as static
elements or variable elements individually.
OVERVIEW
8
Element-based variable data jobs use reusable objects for the variable elements in the job,
such as images. Because these elements are frequently accessed, they are stored on the E-5000/
E-3000 and cached as a group.
Variable data job components
A typical variable data print job includes the following major components:
• Content
Content includes the text, images, or photographs placed in different areas of your
document. You can create static or variable content using a variety of applications,
such as Adobe Photoshop or Microsoft Word.
• Database
A database is a table containing all the changeable or variable elements in a printed
document, such as text, graphics, and photographs. You can use a database created in
popular desktop programs, such as Microsoft Excel or FileMaker Pro.
The data must be organized into records and fields (categories) for each record.
For example, in a database about people, a person is a record and the information
about that person, such as name, address, and phone number, is a field.
• Business rules
Business rules, created in a variable data printing application, specify what variable content
to use and where to place it within your document. According to these predefined rules,
which are described by “if ” and “then” statements, the variable data application uses
particular elements from databases to create personalized pages and documents that
contain different text and images for a specific audience. For example, you can set up
a rule to print specific content for a specific age range.
• Layout
Layout encompasses the design or page layout of your document in any desktop
publishing or word processing application. The layout must accommodate space for
variable text and images.
9
OVERVIEW
• Variable data print applications
Variable data print applications combine master elements and variable information and
prepare the document for printing. For FreeForm, you do not need a dedicated variable
data print application.
• Print device
The print device is the output device that turns digital files into hardcopy documents.
This can be any printer, copier, or digital press that supports variable data printing.
The following diagram shows the variable data printing components.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Layout
Database
Business rules
Content
Variable data application
Print device
1
6
2
3
4
5
OVERVIEW
10
E-5000/E-3000 variable data printing
The E-5000/E-3000 combines variable data printing languages, third-party variable data
printing applications, and E-5000/E-3000 core features to integrate into many existing
workflows. For more information about variable data printing workflows, see Workflow
Examples.
Compatible variable data printing languages
The E-5000/E-3000 is compatible with the following variable data printing languages:
• FreeForm and FreeForm 2
FreeForm and FreeForm 2 are used with variable data solutions. FreeForm technology
reusable data is RIPped only once, enabling the copier to run faster.
FreeForm and FreeForm 2
FreeForm, developed by EFI, supports the creation of master elements and variable data from
any desktop application or platform where the master page is assigned a number from 1 to
100. FreeForm options are found in the Fiery driver, Command WorkStation, and EFI Hot
Folders. For more information about FreeForm, see Printing variable data documents.
FreeForm 2 expands FreeForm technology by allowing you to determine page conditions and
rules for printing a job containing multiple master pages. It also allows you to define
boundaries of each record in the data stream. This means defining the start and end of each
record. Unlike FreeForm, FreeForm 2 requires a variable data printing application (for
example, PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version) that specifically supports FreeForm 2. For more
information about FreeForm 2, see Printing variable data documents.
Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version
Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version, a variable data printing application that supports
FreeForm, FreeForm 2, and PostScript.
Atlas Print Shop Mail-Fiery Version allows you to:
• Create conditional rules that determine what variable content is placed on a page.
• Integrate database information into the layout of a document by dragging and dropping
database fields.
• Create the master and variable document in any layout or design application and use any
database format.
For more information about using Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version, see the documentation
that accompanies the application.
OVERVIEW
11
E-5000/E-3000 core features for variable data printing
By integrating variable data support into the E-5000/E-3000’s core features, such as Impose
and Mixed Media, you can create custom layouts and apply different media and finishing
options to your variable data jobs.
Impose with variable data printing imposition
The E-5000/E-3000 is compatible with variable data printing imposition with Impose for the
following variable data printing languages:
• FreeForm and FreeForm 2 variable data jobs
For information about imposing a variable data job, see “Imposing FreeForm jobs with
Impose” on page 22.
For more information about imposition layouts, see Command WorkStation Help.
Hot Folders with variable data printing imposition
You can impose a variable data job using Hot Folders when you submit it to the E-5000/
E-3000. You must set up a proper variable data printing imposition template for the specific
Hot Folder in the Hot Folders application.
For information about imposing a variable data job with Hot Folders, see Hot Folders Help.
For information about variable data imposition options, see Command WorkStation Help.
Mixed media with variable data printing
You can apply Mixed Media settings to all variable data printing jobs, including imposed
variable data jobs.When using Mixed Media settings, the E-5000/E-3000 recognizes each
variable data record as a separate job. For a variable data job that is not imposed, the Mixed
Media settings are applied to all records of the variable data job. For an imposed variable data
job, the Mixed Media settings are applied to the output sets of the variable data job.
For an example of a variable data Mixed Media workflow, see Workflow Examples. For more
information about setting Mixed Media for a job, see Utilities.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
PRINTING
12
VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
With FreeForm technology, you can use print options to define master documents and assign
them to variable data jobs sent to the E-5000/E-3000.
This chapter explains how to do the following:
• Print documents with FreeForm.
• Create a master and variable document.
• Print documents with FreeForm 2 using a third-party variable data application.
• Impose a variable data job.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
13
Printing variable data documents using FreeForm
You can use FreeForm to print variable data documents. This section provides an overview of
FreeForm and describes how to create and combine master and variable elements. Guidelines
and tips are discussed at the end of the section.
How FreeForm works
FreeForm variable data printing sends the master-element data for the job to the E-5000/
E-3000 and rasterizes it separately from the variable-element data. The master-element data is
stored on the E-5000/E-3000 in rasterized form as a FreeForm master, and can be used as
often as required with multiple sets of variable-element data. Because the FreeForm master job
is preRIPped and stored on the E-5000/E-3000, the only RIP time required for variable data
print jobs is the time necessary to RIP the variable-element data.
You can use FreeForm masters for any fixed-element data you might combine with different
data from day to day. For example, you can store a letterhead template as a FreeForm master
and use it repeatedly as the background for different letter content (the variable-element
data).
FreeForm allows you to create the master and variable documents using any application.
You can create the two documents using different applications or computer platforms.
To create the master document, use a page layout or graphics application. To create the
variable document, use a word processing application that has a mail merge feature, a page
layout application that supports scripting, or a database application.
You control FreeForm functions with the Create Master and Use Master print options. Set
these options in the printer driver when you send a job, or instruct the operator to set them
with job overrides from Command WorkStation or Hot Folders. After the master document is
RIPped, it appears in the Command WorkStation FreeForm tab. You can also use Command
WorkStation to monitor and manage all the FreeForm masters stored on the E-5000/E-3000.
For more information, see Command WorkStation Help.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
14
Creating the master document
Before you can use FreeForm, you must create a master document and a variable document.
This includes creating the layout for the combined document, as well as individual elements.
In a page layout or graphics application, arrange the master elements (text and graphics that
do not change) on one or more pages, leaving space for the variable elements.
Master document
1
2
Space for variable elements
Unchanging master elements
1
2
After you finalize the design of the master document, print it to the E-5000/E-3000 and
specify that a FreeForm master be created from the job (see page 18).
N OTE : Although the E-5000/E-3000 can store up to 100 FreeForm masters, the printer driver
interface only allows you to select numbers 1 through 15. To create a FreeForm master with a
number greater than 15, the operator must create the master page and RIP the job from
Command WorkStation.
Creating the variable document
You can create the variable document with a word processing application that provides a mail
merge function, a database application, or a page layout application that supports scripting.
In all cases, information is taken from a list or database and merged into an existing document
that is designed to accept the information. Each application has different controls for this
function. For detailed instructions, see the documentation that accompanies the application.
Before you add variable elements to the master document, format them to conform to the
layout of the master document. To do this, create a document with the correct formatting,
and then add the variable information in the appropriate places.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
15
N OTE : You must create a variable document with the same page count as the master page
document. For example, if a master document has a record length of four pages, all the
variable documents must have a record length of four pages. Add empty pages to the last
record of the variable document, if necessary.
Variable document
1
Variable element
1
1
1
1
After you create a variable document, print it to the E-5000/E-3000 and specify that it be
combined with the corresponding FreeForm master (see page 19).
Combining the FreeForm master with the variable document
When you print a variable document to the E-5000/E-3000, specify the FreeForm master
created from your master document with the Use Master print option. The E-5000/E-3000
combines the raster data of the variable document with the previously RIPped FreeForm
master, creating a new raster data file. You can soft-proof the merged raster file (before
printing it) in the thumbnail windows of Command WorkStation.
For more information about soft-proofing and the thumbnail windows of Command
WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
16
Combined document
A master document can include more than one page. When you print a variable document
and specify a FreeForm master that contains multiple pages, the variable pages are combined
with the master pages in a cyclical fashion. The following example illustrates how a variable
document combines with a two-page master document.
Pages 1 and 2 of the variable document are combined with Pages 1 and 2, respectively, of the
master document. The cycle of master pages then starts over, and Pages 3 and 4 of the variable
document are combined, respectively, with Pages 1 and 2, again, of the master document.
This pattern continues for each subsequent set of pages in the variable document.
Combined document
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
17
Guidelines
This section provides some suggestions to help you print variable data jobs correctly.
• Ask your administrator or operator about how FreeForm master numbers are assigned
at your site.
If FreeForm printing is used by a large number of users at your site, you can assign
FreeForm master numbers, or ranges of numbers, to specific users or groups. Users can
select only numbers 1 through 15 as print option settings. The operator can override
FreeForm master numbers and reassign them to numbers greater than 15 from Command
WorkStation. Request that the operator assign all FreeForm master numbers to avoid
potential conflicts in the use of FreeForm master numbers.
• Do not send your variable printing jobs to the Direct connection through Command
WorkStation.
If you send a variable data job to the Direct connection, the job does not process.
• Use the Notes and Instructions fields to communicate instructions about your job to
the operator.
If you want to create or use a FreeForm master number greater than 15, use these fields
to tell the operator to override the appropriate job setting (Create Master or Use Master)
and RIP the job from Command WorkStation.
• Give your jobs unique and descriptive names.
You and the operator must be able to easily identify your jobs if there are many jobs in the
queues, the FreeForm master numbers are reassigned, or you must refer to another job in
the Notes or Instructions fields.
• Consider the restrictions on Print Options when using FreeForm.
For more information about these restrictions, see Print Options.
• The following settings for the master document and variable document must match:
Duplex
Color Mode
Slip Sheet
Secure Print
Orientation
Document Size
Staple
Punch Holes
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
18
• The following settings for the variable document override the corresponding settings in the
master document:
Front Cover
Back Cover
Media Type
Input Tray
For more information, see Print Options.
TO PRINT VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS USING FREEFORM
1 Create a master document.
The following example illustrates one page of a master document for a tri-fold brochure
created with a page layout application.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
19
2 Print the master document to the E-5000/E-3000 with the Create Master print option set to
one of the FreeForm Master numbers (1 through 15).
You can also set the Create Master option to None and instruct the operator to use overrides
from Command WorkStation to create a FreeForm master from this job.
For more information, see Command WorkStation Help.
To print your FreeForm master to ensure that it is correct before you merge it with
variable data, enable the Print Master feature after the file is sent to the E-5000/E-3000 (see
Print Options).
3 Create the variable document.
You can create the variable document using a different file, a different application, or a
different computer platform than you used to create the master document, but some print
options must be the same (for details, see page 17).
The following example illustrates one page of the variable document for the tri-fold brochure.
The data in this document can be as simple as a name and address, or as complex as multiple,
graphics and photographic elements.
N OTE : To impose the job, see “Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose” on page 22.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
20
4 Print the variable document to the E-5000/E-3000 with the Use Master print option set to
the appropriate FreeForm master number.
The FreeForm master number can be one you set when you send the master document or one
assigned by the operator.
To preview the master page, click Preview Master from the printer driver to generate a low
resolution image of the master page.
FreeForm master numbers can be overridden from Command WorkStation. Consult the
operator to make sure that the FreeForm master number you specify is the correct one for the
FreeForm master you want to use.
To check the job before it prints, instruct the operator to Process and Hold the job so you can
preview it from Command WorkStation.
The following example illustrates the FreeForm master and variable document combined.
The variable data is overlaid on the master document.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
21
Previewing master documents in the Windows printer driver
Once a master document is created, you can preview it from the Windows printer driver.
This feature allows you to conveniently select your master document when you print using
FreeForm.
TO PREVIEW MASTER DOCUMENTS IN THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER
1 Choose Print in your application.
2 Select the E-5000/E-3000 as your printer and click Properties.
3 Click the Fiery Printing tab.
4 Click and open the VDP icon.
5 Click Update to retrieve the list of FreeForm master names from the E-5000/E-3000.
The FreeForm master numbers and names appear in the Create Master and Use Master
options.
N OTE : You must enable Two-Way Communication to retrieve the list of FreeForm master
names. To enable this feature, see Printing from Windows and Printing from Mac OS.
6 Select the master document that you want to preview from the Use Master option, and then
click Preview Master.
The FreeForm Master Preview window appears.
7 Click Close.
Imposing variable data jobs
If variable data Imposition is enabled on the E-5000/E-3000, you can impose FreeForm and
FreeForm 2 jobs, as well as jobs using other supported variable data languages.
You can impose a variable data job using Hot Folders. For more information, see Hot Folders
Help.
When you submit a variable data job to Command Workstation, open Impose to impose the
job. The printed job merges and imposes the variable and master file.
When you impose a variable data job, you can choose a single record imposition scheme or
a multiple records imposition scheme. For more information, see Command WorkStation
Help.
PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS
22
Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose
You can select Imposition settings for a FreeForm variable data job. Imposition must be
enabled on the E-5000/E-3000.
TO IMPOSE A FREEFORM JOB
1 Download any PS or PDF file as a master job to the E-5000/E-3000.
2 Open Command WorkStation, select the master job, and then click Properties.
3 Select the Create Master print option, and assign the master job a number (1-15).
4 Send the master job to Print or to Process and Hold.
5 Download the variable data file to the E-5000/E-3000.
6 In Command WorkStation, select the variable data file, and then click Properties.
7 Select the Use Master print option and select the master job number.
8 Select the variable data file and click Impose.
Select Imposition settings for the variable data job.
For more information about Imposition settings, see Command WorkStation Help.
9 Process the variable job.
Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose
You can select Imposition settings for a FreeForm 2 variable data job. Imposition must be
enabled on the E-5000/E-3000.
TO IMPOSE A FREEFORM 2 JOB
1 Download the master job using a third-party variable data application that supports
FreeForm 2.
2 Open Command WorkStation, and process the master job.
3 Download the variable job to the Hold queue using a third-party variable data application
that supports FreeForm 2.
4 Select the variable job and click Impose.
Select Imposition settings for the variable data job.
For more information about Imposition settings, see Command WorkStation Help.
5 Process the variable job.
23
INDEX
INDEX
A
I
Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version 10
Impose 11
imposing FreeForm 2 jobs 5, 22
imposing FreeForm jobs 22
B
business rules 8
C
Command WorkStation, overriding
FreeForm Master number 14
content 8
Create Master option 13
L
layout 8
M
master elements 7
Mixed Media 11
D
P
database 8
Page-based technology 7
printing FreeForm jobs 13
E
Element-based technology 7
R
F
reusable data 7
reusable objects 8
FreeForm
combining master and variable 14
create master 14
create variable 14
defined 10
Master number 14
printing variable data documents 13
using 13
FreeForm 2
defined 10
H
Hot Folders 11
T
terminology 5
U
Use Master option 13
V
variable data imposition 11, 21
Hot Folders 11
Impose 11
variable data printing
example 7
languages 5, 10
overview 7
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Workflow Examples
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45058987
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
5
Terminology and conventions
5
About this document
6
MIXED MEDIA
7
What is Mixed Media?
7
Example: Workflow with Mixed Media
8
Items required for this example
8
IMPOSITION
11
What is imposition?
11
Example: Workflow with imposition
12
Items required for this example
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM
What is variable data printing?
Variable data printing languages
12
15
15
15
What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs?
15
Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm
16
Items required for this example
17
CONTENTS
4
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA
20
What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs?
20
What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs?
21
Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media
21
Items required for this example
HOT FOLDERS
22
25
What is a Hot Folder?
25
Example: Workflow with Hot Folders
26
Items required for this example
26
TERMS
29
INDEX
31
5
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This document provides examples of complex printing scenarios and an overview of
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000 features used in the examples. The example workflows
illustrate how you can combine features to create jobs. Each workflow includes crossreferences to help you locate more information about performing each task.
For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome.
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
INTRODUCTION
6
About this document
This document covers the following topics:
• Mixed Media and how it is used in an example workflow.
• Imposition and how it is used in an example workflow using Impose.
• Variable Data Printing (VDP) with FreeForm and how it is used in an example workflow
using FreeForm.
• Variable Data Printing with FreeForm2 and how it is used in an example variable data
workflow with Mixed Media.
• Printing to a Hot Folder on the network and an example workflow using Hot Folders.
• Definitions for popular applications and printing terms used in this document.
MIXED MEDIA
7
MIXED MEDIA
This chapter provides an overview of Mixed Media and an example workflow that includes
Mixed Media.
What is Mixed Media?
The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media.
For example, you can use Mixed Media to specify a heavy stock for the cover, add blank pages,
insert colored media on designated pages, and specify duplex pages within a single print
job. Specify Mixed Media settings when you print a job from an application with the
printer driver. Define and modify the Mixed Media settings of jobs already sent to the
E-5000/E-3000 from Command WorkStation or define Mixed Media settings in the
Hot Folders application.
For more information about Mixed Media, see Utilities.
8
MIXED MEDIA
Example: Workflow with Mixed Media
A geology professor at Ocean Crest University wants to print her new course book for the fall
semester. The new course book consists of eight chapters. She wants her students to be able to
find the information they want easily and quickly. To ensure this, each chapter divider in the
book is printed on heavy media. The chapter text is printed on plain media and the front and
back covers are printed on heavy media.
The professor sends her request, along with the book file in PDF format (Geology101.pdf ),
to the university’s in-house production department.
The following diagram illustrates the components of the course book.
Back cover
printed
on heavy
media
Chapter dividers
on heavy media
Chapters
printed on
plain media
Front cover
printed on
heavy media
Completed course book
Items required for this example
• Geology101.pdf
• E-5000/E-3000
• Command WorkStation with Mixed Media
• Heavy media for the front and back covers
• Heavy media for chapter dividers
• Plain media for the chapter text
For information about supported media types, see Print Options.
N OTE : The E-5000/E-3000 supports PDF versions 1.2 through 1.6.
9
MIXED MEDIA
Mixed Media workflow
1
2
3
4
E-5000/E-3000
8
7
6
5
E-5000/E-3000
Step
Task
1
The professor creates the PDF and sends the file
to the university’s in-house production department.
2
The operator in the production department
downloads the file to Command WorkStation.
For more information
Command WorkStation Help
10
MIXED MEDIA
Step
Task
For more information
3
The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation,
chooses Properties from the Actions menu, clicks the Media
icon in the Job Properties toolbar and scrolls down to Mixed
Media. The operator applies the following settings:
Utilities
a) From New Page Range, the operator types 2, 32, 64, 98,
124 for the page range (the pages that divide the chapters),
specifies a heavy media, indicates which tray contains the
heavy media, and clicks Close.
b) From New Insert, the operator specifies inserting a blank
page after the last page to distinguish the end of the print
job and clicks Close.
c) From Define Cover, the operator specifies front and back
covers that print on front only, cover stock, specifies the
tray to pull media from, and clicks OK.
d) The operator clicks the Layout icon, specifies duplex,
clicks OK, and then saves the file.
4
The operator processes and holds the job.
Command WorkStation Help
5
The operator previews the job.
Command WorkStation Help
6
The operator prints the job.
Command WorkStation Help
N OTE : The operator can also print one set as
a proof before printing multiple copies.
7
The operator retrieves the job from the copier.
8
The job is printed with a front and back cover
and dividers for each chapter.
To use Mixed Media in Command WorkStation, your downloaded file must be a non-raster
file. To remove raster information from a file in Command WorkStation, right-click the file
and select Remove Raster Data.
You can duplicate this workflow with a PostScript file instead of a PDF.
IMPOSITION
11
IMPOSITION
This chapter provides an overview of imposition and an example workflow using imposition.
What is imposition?
Imposition is the process of arranging individual pages of a book, booklet, or brochure on
a large sheet. The pages are laid out such that when the sheet is printed, folded, and cut,
the pages are in the correct orientation and order.
The E-5000/E-3000 supports Impose. Impose is a server-based imposition application that
allows you to edit and assemble entire documents on the E-5000/E-3000 before you process
the files.
For more information about imposition, see Command WorkStation Help.
12
IMPOSITION
Example: Workflow with imposition
The manager of Company ABC wants to make sure that she has enough business cards
to distribute when she manages her company’s booth at the Consumer Electronics Show.
She has sent out a request to a local print shop to print 600 cards.
The print shop imposes her business cards on an 11 x 17 page. Since the card design
incorporates text on the back, the job must be duplexed. Company ABC’s standard
business card size is 2 x 3.25. The print shop calculates that they can impose 25 cards
on one 11 x 17 page.
The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed.
5 columns
{
5 rows
{
11x17 page
2x3.25 business card
Items required for this example
• Card.pdf
• E-5000/E-3000
• Command WorkStation with Impose (requires a dongle)
• 11 x 17 heavy media, such as card stock
For information about supported media types, see Print Options.
• A paper cutter
N OTE : The E-5000/E-3000 supports PDF versions 1.2 through 1.6.
13
IMPOSITION
Imposition workflow
1
2
8
3
7
4
6
5
E-5000/E-3000
Step
Task
For more information
1
Company ABC creates the 2 x 3.25 business card, saves
it as Card.pdf, and then sends the file to the print shop.
Printing from Windows
2
The operator at the print shop downloads the file to
Command WorkStation.
Printing from Mac OS
Command WorkStation Help
14
IMPOSITION
Step
Task
For more information
3
The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation,
chooses Impose from the Actions menu, and then applies
the following settings.
Utilities
a) From the Sheet bar, the operator specifies 11 x 17,
landscape, and duplex.
b) From the Layout bar, the operator specifies five rows
and five columns, turns on printer’s marks, and then
defines both the offset horizontal and vertical printer’s
marks to 0.125 pt.
c) From the Finishing bar, the operator specifies gang
up repeat.
d) From the Scale bar, the operator specifies the scale
at 100% and saves the job.
4
The operator selects Card.pdf.dbp in Command WorkStation
and selects Preview.
Command WorkStation Help
5
The operator prints the job.
Command WorkStation Help
6
The operator retrieves the job from the copier.
7
The cards are printed on an 11 x 17 page.
8
The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts
the business cards.
When you use Impose, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster
information from a file with Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select
Remove Raster Data.
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING
15
WITH FREEFORM
This chapter provides an overview of variable data printing, and an example workflow
that uses FreeForm to create a variable data job.
What is variable data printing?
Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed
documents. Content can consist of text and images (including graphics and photographs)
in electronic form. Variable data printing is used for direct-mail advertising or other targeted
mailings. It typically combines a set of master elements that are common across copies of
a document with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy. An example is a
brochure that greets customers by name and may include other personal information about
the customer obtained from a marketing database. Background elements, illustrations,
and text blocks that do not change across copies of the brochure are the master elements.
The customer name and other customer-specific information are the variable elements.
For more information, see Variable Data Printing.
Variable data printing languages
The E-5000/E-3000 is compatible with the following variable data printing languages:
• FreeForm and FreeForm 2
For more information about how to send variable data printing to the E-5000/E-3000,
see Variable Data Printing.
What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs?
FreeForm allows you to use print options to define and store master-element documents,
called FreeForm masters, on the E-5000/E-3000. You can send a variable-element job to
the E-5000/E-3000 with instructions to combine the job with a particular FreeForm master.
For more information, see Variable Data Printing.
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM
16
Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm
Ocean Crest University wants to promote their three schools through a mailing to prospective
students. The students will be able to request information about the different campuses and
programs. Students can reply via a postage-paid business reply card integrated into the mailer.
The document is personalized with the prospective student’s name, address, and a personal
web link. The design is graphic-intensive to attract the attention of the reader. It is printed on
11 x 17 paper and folded three times, in order to qualify for the standard “letter” mail rate at
the post office.
To create this mail piece, the in-house production department decides to use the caching
capabilities of FreeForm. FreeForm allows them to store a rasterized version of the graphic
intensive layout in memory, since these elements are common to all pages (send and process
once). The variable text (address, name, and web link) is printed separately and merged with
the layout at the E-5000/E-3000.
The production department creates the master document with all the common elements
and saves the file as a PDF (College_Master.pdf ). Next, they create the variable document in
Microsoft Word (College_Variable.doc) and link the variable information to their database
file (College_data.xls).
N OTE : No specialized variable printing software is used to build this job. You can use any
page layout application to create the FreeForm master and any mail merge function, such as
Microsoft Word Mail Merge, to build and print the variable data.
For more information about how to use the Mail Merge feature in Microsoft Word, see the
documentation that accompanies Microsoft Word.
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM
17
The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer.
Master file
Database file
Items required for this example
• College_Master.pdf
• College_Variable.doc
• College_data.xls
• E-5000/E-3000
• E-5000/E-3000 printer driver with FreeForm
• A Windows computer with Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel installed
18
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM
Variable data printing workflow using FreeForm
1
2
E-5000/E-3000
5
3
4
E-5000/E-3000
6
Step
Task
1
The operator in the production department opens
College_Master.pdf in Acrobat.
2
The operator prints the file to the E-5000/E-3000, specifying
11 x 17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Create Master in the
printer driver.
For more information
Printing from Windows
Printing from Mac OS
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM
Step
Task
For more information
3
The operator opens the College_Variable. doc in
Microsoft Word.
Microsoft Word documentation
19
The variable document also opens the College_data.xls file,
because the two documents are linked. If the documents are
not linked, Word prompts the operator for the location of
the Data Source File.
The operator selects Data Merge in Word.
4
The operator prints the file to the E-5000/E-3000,
specifying 11 x 17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Use Master
in the printer driver.
Printing from Windows
The master file and variable file are combined on the E-5000/
E-3000.
5
The operator retrieves the job from the copier.
6
The mailer includes the combined master and variable data.
Certain elements of the master and variable information must match. For example, the
page size and orientation must match. For a complete list, see Variable Data Printing.
You cannot send FreeForm jobs to the Direct connection.
If Two-Way Communication is enabled in the printer driver, the printer driver can detect
what masters already reside on the E-5000/E-3000. Use stored FreeForm masters as often
as needed with multiple sets of variable elements. For more information about Two-Way
Communication, see Printing from Windows.
If the administrator clears the E-5000/E-3000, all FreeForm masters are deleted. For more
information about administrator functions, see Configuration and Setup.
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING
WITH FREEFORM
20
2 AND MIXED MEDIA
This chapter provides an overview of how you use Mixed Media with variable data printing
jobs, and provides an example workflow that uses variable data printing and Mixed Media.
What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs?
FreeForm 2 extends the functionality of FreeForm (see “Variable Data Printing with
FreeForm” on page 15). FreeForm 2 requires a third-party variable data printing application
that supports FreeForm 2 technology, such as Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version. Using
the third-party printing application and FreeForm 2, you can create multiple page masters,
allowing more customization to your documents. You can still use any master created in
another application, and then use a third-party application that supports FreeForm 2, such
as PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version, to combine the design and database information.
Multiple masters allow you to define more than one master file for your job, while drawing
from the same database of variable information. For example, if you own a movie rental
company, you may maintain a database of customer names, addresses, and the last five movies
the customer rented, categorized by genre. As a promotion, you want to send a coupon
booklet with a new movie rental release pictured on the front cover. You want to customize
your mailer with a movie of a similar genre as the last movie the customer rented. The variable
information, such as the customer names and addresses, is always drawn from the database.
However, the different movie images are defined by the multiple masters.
For more information about FreeForm 2, see Variable Data Printing.
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA
21
What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data
print jobs?
The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media.
For more information, see “What is Mixed Media?” on page 7.
Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed
documents. For more information, see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 15.
Use variable data print jobs with Mixed Media to create custom jobs, such as mailers.
For example, use the variable information to create booklet mailers that greet customers by
name, and print the booklet cover on a different medium than the body of the mailer.
The Mixed Media that you specify for your job is applied for every record, relative to the
record start. For example, if Mixed Media is set to print Page 1 with cover stock, the first
page of every record is printed on cover stock.
Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media
To announce its new line of children’s styles, Banana Rama is creating a promotional mailer
that targets customers by ethnicity, gender, and age. The company has compiled a database of
customers by name and attributes, such as ethnicity, gender, and age. For the promotional
mailer, Banana Rama also draws from a content database consisting of images of children of
different ages, gender, and ethnicity wearing the new Banana Rama clothes; images of typical
gadgets enjoyed by these children; and background graphics. Using a variable data application
such as PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version and images that match the targeted individual, Banana
Rama creates, in one print run, a mailer targeting the parents of girls aged 7 to 10 years and
customized mailers targeting the parents of boys in different age groups. The mailers feature
images of children in the targeted age group wearing Banana Rama clothing and playing with
their favorite toys.
Each promotional mailer includes a cover sheet with the customer’s name and a discount
coupon. The Banana Rama girls’ clothing line is more extensive, so the mailer targeting girls
includes additional pages advertising the girls’ fashions.
Since the promotional mailer may vary in length, depending on whether it is targeted toward
a boy or a girl, a blank page is added between each mailer to indicate when a new mailer starts.
The print shop that received Banana Rama’s mailer request first creates the master and variable
document in Atlas Print Shop Mail-Fiery Version to create a .psm project file. For more
information about Print Shop Mail-Fiery Version, see the documentation that accompanies
the application.
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA
The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer.
Girls template
Boys template
Letter/coupon template
Graphics
Database
Items required for this example
• Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version
• FreeForm 2
• BananaRama.psm
• BananaRama_V.ps
• E-5000/E-3000
• Command WorkStation with Mixed Media
• Cover stock
• Plain media
22
23
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA
Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media
1
2
4
3
E-5000/E-3000
8
7
6
5
E-5000/E-3000
Step
Task
For more information
1
The print shop operator opens the Banarama.psm file in
Print Shop Mail-Fiery Version, specifies FreeForm 2, and
prints the file to the E-5000/E-3000.
Variable Data Printing
In the Print dialog box, the operator sends both the master
and variable data. The E-5000/E-3000 receives a master and
variable PostScript document.
2
The operator selects the BanaRama_V.ps file from
Command WorkStation.
For more information about Print Shop Mail-Fiery
Version, see the documentation that accompanies
the application.
Command WorkStation Help
VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA
Step
Task
For more information
3
The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation,
chooses Properties from the Actions menu, clicks the Media
icon in the Job Properties toolbar, and then scrolls down to
Mixed Media. The operator applies the following settings:
Utilities
a) From Define Cover, the operator specifies a front
cover (print on front only), cover stock, and tray
for the media, and then clicks OK.
b) From New Insert, the operator specifies to insert a blank
page after the last page, indicates which tray is to be used
for the media, clicks Close, and then clicks Close again.
4
The operator processes and holds the job.
Command WorkStation Help
5
The operator previews the job.
Command WorkStation Help
6
The operator prints the job.
Command WorkStation Help
7
The operator retrieves the job from the copier.
8
The job prints with the merged variable and master
information with a blank sheet between records.
Certain elements of the master and variable information must match. For example, the
page size and orientation must match. For a complete list, see Variable Data Printing.
24
HOT FOLDERS
25
HOT FOLDERS
This chapter provides an overview of Hot Folders and an example workflow using
Hot Folders.
What is a Hot Folder?
Hot Folders is a software application that streamlines network printing tasks. A Hot Folder
is a folder to which you can assign a group of print options, along with an E-5000/E-3000
print queue.
To print a document, drag and drop the file onto the Hot Folder. You can create multiple
Hot Folders, each with different settings and different E-5000/E-3000 connections.
Depending on the configuration of the Hot Folder, jobs are routed to an E-5000/E-3000
with settings that you have configured.
Hot Folder software runs as a background utility, continuously monitoring Hot Folders
for new jobs.
For more information about Hot Folders, see Utilities and Hot Folders Help.
26
HOT FOLDERS
Example: Workflow with Hot Folders
Greg works for Company ABC and wants to print 25 copies of his new business cards.
Company ABC has configured a network Hot Folder called “BusinessCards,” so that their
employees can drop their business card .pdf file directly onto the Hot Folder for printing.
Greg creates his business cards using the required company business card template, and
saves the file as GregCard.pdf. The business card template ensures that the cards are printed
optimally, using the imposition settings specified in the BusinessCards Hot Folder.
After the cards are printed, an operator in the company print shop cuts the cards and places
them in interoffice mail for the employee.
Company ABC business cards are 2 x 3.25 inches in size.
The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed.
5 columns
{
5 rows
{
11x17 page
2x3.25 business card
Items required for this example
• GregCard.pdf
• E-5000/E-3000
• Hot Folder configured on the network
• 11 x 17 heavy media, such as card stock
For information about supported media types, see Print Options.
• A paper cutter
N OTE : The E-5000/E-3000 supports PDF versions 1.2 through1.6.
27
HOT FOLDERS
Hot Folders workflow
1
2
3
4
E-5000/E-3000
7
6
5
Step
Task
For more information
1
The operator at Company ABC creates a Hot Folder on
the network, names it “BusinessCards,” and applies
the following Hot Folder settings.
Utilities
a) From Job Settings, the operator specifies 25 copies.
b) From the Sheet tab in Imposition Settings, the operator
specifies 11 x 17 for Sheet Size, Landscape for Orientation,
and Off for Duplex.
c) From the Layout tab in Imposition Settings, the operator
specifies 5 Rows and 5 columns, and selects Printer’s
Marks.
d) From the Scale tab in Imposition Settings, the operator
specifies scale at 100%.
e) From the Finishing tab in Imposition Settings, the
operator selects Gang Up and chooses Repeat.
2
Greg locates his file, GregCard.pdf, on his computer.
Hot Folders Help
28
HOT FOLDERS
Step
Task
For more information
3
Greg drops the file GregCard.pdf on the BusinessCards
Hot Folder.
4
The job prints.
5
The operator retrieves the job from the copier.
6
The cards are printed on an 11 x 17 page.
7
The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts
the business cards.
Hot Folders Help
Hot Folders does not apply any constraints between Job Settings and Imposition Settings.
For a list of settings that should not be modified in Hot Folder Job Settings when Imposition
Settings are used, see Utilities.
TERMS
29
TERMS
Authoring tool
A software application used to create text or images, or to define layouts for documents.
Component
In variable data printing, an element such as text, a graphic, or a photograph that is printed
on a page.
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
A PostScript file format designed to be embedded in another PostScript stream.
FreeForm
A variable data printing technology that works with variable-data printing solutions. It allows
data that is used many times in a variable-data printing job to be processed just once, enabling
a copier to run at or near rated speed.
FreeForm 2
FreeForm 2 expands FreeForm technology by allowing you to determine page conditions and
rules for printing a job containing multiple master pages. Unlike FreeForm, FreeForm 2
requires a variable data printing application that specifically supports FreeForm 2.
Imposition
Grouping and arranging pages for efficient printing on larger sheets of paper, taking into
account the need to cut and bind the pages after printing.
Master elements
Used in variable data printing with variable elements. Reusable data that is common across
copies of a document.
Mixed Media
A feature that allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media.
PDF (Portable Document Format)
An open file format specification that describes text and graphics in documents.
PostScript
A device-independent page description language that is used to print and display pictures and
text. PostScript 3 includes many enhancements to older versions of PostScript, including
improved image quality.
TERMS
30
Raster image
Electronic representation of a page or image using a grid of points called pixels.
Rasterization
The process of converting code that describes text and graphics into the format that is
understood by a printer’s “print engine” to print them on a page.
Variable Data Printing (VDP)
Digital technology that links print engines to databases that contain the content for printed
documents in order to print pages that vary in content.
Variable elements
Used in variable data printing with master elements. Data that changes across copies of a
document.
31
INDEX
INDEX
A
L
Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version 20
Authoring tool 29
Layout 14
C
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) 29
master elements 29
mixed media 7, 29
accessing from Command
WorkStation 10, 24
Define Page Range 24
example workflow 8
example workflow with FreeForm 2 21
Insert Blank 10, 24
with variable data printing 21
F
P
component 29
D
Define Page Range 24
downloading files 9, 13
E
Finishing 14
FreeForm 29
example workflow 16
FreeForm 2 20, 29
example workflow 21
with mixed media 21
H
Hot Folder
example workflow 26
I
Impose
Finishing 14
Layout 14
Scale 14
Sheet 14
imposition 11, 29
example workflow 12
Insert Blank 24
Insert Blank from mixed media 10
M
PDF 29
PostScript 29
Preview job 24
from Command WorkStation 10
R
raster image 30
rasterization 30
S
Scale 14
Sheet 14
T
terminology 5
V
variable data printing 30
example workflow 16
languages 15
with mixed media 21
variable elements 30
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Utilities
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45058975
28 September 2006
CONTENTS
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
7
Terminology and conventions
8
About this document
9
About Help
9
Preparing for installation on Windows computers
10
Preparing for installation on Mac OS computers
11
Fonts
Installing user software
11
12
Installing user software on a Windows computer
12
Installing user software on a Mac OS computer
14
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
15
Installing Command WorkStation, Windows Edition
16
Configuring the connection to the E-5000/E-3000
17
Using Command WorkStation, Windows Edition
20
Additional features
21
User Authentication
21
Align Trays
21
Mixed Media
23
Virtual Printers
27
Troubleshooting
30
Command WorkStation cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000
30
Command WorkStation does not respond
31
CONTENTS
IMPOSE
4
32
Installing and enabling Impose
33
Installing Impose
33
Installing Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop
34
Using Impose
35
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
36
Installing Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
36
Configuring the connection to the E-5000/E-3000
37
Using Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
40
Additional Features
41
User Authentication
41
Mixed Media
41
Troubleshooting
45
Command WorkStation cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000
45
Command WorkStation does not respond
46
SCAN
47
Installing and configuring Remote Scan
48
Installing Remote Scan
48
Configuring Remote Scan
48
Using Remote Scan
Specifying scan settings from Remote Scan
Scanning from the copier control panel
49
49
51
Specifying scan settings from the copier
51
Image Mode setting
53
Additional information
54
Preset
54
Split Mode
54
Destinations
55
Retrieving scans using Docs
56
CONTENTS
HOT FOLDERS
5
57
Installing Hot Folders
57
Using Hot Folders
58
Additional features
58
Preserve Document Setting
WEBTOOLS
58
59
Setting up WebTools
60
Accessing the WebTools home page
61
Using WebTools
62
Home
62
Downloads
62
Docs
62
Configure
62
INDEX
63
INTRODUCTION
7
INTRODUCTION
The Color Controller E-5000/E-3000 media pack includes a set of software utilities that
allow you to manage the Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, as well as the print workflow and
content of jobs on the Color Controller E-5000/E-3000.
This document provides an overview of how to install, configure, and use the following Color
Controller E-5000/E-3000 utilities:
• Command WorkStation, Windows Edition
• Impose
• Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
• Remote Scan
• Hot Folders
• WebTools
8
INTRODUCTION
Terminology and conventions
This document uses the following terminology and conventions.
Term or convention
Refers to
Aero
E-5000/E-3000 (in illustrations and examples)
Copier
Copier Main Unit
E-5000/E-3000
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000
Mac OS
Apple Mac OS X
Titles in italics
Other documents in this set
Windows
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Topics for which additional information is available by starting
Help in the software
Tips and information
Important information
Important information about issues that can result in physical
harm to you or others
INTRODUCTION
9
About this document
This document covers the following topics:
• Command WorkStation, Windows Edition: Monitoring and managing the print workflow of
jobs on the E-5000/E-3000 (Windows only).
• Impose: Applying imposition layouts to jobs for custom printing, binding, and cutting
purposes (Windows only).
• Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition: Monitoring and managing the print
workflow of jobs on the E-5000/E-3000 (Mac OS X only).
• Remote Scan: Initiating and retrieving a scan on the copier from a remote computer on
the network. Includes the Scan TWAIN plug-in module.
• Hot Folders: Storing and reusing frequently used print options when printing PostScript
and PDF files on the E-5000/E-3000.
• WebTools: Managing your E-5000/E-3000 remotely from the Internet or your company’s
intranet.
About Help
Detailed instructions on using most E-5000/E-3000 utilities are provided in the Help.
Wherever appropriate, this document refers you to Help for additional information and
explains how to access Help for each utility.
INTRODUCTION
10
Preparing for installation on Windows computers
Before you install E-5000/E-3000 software on a Windows computer, be sure to complete
the following:
• To use E-5000/E-3000 user software on a Windows computer, the Sun Java file, Java
Runtime Environment (JRE), provided in the Common Utilities folder on the User
Software CD (Utilities), must be installed on your computer. If the correct Sun Java file is
not installed, the Fiery User Software Installer installs it automatically before installing the
E-5000/E-3000 software.
N OTE : JRE, SE v1.5 (the recommended version) is provided on the User Software CD
(Utilities).
• To install the E-5000/E-3000 software, you must have Service Pack 4 installed on a
Windows 2000 computer, and Service Pack 2 installed on a Windows XP computer.
If not, a warning message alerts you to install the Service Pack.
After installation of Sun Java JRE, a Java Web Start shortcut is created on your computer
desktop. The shortcut is not intended for use with E-5000/E-3000 software and can
be deleted.
Different versions of Sun Java JRE can be installed on your computer. The E-5000/E-3000
software automatically finds the correct version, so you do not need to uninstall other versions
of Sun Java JRE required for third-party applications.
INTRODUCTION
11
Preparing for installation on Mac OS computers
Before you install E-5000/E-3000 software on a Mac OS X computer, you must install screen
and printer fonts.
Fonts
The Fonts on the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) include screen and printer fonts that
correspond to the 136 built-in PostScript printer fonts on the E-5000/E-3000. To be available
to applications, the screen fonts must be installed on Mac OS X.
TO INSTALL SCREEN AND PRINTER FONTS ON MAC OS X V10.2
1 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive of the Mac OS X
computer.
2 Open the OSX : Fonts folder.
3 Copy the fonts to the following location:
• For your personal use: Users/account name/Library/Fonts
• For shared use: Library/Fonts
TO INSTALL SCREEN AND PRINTER FONTS ON MAC OS X V10.3 AND V10.4
1 Insert the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) into the CD-ROM drive of the Mac OS X
computer.
2 Start the Font Book application in Applications : Font Book.
3 Choose Add Fonts from the File menu.
4 Choose User Software : OSX : Fonts : Albertus MT.
5 Choose Select All from the Edit menu.
6 Choose one of the following from Install fonts:
• For your personal use: for your use only
• For shared use: for all users of this computer
• For Classic: for Mac OS X Classic
N OTE : For Mac OS X v10.4, you must select User, Computer, or Classic Mac OS in
Preferences:Default Install Location of Font Book.
7 Click Open.
8 Exit the Font Book application.
INTRODUCTION
Installing user software
You can install E-5000/E-3000 user software in the following ways:
• From the User Software CD (Utilities)
• From the E-5000/E-3000, using the Internet or intranet
If you have installed any E-5000/E-3000 user software previously on your computer,
the installer allows you to uninstall those applications during the process.
Installing user software on a Windows computer
All installation of user software on a Windows computer is done through the Fiery User
Software Installer. The following procedures describe installing from the CD or over the
Internet, and modifying the user software.
TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE CD (UTILITIES)
1 Insert the User Software CD (Utilities) into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
The Welcome screen of the installer appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
To modify or remove user software after you have installed it on your computer, use the
User Software CD (Utilities) and the following procedure.
12
INTRODUCTION
13
TO MODIFY USER SOFTWARE USING THE USER SOFTWARE CD (UTILITIES) INSTALLER
1 Insert the User Software CD (Utilities) into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2 In the window that appears, select Modify, Repair, or Remove.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can also install the user software from the E-5000/E-3000 over the Internet. Ask your
network administrator for the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000.
Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and
system requirements, see Welcome.
TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER OVER THE INTERNET
1 Start your Internet browser.
2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the E-5000/E-3000.
The E-5000/E-3000 home page appears.
3 Click the tab for Downloads.
4 Click the link for the software that you want to install.
5 Choose to open the file or save it to your computer.
6 Type the E-5000/E-3000 URL, http://<IP address> when prompted.
7 Follow the on-screen instructions.
For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see Downloads Help.
For more information about WebTools and Downloads, see WebTools.
Do not attempt to install user software by opening the individual folders for the applications.
Always use the Fiery User Software Installer.
The only applications that are not installed by the Fiery User Software Installer are Adobe
Acrobat and PitStop for use with Impose. For more information, see “Installing Adobe
Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop” on page 34.
INTRODUCTION
14
Installing user software on a Mac OS computer
Installation of user software on a Mac OS computer is done separately for each application.
TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE CD (UTILITIES)
1 Insert the User Software CD (Utilities) into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2 Browse to the OSX folder.
3 Double-click the installer icon for the application you want to install.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can also install the user software from the E-5000/E-3000 over the Internet. Ask your
network administrator for the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000.
Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and
system requirements, see Welcome.
TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER OVER THE INTERNET
1 Start your Internet browser.
2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the E-5000/E-3000.
The E-5000/E-3000 home page appears.
3 Click the tab for Downloads.
4 Click the link for the software that you want to install.
The osxutils.dmg file is downloaded to your computer. and a virtual disk appears on your
desktop.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see Downloads Help.
For more information about WebTools and Downloads, see WebTools.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
15
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
Command WorkStation, Windows Edition allows E-5000/E-3000 operators (or users with
Operator or Administrator privileges) to monitor and manage the print workflow of jobs
on the E-5000/E-3000. Command WorkStation, Windows Edition allows you to do the
following:
• View the print status of jobs on the E-5000/E-3000.
• Hold, process, and print jobs.
• Override user-assigned print option settings.
• Preview the page content of a job.
• Reorder pages in a job and combine pages from different jobs.
• Create and use FreeForm master files for variable data printing.
• Archive job files.
• View Job Logs of recent print activity.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
16
Installing Command WorkStation, Windows Edition
Install Command WorkStation, Windows Edition on a Microsoft Windows computer that
has a network connection to the E-5000/E-3000. For a complete list of system requirements,
see Welcome.
The installer for Command WorkStation, Windows Edition is provided on the User Software
CD (Utilities). In addition to the Command WorkStation software, the installer installs the
Java files required to use Fiery Setup from Command WorkStation. For information about
using Fiery Setup, see Configuration and Setup.
Before you install the utility, read the guidelines described in “Preparing for installation on
Windows computers” on page 10.
To install Command WorkStation, see “Installing user software on a Windows computer” on
page 12.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
17
Configuring the connection to the E-5000/E-3000
The first time you start Command WorkStation, you are prompted to configure the
connection to the E-5000/E-3000.
You can also edit the configuration whenever there is any change to your E-5000/E-3000
server or network, such as a changed server name or IP address. If you change E-5000/
E-3000 Setup information, do so before you reconfigure the connection. For information
about reconfiguring the connection, see “To modify the configuration for Command
WorkStation, Windows Edition” on page 19.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Print the E-5000/E-3000 Configuration page.
For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup.
The Configuration page contains information you need when configuring the connection,
such as the IP address of the E-5000/E-3000. For TCP/IP installations, you can use the DNS
name instead of the IP address. Make sure the E-5000/E-3000 is already registered in a
Domain Name Server (DNS) on your network. For more information, contact your network
administrator.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
1 Choose Start > Programs > Fiery > Command WorkStation to start the utility.
The Available Servers dialog box appears and displays all servers found in the local subnet.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
18
2 If no E-5000/E-3000 servers were found, click the Manual tab to search by DNS name or IP
address. Type the DNS name or IP address and click Add to add the server to the Available
Servers list.
If no E-5000/E-3000 servers were found by Manual search, click the Auto Search tab, and
then click Advanced to search by a range of IP addresses or by the IP address and subnet
mask.
All available servers appear in the Available Servers list.
3 Select the E-5000/E-3000 server that you want to use and click Add.
The selected E-5000/E-3000 is added to the Login Server window.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
4 Click the button to the left of the server name.
The Login dialog box appears.
5 Click the key to the left of Administrator, Operator, or Guest and type the appropriate
password, if required.
6 Click Log In.
For information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the
E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup.
Command WorkStation is now connected to the E-5000/E-3000.
TO MODIFY THE CONFIGURATION FOR COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
1 Start Command WorkStation.
The Login Server window appears.
2 Select the E-5000/E-3000 server for which you want to modify the configuration and
click Remove.
3 Repeat “To configure the connection for Command WorkStation, Windows Edition” on
page 17.
19
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
20
Using Command WorkStation, Windows Edition
After you install and configure Command WorkStation, you can begin using it to monitor
and manage jobs on the E-5000/E-3000.
For complete instructions on using the standard Command WorkStation features, see
Command WorkStation Help. Additional features are described in the sections starting on
page 21.
TO ACCESS COMMAND WORKSTATION HELP
1 Start Command WorkStation.
Select the E-5000/E-3000 from the Server List dialog box and log on to the server.
For information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the
E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup.
2 Choose Help from the Help menu.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
21
Additional features
The following sections describe how to use additional features of Command WorkStation that
are not discussed in Command WorkStation Help.
User Authentication
If user authentication has been enabled in E-5000/E-3000 Setup, users may have to enter a
user name and password in the printer driver to send a job to the E-5000/E-3000.
Management of the job in Command WorkStation is determined by how you have logged on
to the E-5000/E-3000, as Administrator, Operator, or Guest.
For information about setting up Users and Groups and enabling user authentication in the
Configure WebTool, see Configuration and Setup. For information about User Authentication
in the printer driver, see Print Options.
Align Trays
The Align Trays feature allows you to adjust the placement of text and images on the page so
they are correctly aligned on a sheet of paper. This ensures that both sides of a duplex sheet
have exactly the same alignment.
You can also perform tray alignment from the E-5000/E-3000 copier display panel by
choosing Tray Alignment from the Functions menu.
To perform tray alignment, you must do the following:
• Log on to the E-5000/E-3000 with Administrator privileges and enable tray alignment in
E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
• Enable Tray Alignment in the Layout option bar of the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver.
• Select the correct paper tray before printing.
N OTE : For Tray Alignment to work when printing a job, select the tray that you have aligned
in the Paper Source option bar before printing. If you later print a job using auto tray
selection, the alignment does not work. To print two-sided jobs, select the Short Edge
Binding with Tray Alignment feature.
TO ALIGN TEXT AND IMAGES FOR PRINTING
1 In the Active Jobs window, select the connected E-5000/E-3000 for which you want to
perform tray alignment.
If the Active Jobs window is hidden, choose Active Jobs from the Window menu to display it.
2 Choose Align Trays from the Server menu.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
22
A dialog box containing the Tray Alignment options appears.
3 Choose the tray that you want to align from the Tray menu.
4 Choose the paper size loaded in the tray from the Media menu.
N OTE : The alignment is specific to the combination of tray and paper size specified. If you
align a given tray with Letter paper, and then load Legal paper in that tray, the alignment is
wrong. You must perform a new alignment for each combination of tray and paper size.
5 In the Print Alignment Page area, select the Print Duplex option to print a duplex page, or
clear the option to print a simplex page.
6 Click Print.
7 After the Alignment Page is printed, follow the instructions on the page.
Fold the page exactly in half horizontally, unfold it, and then fold it in half vertically. When
you unfold the sheet, observe that the fold lines cross three scales on three sides of the page.
Determine which number on the scale each fold line crosses.
8 In the Enter alignment values area, enter the value that appears where the fold crosses each
of the three scales, marked A, B, and C, for Side 1. If you choose to align for duplex printing,
enter the values for the three scales on Side 2 of the page, as well.
N OTE : If you enter different values in A and C, the image rotates, leading to uneven areas on
printed output. If this occurs, enter the same value in A and C.
9 After you have entered the alignment values, click Apply, and then click Check Alignment to
print the new alignment page.
10 To remove the alignments, select a tray and click Defaults in the Enter alignment values area.
11 Click Done.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
23
Mixed Media
The Mixed Media feature allows you to define the chapter divisions of a job, print ranges of
pages on varying types of media, insert blank media between pages, and insert tab media
containing text labels.
The following guidelines and restrictions apply to Mixed Media settings:
• The Mixed Media dialog box restricts you from specifying settings that conflict with
any media, page size, or finishing settings that have been specified for the job in the
Job Properties dialog box or printer driver.
• When two or more Mixed Media settings are in conflict with each other, the Mixed Media
dialog box highlights the setting names in red, signaling you to resolve the conflict.
• When you specify print options (in the Job Properties dialog box or printer driver) after
specifying Mixed Media settings, certain print options may conflict with the page-specific
Mixed Media settings. You must resolve the conflict by choosing different print options or
removing certain Mixed Media specifications.
• If counters are configured for the copier, blank media inserted between pages count as
printed pages.
Basic instructions for accessing and using Mixed Media are provided in Command
WorkStation Help. Features specific to the E-5000/E-3000 are described in the following
procedures.
TO DEFINE MIXED MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS
1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Active Jobs window and choose Properties from
the Actions menu or double-click a job.
2 Click the Media icon in the Job Properties toolbar and scroll down to Mixed Media.
The Mixed Media dialog box lists any previously defined media settings and includes buttons
for defining, modifying, and removing settings.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
24
3 For Chapter Start Page(s), type the page numbers on which you want to start new chapter
sections.
Type page numbers as comma-separated values (for example: 4,9,17) to designate the start of
each new chapter. This feature forces each starting page to use a right-side page, adding a
preceding left-sided blank, if required.
N OTE : It is not necessary to type the first page, and page numbers refer to the numbering of
the original document. If you use the Chapter Start Page(s) feature, all media specified in the
Paper menu per chapter must share the same dimensions (for example, all Letter, all Tabloid,
or all A4).
4 To apply finishing options (for example, stapling or sorting) to each chapter created using
the Chapter Start feature, select the “Define Each Chapter As A Separate Finishing Set”
option.
N OTE : Not all finishing options can be applied to chapters that contain mixed sizes of media
(for example, Letter and A4).
5 To define properties for front and back covers, click Define Cover.
For more information, see “To define cover media settings” on page 25.
6 To define properties for individual pages or page ranges, click New Page Range.
For more information, see “To define media for specific pages” on page 26.
7 To insert blank pages, click New Insert.
For more information, see “To insert blank pages” on page 26.
8 To modify or delete a current definition, select it in the Mixed Media Definition list, and click
Edit or Remove.
If you click Edit, enter new settings for the definition and click Modify.
9 After you finish defining Mixed Media settings, click OK to close the Mixed Media dialog box
and Job Properties.
The Mixed Media settings are applied to the job.
N OTE : You can save up to 100 different settings for the Selection list in the Mixed Media
dialog box.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
25
TO DEFINE COVER MEDIA SETTINGS
1 In the Mixed Media dialog box, click Define Cover.
The Cover Media dialog box appears.
2 To define identical front cover and back cover media, select the “Apply the same settings
for both front and back cover” option. To define media settings for the front or back cover
individually, select the Front Cover or Back Cover option.
N OTE : If none of these options is selected, all other options in the dialog box may be disabled.
If “Apply the same settings for both front and back cover” is selected, the Back Cover option
is disabled.
3 Define duplexing, media, and paper source settings as required.
4 For Cover Page Mode, define how you want the content printed on the cover. You can specify
printing on the front side only, back side only, or both sides of the cover page.
The following restrictions apply to Cover Page Mode settings:
• If you specify Print on Front Only, you must set the Duplex setting to Off.
• If you specify Print on Back Only or Print on Both Sides, you must set the Duplex setting
to either Head to Head or Head to Toe. The Duplex setting determines the orientation of
the cover content.
5 Click OK to return to the Mixed Media dialog box.
Cover Media settings take precedence over settings defined in the Page/Page Range Media
dialog box.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
26
TO DEFINE MEDIA FOR SPECIFIC PAGES
1 In the Mixed Media dialog box, click New Page Range.
The Page/Page Range Media dialog box appears.
2 Type pages and page ranges as comma-separated values (for example: 3,9–14,18).
3 Define duplexing, media, and paper source settings, as required.
If you assign a new media type to the back side of a duplexed sheet, a blank page is inserted
to force the assigned page content to the front side of the next sheet.
4 Click Add Definition after each media setting you define.
5 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media dialog box.
TO INSERT BLANK PAGES
1 In the Mixed Media dialog box, click New Insert.
The Insert Blank dialog box appears.
2 Indicate whether to insert the blank before or after the target page. Define the target page
as either the first or last page in the document, or as a specific numbered page.
3 Define media, paper source, and paper size settings for the blank page.
4 Click Insert after each blank page you define.
5 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media dialog box.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
27
Virtual Printers
Virtual printers give users a method of printing to the E-5000/E-3000 using predefined
settings to configure the print job. The E-5000/E-3000 administrator can create virtual
printers and publish them so that users can access them on the network. SMB, LPR, and
FTP services are supported.
N OTE : Virtual Printers are available as an optional feature package that includes Hot Folders.
For more information, see Hot Folders.
By default, three virtual printers are already set up to correspond to the print, hold, and direct
queues. These virtual printers cannot be modified.
The administrator specifies job settings for the virtual printer. The administrator can apply an
imposition template to a virtual printer. Imposition settings override job property settings.
The E-5000/E-3000 Administrator can view the available virtual printers and published
queues, publish a virtual printer, and delete, duplicate, or edit a virtual printer.
You must be logged on with administrator privileges to configure virtual printers.
TO CONFIGURE A VIRTUAL PRINTER
1 In the Command WorkStation Server menu, choose Virtual Printers.
2 Click New.
3 Specify the following:
• Type an alphanumeric name.
• Comments: Add comments to help define the virtual printer for the user, for example,
“duplex company brochure”.
• Printing: Select one of the standard E-5000/E-3000 actions available from Command
WorkStation, including Hold, Process and Hold, Print, and Print and Hold.
• Use Custom Job Properties: Access and choose Job Properties.
• Apply Imposition Settings: Access and choose Impose settings.
4 Click OK.
TO MANAGE VIRTUAL PRINTERS
1 Choose Server > Virtual Printers.
2 Select a virtual printer in the list and click Edit, Duplicate, or Delete.
N OTE : Once a virtual printer has been created, its name cannot be changed, although the
print settings can be changed.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
28
Printing to a virtual printer using SMB
Virtual printers are published on the network. To print to a published virtual printer from a
client computer over SMB, do the following:
TO PRINT TO A VIRTUAL PRINTER USING SMB
1 Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places, and select Find Computer or Search
for Computers.
2 Type the name of the E-5000/E-3000 you are looking for and click Search Now.
If you cannot locate the E-5000/E-3000, contact your network administrator.
3 Double-click the name of the E-5000/E-3000 to display published virtual printers.
4 Double-click the virtual printer you want to connect to.
You must install the printer driver from the User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) as
described in Printing from Windows.
The virtual printer appears in Settings > Printers and Faxes.
Printing to a virtual printer using LPR on Windows
To print to a virtual printer from a client computer using an LPR connection on Windows,
you must configure a standard TCP/IP port for LPR printing and install the E-5000/E-3000
printer drivers. When you configure the port, select LPR for the protocol and type the name
of the virtual printer for Queue Name.
For more information, see Printing from Windows.
Printing to a virtual printer using LPR on Mac OS
To print to a virtual printer from a client computer using an LPR connection on Mac OS,
follow the instructions for setting up the E-5000/E-3000 on Mac OS X using IP printing.
Type the name of the virtual printer for Queue Name.
For more information, see Printing from Mac OS.
Printing to a virtual printer using FTP
If enabled in Server Setup, the E-5000/E-3000 can function as a FTP server. For information
about Setup, see Configuration and Setup.
To print to a virtual printer using FTP, use your FTP client software and connect to the
E-5000/E-3000 as to any FTP server. Ask your network administrator for the following
information:
• IP address or DNS name of the E-5000/E-3000
• User name and password, if required
• The name of the virtual printer
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
29
For more information about FTP printing, see Printing from Windows and Printing from
Mac OS.
Printing to a virtual printer using USB Media Server
You can also print to a virtual printer using the USB Server Media function on the copier
display panel. Download the files that you want to print to a USB media device and connect
the device directly to the E-5000/E-3000.
For information about USB Media Server, see Printing from Windows and Printing from
Mac OS.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
30
Troubleshooting
To troubleshoot basic connection and software problems with Command WorkStation,
see the following sections. For additional troubleshooting information, see Command
WorkStation Help.
Command WorkStation cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000
If you cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000 or locate the E-5000/E-3000 from your
computer, contact your network administrator. The administrator may need to troubleshoot
your network connections and check settings on the servers that you print to. If settings have
changed, you may need to reconfigure the E-5000/E-3000 (see Configuration and Setup).
For example, if objects in your Novell network environment are removed or renamed, or
accounts or permissions are changed, the network administrator may have to edit settings or
enter new settings in IPX (Novell) Setup to reflect the new configuration.
If you can connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with another utility, you may need to reconfigure
the Command WorkStation connection to the E-5000/E-3000 (see page 17).
If you configured the E-5000/E-3000 and set up client computers and network servers
according to the instructions in Configuration and Setup, print a Test Page. If you can print the
Test Page but still cannot print a document from a remote computer, contact the system
administrator to troubleshoot you network connection.
If you cannot connect and cannot print a Test Page, check the copier display panel for error
information.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, WINDOWS EDITION
31
Command WorkStation does not respond
If Command WorkStation is unresponsive, use the following troubleshooting guidelines.
IF THE COMMAND WORKSTATION WINDOWS DO NOT UPDATE
1 Log off and then quit Command WorkStation.
2 Restart Command WorkStation or restart the computer.
If the Command WorkStation windows do not update or no jobs are displayed, and the
mouse has no effect (you cannot select a job or a window, use a right mouse command, or
select a menu item), the E-5000/E-3000 is offline or network communication has failed.
TO FORCE AN EXIT FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION
1 Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and use the Program Manager to close Command WorkStation.
2 At the E-5000/E-3000, disconnect and reconnect the network cable, and then try printing a
Test Page or Configuration page.
3 If printing a Test Page or Configuration page fails, restart the E-5000/E-3000.
IMPOSE
IMPOSE
Impose is a utility (available as an option) that you access from Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition. Impose allows you to do the following:
• Apply imposition layouts to jobs for custom printing, binding, and cutting.
• Apply impositions to variable data jobs.
32
IMPOSE
33
Installing and enabling Impose
The following sections describe how to install and enable Impose.
Installing Impose
The Impose software is automatically installed when you install Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition from the User Software CD (Utilities).
Do not attempt to install Impose manually from the User Software CD (Utilities) (by starting
the setup.exe from the Impose folder). Impose is automatically installed when you install
Command WorkStation. Installing Impose separately from Command WorkStation can cause
unpredictable results.
To enable Impose on a client workstation, you must:
• Install Adobe Acrobat and the Enfocus PitStop plug-in module.
N OTE : The Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop CD(s) are provided in the Impose Media Pack.
• Install the Impose software protection key (dongle) into the correct port of the
client workstation.
If you see a dongle installed on the workstation, Impose has already been enabled and is ready
for use. If the dongle is not installed, see the documentation that accompanies the Impose kit.
Without a dongle installed, you can use Impose in Demo mode. In Demo mode, you can
impose documents and save them, but all printed output displays a “Demo” watermark.
N OTE : The protection key (dongle) may be either a parallel port type or a USB type dongle.
For more information, see the documentation included in the Impose kit.
34
IMPOSE
Installing Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop
To use Impose, you must install Acrobat and PitStop (a plug-in for Acrobat for use with
Impose) from the Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop installers provided in your Impose kit.
Impose is installed when you install Command WorkStation, and is accessed from Command
WorkStation.
N OTE : If you install Acrobat after Command WorkStation, you may need to restart
Command WorkStation in order to use Impose.
For more information about Acrobat, see the ReadMe file in the Acrobat folder on the Adobe
Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop CD(s).
We recommend that you install the version of Acrobat provided in your Impose kit and
remove any other versions of Acrobat installed on your computer.
TO INSTALL ADOBE ACROBAT 7.0
AND
PITSTOP 6.5.2
1 Uninstall all versions of Acrobat that are currently installed on the computer.
• Close all open applications.
• Follow the Windows instructions for removing programs.
Make sure to delete not only the main folder for the application but also the associated
Acrobat folder located, by default, in C:\Program Files\Common Files\Adobe. (The exact
drive letter may vary, depending on the computer.)
2 Restart the computer after you finish uninstalling earlier versions of Acrobat.
3 Close all software applications that are currently running on the computer.
4 Insert the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop CD in the CD-ROM or DVD drive.
5 If the installer does not start automatically, browse to the location of the CD-ROM or DVD
drive, and double-click the Setup.exe icon.
N OTE : Use only Setup.exe on the root level of the CD. Do not navigate inside any of the
folders on the CD. Using Setup.exe from any of these folders can result in an incomplete
installation and cause system problems.
6 At the message reminding you to close all applications, click Yes.
7 At the next installation screen, make sure “Adobe Acrobat” and “PitStop” are both selected,
and then click Next.
Wait while the installer copies software files to the computer and displays progress bars.
8 At the message indicating a successful installation, click OK.
9 At the next screen, click Finish.
If the latest version of Command WorkStation is already installed on the workstation, Impose
is now fully enabled. If Command WorkStation is not yet installed, install Command
WorkStation as described on page 16.
IMPOSE
Using Impose
Complete instructions on how to use Impose are provided in Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition Help.
TO ACCESS IMPOSE HELP
1 Start Command WorkStation, Windows Edition.
2 Choose Help from the Help menu.
3 Use the Contents, Index, or Search panes to navigate to the Impose Help topics.
35
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
36
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition allows operators of the E-5000/E-3000, or users
with Operator or Administrator privileges, to monitor and manage the print workflow of jobs
on the E-5000/E-3000.
Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition, enables you to do the following:
• View the print status of jobs on the E-5000/E-3000.
• Hold, process, and print jobs.
• Override user-assigned print option settings.
• Preview the page content of a job.
• Create and use FreeForm master files for variable data printing.
• Archive job files.
• View job logs of recent print activity.
Installing Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
Install Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition on a Mac OS X computer that has a
network connection to the E-5000/E-3000. For complete system requirements, see Welcome.
Before installing the utility, complete the preliminary procedures described in “Preparing for
installation on Mac OS computers” on page 11.
To install Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition, see “Installing user software on a Mac
OS computer” on page 14.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
37
Configuring the connection to the E-5000/E-3000
The first time you start Command WorkStation, you are prompted to configure the
connection to the E-5000/E-3000.
You can also edit the configuration whenever there is any change to your E-5000/E-3000
server or network, such as a changed server name or IP address. If you change E-5000/
E-3000 Setup information, do so before you reconfigure the connection.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Print the E-5000/E-3000 Configuration page.
For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup.
This page contains information you need when configuring the connection, such as the IP
address of the E-5000/E-3000. For TCP/IP installations, you can use the DNS name instead
of the IP address. Make sure the E-5000/E-3000 is already registered in a Domain Name
Server (DNS) on your network. For more information, see the documentation that
accompanies your network system.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
1 Open the Applications : Fiery : CWS Macintosh Edition folder on the Mac OS X hard disk.
Double-click the CWS Macintosh Edition file to start the application.
The Available Servers dialog box appears. All servers found in the local subnet are displayed.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
38
2 If no E-5000/E-3000 servers were found, click the Manual tab to search by DNS name or
IP address. Click Add to add the server to the Available Servers list.
If no E-5000/E-3000 servers were found in the Manual search, click the Auto Search tab, and
then click Advanced to search by a range of IP addresses or the IP address and subnet mask.
All available servers are displayed in the Available Servers list.
3 Select the E-5000/E-3000 server that you want to use and click Add.
The selected E-5000/E-3000 server is displayed in the Server List dialog box.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
39
4 Click the server name to select it, and then click the key or the Login button.
The Login dialog box appears.
5 Select Administrator, Operator, or Guest, type the password next to the key, and then
click Login.
Your computer is connected to the server.
For more information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the
E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup.
To modify the Command WorkStation connection to the E-5000/E-3000, you must remove
the server from the Login Server list and follow the procedure for configuring the connection.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
40
Using Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
After you install and configure Command WorkStation, you can begin using it to monitor
and manage jobs on the E-5000/E-3000.
Complete instructions on how to use the Command WorkStation features are provided in
Command WorkStation Help.
TO ACCESS COMMAND WORKSTATION HELP
1 Start Command WorkStation.
Select the E-5000/E-3000 in the server list, and log on to the server.
For more information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for
the E-5000/E-3000, see Configuration and Setup.
2 Choose Help from the CWS menu.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
41
Additional Features
The following sections describe how to use additional features of Command WorkStation that
are not discussed in Command WorkStation Help.
User Authentication
If user authentication has been enabled in E-5000/E-3000 Setup, users may have to
enter a user name and password in the printer driver to send a job to the E-5000/E-3000.
Management of the job in Command WorkStation is determined by how you log on to the
E-5000/E-3000, as Administrator, Operator, or Guest.
For information about setting up Users and Groups and enabling user authentication in the
Configure WebTool, see Configuration and Setup. For information about User Authentication
in the printer driver, see Print Options.
Mixed Media
The Mixed Media feature allows you to define the chapter divisions of a job, print ranges of
pages on varying types of media, insert blank media between pages, and insert tab media
containing text labels.
The following guidelines and restrictions apply to Mixed Media settings:
• The Mixed Media dialog box restricts you from specifying settings that conflict with
any media, page size, or finishing settings that have been specified for the job in the
Job Properties dialog box or printer driver.
• When two or more Mixed Media settings are in conflict with each other, the Mixed Media
dialog box highlights the setting names in red, signaling you to resolve the conflict.
• When you specify print options (in the Job Properties dialog box or printer driver) after
specifying Mixed Media settings, certain print options may conflict with the page-specific
Mixed Media settings. You must resolve the conflict by choosing different print options or
removing certain Mixed Media specifications.
• If counters are configured for the copier, blank media inserted between pages count as
printed pages.
Mixed Media features specific to the E-5000/E-3000 are described in the following
procedures.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
42
TO DEFINE MIXED MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS
1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Active Jobs window and choose Properties from
the Actions menu or double-click a job.
2 Click the Media icon in the Job Properties toolbar and scroll down to Mixed Media.
The Mixed Media dialog box lists any previously defined media settings and includes buttons
for defining, modifying, and removing settings.
3 For Chapter Start Page(s), type the page numbers on which you want to start new chapter
sections.
Type page numbers as comma-separated values (for example: 4,9,17) to designate the start
of each new chapter. This feature forces each starting page to use a right-side page, adding a
preceding left-sided blank, if required.
N OTE : It is not necessary to type the first page, and page numbers refer to the numbering of
the original document. If you use the Chapter Start Page(s) feature, all media specified in the
Paper menu per chapter must share the same dimensions (for example, all Letter, all Tabloid,
or all A4).
4 To apply finishing options (for example, stapling or sorting) to each chapter created using
the Chapter Start feature, select the “Define Each Chapter As A Separate Finishing Set”
option.
N OTE : Not all finishing options can be applied to chapters that contain mixed sizes of media
(for example, Letter and A4).
5 To define properties for front and back covers, click Define Cover.
For more information, see “To define cover media settings” on page 43.
6 To define properties for individual pages or page ranges, click New Page Range.
For more information, see “To define media for specific pages” on page 44.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
43
7 To insert blank pages, click New Insert.
For more information, see “To insert blank pages” on page 44.
8 To modify or delete a current definition, select it in the Mixed Media Definition list, and click
Edit or Remove.
If you click Edit, enter new settings for the definition and click Modify.
9 After you finish defining Mixed Media settings, click OK to close the Mixed Media dialog box
and Job Properties.
The Mixed Media settings are applied to the job.
N OTE : You can save up to 100 different settings for the Selection list in the Mixed Media
dialog box.
TO DEFINE COVER MEDIA SETTINGS
1 In the Mixed Media dialog box, click Define Cover.
The Cover Media dialog box appears.
2 To define identical front cover and back cover media, select the “Apply the same settings for
both front and back cover” option. To define media settings for the front or back cover
individually, select the Front Cover or Back Cover option.
3 Define duplexing, media, and paper source settings as required.
4 For Cover Page Mode, define how you want the content printed on the cover. You can specify
printing on the front side only, back side only, or both sides of the cover page.
The following restrictions apply to Cover Page Mode settings:
• If you specify Print on Front Only, you must set the Duplex setting to Off.
• If you specify Print on Back Only or Print on Both Sides, you must set the Duplex setting
to either Head to Head or Head to Toe. The Duplex setting determines the orientation of
the cover content.
5 Click OK to return to the Mixed Media dialog box.
Cover Media settings take precedence over settings defined in the Page/Page Range Media
dialog box.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
44
TO DEFINE MEDIA FOR SPECIFIC PAGES
1 In the Mixed Media dialog box, click New Page Range.
The Page/Page Range Media dialog box appears.
2 Type pages and page ranges as comma-separated values (for example: 3,9–14,18).
3 Define duplexing, media, tab shift, paper source settings, and paper size, as required.
If you assign a new media type to the back side of a duplexed sheet, a blank page is inserted to
force the assigned page content to the front side of the next sheet.
4 Click Add Definition after each media setting you define.
5 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media dialog box.
TO INSERT BLANK PAGES
1 In the Mixed Media dialog box, click New Insert.
The Insert Blank dialog box appears.
2 Indicate whether to insert the blank before or after the target page. Define the target page as
either the first or last page in the document, or as a specific numbered page.
3 Define duplex, media, paper source, and paper size settings for the blank page.
4 Click Insert after each blank page you define.
5 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media dialog box.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
45
Troubleshooting
When troubleshooting basic connection and software problems with Command
WorkStation, see the following sections. For additional troubleshooting information,
see Command WorkStation Help.
Command WorkStation cannot connect to the E-5000/E-3000
If you are unable to connect to the E-5000/E-3000, or are unable to locate the E-5000/
E-3000 from your computer, the network administrator may need to troubleshoot your
network connection and check settings on the servers that you print to. If settings have
changed, it may be necessary to reconfigure the E-5000/E-3000.
For example, if objects in your Novell network environment are removed or renamed, or
accounts or permissions are changed, the network administrator may need to edit settings or
configure new settings in IPX (Novell) Setup to reflect the new configuration.
If you are able to connect to the E-5000/E-3000 with another utility, you may need to
reconfigure the Command WorkStation connection to the E-5000/E-3000 (see page 37).
If you configured the E-5000/E-3000 and set up client computers and network servers
according to the instructions in Configuration and Setup, try printing a Test Page.
If you can print the Test Page but still cannot print a document from a remote computer,
contact your network administrator to troubleshoot the network connection.
If you cannot connect and cannot print a Test Page, check the copier display panel for error
information.
COMMAND WORKSTATION, MACINTOSH EDITION
46
Command WorkStation does not respond
If Command WorkStation is unresponsive, use the following troubleshooting guidelines.
IF COMMAND WORKSTATION WINDOWS DO NOT UPDATE
1 Log off and then quit Command WorkStation.
2 Restart Command WorkStation or restart the computer.
If the Command WorkStation windows do not update, or no jobs are displayed, and the
mouse has no effect (you cannot select a job or a window, use a Control-click command,
or select a menu item), the Print Server is offline or network communication has failed.
TO FORCE AN EXIT FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION
1 Press Command-Option-Escape and use the Force Quit Applications dialog box to close
Command WorkStation.
2 At the E-5000/E-3000, disconnect and reconnect the network cable, and then try printing a
Test Page or Configuration page.
3 If printing fails, restart the E-5000/E-3000.
SCAN
47
SCAN
Scan is a collection of software components that allow you to scan documents from the copier
glass or through the copier’s automatic document feeder (ADF) and send the scanned images
to specific destinations. Scan consists of the following components:
• Remote Scan includes the TWAIN plug-in module. Remote Scan allows you to remotely
initiate and retrieve a scan from a copier.
• Scan to E-mail allows you to send the scan file by e-mail as either an attachment or URL.
• Scan to FTP allows you to send the scan file to an FTP server.
• Scan to Internet Fax allows you to send the scan file to an e-mail address to be delivered as
a fax.
• Scan to Mailbox allows you to send the scan to a mailbox on the E-5000/E-3000, from
where it can be retrieved.
• Scan to Hold queue allows you to scan to the E-5000/E-3000 Hold queue for document
merging and editing.
• Docs WebTool allows you to retrieve scanned jobs from mailboxes on the copier.
SCAN
48
Installing and configuring Remote Scan
The following sections describe how to install and configure Remote Scan.
Installing Remote Scan
To install and use the Remote Scan plug-in module, you must have a Windows or Mac OS
computer with a network connection. For detailed system requirements, see Welcome.
The installer for Remote Scan is located on the User Software CD (Utilities).
To install Remote Scan, see “Installing user software on a Windows computer” on page 12
and “Installing user software on a Mac OS computer” on page 14.
Configuring Remote Scan
The first time you start Remote Scan, you must configure the connection to the E-5000/
E-3000. Before you configure the connection, you must have the correct IP address. Make
sure the E-5000/E-3000 is registered in a Domain Name Server (DNS) on your network.
When you open Remote Scan, the Scan Configuration dialog box appears. For instructions
on configuring the connection to the E-5000/E-3000 for the first time, see “To configure the
connection to the E-5000/E-3000” on page 48.
Complete instructions on configuring and modifying the connection to the E-5000/E-3000
are provided in Remote Scan Help.
If you have previously configured a connection to the E-5000/E-3000, it appears in the main
Remote Scan window, and you can immediately start to initiate a scan or retrieve any scans
initiated at the copier display panel, and use Remote Scan Help.
TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION TO THE E-5000/E-3000
1 When you start Remote Scan for first-time use, the Configuration window automatically
appears. In the Server Name (or IP Address) text field, type the IP address or the DNS name
of the Print Server.
2 Select Use Nickname to enter another name to distinguish the E-5000/E-3000. This name
does not have to match the actual Server Name of the E-5000/E-3000.
3 Type the device name for the E-5000/E-3000: E-5000 or E-3000.
4 Click the green arrow to add the E-5000/E-3000 to My Fiery List.
5 Click OK.
SCAN
49
Using Remote Scan
You can initiate and retrieve scan files remotely with Remote Scan and the TWAIN plug-in
module. You can open the scan file in a host application, such as Photoshop, and send the
scan file to a mailbox, the Hold queue, an FTP server, or to an e-mail address as an e-mail or
as an internet fax. You can retrieve files from the mailbox using Remote Scan, WebScan, or
Command WorkStation. All scans are stored on the E-5000/E-3000 and retrieved through
the network.
Complete instructions for using the Remote Scan application and plug-in module are
provided in Remote Scan Help.
TO ACCESS REMOTE SCAN HELP
1 Start Remote Scan or open the Remote Scan plug-in module.
2 Click the Help button.
3 Use the Contents, Index, or Search panes to locate Remote Scan Help topics.
Scan settings specific to the copier are described in the following section.
Specifying scan settings from Remote Scan
When you start Remote Scan and connect to the E-5000/E-3000, the copier specific settings
are displayed on the Initiate tab of the Remote Scan window. Similarly, if you open the
Remote Scan TWAIN plug-in from a third-party application and connect to the E-5000/
E-3000, the copier specific settings are displayed.
TO SPECIFY SCAN SETTINGS FROM REMOTE SCAN
1 Select the appropriate options on the Initiate tab.
Sides: Choose the number of sides the copier must scan.
(This option is only available if you are scanning from the ADF.)
Size: Choose the size of the document.
If you choose AutoSelect, you can select Mixed and scan a job of different page sizes.
Orientation: Choose the orientation.
Background Removal: Specify the degree to which the background should be removed by
choosing from the numerica range. The default setting is Off.
Image Mode: Specify whether you want Text, Text (OCR), Text/Image, or Image scanning.
The options offered depend on the Color Mode you have chosen.
SCAN
50
Split Mode: Specify whether you want Page or Batch mode. The default is Off.
Split Mode Timeout: Specify length of time in seconds after which the job times out.
This option is only available if you choose Page mode.
Erase Border: Specify whether you want to delete the borders of the scanned original.
N OTE : Erase Border cannot be selected if Mixed Size mode has been selected.
Border Width: If you selected the Erase Border option, enter the width of the border you want
deleted on all four sides. Width is specified in millimeters (mm).
Resolution: Choose a value for the resolution. Changing the resolution also changes the image
size. The maximum resolution supported by the E-5000/E-3000 is displayed in the dialog
box.
Color Mode (Color, Grayscale, or Black and White): Choose the type of scan you want.
Compression: Choose the compression level, depending on the desired quality and file size
of the scanned job.
Brightness: Specify whether to increase or decrease brightness by choosing a setting.
The default is 0.
Drop Out Color: Specify whether to drop out any colors from the scanned original.
This option can only be selected under the following conditions:
• Text (OCR) for Black and White was chosen in Image mode.
• Background Removal is set as Off.
Color Range: Specify the density of the colors you selected to drop out of the scanned original.
This option is only available if you have selected Drop Out Color.
Internet Fax: If this option is selected, some settings are disabled.
2 Click Send.
3 Select the destinations for the scan.
For information about selecting scan destinations, see Remote Scan Help.
4 Click Send.
SCAN
51
Scanning from the copier control panel
You can scan an image from the copier glass (platen) or automatic document feeder (ADF)
into E-5000/E-3000 memory using the copier control panel. You can then open the image
with Remote Scan or the WebScan WebTool.
Additionally, you can scan a job directly to the Hold queue, so that you can use the document
merging and editing features of Command WorkStation. For more information about using
these features, see Command WorkStation Help.
The following procedure explains how to scan from the copier control panel.
TO SCAN A JOB FROM THE COPIER CONTROL PANEL
1 Press the “fierydriven®” key.
2 Press the Scan tab.
3 Press Scan Options.
N OTE : If you previously set scan or destination options and saved them, you can press Preset
to access them. For more information, see “Preset” on page 54.
4 Press a menu button to access the scan options in that menu.
5 Specify the scan settings for each menu, and then press OK.
For specific scan settings, see the following section.
6 Place the document that you want to scan in the ADF, or place the first page of the document
on the copier glass.
N OTE : If you have selected Batch for the Split Mode, you can only scan from the ADF.
7 Press the Start (green) button.
Specifying scan settings from the copier
When you initiate a scan, you specify scan settings. Scan settings are copier-specific options.
The specific scan settings for the copier are as follows:
Image Mode: Choose from Black&White, Grayscale, and Color.
• Black&White: Text, Text (OCR), Text/Image, Image
• Color: Text/Image, Image
Resolution: Choose from 100 dpi, 150 dpi, 200 dip, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.
SCAN
52
Brightness: Choose from Set Brightness Level or Background Removal.
N OTE : A numeric range for Background Removal can be set only when Color mode is
selected. If Black and White has been selected, you can choose only On or Off.
Dropout Color: Choose from Off, Red, Green, Blue, All Colors.
This option can only be selected under the following conditions:
• Text (OCR) for Black and White was chosen in Image Mode
• Background Removal is set as Off
N OTE : If the original includes colors you do not want to scan, you can select the colors to
exclude. You can select red, green, blue, or other chromatic colors. If you specify narrow
ranges for the selected colors, only the selected colors and colors very close to them are
excluded. If you specify wide ranges for the selected colors, the selected colors and all colors
based on them are excluded.
Erase Mode: Choose from Off, Top, Left, Rim, Right, Bottom.
This setting deletes the borders of the scanned original according to the width specified.
Width is in millimeters (mm).
N OTE : Erase mode can not be selected if Mixed Size mode has been selected.
Page Size: Choose from Auto Detect, A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, B5 LEF, B5 SEF, A5
LEF, A5 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF,
5.5 x 8.5 SEF, 432 x 297mm, Mixed Size.
N OTE : Users can set Mixed Size only when Auto Detect has been selected.
Orientation: Choose from Portrait or Landscape. For Duplex setting, choose from Single,
Top-Top, Top-Bottom. If choosing Top-Top or Top-Bottom, choose 1 side or 2 sides for Last
page, additionally.
Compression: Choose from Maximum, Standard, Minimum.
Split Mode: Choose from Off, Page, Batch, Timer, Edit.
N OTE : Split Mode Timeout is only available when the split mode is set to Page.
Destination: Choose from Hold Queue, Mail Box, FTP, E-Mail, Internet Fax, File Name.
53
SCAN
Image Mode setting
The following table shows how different combinations in Remote Scan correspond to Image
Mode settings in copier control panel scan.
Copier control panel scan
Item name
Selection
Image mode
Black and White
Text
Remote Scan
Color mode
Image mode
Black and White
Text
Image
Image
Text/Image
Text/Image
Text (OCR)
Text (OCR)
Grayscale
Grayscale
Grayscale
Image
Color
Image
Color
Image
Text/Image
Text/Image
SCAN
54
Additional information
The following sections provide additional information about the scan settings on the copier.
Preset
You can save scan options or destination options in the Scan Options Preset or Destination
Preset menus. After you enter scan options or destinations, press Add to Preset and type a
name for the saved set of options.
TO RETRIEVE PRESET OPTIONS
1 Press Preset> Scan Option Preset or Preset > Destination Preset.
2 Use the up and down arrows to scroll to the selection that you want.
3 Press the selection, and then press Load.
You can also choose to Delete a set of preset options.
Split Mode
The Split Mode option allows you to scan a job with multiple pages, either sequentially page
by page, or in batches. This option is useful if you need to scan all the pages of a document
into one file, or if you have a large document to scan.
Page Mode
• In Page Mode, if you place the originals in the ADF, you can scan the originals one by one
without pressing the Start key to start the next scan.
• If you place the originals on the platen in Page Mode, you must press the Start key
between each original.
• To end a Page Mode scanning job, press the # key.
• If the Timer is set for a certain number of seconds, the job ends when the set time elapses.
Batch Mode
• You must press the Start key between each batch of originals to be scanned.
• To end a Batch Made scanning job, press the # key.
• You cannot set the Timer for Batch Mode.
SCAN
55
Destinations
When you initiate the scan, you select where to send the file. When you select the appropriate
settings for your scan job (see “Specifying scan settings from the copier” on page 51), you can
specify the location to send the scan.
You can send a scan from the copier control panel to the following destinations:
• Hold queue
• Mail Box
• FTP
• E-Mail
• Internet Fax
You can select more than one destination for a scan.
Hold queue
The scan is sent to the Hold queue of the E-5000/E-3000, and appears in the Command
WorkStation Active Jobs window. If you do not type a file name for the job, a file name is
assigned automatically.
Mail Box
When you select Mail Box as a destination, you are prompted to type a 4-digit number for the
Mail Box name. Only one Mail Box can be set up at a time.
When retrieving a scan from Remote Scan or Docs, you type the same 4-digit number for the
Mail Box name.
FTP
You can choose to send a scan to an FTP server as a PDF, TIFF, or JPEG file. Only color files
can be sent as JPEG files. The FTP server must be set up before you can send a scan job to it.
Consult your network administrator for information about the FTP servers available at your
site.
E-Mail
You can send a scan to an e-mail address only if you have set up E-mail Service in advance.
For more information, see Configuration and Setup. The E-5000/E-3000 supports an Address
Book and an LDAP address book feature, which must be enabled and configured in Setup.
Using this feature, you can access the e-mail addresses on your corporate network. You can
choose to send the scan as an attachment or as a URL.
You can add e-mail addresses to the Address Book from the copier control panel, but you
must log on with Administrator privileges to do so.
SCAN
56
Internet Fax
To send a scan by Internet Fax, you must set up the e-mail service in advance, and indicate the
E-Mail destination. The scan is sent to the specified e-mail address and delivered as a fax.
Retrieving scans using Docs
You can retrieve scan jobs in the E-5000/E-3000 Mailboxes to your remote workstation using
the Docs WebTool. For instructions on using Docs, see page 62.
HOT FOLDERS
57
HOT FOLDERS
Hot Folders is a utility that allows you to store and reuse frequently used print options when
printing PostScript and PDF files on the E-5000/E-3000. With Hot Folders, you can do the
following:
• Create special folders (hot folders) that assign specific print settings and print queues
to jobs.
• Print jobs to the E-5000/E-3000 by dragging and dropping them onto hot folders on your
computer’s desktop.
• Monitor the status of jobs sent to hot folders.
Installing Hot Folders
The Hot Folders installer is located on the User Software CD (Utilities).
Before installing the utility, complete the preliminary procedures described on pages 10
and 11.
To install Hot Folders on a Windows computer, see “Installing user software on a Windows
computer” on page 12. To install Hot Folders on a Mac OS computer, see “Installing user
software on a Mac OS computer” on page 14.
HOT FOLDERS
58
Using Hot Folders
Complete instructions on how to use the standard Hot Folders features are provided in
Hot Folders Help.
TO ACCESS HOT FOLDERS HELP
1 Start Hot Folders.
2 Choose Help > EFI Hot Folders Help.
Additional features
The following section describes additional features of Hot Folders that are not discussed in
Hot Folders Help.
Preserve Document Setting
When you define Job Settings for a new Hot Folder and open the Job Properties window, the
default for many settings is displayed as Preserve Document Setting. This setting allows you to
keep the job properties you set when creating the original job in the application.
WEBTOOLS
59
WEBTOOLS
WebTools allow you to manage your E-5000/E-3000 remotely from the Internet or your
company’s intranet. The E-5000/E-3000 has its own home page, where you can select the
following WebTools:
• Home provides current information on the jobs processing and printing on the
E-5000/E-3000.
• Downloads allows remote users to download installers (for drivers, PPDs, and other
software) directly from the E-5000/E-3000.
• Docs allows remote users to access jobs on the E-5000/E-3000 over the Internet or
intranet.
• Configure allows the E-5000/E-3000 Administrator to view and modify Setup options
remotely from a Windows computer.
WEBTOOLS
60
Setting up WebTools
WebTools are accessed through the home page of the E-5000/E-3000 web site and do not
require special installation. However, WebTools do require initial Setup by the E-5000/
E-3000 administrator.
In order for network users to access and use WebTools, the Administrator must set specific
options in Network Setup and Printer Setup. For information on these specific Setup options,
see Configuration and Setup.
The administrator also must prepare each user’s computer to communicate with the E-5000/
E-3000 over the Internet or intranet.
TO SET UP CLIENT COMPUTERS TO USE WEBTOOLS
1 Enable TCP/IP networking.
2 Make sure the workstation has a valid, unique IP address.
3 Make sure a supported Internet browser is installed on the computer.
For more information on supported browsers, see Welcome.
4 Make sure Java is enabled in your Internet browser.
In addition, make sure you have completed the preliminary procedures described in
“Preparing for installation on Windows computers” on page 10.
N OTE : If the client computer is running Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (SP2) installed,
Pop-up Blocker is turned on by default. With this function turned on, a warning message
appears when you access WebTools, and your access to WebTools is denied. To gain access,
you can do one of the following:
• Change the Pop-up Blocker setting by clicking the warning message and choosing from
one of the selections that appears.
• Turn off Pop-up Blocker in Internet Explorer from the Tools menu or in Internet Options.
For more information, see Internet Explorer Help, or the documentation that accompanies
your Windows system.
WEBTOOLS
61
Accessing the WebTools home page
Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and
system requirements, see Welcome.
1 Start your Internet browser.
2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the E-5000/E-3000.
The E-5000/E-3000 home page appears.
If the home page for the copier appears instead of the WebTools page, click the WebTools
link.
3 Click the tab for the WebTool that you want to use.
WEBTOOLS
62
Using WebTools
The following sections describe how to use the WebTools.
Home
Home lets you view jobs that are currently processing and printing on the E-5000/E-3000.
Printing and processing information is updated every 30 seconds.
For complete instructions on how to use Home, see Home Help.
Downloads
The Downloads WebTool allows you to download installers (for drivers, PPDs, and other
E-5000/E-3000 software) directly from the E-5000/E-3000.
For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see Downloads Help.
Docs
Docs allows you to access jobs on the E-5000/E-3000 over the Internet or intranet. You can:
• Manage and distribute jobs in your mailbox.
Mailboxes are set up in the Configure WebTool.
• Control and modify jobs.
• Submit jobs to the Print Server.
For complete instructions on how to use Docs, see Docs Help.
Configure
Configure allows the E-5000/E-3000 administrator to view and modify Setup options
remotely from a Windows computer. For information about using Configure, see
Configuration and Setup.
Before using Configure, make sure you have completed the Configure preparation procedure
described in “Preparing for installation on Windows computers” on page 10.
For complete instructions on how to use Configure, see Configure Help.
63
INDEX
INDEX
A
F
ADF (automatic document feeder) 47
Adobe Acrobat 34
Adobe Photoshop
scanning with 51
Align Trays 21
Fiery utilities, configuring the
connection on Windows 48
fonts
installer for Mac OS 11
installing 11
printer fonts 11
screen fonts 11
C
chapter definition for jobs 24, 42
Configure 62
configuring 60
Command WorkStation,
Macintosh Edition 37
Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition 17
connection on Windows 48
server 62
virtual printers 27
WebTools 60
conventions 8
cover media 25, 43
D
H
Home WebTool 62
I
icons, in documentation 8
imposing jobs 32
imposition layouts 32
installing
Acrobat 34
Impose 33
PitStop 34
screen and printer fonts 11
J
deleting virtual printers 27
DNS name 17, 37
Docs webtool 62
Domain Name Server, see DNS name
dongle 33
downloading software 62
Downloads WebTool 62
drag-and-drop printing 57
duplicating virtual printers 27
Java 16, 60
Java JRE 10
jobs
chapter definitions 24, 42
cover media 25, 43
mixed media definitions
23, 41
VDP 32
E
LPR printing
on Mac OS 28
on Windows 28
editing virtual printers 27
Enfocus PitStop plug-in 34
L
64
INDEX
M
U
Mac OS fonts 11
media definitions 23, 41
Mixed Media 23, 41
USB device 29
USB Media Server 29
user authentication 21, 41
users and groups 21, 41
P
paper definitions 23, 41
PitStop plug-in 34
printer fonts 11
printing frequently used print options 57
R
remote setup 62
S
screen fonts 11
server setup 62
software protection key 33
Sun Java JRE 10
T
TCP/IP 17, 37
terminology 8
tray alignment 21
troubleshooting
Command WorkStation,
Macintosh Edition 45
Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition 30
V
variable data printing,
see VDP jobs
VDP jobs
imposing 32
virtual printers 27
configuring 27
LPR printing 28
Mac OS 28
printing to 28
USB device 29
W
WebTools 60
Configure 62
Docs 62
Downloads 62
Home 62
home page
13, 14, 61
Release Notes
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, version 1.0
This document contains information about Color Controller E-5000/E-3000 software
version 1.0.
N OTE : This document uses the term “E-5000/E-3000” to refer to the Color Controller
E-5000/E-3000. The term “copier” is used to refer to the Copier Main Unit.
Printing
Long file names with PCL5c
If you print a PCL5c document that has a long file name, the document name may be printed
on an extra page.
Mixed Media finishing sets with Insert Blank
If you specify finishing sets for each chapter in a stapled Mixed Media job and then insert
a blank page before each selected chapter, your job is output with the wrong stapling sets.
Do not use “Define Each Chapter as a Separate Finishing set” and “Insert Blank” at the
same time.
Updating Installed Options in the Windows 2000/XP printer driver
The Installed Options list does not update correctly in the Windows 2000/XP printer driver if
you select “Update Fiery when opened”. To correctly display Installed Options in the printer
driver, click Update in addition to selecting “Update Fiery when opened” from the printer
driver.
Image Smoothing
When you select the Printer Default for Image Smoothing, the result is the same as with the
setting “Image Smoothing=Off ”.
Too many processing jobs in queue error
If the number of processing jobs in the E-5000/E-3000 queue is close to the maximum
of 2,500, the E-5000/E-3000 will not accept any additional jobs, and an error messsage
is displayed.
Printing Large files
To print files larger than 4GB, print by page ranges, so that the job is separated into separate
files, each 2GB or less in size.
FreeForm jobs with the Document Server option
To send a FreeForm job to Document Server on the E-5000/E-3000, you must select
Document Server before creating the FreeForm master. If you do not, the job does not print,
and displays an error in the Job Log.
Copyright 2006 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
Part Number: 45058080
30 November 2006
Page 2
Document Server
You cannot store 12" x 18" and custom-sized documents using Document Server.
EFI Impose on Document Server
You cannot save an imposed job in Document Server. Document Server does not support
Impose.
Printing to Document Server
The default Quality Mode setting is Super Fine. When sending data to the Document Server
for printing, using Super Fine uses a lot of hard disk drive space. You may want to select Fine
or Coarse, instead. The values for the Quality Mode settings are as follows:
• Super Fine: Large amount of hard disk space
• Fine: Medium amount of hard disk space
• Coarse: Small amount of hard disk space
Printing thin lines
Thin lines in a document may not print, may appear jagged, or may produce different results
than expected. If you encounter this problem, select Text for the Dithering option on the
Image Quality tab of the printer driver.
Rebooting system while printing in process
If you attempt to reboot the system while the E-5000/E-3000 is in the process of printing,
you may experience unexpected results. Always wait until the display reads Idle before
rebooting the system.
Image Shift
The Image Shift setting is invalid when using the N-up setting.
Mixed paper size stapling
Mixed paper size stapling is supported only on SR3020/SR3030 for E-5000. If you use this
setting with other finishers, you may have unexpected results.
Virtual Printers
When opening the job properties for a Virtual Printer, Mixed Media settings are not properly
displayed. To confirm or change Mixed Media settings, use Command WorkStation. If the
Job Properties window for a Virtual Printer is accidentally opened from the Virtual Printers
dialog box, press Cancel to close the window. Do not press OK.
Page 3
Booklet Maker
Nobi-size printing with Booklet Maker
With Booklet Maker, an imposed job does not print properly to custom Nobi-size paper.
Custom paper sizes are not supported. You must select an available paper size for this type
of print job.
Standard Booklet printing with N-up layout
Standard Booklet printing is not supported with N-up layout printing.
Imposition
If you specify Mixed Media for Booklet Maker jobs, such as Saddle, Perfect, Double Print,
and Speed Print, you may experience unexpected printing results. Booklet Maker print jobs
may not be stapled or punched correctly. Booklet Maker and 2 at Center can be set separately.
If you want the document that is imposed in the application to be booklet-stapled, select only
2 at Center from the Staple print option.
Landscape data with Duplex printing and Double/Speed Print setting
When you select Duplex mode with Double/Speed Print set for landscape data, the binding
direction of the print jobs will be the opposite of what you selected. For example:
• If “Open to Top” is selected, the job prints in the “Open to Left” direction.
• If “Open to Left” is selected, the job prints in the “Open to Top” direction.
For the Double Print setting, a workaround is to use Orientation Override on the Layout tab
of the print driver.
Limitations of Booklet Maker
The following are limitations of Booklet Maker:
• When blank pages are inserted into a job as a result of specifying Booklet Maker settings,
the blank pages are counted as printed black-and-white pages.
• Scale, Scale to Fit, or Fit to Print (on the Layout tab of the Job Properties window) are
not applicable when using Booklet Maker settings for a job.
• If you select the Speed Print setting for Booklet Maker, the Booklet Cover settings are
not available.
• Booklet Maker settings cannot be specified for an Adobe PDF file with security settings.
• When using Booklet Maker settings, the Remove White PPT Background option on the
FreeForm tab cannot be selected.
• A large job with Booklet Maker Double Print settings may take a long time to print.
• When you print a large number of documents with Booklet Maker, you may experience
an unexpectedly long printing time.
Page 4
Direct connection limitations
Jobs or job-related information sent to the Direct connection are not saved to the hard disk.
With the Direct connection, jobs or page rasters cannot be saved to disk. Therefore, any
operation that requires disk access is not possible. These operations include:
• Spooling for PDF jobs
PDF jobs must be saved to disk, as the interpreter must have random access to the file.
Most PDF jobs cannot be processed as a stream of data like PostScript. PDF jobs sent to
the Direct connection from Command WorkStation or the printer driver are redirected to
the Print queue. PDF jobs sent to the Direct connection from LPR fail.
• Direct connection printing for VDP jobs
VDP jobs sent to the Direct connection are redirected to the Print queue. (For more
information, see Variable Data Printing on the User Documentation CD.)
• Reverse order printing for large jobs
Reverse order printing requires RIPping the entire job before printing. If the job cannot
fit in memory, the job still prints (in reverse order), but pages are saved to disk.
• Collation for large jobs
Collation is not supported for the same reason as reverse order printing. Note that
Collation is turned off for jobs printed to the Direct connection.
• FreeForm jobs, including the following PPD options:
– Booklet Maker
– Combine Separations
– Save Fast Reprint
– Page Order
– Duplex
– Collate
– Create Master
– Use Master
Page 5
WebTools
Creating mailboxes
You must include the user’s domain name when you create a mailbox from Configure with
LDAP and the Global Address List. If you do not add the user’s domain name, for example,
<Domain Name>/:<User>, the E-5000/E-3000 does not recognize the mailbox name.
Service Location Protocol
You cannot set up Service Location Protocol (SLP) from the Configure WebTool.
As a workaround, set up SLP from the copier display panel.
EULA dialog box
If you are unable to connect to PrintMe with the Configure WebTool, a blank EULA
dialog box appears. Ignore this dialog box by clicking Cancel.
Web Downloads
When you download Windows software, the name of the software may not display properly if
the language differs from the current language configuration of the E-5000/E-3000. In this
case, install the required software from User Software CD (PS Printer Drivers) or User
Software CD (Utilities).
Internet Explorer 7
If you use Web Tools on Internet Explorer 7, you might be forced to quit Internet Explorer.
Help
Help files
Help files for the Fiery utilities are developed for use with Microsoft Internet Explorer v5.5
or later. If you use other browsers, such as Safari or earlier versions of Internet Explorer, the
Help files might not display properly.
With Microsoft Internet Explorer on a Windows XP Service Pack 2 computer, Help files
might not display or display properly in the following situations:
• If your browser uses a pop-up blocker, it might block Help files. If this happens,
temporarily disable your pop-up blocker.
• If your browser has the advanced Internet option enabled to display notifications about
script errors, it might display a warning window before displaying a Help file. To avoid the
warning window, clear the “Display a notification about every script error” option on the
Advanced tab in the Internet Options dialog box.
• A warning message might also appear in the Status bar, but the content of the Help file is
not affected by this error.
Page 6
Safari
With Safari on Mac OS X systems, Help files might not display or display incorrectly in the
following situations:
• When you start Hot Folders Help using Safari on Mac OS X computers, the Help files
may not load properly, displaying the message “Loading data” with no result. If this occurs,
quit Safari and restart the Help files. If the problem persists, use Internet Explorer v5.5
or later.
• When you use Safari on a Mac OS X computer and move the cursor to an item in
Command WorkStation Help, a frame line may appear to the left of the image.
• When you use Safari v1.2 or v1.3 on Mac OS X v10.3.x computers, the text “Next,”
“Previous,” and “Show in Contents” incorrectly displays in the initial Command
WorkStation Help pane. If this occurs, use Mac OS X v10.4.5 with Safari v2.0.3, or
Internet Explorer v5.5 or later.
Windows
Accessories tab display
If the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver Printer Properties does not display the Printer Properties
properly, reduce the resolution and color quality in the Windows computer Control Panel\
Display properties.
Saving custom paper sizes
In the E-5000/E-3000 printer driver on Windows, custom page size is not supported for
creating templates for future use.
Mac OS X
Image Shift with Duplex printing
When you use the Image Shift option with Duplex (two-sided printing) settings for a job with
more than two pages, the image on the third page may appear distorted. This is caused by the
Mac OS X printer driver, and there is currently no workaround.
Thick1 and Thick2 Media Type with Staple
You can select Thick1 and Thick2 for Media Type when Staple is selected from the Mac OS X
printer driver. However, this print combination is not supported.
Page 7
Saving PDF or PS files
When you use Image Shift with Duplex (two-sided printing) settings, save the file as a PDF or
PostScript (PS), and then print the file, the job prints single-sided without the Image Shift
settings. If you print with the settings from the driver without saving the file as PS or PDF, the
job prints with the correct settings.
Resolving print option conflicts in the Mac OS X v10.4 printer driver
When you change print options in the Mac OS X v10.4 printer driver, specifically in the
Printer Features pane, print option conflicts are not resolved appropriately.
For example, to select a setting for the Booklet Maker print option, you must set the Duplex
(two-sided printing) print option to On before the Booklet Maker print options are available.
The Booklet Maker print options are dependent on the Duplex (two-sided printing) print
option.
In previous Mac OS versions, the print option conflicts were automatically corrected.
To resolve the print option conflicts in the Printer Features pane, use the following procedure.
TO RESOLVE PRINT OPTION CONFLICTS IN THE PRINTER FEATURES PANE
1 Select a different pane.
For example, if you were in the Printer Features pane, select the Summary pane.
After you refresh the Printer Features pane, there is a mismatch between the selected Feature
Set group and the print options that are displayed. For example, if the last Feature Set that
you changed was Image 1, it is now displayed with the print options for the first Feature Set,
such as Finishing 1.
2 Reselect the Feature Set group (for example, Image 1) to refresh the print options displayed.
3 Select the appropriate print options and print the job.
Page 8
Print constraints
For unsupported print options, the Mac OS X printer driver displays the option as grayed
out. When printing from Mac OS X, refer to the following constraints table.
Category
Option
Constraint
Workaround
Finishing 2
Punch Holes
Two Holes
Punch = Left, Right, Top
Three Holes
Punch = Left, Right, Top
Four Holes
Punch = Left, Right, Top
Four Holes Grouped
Punch = Left, Right, Top
Job Info
Document Server
On
Collate = Off
Layout 1
Booklet Maker
Saddle
Duplex = Open to Left
Saddle (Right Binding)
Duplex = Open to Left
Perfect
Duplex = Open to Left
Perfect (Right Binding)
Duplex = Open to Left
Auto Tray Select
Duplex = Off, or Open to left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Layout 2
Booklet Cover Source
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Bypass Tray
Duplex = Off
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Tray 1
Duplex = Off, or Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang-Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Tray 2
Duplex = Off, or Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang-Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Tray 3
Duplex = Off, or Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Page 9
Category
Option
Constraint
Workaround
Layout 2 (cont’d.)
Booklet Cover Source
(cont’d.)
Tray4
Duplex = Off, Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Tray3 (LCT)
Duplex = Off, Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Booklet Front Cover Mode
Print on Front Only
Duplex = Off, or Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Print on Back Only
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Print Both
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Blank
Duplex = Off, Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Booklet Back Cover Mode
Print on Front Only
Duplex = Off, or Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Print on Back Only
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Page 10
Category
Option
Constraint
Workaround
Layout 2 (cont’d.)
Booklet Back Cover Mode
(cont’d.)
Print Both
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Blank
Duplex = Off, or Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Gang Up-Double Print
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Media 1
Media 2
Centering Adjustment
Bottom X
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding), Perfect, or Perfect
(Right Binding)
Creep Adjustment
Plain
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, Saddle
(Right Binding)
Thick
Duplex = Open to Left
Booklet Maker = Saddle, or Saddle
(Right Binding)
Labels
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Transparency
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Thick 3
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Plain
First Page Input = On
Recycled
First Page Input = On
Color
First Page Input = On
Special1
First Page Input = On
Special2
First Page Input = On
Special3
First Page Input = On
Letterhead
First Page Input = On
Labels
First Page Input = On
First Page Input Tray = Bypass Tray
Cardstock
First Page Input = On
Bond
First Page Input = On
Preprinted
First Page Input = On
Media Type
First Page Media Type
Page 11
Category
Option
Constraint
Workaround
Media 2 (cont’d.)
First Page Media Type
(cont’d.)
Transparency
First Page Input = On
First Page Input Tray = Bypass Tray
Thin
First Page Input = On
Middle Thick
First Page Input = On
Thick1
First Page Input = On
Thick2
First Page Input = On
Thick3
First Page Input = On
First Page Input Tray = Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray
First Page Input = On
Tray1
First Page Input = On
Tray2
First Page Input = On
Tray3
First Page Input = On
Tray4
First Page Input = On
Tray3 (LCT)
First Page Input = On
Blank
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Printed
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
First Page Input Tray
Use Slip Sheet
Page 12
Category
Option
Constraint
Workaround
Media 2 (cont’d.)
Slip Sheet Media Type
Plain
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Recycled
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Color
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Special1
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Special2
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Special3
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Letterhead
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Labels
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray = Bypass Tray
Cardstock
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray = Auto Tray Select
Bond
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray = Auto Tray Select
Preprinted
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray = Auto Tray Select
Transparency
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray = Bypass Tray
Page 13
Category
Option
Constraint
Workaround
Media 2 (cont’d.)
Slip Sheet Media Type
(cont’d.)
Thin
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Middle Thick
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Thick1
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Thick2
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Thick3
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray = Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Tray1
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Tray2
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Tray3
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Tray4
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Tray3 (LCT)
Paper Feed = Bypass Tray
Media Type = Transparency
Use Slip Sheet = Blank, or Printed
Slip Sheet Input Tray
Page 14
Hot Folders v2.x on Mac OS 10.4.x
Files submitted to Hot Folders v2.x on a local Mac OS 10.4.x computer or a network location
may not recognize submitted file formats, even though the file is correct and valid. This
commonly occurs if the files are in a network folder that is accessed via the Apple Filing
Protocol (AFP). This does not occur if the files are in a network folder that is accessed via
SMB.
As a workaround, set all submitted Hot Folders files with “Read and Write” or “Read”
permissions.
• If your files are on the network, move them to your local computer, change the file
permissions, and then resubmit the files to Hot Folders.
If you are working from a Mac OS computer, you must first unlock and change the file
permissions. Save the new file attributes as unlocked, or change the file back to locked and
then save the attributes.
• If your files are on your local computer, review and modify file permissions as necessary,
and then submit the files to Hot Folders.
Remote Scan version 5.3 and 5.4 on Mac OS X
To quit Remote Scan version 5.3 and 5.4 on a Mac OS X computer, use your mouse to close
the Remote Scan application window. You cannot quit the application from the main menu
or by pressing Command+Q.
Finishing on Mac OS X
With any combination of Duplex and Staple settings for a job printed from a Mac OS X
computer, the staple position and duplex direction on the output may not be as expected.
If this occurs, specify the desired image direction in the orientation override of the E-5000/
E-3000 printer driver.
Custom size printing
Maximum custom size is set as follows:
• Inch: 12" x 23.62"
• Millimeter: 304.9mm x 599.9 mm
Printing on Mac OS
When you print from an application by clicking the Print button, the print options are not
displayed. Choose Print from the File menu instead.
Page 15
Command
WorkStation
Canceling multiple jobs
When you cancel multiple jobs with Command WorkStation, it may take an unexpectedly
long time to complete the cancellation process.
Similarly, when you cancel Booklet Maker jobs or jobs with a large number of pages, it may
take an unexpectedly long time to complete the cancellation process.
Preview While Processing
It may take an unexpectedly long time to cancel a job or to move it from Active Jobs
to Printed Jobs in Command WorkStation when Preview While Processing is enabled in
E-5000/E-3000 Setup.
Adobe PageMaker
When the job properties for a job printed with Adobe PageMaker PPD are opened in
Command WorkStation, a set value might not be correctly displayed.
Printing Groups
The Printing Groups feature is not supported, although it is described in Command
WorkStation Help. Printing Groups has been replaced by User Authentication, which is set
in the printer driver, if it has been enabled in E-5000/E-3000 Setup. For information about
User Authentication, see Configuration and Setup and Print Options.
Backing up and restoring fonts
With Command WorkStation, you can back up and restore fonts. This feature is described
incorrectly in Command WorkStation Help.
Observe these guidelines before backing up or restoring fonts:
• Back up and restore only PostScript fonts.
• All fonts are backed up or restored. You cannot select individual fonts.
• Do not back up fonts to an internal hard disk that also contains the E-5000/E-3000
system software.
• Restore fonts only to the E-5000/E-3000 from which the fonts were originally backed up.
TO BACK UP OR RESTORE FONTS
1 Start Command WorkStation and log on with Administrator privileges.
2 Choose Manage Fonts from the Server menu.
3 Click Backup or Restore.
4 In the window that appears, navigate to the folder where you want to back up the fonts or
restore them.
5 Click OK.
Page 16
Composite Overprint
If you select a duotone job from Command WorkStation and select Composite Overprint and
then process and hold the job, the duotone portion of the job appears corrupt if you view the
job from ImageViewer.
ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools connected to a Spanish E-5000/E-3000
If you start ColorWise Pro Tools and connect to a Spanish E-5000/E-3000 from a Mac OS X
computer, some menu items display in French instead of Spanish.
External
Connections
USB Media connection
Internet Fax
No error message for unsupported resolutions
The E-5000/E-3000 may not return to Idle after the USB media drive is inserted. This may
occur when the USB drive has been formatted in Windows, which sometimes causes the
E-5000/E-3000 to try to boot off the drive. If this occurs, clear the first sector without
formatting the drive.
When you send an Internet Fax with 100 dpi or 600 dpi (dots per inch), the scanning
software does not alert you that these resolutions are not supported. The currently supported
scan resolutions are 200 dpi, 300, or 400 dpi.
Remote Scan
Limits on scan size
The limit on the file size of a scanned job is 2GB. If you attempt to scan a large job that
results in a file greater than 2GB, the scan fails. As a workaround, split large scan jobs into
smaller batches.
Split Mode
When using Split mode settings with Remote Scan, you may find that Remote Scan never
completes the scan. To complete a scan job, push the # key on the copier display panel.
Page 17
Image Mode settings
The following table replaces the table provided in the “Scanning from the copier control
panel” section in Utilities on the User Documentation CD.
Copier control panel scan
Item name
Selection
Image mode
Black and White
Grayscale
Text
Remote Scan
Color mode
Image mode
Black and White
Text
Image
Image
Text/Image
Text/Image
Text (OCR)
Text (OCR)
Grayscale
Grayscale
Text
Image
Text/Image
Color
Image
Text/Image
Color
Image
Text/Image
Text
Network Setup
DNS settings
DNS settings set from Command WorkStation Setup or WebTools Configure are not valid.
Set DNS settings from Run Setup on the copier display panel.
Notes de mise à jour
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, version 1.0
Ce document contient des informations concernant la version 1.0 du logiciel
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000.
R EMARQUE : Dans ce document, le terme E-5000/E-3000 désigne le Color Controller
E-5000/E-3000. Le terme copieur désigne le copieur proprement dit.
Impression
Noms de fichier longs avec PCL5c
Si vous imprimez un document PCL5c dont le nom de fichier est long, il est possible que
le nom soit imprimé sur une page supplémentaire.
Jeux de finition sur supports mixtes et insertion d’une page vierge
Si vous définissez des jeux de finition pour chaque chapitre dans une tâche agrafée sur
supports mixtes et si vous insérez ensuite une page vierge avant chaque chapitre sélectionné,
la tâche s’imprime avec des paramètres d’agrafage incorrects. N’utilisez pas « Définir chaque
chapitre comme une section de finition séparée » et « Insérer une page vierge » en
même temps.
Mise à jour des options installées dans le pilote d’imprimante Windows 2000/XP
La liste Options installées ne se met pas à jour correctement dans le pilote d’imprimante
Windows 2000/XP si vous sélectionnez « Mettre à jour Fiery Driver à chaque ouverture ».
Pour afficher correctement les options installées dans le pilote d’imprimante, cliquez sur
Mise à jour en plus de sélectionner « Mettre à jour Fiery Driver à chaque ouverture » dans
le pilote d’imprimante.
Lissage de l’image
Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option Imprimante par défaut pour la fonction de Lissage
de l’image, le résultat est le même que lorsque le Lissage de l’image est réglé sur Non.
Message d’erreur indiquant un trop grand nombre de tâches en traitement
Lorsque le nombre de tâches en traitement dans la file de l’E-5000/E-3000 s’approche
de la limite maximale de 2 500, celui-ci n’accepte plus de nouvelle tâche et un message
d’erreur s’affiche.
Impression de fichiers volumineux
Pour imprimer des fichiers dont la taille est supérieure à 4 Go, imprimez des plages de pages,
afin de fractionner la tâche en plusieurs fichiers de moins de 2 Go.
Copyright 2006 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
Référence : 45058080
30 novembre 2006
Page 20
Tâches FreeForm avec l’option Serveur de documents
Pour envoyer une tâche FreeForm à un serveur de documents sur l’E-5000/E-3000, vous
devez sélectionner Serveur de documents avant de créer la maquette FreeForm. Sinon, la tâche
ne s’imprime pas et une erreur est indiquée dans le journal des tâches.
Serveur de documents
Vous ne pouvez pas stocker les documents au format 12" x 18" et ceux de format personnalisé
à l’aide du Serveur de documents.
EFI Impose sur le Serveur de documents
Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une tâche imposée dans le Serveur de documents, qui ne prend
pas en charge Impose.
Impression sur le Serveur de documents
Le paramètre par défaut de l’option Qualité d’impression est Très fin. Lorsque vous envoyez
des données à imprimer sur le Serveur de documents, l’utilisation de ce paramètre par défaut
nécessite un espace disque important. Nous vous conseillons de sélectionner plutôt le
paramètre Fin ou Gros. Les paramètres de l’option Qualité d’impression sont les suivants :
• Très fin : Occupe une grande quantité d’espace disque
• Fin : Occupe une quantité moyenne d’espace disque
• Gros : Occupe un faible espace disque
Impression de lignes fines
Les lignes fines d’un document peuvent ne pas s’imprimer, paraître irrégulières ou ne pas avoir
l’aspect attendu. Si ce problème se présente, sélectionnez Texte pour l’option Diffusion, dans
l’onglet Image du pilote d’imprimante.
Redémarrage du système lorsqu’une impression est en cours
Si vous essayez de redémarrer le système alors que l’E-5000/E-3000 est en train d’imprimer,
vous risquez d’obtenir des résultats inattendus. Attendez toujours que l’afficheur indique Au
repos avant de redémarrer le système.
Décalage image
Le Décalage image est incompatible avec la mise en page N poses.
Agrafage et formats mixtes
L’agrafage de papiers de formats mixtes est uniquement pris en charge avec le SR3020/
SR3030 pour l’E-5000. Si vous utilisez ce paramètre avec d’autres modules de finition, des
résultats inattendus peuvent se produire.
Page 21
Imprimantes virtuelles
Lorsque vous ouvrez les propriétés d’une tâche pour une imprimante virtuelle, les paramètres
de supports mixtes ne s’affichent pas correctement. Pour confirmer ou modifier les paramètres
de supports mixtes, utilisez la Command WorkStation. Si la fenêtre Propriétés de la tâche
d’une Imprimante virtuelle est accidentellement ouverte à partir de la boîte de dialogue
Imprimantes virtuelles, appuyez sur Annuler pour fermer la fenêtre. N’appuyez pas sur OK.
Création de
brochures
Impression de brochures au format Nobi
Avec l’option Création de brochures, une tâche imposée ne s’imprime pas correctement sur
un papier au format personnalisé Nobi. Les formats papier personnalisés ne sont pas pris
en charge. Vous devez sélectionner un format de papier disponible pour ce type de tâche
d’impression.
Impression de brochures standard avec mise en page N poses
L’impression de brochures standard n’est pas possible avec la mise en page N poses.
Imposition
Si vous spécifiez des Supports mixtes pour créer des brochures (options Piqûre à cheval,
Parfaite, Impression double et Impression rapide), le résultat à l’impression peut être
inattendu. L’agrafage ou la perforation des brochures risquent d’être incorrects. Les paramètres
Création de brochures et 2 au centre peuvent être définis séparément. Pour obtenir une
brochure agrafée à partir d’un document imposé dans l’application, sélectionnez uniquement
le paramètre 2 au centre pour l’option Agrafage.
Données paysage en impression recto verso avec les paramètres d’impression
double/rapide
Lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Recto-verso alors que l’impression double/rapide a été
choisie pour des données en orientation paysage, le sens de reliure de la tâche sera à l’opposé
de ce que vous avez sélectionné. Par exemple :
• Avec « Ouverture en haut », la tâche s’imprimera en « Ouverture à gauche ».
• Avec « Ouverture à gauche », la tâche s’imprimera en « Ouverture en haut ».
Pour l’Impression double, vous pouvez résoudre ce problème en utilisant l’option Ignorer
l’orientation dans l’onglet Mise en page du pilote d’imprimante.
Page 22
Limites de l’option Création de brochures
Les limites de l’option Création de brochures sont les suivantes :
• Si des pages vierges sont insérées dans une tâche suite à un paramétrage de l’option
Création de brochures, ces pages vierges sont décomptées comme des pages noir et blanc
imprimées.
• Les options Echelle, Adapter au format ou Ajuster au format d’impression (dans l’onglet
Mise en page) ne sont pas applicables si l’on utilise les paramètres de Création de
brochures.
• Si vous sélectionnez Impression rapide pour la Création de brochures, les paramètres de
couverture de brochures ne sont pas disponibles.
• Les paramètres de Création de brochures ne peuvent pas être spécifiés pour un fichier
Adobe PDF avec paramètres de sécurité.
• Avec les paramètres de Création de brochures, l’option Suppr. arrière-plan blanc dans PPT
de l’onglet Impression variable ne peut pas être sélectionnée.
• Si vous imprimez une tâche volumineuse avec le paramètre d’impression double de
l’option Création de brochures, il est possible que l’impression prenne du temps.
• Lorsque vous imprimez un grand nombre de documents avec la fonction de Création de
brochures, l’impression peut prendre un certain temps.
Limites de la connexion Direct
Les tâches ou informations liées à une tâche, envoyées vers la connexion Direct ne sont pas
enregistrées sur le disque dur. Avec cette connexion, les tâches ou les pages rastérisées ne
peuvent pas être enregistrées. Par conséquent, toute opération nécessitant un accès au disque
est impossible. Ces opérations sont les suivantes :
• Spoulage de tâches PDF
Les tâches PDF doivent être enregistrées sur le disque, car l’interpréteur a besoin d’un accès
aléatoire au fichier. La plupart des tâches PDF ne peuvent pas être traitées sous forme de
flux de données, comme PostScript. Les tâches PDF envoyées sur la connexion Direct
depuis la Command WorkStation ou le pilote d’imprimante sont redirigées vers la queue
Impression. Les tâches PDF envoyées depuis LPR provoquent une erreur.
• Impression sur la connexion Direct de tâches VDP
Les tâches VDP envoyées sur la connexion Direct sont redirigées vers la queue Impression.
(Pour plus d’informations, voir Impression de données variables sur le CD Documentation
Utilisateur.)
• Impression en ordre inversé de tâches volumineuses
L’impression en ordre inversé implique que la tâche soit intégralement rippée avant son
impression. Si elle dépasse la capacité mémoire, la tâche s’imprime toujours (en ordre
inversé), mais les pages sont enregistrées sur le disque.
Page 23
• Assemblage de tâches volumineuses
L’assemblage n’est pas pris en charge pour les mêmes raisons que l’impression en ordre
inversé. Veuillez noter que l’Assemblage est désactivé pour les tâches imprimées sur la
connexion Direct.
• Tâches FreeForm, y compris les options PPD suivantes :
– Création de brochures
– Activer surimpression
– Enregist. réimpression rapide
– Ordre des pages
– Recto verso
– Assembler
– Créer maquette
– Utiliser maquette
WebTools
Création de boîtes
Vous devez inclure le nom de domaine de l’utilisateur lorsque vous créez une boîte à partir
de Configure avec LDAP et la Liste des adresses globales. Si vous n’ajoutez pas le nom de
domaine de l’utilisateur (par exemple, <Nom de domaine>/:<Utilisateur>), l’E-5000/E-3000
ne reconnaît pas le nom de la boîte.
Protocole SLP
Vous ne pouvez pas configurer le protocole SLP (Service Location Protocol) à partir du
WebTool Configure. Pour résoudre ce problème, configurez SLP à partir de l’afficheur
du copieur.
Boîte de dialogue de contrat de licence utilisateur
Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à PrintMe avec le WebTool Configure, une
boîte de dialogue de contrat de licence utilisateur vide apparaît. Ignorez cette boîte de
dialogue en cliquant sur Annuler.
Téléchargements du Web
Lorsque vous téléchargez un logiciel Windows, il est possible que le nom du logiciel ne
s’affiche pas correctement si la langue diffère de la configuration de langue actuelle de
l’E-5000/E-3000. Dans ce cas, installez le logiciel requis à partir du CD User Software
(PS Printer Drivers) ou du CD User Software (Utilities).
Internet Explorer 7
Si vous utilisez les Web Tools sur Internet Explorer 7, il est possible que vous soyez forcé de
quitter Internet Explorer.
Page 24
Aide
Fichiers d’aide
Les fichiers d’aide des utilitaires Fiery ont été programmés pour fonctionner avec Microsoft
Internet Explorer version 5.5 ou ultérieure. Si vous utilisez d’autres navigateurs, tels que
Safari, ou des versions antérieures d’Internet Explorer, l’aide risque de ne pas s’afficher
correctement.
Si vous utilisez Microsoft Internet Explorer sur un ordinateur Windows XP avec le Service
Pack 2, les fichiers d’aide risquent de ne pas s’afficher du tout ou de ne pas s’afficher
correctement dans les cas suivants :
• Si votre navigateur bloque les fenêtres publicitaires intempestives, il risque de bloquer
également les fichiers d’aide. Si cela se produit, désactivez provisoirement le blocage des
fenêtres publicitaires intempestives.
• Si l’option de notification des erreurs de scripts est activée dans l’onglet Avancé des
Options Internet de votre navigateur, une fenêtre d’avertissement risque de s’afficher avant
la page du fichier d’aide. Pour éviter ce problème, désactivez l’option « Afficher une
notification de chaque erreur de script » dans l’onglet Avancé de la boîte de dialogue
Options Internet.
• Un message d’avertissement peut également s’afficher dans la barre d’état, mais le contenu
du fichier d’aide n’en est pas affecté.
Safari
Si vous utilisez Safari sur un système Mac OS X, les fichiers d’aide risquent de ne pas s’afficher
du tout ou de ne pas s’afficher correctement dans les cas suivants :
• Lorsque vous lancez l’aide de Hot Folders dans Safari sur un ordinateur Mac OS X, les
fichiers d’aide risquent de ne pas se charger correctement et le message « Loading data... »
(Chargement des données…) peut s’afficher, sans résultat. Dans ce cas, quittez Safari et
relancez les fichiers d’aide. Si le problème persiste, utilisez Internet Explorer version 5.5
ou ultérieure.
• Si vous utilisez Safari sur un ordinateur Mac OS X et déplacez le curseur vers un élément
dans l’aide de la Command WorkStation, une ligne de cadre peut apparaître sur la gauche
de l’image.
• Si vous utilisez Safari 1.2 ou 1.3 sur un ordinateur Mac OS X 10.3.x, le texte « Next »
(Suivant), « Previous » (Précédent) et « Show in Contents » (Afficher dans la table des
matières) s’affiche dans la première sous-fenêtre d’aide de la Command WorkStation,
ce qui est incorrect. Dans ce cas, utilisez Mac OS X 10.4.5 avec Safari 2.0.3, ou Internet
Explorer version 5.5 ou ultérieure.
Page 25
Windows
Affichage de l’onglet Accessoires
Si les propriétés du pilote de l’E-5000/E-3000 ne s’affichent pas correctement, réduisez la
résolution et la qualité des couleurs à l’aide des paramètres d’affichage dans le Panneau de
configuration\Affichage sous Windows.
Enregistrement des formats papier personnalisés
Sous Windows, le pilote d’imprimante de l’E-5000/E-3000 ne prend pas en charge les
formats de page personnalisés pour la création de modèles à utiliser ultérieurement.
Mac OS X
Décalage de l’image lors d’une impression recto verso
Lorsque vous combinez des paramètres de décalage de l’image et de recto verso pour une tâche
de plus de deux pages, l’image de la troisième page risque d’apparaître déformée. Cela est dû
au pilote d’imprimante Mac OS X et il n’existe pas de solution à ce problème pour l’instant.
Type de papier Epais 1 et Epais 2 avec l’agrafage
Vous pouvez sélectionner les types de support Epais 1 et Epais 2 lorsque la fonction Agrafage
est sélectionnée dans le pilote d’imprimante Mac OS X. Cependant, cette combinaison
d’options d’impression n’est pas prise en charge.
Enregistrement de fichiers PDF ou PS
Lorsque vous combinez des paramètres de décalage de l’image et de recto verso et que vous
enregistrez le fichier au format PDF ou PostScript (PS), la tâche s’imprime en recto
uniquement et sans tenir compte de l’option Décalage image. En revanche, si vous imprimez
avec les paramètres du pilote sans enregistrer le fichier au format PS ou PDF, la tâche
s’imprime avec les bonnes options d’impression.
Page 26
Résolution des conflits entre options d’impression dans le pilote
d’imprimante Mac OS X v10.4
Lorsque vous modifiez les options d’impression dans le pilote d’imprimante Mac OS X v10.4,
notamment dans la sous-fenêtre Fonctions d’imprimante, les conflits entre options ne sont pas
résolus correctement.
Par exemple, pour pouvoir sélectionner un paramètre pour l’option d’impression Création de
brochures, vous devez auparavant activer l’option d’impression Recto verso. Les paramètres de
l’option Création de brochures dépendent de l’option Recto verso.
Dans les versions antérieures de Mac OS, les conflits entre options d’impression étaient
automatiquement corrigés. Pour résoudre les conflits entre options d’impression dans la sousfenêtre Fonctions d’imprimante, procédez comme suit :
POUR RÉSOUDRE LES CONFLITS ENTRE OPTIONS D’IMPRESSION DANS LA SOUS-FENÊTRE
FONCTIONS D’IMPRIMANTE
1 Sélectionnez une autre sous-fenêtre.
Par exemple, si vous vous trouviez dans la sous-fenêtre Fonctions d’imprimante, sélectionnez
la sous-fenêtre Résumé.
Une fois que vous avez actualisé la sous-fenêtre Fonctions d’imprimante, vous pouvez
constater que les options d’impression affichées ne correspondent pas au groupe de Modèles
de réglages sélectionné. Par exemple, si le dernier modèle de réglages que vous avez modifié
était Image 1, il s’affiche avec les options d’impression du premier groupe de Modèles de
réglages, à savoir Finition 1.
2 Sélectionnez à nouveau le groupe de Modèles de réglages (par exemple, Image 1) afin
d’actualiser les options d’impression affichées.
3 Sélectionnez les options d’impression appropriées et imprimez la tâche.
Page 27
Contraintes relatives à l’impression
Les options d’impression non prises en charge apparaissent grisées dans le pilote d’imprimante
Mac OS X. Pour imprimer depuis Mac OS X, reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous.
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Finition 2
Perforations
2 trous
Perforation = Gauche, Droite, Haute
3 trous
Perforation = Gauche, Droite, Haute
4 trous
Perforation = Gauche, Droite, Haute
4 trous groupés
Perforation = Gauche, Droite, Haute
Infos sur la tâche
Serveur de documents
Oui
Assembler = Non
Mise en page 1
Création de brochures
Piqûre à cheval
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Piqûre à cheval
(à droite)
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Parfaite
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Parfaite (à droite)
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Sélection automatique
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Mise en page 2
Source couverture brochure
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Passe-copie
Recto-verso = Non
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Bac1
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Bac2
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Page 28
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Mise en page 2 (suite)
Source couverture brochure
(suite)
Bac3
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Bac4
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Bac3 (LCT)
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Mode couv. dessus
de brochure
Imprimer le recto
uniquement
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Imprimer le verso
uniquement
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Imprimer recto et verso
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Page 29
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Mise en page 2 (suite)
Mode couv. dessus
de brochure (suite)
Vierge
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Mode couv. dessous
de brochure
Imprimer le recto
uniquement
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Imprimer le verso
uniquement
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Imprimer recto et verso
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Vierge
Recto-verso = Non ou Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Impression groupée Double
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Réglage du centrage
X Bas
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite), Parfaite ou Parfaite (à droite)
Compensation
du renflement
Normal
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval, Piqûre à
cheval (à droite)
Epais
Recto-verso = Ouverture à gauche
Création de brochures = Piqûre à cheval ou
Piqûre à cheval (à droite)
Page 30
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Support 1
Support
Etiquettes
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Transparent
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Epais 3
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Normal
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Recyclé
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Couleur
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Spécial1
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Spécial2
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Spécial3
Entrée 1re page = Oui
En-tête
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Etiquettes
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac d’entrée 1ère page = Passe-copie
Cartes
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Machine
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Préimprimé
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Support 2
Support 1re page
Page 31
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Support 2 (suite)
Support 1re page (suite)
Transparent
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac d’entrée 1re page = Passe-copie
Fin
Bac d’entrée 1re page = Oui
Semi-épais
Bac d’entrée 1re page = Oui
Epais 1
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Epais 2
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Epais 3
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac d’entrée 1re page = Passe-copie
Passe-copie
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac1
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac2
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac3
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac4
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Bac3 (LCT)
Entrée 1re page = Oui
Vierge
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Imprimé
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Bac d’entrée 1ère page
Intercalaire
Page 32
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Support 2 (suite)
Support intercalaires
Normal
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Recyclé
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Couleur
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Spécial1
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Spécial2
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Spécial3
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
En-tête
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Etiquettes
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire = Passe-copie
Cartes
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire = Sélection automatique
Machine
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire = Sélection automatique
Préimprimé
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire = Sélection automatique
Page 33
Catégorie
Option
Contrainte
Solution
Support 2 (suite)
Support intercalaires (suite)
Transparent
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire = Passe-copie
Fin
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Semi-épais
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Epais 1
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Epais 2
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Epais 3
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire = Passe-copie
Passe-copie
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac1
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac2
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac3
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac4
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac3 (LCT)
Alimentation = Passe-copie
Type Papier = Transparent
Intercalaire = Vierge ou Imprimé
Bac d’entrée intercalaire
Page 34
Hot Folders v2.x sous Mac OS 10.4.x
Les formats de fichiers envoyés à l’application Hot Folders v2.x installée sur un ordinateur
Mac OS 10.4.x local ou sur un emplacement réseau risquent de ne pas être reconnus, même si
ces fichiers sont corrects et valides. Cela se produit généralement si les fichiers se trouvent dans
un dossier réseau accessible via le protocole AFP (Apple Filing Protocol). Cela ne se produit pas
s’ils se trouvent dans un dossier réseau accessible via SMB.
Pour éviter ce problème, attribuez un droit d’accès en lecture et écriture ou en lecture seule à
tous les fichiers Hot Folders.
• Si vos fichiers sont sur le réseau, déplacez-les sur votre ordinateur local, modifiez les droits
d’accès, puis soumettez les à nouveau à Hot Folders.
Si vous travaillez sur un ordinateur Mac OS, vous devez d’abord déverrouiller et modifier
les droits d’accès. Enregistrez les nouveaux attributs de fichiers comme étant déverrouillés
ou rétablissez l’état verrouillé du fichier, puis enregistrez les attributs.
• Si vos fichiers sont enregistrés sur votre ordinateur local, examinez et modifiez leurs droits
d’accès si besoin, puis soumettez à nouveau les fichiers à l’application Hot Folders.
Remote Scan versions 5.3 et 5.4 sous Mac OS X
Pour quitter Remote Scan versions 5.3 et 5.4 sur un ordinateur Mac OS X, fermez la fenêtre
de l’application Remote Scan à l’aide de la souris. Vous ne pouvez pas sortir de l’application à
l’aide du menu principal ou en appuyant sur Commande+Q.
Finition sur Mac OS X
Quelle que soit la combinaison des paramètres d’Agrafage et de Recto verso pour une tâche
imprimée depuis un poste Mac OS X, la position d’agrafage et le sens recto verso de la sortie
risquent de ne pas être corrects. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction de modification d’orientation
de l’E-5000/E-3000 pour spécifier le sens correct de l’image.
Impression d’un format personnalisé
Le format personnalisé maximal est le suivant :
• Pouces : 12 x 23,62"
• Millimètres : 304,9 x 599,9 mm
Impression sous Mac OS
Lorsque vous imprimez à partir d’une application en cliquant sur le bouton Imprimer, les
options d’impression ne sont pas affichées. Vous devez choisir Imprimer dans le menu Fichier.
Page 35
Command
WorkStation
Annulation de plusieurs tâches
Lorsque vous annulez plusieurs tâches avec la Command WorkStation, le processus
d’annulation peut prendre plus de temps que prévu.
De même, lorsque vous annulez des tâches en brochure ou comportant un grand nombre
de pages, le processus peut prendre plus de temps que prévu.
Prévisualisation pendant le traitement
Le temps d’annulation d’une tâche ou pour la faire passer de Tâches actives à Tâches
imprimées dans la Command WorkStation peut prendre plus de temps que prévu lorsque
la fonction de Prévisualisation pendant le traitement est activée dans la configuration de
l’E-5000/E-3000.
Adobe PageMaker
Lorsque les propriétés d’une tâche imprimée avec le fichier PPD d’Adobe PageMaker sont
ouvertes dans la Command WorkStation, il est possible qu’une valeur définie ne s’affiche
pas correctement.
Groupes d’impression
Bien qu’elle soit décrite dans l’aide de la Command WorkStation, la fonction Groupes
d’impression n’est pas prise en charge. Cette fonction a été remplacée par fonction
d’authentification des utilisateurs, définie dans le pilote d’imprimante si cela a été activé
dans la configuration de l’E-5000/E-3000. Pour plus d’informations sur l’authentification
utilisateur, voir Configuration et installation et Options d’impression.
Sauvegarde et restauration de polices
Avec la Command WorkStation, vous pouvez sauvegarder et restaurer des polices.
Cette fonction est décrite incorrectement dans l’aide de la Command WorkStation.
Avant de procéder à la sauvegarde ou à la restauration de polices, suivez les instructions
ci-dessous :
• Sauvegardez et restaurez uniquement les polices PostScript.
• Toutes les polices sont archivées ou restaurées. Il n’est pas possible de sélectionner des
polices individuellement.
• Ne sauvegardez pas les polices sur un disque dur interne contenant également le logiciel
système de l’E-5000/E-3000.
• Ne restaurez les polices que sur l’E-5000/E-3000 à partir duquel elles ont été sauvegardées.
Page 36
POUR SAUVEGARDER ET RESTAURER DES POLICES
1 Lancez la Command WorkStation et ouvrez une session en tant qu’Administrateur.
2 Choisissez Gérer les polices dans le menu Serveur.
3 Cliquez sur Sauvegarder ou Restaurer.
4 Dans la fenêtre qui apparaît, accédez au dossier dans lequel vous souhaitez sauvegarder
ou restaurer les polices.
5 Cliquez sur OK.
Surimpression composite
Si vous sélectionnez une tâche bichrome dans la Command WorkStation et que vous
choisissez l’option Surimpression composite puis traitez et mettez la tâche en attente, la partie
bichrome de la tâche apparaît incorrectement si vous affichez la tâche à l’aide d’ImageViewer.
ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools connecté à une version espagnole de l’E-5000/E-3000
Si vous lancez ColorWise Pro Tools et vous connectez à un E-5000/E-3000 espagnol à
partir d’un ordinateur Mac OS X, certains éléments de menu s’affichent en français au lieu
d’apparaître en espagnol.
Connexions
externes
Connexion d’un périphérique USB
Fax Internet
Pas de message d’erreur pour les résolutions non prises en charge
L’E-5000/E-3000 risque de ne pas revenir à l’état Au repos après l’insertion du périphérique
USB. Cela peut se produire lorsque le périphérique USB a été formaté sous Windows ;
l’E-5000/E-3000 tente alors parfois de le désactiver. Dans ce cas, effacez le premier
secteur sans formater le périphérique.
Lorsque vous envoyez un fax Internet avec une résolution de 100 ou 600 dpi (dots per inch,
ou points par pouce), le logiciel de numérisation ne vous prévient pas que ces résolutions ne
sont pas prises en charge. Les résolutions de numérisation actuellement prises en charge sont
les suivantes : 200 dpi, 300 dpi et 400 dpi.
Page 37
Remote Scan
Limites du format de numérisation
La taille du fichier d’une tâche numérisée est limitée à 2 Go. Si vous numérisez une tâche
volumineuse dont la taille de fichier dépassera 2 Go, l’opération échouera. Pour éviter ce
problème, fractionnez les tâches volumineuses en plus petits lots.
Mode de fractionnement
Lorsque vous utilisez les paramètres du mode de fractionnement avec Remote Scan, il est
possible que la numérisation n’aboutisse pas. Pour terminer la numérisation, appuyez sur
la touche # de l’afficheur du copieur.
Paramètres du Mode image
Le tableau suivant remplace celui fourni dans la section Numérisation à partir du panneau
de commande du copieur dans Utilitaires sur le CD Documentation Utilisateur.
Numérisation à partir du panneau
de commande du copieur
Nom de
rubrique
Sélection
Mode image
Noir et blanc
Niveaux de gris
Texte
Remote Scan
Mode couleur
Mode image
Noir et blanc
Texte
Image
Image
Texte/Image
Texte/Image
Texte (OCR)
Texte (OCR)
Niveaux de gris
Niveaux de gris
Texte
Image
Texte/Image
Couleur
Image
Texte/Image
Couleur
Image
Texte/Image
Texte
Configuration
réseau
Paramètres DNS
Les paramètres DNS définis dans la Configuration de la Command WorkStation ou dans le
WebTool Configure ne sont pas valides. Vous devez définir les paramètres DNS à l’aide de la
fonction Configurer sur l’afficheur du copieur.
Note di release
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, versione 1.0
Questo documento contiene informazioni relative al software di Color Controller E-5000/
E-3000 versione 1.0.
N OTA : In questo documento viene utilizzato il termine “E-5000/E-3000” per fare
riferimento a Color Controller E-5000/E-3000. Il termine “fotocopiatrice” viene usato
per fare riferimento all’unità principale della fotocopiatrice.
Stampa
Nomi dei file lunghi con PCL5c
Se si stampa un documento PCL5c con un nome file lungo, tale nome potrebbe essere
stampato su un’altra pagina.
Gruppi di finitura in Supporti misti con Inserisci pagina vuota
Se si specificano dei gruppi di finitura per ciascun capitolo in un lavoro per il quale si
utilizzano la funzione di graffatura e l’opzione Supporti misti e poi si inserisce una pagina
vuota prima di ogni capitolo selezionato, la graffatura applicata al lavoro non sarà corretta.
Non usare contemporaneamente le opzioni “Definisci ciascun capitolo come gruppo di
finitura separato” e “Inserisci pagina vuota”.
Aggiornamento delle opzioni installate nel driver di stampa per Windows 2000/XP
L’elenco Opzioni installate non si aggiorna correttamente nel driver di stampa per
Windows 2000/XP se si seleziona l’opzione “Aggiorna Fiery Driver all’apertura”. Per
visualizzare correttamente l’elenco Opzioni installate nel driver di stampa, fare clic su
Aggiorna oltre a selezionare l’opzione “Aggiorna Fiery Driver all’apertura” nel driver
di stampa.
Ottimizza immagine
Quando si imposta l’opzione Ottimizza immagine su Valore predefinito della stampante,
è come se si impostasse l’opzione su “No”.
Troppi lavori in elaborazione nella coda
Se il numero di lavori in elaborazione nella coda di E-5000/E-3000 ha quasi raggiunto il
massimo consentito di 2500, E-5000/E-3000 non accetterà altri lavori e verrà visualizzato
un messaggio di errore.
Stampa di file di grandi dimensioni
Stampare i file con dimensioni superiori a 4 GB in intervalli di pagine, in modo tale che il
lavoro sia diviso in più file, ciascuno di dimensioni inferiori o uguali a 2 GB.
Copyright 2006 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
Numero parte: 45058080
30 novembre 2006
Pagina 40
Lavori FreeForm con l’impostazione Server documenti
Per inviare un lavoro FreeForm con l’impostazione Server documenti su E-5000/E-3000, è
necessario selezionare tale impostazione prima di creare il master FreeForm. In caso contrario,
il lavoro non verrà stampato e verrà visualizzato un errore nel job log.
Server documenti
Non è possibile memorizzare documenti con formato 12" x 18" o con un formato
personalizzato usando l’impostazione Server documenti.
EFI Impose sul Server documenti
Non è possibile salvare un lavoro di cui è stata eseguita l’imposizione nel Server documenti.
Il Server documenti non supporta Impose.
Stampa sul Server documenti
L’impostazione predefinita per Qualità di stampa è Superfine. Quando si inviano dei dati in
stampa al Server documenti, l’impostazione Superfine comporta l’utilizzo di molto spazio sul
disco fisso. È consigliabile scegliere le impostazioni Fine o A grana grossa. Le impostazioni
disponibili per l’opzione Qualità di stampa sono le seguenti:
• Superfine: richiede molto spazio su disco
• Fine: richiede uno spazio su disco di medie dimensioni
• A grana grossa: richiede poco spazio su disco
Stampa di linee sottili
All’interno di un documento, le linee sottili possono non essere stampate, essere irregolari o
presentare risultati differenti rispetto a quelli previsti. Se si verifica tale problema, selezionare
l’impostazione Testo per l’opzione Retinatura nella scheda Qualità immagine del driver di
stampa.
Riavvio del sistema durante la stampa
Se si riavvia il sistema mentre E-5000/E-3000 sta stampando, potrebbero verificarsi dei
risultati imprevisti. Attendere fino a quando sul display appare il messaggio In attesa prima
di riavviare il sistema.
Spostamento immagine
L’opzione Spostamento immagine non è valida se si utilizza l’impostazione Layout N pagine.
Graffatura di formati carta misti
La graffatura di formati carta misti è supportata solo su SR3020/SR3030 per E-5000.
Se si utilizza questa impostazione con altre unità di finitura, potrebbero verificarsi dei
risultati inattesi.
Pagina 41
Stampanti virtuali
Quando si accede alle proprietà del lavoro di una stampante virtuale, le impostazioni relative
a Supporti misti non vengono visualizzate in modo corretto. Per confermare o modificare le
impostazioni di Supporti misti, usare Command WorkStation. Se la finestra Proprietà del
lavoro di una stampante virtuale viene aperta per errore dalla finestra di dialogo Stampanti
virtuali, premere Annulla per chiudere la finestra di dialogo. Non premere OK.
Creazione booklet
Stampa in formato Nobi con l’opzione Creazione booklet
Quando è attivata l’opzione Creazione booklet, un lavoro impostato non viene stampato
correttamente su un formato pagina personalizzato Nobi. I formati pagina personalizzati non
sono supportati. È necessario selezionare un formato standard disponibile per questo tipo di
lavoro di stampa.
Stampa con l’impostazione Booklet standard con l’opzione Layout N pagine
La stampa con l’impostazione Booklet standard non è supportata con l’opzione Layout N
pagine.
Imposizione
Se si usa la funzione Supporti misti per lavori per i quali l’opzione Creazione booklet è
impostata su A sella, Senza cuciture, Stampa multipla-doppia stampa, Stampa multiplastampa veloce, si potrebbero verificare risultati di stampa imprevisti. La graffatura e la
perforazione dei lavori per cui è stata specificata l’opzione Creazione booklet potrebbero
non essere eseguite correttamente. L’opzione Creazione booklet e l’impostazione 2 al centro
possono essere impostate separatamente. Se si desidera che per il documento di cui si è
eseguita l’imposizione nell’applicazione sia eseguita la graffatura booklet, specificare solo
l’impostazione 2 al centro per l’opzione di stampa Graffa.
Stampa di lavori con orientamento orizzontale in fronte-retro e con l’impostazione
Stampa multipla-doppia stampa o Stampa multipla-stampa veloce
Quando si seleziona la stampa in fronte-retro con l’impostazione Stampa multipla-doppia
stampa/Stampa multipla-stampa veloce per i lavori con orientamento orizzontale, la legatura
dei lavori di stampa verrà eseguita sul lato opposto rispetto a quello specificato. Ad esempio:
• Se si è selezionato “Apertura verso l’alto”, il lavoro verrà stampato con l’impostazione
“Apertura verso sinistra”.
• Se si è selezionato “Apertura verso sinistra”, il lavoro verrà stampato con l’impostazione
“Apertura verso l’alto”.
Per ovviare al problema è possibile utilizzare l’opzione Cambia orientamento nella scheda
Disposizione del driver di stampa per l’impostazione Stampa multipla-doppia stampa.
Pagina 42
Restrizioni dell’opzione Creazione booklet
Le restrizioni dell’opzione Creazione booklet sono le seguenti:
• Quando vengono inserite delle pagine bianche in un lavoro a seguito delle scelte effettuate
durante l’impostazione dell’opzione Creazione Booklet, queste vengono contate come
pagine stampate in bianco e nero.
• Le opzioni Scala e Adatta alla pagina (nella barra delle opzioni Layout della finestra
Proprietà del lavoro) non sono disponibili se si usano le impostazioni per la creazione
Booklet per un lavoro.
• Se si seleziona l’impostazione Stampa multipla-stampa veloce per l’opzione Creazione
booklet, le impostazioni relative al modo copertina del booklet non sono disponibili.
• Le impostazioni per l’opzione Creazione booklet non possono essere specificate per un file
Adobe PDF con impostazioni per la sicurezza.
• Se si utilizzano delle impostazioni per la creazione del Booklet, l’opzione Rimuovi sfondo
bianco per PPT non può essere selezionata.
• Un lavoro di grandi dimensioni con l’impostazione Stampa multipla-doppia stampa per
l’opzione Creazione Booklet potrebbe impiegare molto tempo prima di essere stampato.
• Quando si invia in stampa un numero elevato di documenti con l’opzione Creazione
booklet, il tempo impiegato per la stampa potrebbe essere particolarmente lungo.
Restrizioni del collegamento diretto
I lavori o le informazioni relative ai lavori inviati al collegamento diretto non vengono salvati
sul disco fisso. Con il collegamento diretto, i lavori o i dati raster delle pagine non possono
essere salvati sul disco fisso. Pertanto non è possibile eseguire nessuna operazione che richieda
l’accesso al disco. Tali operazioni sono:
• L’invio in spool dei lavori in formato PDF
I lavori in formato PDF devono essere salvati su disco in quanto l’interprete dei comandi
deve potervi accedere. La maggior parte dei lavori PDF non può essere elaborata come
flusso di dati come accade per i lavori PostScript. I lavori in formato PDF inviati al
collegamento diretto da Command WorkStation o dal driver di stampa vengono
reindirizzati alla coda di stampa. I lavori in formato PDF inviati al collegamento diretto
tramite LPR non verranno stampati.
• La stampa di lavori con dati variabili sul collegamento diretto
I lavori con dati variabili inviati sul collegamento diretto vengono reindirizzati alla coda
di stampa. Per ulteriori informazioni, vedere il manuale Stampa di dati variabili sul CD
contenente la documentazione per gli utenti.
Pagina 43
• La stampa in ordine inverso per i lavori di grandi dimensioni
La stampa in ordine inverso richiede l’elaborazione (RIP) dell’intero lavoro prima della
stampa. Se la memoria per il lavoro non è sufficiente, il lavoro viene comunque stampato
(in ordine inverso) ma le pagine vengono salvate sul disco.
• La fascicolazione per i lavori di grandi dimensioni
L’opzione per la fascicolazione non è supportata per gli stessi motivi dell’opzione per la
stampa in ordine inverso. Si noti che l’opzione per la fascicolazione non è disponibile
per i lavori stampati sul collegamento diretto.
• I lavori FreeForm, incluse le seguenti opzioni del PPD:
– Creazione booklet
– Combina separazioni
– Salva ristampa veloce
– Ordine pagine
– Fronte-retro
– Fascicola in vassoio unico
– Crea master
– Usa master
WebTools
Creazione delle mailbox
È necessario includere il nome dominio dell’utente quando si crea una mailbox da Configura
con elenchi di indirizzi globali e LDAP. Se non si aggiunge il nome dominio dell’utente, ad
esempio <Nome dominio>/:<Utente>, E-5000/E-3000 non è in grado di riconoscere il nome
della mailbox.
Service Location Protocol
Non è possibile impostare il protocollo SLP (Service Location Protocol) dal WebTool
Configura. Per ovviare a questo problema, impostare il protocollo SLP dal pannello
della fotocopiatrice.
Finestra di dialogo EULA
Se non si è in grado di collegarsi a PrintMe con il WebTool Configura, viene visualizzata una
finestra di dialogo EULA vuota. Ignorare questa finestra di dialogo facendo clic su Annulla.
Pagina 44
Scaricamenti in WebTools
Quando si trasferisce il software di Windows, il nome corrispondente potrebbe non essere
visualizzato correttamente se la lingua non corrisponde a quella utilizzata per la configurazione
di E-5000/E-3000. In questo caso, installare il software richiesto dal CD Software utente (PS
Printer Drivers) o dal CD Software utente (Utilities).
Internet Explorer 7
Se si utilizza WebTools su Internet Explorer 7, potrebbe verificarsi un errore per cui è
necessario chiudere Internet Explorer.
Guida
File della Guida
I file della Guida per i programmi di utilità Fiery sono stati progettati per essere usati con
Microsoft Internet Explorer v5.5 e versioni successive. Se si usano altri browser, come Safari,
o versioni precedenti di Internet Explorer, la Guida potrebbe non essere visualizzata in modo
corretto.
Con Microsoft Internet Explorer su un computer Windows XP con Service Pack 2, i file della
Guida potrebbero non essere visualizzati correttamente o non essere visualizzati affatto nei
seguenti casi:
• Se il browser utilizza la funzione Blocco popup, questa potrebbe bloccare i file della Guida.
Se ciò si verifica, disattivare momentaneamente la funzione Blocco pop-up.
• Se sul browser sono abilitate le opzioni avanzate per Internet relative alla visualizzazione
delle notifiche degli errori di script, potrebbe apparire una finestra di avviso prima della
pagina dei file della Guida. Per evitare che venga visualizzata la finestra di avviso,
deselezionare l’opzione “Visualizza notifica di tutti gli errori di script” nella scheda
Avanzate nella finestra di dialogo Opzioni Internet.
• È anche possibile che appaia un messaggio di avviso nella barra di stato, ma questo tipo
di errore non influenza il contenuto dei file della Guida.
Pagina 45
Safari
Se si utilizza Safari su un sistema Mac OS X, i file della Guida potrebbero non essere
visualizzati correttamente o non essere visualizzati affatto nei seguenti casi:
• Quando si apre la Guida di Hot Folders con Safari su un computer Mac OS X, i file della
Guida potrebbero non essere caricati correttamente e potrebbe apparire un messaggio che
indica che il caricamento dei dati non è riuscito. In questo caso, chiudere Safari e aprire i
file della Guida. Se il problema persiste, utilizzare Internet Explorer v5.5 o versioni
successive.
• Se su utilizza Safari su un computer Mac OS X e si sposta il cursore su un elemento della
Guida di Command WorkStation, a sinistra dell’immagine potrebbe apparire una linea.
• Se si utilizza Safari v1.2 o v1.3 su un computer Mac OS X v10.3.x, il testo “Avanti”,
“Indietro” e “Contenuto” non viene visualizzato correttamente nel riquadro iniziale
della Guida di Command WorkStation. In questo caso, utilizzare Mac OS X v10.4.5 con
Safari v2.0.3 oppure Internet Explorer v5.5 o versioni successive.
Windows
Visualizzazione della scheda Accessori
Se la finestra delle proprietà di stampa di E-5000/E-3000 non viene visualizzata correttamente
nel driver di stampa, ridurre la risoluzione e la qualità dei colori nella finestra Pannello di
controllo\ Schermo di un computer Windows.
Salvataggio di formati carta personalizzati
I formati pagina personalizzati non sono supportati per la creazione di modelli per usi
successivi dal driver di stampa di E-5000/E-3000 per Windows.
Pagina 46
Mac OS X
Spostamento immagine con la stampa fronte-retro
Quando si usa l’opzione Spostamento immagine con le impostazioni per la stampa in
fronte-retro per un lavoro con più di due pagine, l’immagine sulla terza pagina potrebbe
risultare distorta. Questo errore viene causato dal driver di stampa per Mac OS X e al
momento non esiste alcuna soluzione.
Impostazioni Spessa 1 e Spessa 2 per Tipo di supporti con l’opzione Graffa
È possibile selezionare le impostazioni Spessa 1 e Spessa 2 per Tipo di supporti quando
l’opzione Graffa viene impostata dal driver di stampa per Mac OS X. Tuttavia, questa
combinazione non è supportata.
Salvataggio di file PDF o PS
Quando si usa l’opzione Spostamento immagine con le impostazioni per la stampa in
fronte-retro, si salva il file in formato PDF o PS (PostScript) e poi lo si stampa, il lavoro viene
stampato su un solo lato senza tener conto delle impostazioni dell’opzione Spostamento
immagine. Se si stampa selezionando le impostazioni dal driver senza salvare il file come
PS o PDF, il lavoro viene stampato con le impostazioni corrette.
Pagina 47
Risoluzione dei conflitti tra le opzioni di stampa nel driver di stampa per
Mac OS X v10.4
Quando si modificano le opzioni nel driver di stampa per Mac OS X v10.4 in Caratteristiche
stampante, i conflitti tra le diverse impostazioni non vengono risolti in modo appropriato.
Ad esempio, per selezionare un’impostazione per l’opzione Creazione booklet, è necessario
che sia attivata la stampa in fronte-retro affinché le opzioni di Creazione booklet risultino
disponibili. Le opzioni di Creazione booklet dipendono dall’impostazione per la stampa in
fronte-retro.
Nelle versioni precedenti di Mac OS, gli eventuali conflitti tra le opzioni di stampa venivano
corretti automaticamente. Per risolvere i conflitti tra opzioni di stampa nel menu
Caratteristiche stampante, procedere nel seguente modo.
PER RISOLVERE I CONFLITTI TRA OPZIONI DI STAMPA NEL MENU CARATTERISTICHE STAMPANTE
1 Selezionare un altro menu.
Ad esempio, se è visualizzato il menu Caratteristiche Stampante, selezionare Sommario.
Una volta aggiornata la visualizzazione del menu Caratteristiche stampante, si riscontra
un conflitto tra il gruppo di impostazioni selezionate e le opzioni di stampa visualizzate.
Ad esempio, se l’ultimo gruppo di impostazioni modificato era Immagine 1, ora viene
visualizzato il primo gruppo di impostazioni specificato, ad esempio Finitura 1.
2 Riselezionare il gruppo desiderato per Impostazioni caratteristiche (ad esempio,
Immagine 1) per aggiornare le opzioni di stampa visualizzate.
3 Selezionare le opzioni di stampa appropriate e stampare il lavoro.
Pagina 48
Restrizioni relative alla stampa
Le opzioni non supportate dal driver di stampa per Mac OS X appaiono ombreggiate.
Quando si stampa da Mac OS X, vedere la seguente tabella delle restrizioni di stampa.
Menu
Opzione
Restrizione
Soluzione
Finitura 2
Fori
Due
Perforazione = Sinistra, Destra, Superiore
Tre
Perforazione = Sinistra, Destra, Superiore
Quattro
Perforazione = Sinistra, Destra, Superiore
Quattro fori raggruppati
Perforazione = Sinistra, Destra, Superiore
Info lavoro
Server documenti
Sì
Fascicola in vassoio unico = No
Layout 1
Creazione booklet
A sella
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Senza cuciture
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Senza cuciture-rileg. lato dx
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Selezione automatica
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Layout 2
Alimentaz copertina booklet
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Cassetto Bypass
Fronte-retro = No
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Cassetto 1
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Cassetto 2
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Cassetto 3
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Pagina 49
Menu
Opzione
Restrizione
Soluzione
Layout 2
(continua)
Alimentaz copertina booklet
(continua)
Cassetto 4
Fronte-retro = No, Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Cassetto 3 (LCT)
Fronte-retro = No, Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Modo coper. anteriore
booklet
Stampa solo su fronte
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Stampa solo su retro
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Stampa entrambi i lati
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Vuota
Fronte-retro = No, Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Modo coper. posteriore
booklet
Stampa solo su fronte
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Stampa solo su retro
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Pagina 50
Menu
Opzione
Restrizione
Soluzione
Layout 2
(continua)
Modo coper. posteriore
booklet (continua)
Stampa entrambi i lati
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Vuota
Fronte-retro = No o Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = Stampa multipla-doppia stampa
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Supporti 1
Supporti 2
Regolazione centratura
Basso X
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella, A sella-rilegatura lato dx,
Senza cuciture o Senza cuciture-rileg. lato dx
Regolazione scorrimento
Normale
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Carta pesante
Fronte-retro = Apertura verso sinistra
Creazione booklet = A sella o A sella-rilegatura lato dx
Etichette
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Lucidi
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Spessa 3
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Normale
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Riciclata
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Colore
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Speciale 1
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Speciale 2
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Speciale 3
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Carta intestata
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Etichette
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto ins. prima pagina = Cassetto Bypass
Cartoncino
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Alta qualità
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Prestampata
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Tipo di supporti
Tipo supporto prima pagina
Pagina 51
Menu
Opzione
Restrizione
Soluzione
Supporti 2
(continua)
Tipo supporto prima pagina
(continua)
Lucidi
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto ins. prima pagina = Cassetto Bypass
Sottile
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Medio-spessa
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Spessa 1
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Spessa 2
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Spessa 3
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto ins. prima pagina = Cassetto Bypass
Cassetto Bypass
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto 1
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto 2
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto 3
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto 4
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Cassetto 3 (LCT)
Ins. Prima pagina = Sì
Vuoto
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Stampato
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Cassetto ins. prima pagina
Divisorio
Pagina 52
Menu
Opzione
Restrizione
Soluzione
Supporti 2
(continua)
Tipo supporto divisorio
Normale
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Riciclata
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Colore
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Speciale 1
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Speciale 2
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Speciale 3
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Carta intestata
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Etichette
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio = Cassetto Bypass
Cartoncino
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio = Selezione automatica
Alta qualità
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio = Selezione automatica
Prestampata
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio = Selezione automatica
Lucidi
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio = Cassetto Bypass
Pagina 53
Menu
Opzione
Restrizione
Soluzione
Supporti 2
(continua)
Tipo supporto divisorio
(continua)
Sottile
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Medio-spessa
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Spessa 1
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Spessa 2
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Spessa 3
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio = Cassetto Bypass
Cassetto Bypass
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto 1
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto 2
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto 3
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto 4
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto 3 (LCT)
Cassetto di alimentazione = Cassetto Bypass
Tipo di supporti = Lucidi
Divisorio = Vuoto o Stampato
Cassetto ins. divisorio
Pagina 54
Hot Folders v2.x su Mac OS 10.4.x
Hot Folders v2.x su un computer Mac OS 10.4.x locale o un’ubicazione di rete potrebbe non
riconoscere il formato dei file inviati anche se questo è corretto e valido. Ciò si verifica
comunemente se i file si trovano in una cartella di rete accessibile tramite AFP (Apple Filing
Protocol) e non si verifica se i file si trovano in una cartella di rete accessibile tramite SMB.
Per ovviare a questo problema, impostare tutti i file di Hot Folders inviati con le
autorizzazioni in “lettura e scrittura” o “lettura”.
• Se i file si trovano sulla rete, spostarli sul computer locale, modificare le autorizzazioni dei
file, quindi inviarli nuovamente a Hot Folders.
Se si usa un computer Mac OS, è necessario prima annullare la protezione e modificare le
autorizzazioni del file. Salvare il nuovo file come non protetto o proteggere nuovamente il
file e salvare gli attributi.
• Se i file si trovano sul computer locale, controllare e modificare le autorizzazioni del file in
base alle necessità, quindi inviare i file a Hot Folders.
Remote Scan versione 5.3 e 5.4 su Mac OS X
Per uscire da Remote Scan versione 5.3 e 5.4 su un computer Mac OS X, usare il mouse per
chiudere la finestra dell’applicazione Remote Scan. Non è possibile chiudere l’applicazione dal
menu principale o premendo Comando+Q.
Finitura su Mac OS X
Se si stampa un lavoro da un computer Mac OS X con una combinazione di impostazioni per
la stampa in fronte-retro e la graffatura, la posizione delle graffe e la direzione della stampa
fronte-retro potrebbero essere diverse da quelle previste. In tal caso, impostare la direzione
dell’immagine desiderata mediante l’opzione Cambia orientamento del driver di stampa di
E-5000/E-3000.
Stampa su un formato pagina personalizzato
Le dimensioni massime personalizzate sono impostate come segue:
• Pollici: 12" x 23.62"
• Millimetri: 304.9mm x 599.9 mm
Stampa su Mac OS
Se si stampa dall’applicazione facendo clic sul pulsante Stampa, le opzioni di stampa non
vengono visualizzate. Pertanto, è consigliabile stampare selezionando l’opzione Stampa dal
menu File (o Archivio).
Pagina 55
Command
WorkStation
Annullamento di più lavori
Quando si annullano più lavori con Command WorkStation, il processo di annullamento
potrebbe durare molto più tempo di quello previsto.
Allo stesso modo, quando si annullano i lavori con l’opzione Creazione booklet impostata
o con un numero elevato di pagine, il processo di annullamento potrebbe durare molto più
tempo di quello previsto.
Anteprima durante l’elaborazione
Il processo di annullamento potrebbe durare più tempo di quello previsto per annullare
un lavoro o spostarlo dalla finestra dei lavori attivi a quella dei lavori stampati in Command
WorkStation se l’opzione Anteprima durante l’elaborazione è stata attivata durante la
configurazione di E-5000/E-3000.
Adobe PageMaker
Quando le proprietà di un lavoro stampato con il PPD di Adobe PageMaker vengono
visualizzate in Command WorkStation, i valori potrebbero non essere visualizzati in modo
corretto.
Gruppi di stampa
La funzione Gruppi di stampa non è supportata, nonostante venga descritta nella Guida
di Command WorkStation. La funzione Gruppi di stampa è stata sostituita dall’opzione
Autenticazione utente, impostata nel driver di stampa, se abilitata durante la configurazione
di E-5000/E-3000. Per ulteriori informazioni sull’opzione Autenticazione utente, vedere i
manuali Configurazione e impostazione e Opzioni di stampa.
Backup e ripristino dei font
Con Command WorkStation, è possibile eseguire il backup e il ripristino dei font.
Questa funzione viene descritta erroneamente nella Guida di Command WorkStation.
Rispettare queste linee guida prima di eseguire il backup o il ripristino dei font:
• Eseguire il backup e il ripristino solo dei font PostScript.
• Le copie di backup vengono eseguite per tutti i font, così come il loro ripristino.
Non è possibile selezionare singoli font.
• Non eseguire il backup dei font su un’unità disco fisso interna che include anche il
software di sistema di E-5000/E-3000.
• Ripristinare i font solo sull’unità E-5000/E-3000 da cui era stata originariamente eseguita
la copia di backup.
Pagina 56
PER ESEGUIRE DELLE COPIE DI BACKUP DEI FONT O RIPRISTINARLI
1 Avviare Command WorkStation e collegarsi con i privilegi di amministratore.
2 Selezionare Gestione font (o Gestione caratteri) dal menu Server.
3 Fare clic su Esegui backup o Ripristina.
4 Nella finestra che appare, accedere alla cartella in cui si desidera eseguire il backup o il
ripristino dei font.
5 Fare clic su OK.
Sovrastampa composita
Se si seleziona un lavoro a due tonalità da Command WorkStation, si seleziona l’opzione
Sovrastampa composita e poi si elabora un lavoro e lo si mette in attesa, la parte a due tonalità
non viene visualizzata correttamente su ImageViewer.
ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools collegato ad un’unità E-5000/E-3000 spagnola
Se si avvia ColorWise Pro Tools e ci si collega ad un’unità E-5000/E-3000 spagnola da un
computer Mac OS X, alcuni elementi del menu vengono visualizzati in francese anziché
in spagnolo.
Collegamenti
esterni
Collegamento di un’unità USB
Internet Fax
Non appare alcun messaggio di errore quando la risoluzione non è supportata
E-5000/E-3000 potrebbe non tornare allo stato In attesa dopo che è stata inserita un’unità
USB. Questo problema può verificarsi quando l’unità USB è stata formattata in Windows e
di conseguenza E-5000/E-3000 tenta di riavviarsi dall’unità. In questo caso, eliminare i dati
dal primo settore senza formattare l’unità.
Quando si invia un lavoro Internet FAX con una risoluzione pari a 100 dpi o 600 dpi, il
software di scansione non visualizza alcun messaggio per indicare che queste risoluzioni
non sono supportate. Attualmente per la risoluzione sono supportati solo i valori 200 dpi,
300 dpi, 400 dpi.
Remote Scan
Restrizioni del formato di scansione
Il limite di formato dei file per i lavori di scansione è di 2 GB. Se si tenta di eseguire la
scansione di un lavoro con dimensioni superiori a 2 GB, la scansione non viene eseguita.
Per ovviare a questo problema, dividere i lavori di scansione in lotti di dimensioni minori.
Pagina 57
Modo divisione
Quando si imposta l’opzione Modo divisione con Remote Scan, è possibile che Remote Scan
non completi la scansione. Per completare un lavoro di scansione, premere il tasto # sul
pannello della fotocopiatrice.
Impostazioni di Modalità immagine
La seguente tabella sostituisce quella riportata nella sezione “Scansione dal pannello di
controllo” in Programmi di utilità sul CD contenente la documentazione per l’utente.
Scansione dal pannello di
controllo della fotocopiatrice
Nome
Selezione
Modalità immagine
Bianco e nero
Scala di grigi
Testo
Remote Scan
Modo colore
Modalità
immagine
Bianco e nero
Testo
Immagine
Immagine
Testo/immagine
Testo/immagine
Testo (OCR)
Testo (OCR)
Scala di grigi
Scala di grigi
Testo
Immagine
Testo/immagine
Colore
Immagine
Testo/immagine
Colore
Immagine
Testo/immagine
Testo
Configurazione
della rete
Impostazioni DNS
Le impostazioni DNS selezionate durante la configurazione di Command WorkStation
o dal WebTool Configura non sono valide. Modificare le impostazioni DNS dai menu di
configurazione del pannello della fotocopiatrice.
Release-Informationen
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, Version 1.0
Dieses Dokument enthält Hinweise zur Software Version 1.0 für den Color Controller
E-5000/E-3000.
H INWEIS : In diesem Dokument steht der Begriff „E-5000/E-3000“ für den Color
Controller E-5000/E-3000. Der Begriff „Kopierer“ bezieht sich auf die Haupteinheit
des Kopierers.
Drucken
Lange Dateinamen bei PCL5c
Wenn Sie mit dem PCL5c-Druckertreiber ein Dokument mit einem langen Dateinamen
drucken, kann es geschehen, dass der Name des Dokuments auf einem extra Blatt gedruckt
wird.
Finishing-Sets mit eingefügten Leerseiten
Wenn Sie mit der Funktion für gemischte Medien für einen zu heftenden Auftrag veranlassen,
dass jedes definierte Kapitel als separates Finishing-Set behandelt wird, und im Anschluss
daran vor jedem definierten Kapitel eine Leerseite einfügen, wird der Auftrag nicht in der
erwünschten Weise geheftet. Kombinieren Sie für einen Auftrag nie die Option „Jedes Kapitel
als separates Finishing-Set definieren“ mit der Option „Neuer Einleger / Leerseite einfügen“.
Aktualisieren der Optionen für installiertes Zubehör im Druckertreiber für
Windows 2000/XP
Wenn Sie im Druckertreiber für Windows 2000/XP die Option „Fiery Driver beim Öffnen
aktualisieren“ aktivieren, wird die Liste der installierten Optionen nicht richtig aktualisiert.
Damit die tatsächlich installierten Optionen im Druckertreiber richtig angezeigt werden,
müssen Sie nach dem Aktivieren der Option „Fiery Driver beim Öffnen aktualisieren“
zusätzlich auf „Aktualisieren“ klicken.
Bildglättung
Wenn Sie für die Druckoption „Bildglättung“ die Einstellung „Druckerstandard“ wählen,
entspricht dies der Festlegung „Bildglättung = Aus“.
Fehler wegen zu vieler zu verarbeitender Aufträge in Warteschlange
Wenn die Anzahl der zu verarbeitenden Aufträge in der Warteschlange des E-5000/E-3000
dem Maximum von 2.500 Aufträgen nahekommt, akzeptiert der E-5000/E-3000 keine
weiteren Aufträge mehr. In dieser Situation wird eine Fehlermeldung generiert.
Drucken großer Dateien
Ein Auftrag, der größer als 4 GB ist, kann nicht im Ganzen gedruckt werden. Sie müssen
einen solchen Auftrag in Seitenbereiche unterteilen und diese Seitenbereiche drucken,
wobei die so gebildeten Aufträge kleiner als 2 GB sein müssen.
Copyright 2006 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
Artikelnummer: 45058080
30. November 2006
Seite 60
FreeForm Aufträge und Dokumentenserver
Damit Sie einen FreeForm an die Komponente Dokumentenserver des E-5000/E-3000
senden können, müssen Sie die Option „Dokumentenserver“ aktivieren, bevor Sie die
FreeForm Master-Datei erstellen. Anderenfalls wird der betreffende Auftrag nicht gedruckt
und ein Fehler im Auftragsprotokoll vermerkt.
Dokumentenserver
Bei Verwendung des Dokumentenservers können Dokumente mit der Größe
„12 Inch x 18 Inch“ oder mit einer eigenen (benutzerdefinierten) Seitengröße
gespeichert werden.
EFI Impose und Dokumentenserver
Es ist nicht möglich, einen ausgeschossenen Auftrag auf dem Dokumentenserver zu
speichern. Der Dokumentenserver unterstützt das Ausschießen mit Impose nicht.
Drucken mit Dokumentenserver
Die Standardeinstellung für die Option „Qualitätsmodus“ ist „Extrafein“. Beim Senden
eines Dokuments an den Dokumentenserver führt die Einstellung „Extrafein“ dazu, dass ein
sehr großer Bereich auf der Festplatte benötigt wird. In bestimmten Situationen empfiehlt es
sich daher, anstelle von „Extrafein“ die Einstellung „Fein“ oder „Grob“ zu verwenden. Die
Einstellungen der Option „Qualitätsmodus“ wirken sich wie folgt aus:
• Extrafein: Sehr großer Festplattenbedarf
• Fein: Mittlerer Festplattenbedarf
• Grob: Geringer Festplattenbedarf
Drucken von Haarlinien
Es ist möglich, dass Haarlinien in einem Dokument überhaupt nicht oder stark gezackt
gedruckt werden oder dass das Druckergebnis in anderer Weise von der erwarteten Ausgabe
abweicht. Sie können dieses Problem beheben, wenn Sie auf der Seite „Bild“ des Druckertreibers für die Option „Aufrasterung“ die Einstellung „Text“ wählen.
Booten des Systems während laufender Druckausgabe
Wenn Sie versuchen, das System neu zu booten, solange der E-5000/E-3000 einen Auftrag
druckt, kann es zu unerwarteten Druckergebnissen kommen. Warten Sie stets, bis die Statusmeldung „Bereit“ erscheint, bevor Sie das erneute Booten des Systems veranlassen.
Seite 61
Bildoffset
Für einen Auftrag mit Mehrfachlayout (n-fach, mehrere Seiten pro Blatt) sind Bildoffseteinstellungen ungültig.
Heften von Dokumenten mit verschieden großen Seiten
Das Heften von Dokumenten mit verschieden großen Seiten wird nur vom Finisher
SR3020/SR3030 für den E-5000 unterstützt. Bei Verwendung eines anderen Finishers
kann diese Festlegung zu unerwarteten Ergebnissen führen.
Virtuelle Drucker
Im Falle eines virtuellen Druckers werden in den Auftragseigenschaften die Einstellungen für
gemischte Medien nicht richtig angezeigt. Verwenden Sie daher die Anwendung Command
WorkStation, wenn Sie diese Einstellungen prüfen oder ändern wollen. Schließen Sie das
Fenster „Auftragseigenschaften“ eines virtuellen Druckers, falls Sie es versehentlich geöffnet
haben, indem Sie auf „Abbrechen“ klicken. Klicken Sie nicht auf „OK“.
Broschürenerstellung
Ausgabe von Aufträgen mit NOBI-Größen als Broschüre
Wenn Sie für einen ausgeschossenen Auftrag eine benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße (NOBIGröße) festlegen und diesen Auftrag als Broschüre drucken, erfolgt die Ausgabe nicht in
der gewünschten Weise. Eigene (benutzerdefinierte) Seitengrößen werden nicht unterstützt.
Für Aufträge dieses Typs müssen Sie eine der verfügbaren Papiergrößen wählen.
Standardbroschürenerstellung und Mehrfachlayout (n-fach)
Für Aufträge mit Mehrfachlayout (n) wird die Ausgabe als Standardbroschüre nicht
unterstützt.
Ausschießen
Wenn Sie für einen Auftrag, für den gemischte Medien verwendet werden, die Option
„Broschürenerstellung“ aktivieren (indem Sie die Einstellung „Rückenheftung“, „Klebebindung“, „Sammelform - Schnelldruck“ oder „Sammelform - Doppeldruck“ wählen),
kann es zu unerwarteten Ergebnissen kommen. Es ist möglich, dass Aufträge, für die Sie die
Option „Broschürenerstellung“ verwenden, nicht an den erwarteten Stellen geheftet oder
gelocht werden. Die Option „Broschürenerstellung“ und die Festlegung „Heften = 2 in Mitte“
können unabhängig voneinander eingestellt werden. Wenn Sie ein Dokument, das in der
Anwendung ausgeschossen wurde, als Broschüre heften wollen, müssen Sie für die Option
„Heften“ die Einstellung „2 in Mitte“ wählen.
Seite 62
Optionen „Duplexdruck“ und „Broschürenerstellung = Schnelldruck/Doppeldruck“
für Aufträge im Querformat
Wenn Sie einen Auftrag im Querformat doppelseitig drucken und für ihn die Einstellung
„Sammelform = Doppeldruck“ oder „Sammelform = Schnelldruck“ (für die Option
„Broschürenerstellung“) wählen, wird nicht die von Ihnen gewählte Binderichtung
verwendet. Beispiel:
• Wenn Sie für die Option „Duplexdruck“ die Einstellung „Nach oben öffnen“ wählen,
wird für die Ausgabe tatsächlich die Einstellung „Nach links öffnen“ verwendet.
• Wenn Sie „Nach links öffnen“ wählen, wird für die Ausgabe tatsächlich die Einstellung
„Nach oben öffnen“ verwendet.
Für die Festlegung „Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform -Doppeldruck“ kann die Option
„Ausrichtung überschreiben“ auf der Seite „Layout“ des Druckertreibers als Abhilfe verwendet
werden.
Einschränkungen für Broschürenerstellung
Für die Option „Broschürenerstellung“ gelten die folgenden Einschränkungen:
• Leerseiten, die infolge der für die Broschürenerstellung gewählten Einstellungen in ein
Auftragsdokument eingefügt werden, werden als gedruckte S/W-Seiten gezählt.
• Für einen Auftrag, für den Einstellungen für die Broschürenerstellung festgelegt werden,
stehen Optionen wie „Skalieren“, „Passend skalieren“ und „Anpassen zum Drucken“
(auf der Seite „Layout“ im Fenster „Auftragseigenschaften“) nicht zur Verfügung.
• Wenn Sie für die Option „Broschürenerstellung“ die Einstellung „Sammelform Schnelldruck“ wählen, stehen die Optionen für den Broschüreneinband (Titelund Abschlussblatt) nicht zur Verfügung.
• Für eine Adobe PDF-Datei, für die Sicherheitseinstellungen festgelegt wurden, können
keine Einstellungen für die Broschürenerstellung gewählt werden.
• Für einen Auftrag, für den Einstellungen für die Broschürenerstellung festgelegt wurden,
kann die FreeForm Option „Weißen PPT-Hintergrund entfernen“ nicht verwendet
werden.
• Die Druckausgabe eines umfangreichen Auftrags, für den die Festlegung „Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform - Doppeldruck“ gewählt wurde, kann längere Zeit dauern.
• Wenn Sie eine sehr große Zahl von Dokumenten als Broschüren drucken, kann sich die
jeweilige Druckdauer deutlich verlängern.
Seite 63
Einschränkungen für direkte Verbindung
Auf der Festplatte werden keine Aufträge und keinerlei Informationen von Aufträgen gespeichert, die an die direkte Verbindung gesendet werden. Bei Verwendung der direkten Verbindung können daher keine Rasterdaten von Auftragsdokumenten oder Auftragsseiten auf der
Festplatte gespeichert werden. Dies wiederum hat zur Folge, dass keine Operationen möglich
sind, die den Zugriff auf die Festplatte erfordern. Zu diesen Operationen zählen:
• Spoolen für PDF-Aufträge
PDF-Aufträge müssen auf der Festplatte gespeichert werden, da das Interpretermodul
freien Zugriff auf die Datei haben muss. Die meisten PDF-Aufträge können nicht wie
PostScript als ein Datenstrom verarbeitet werden. PDF-Aufträge, die mithilfe der
Anwendung Command WorkStation oder des Druckertreibers an die direkte Verbindung
gesendet werden, werden in die Warteschlange „Drucken“ umgeleitet. PDF-Aufträge, die
über LPR an die direkte Verbindung gesendet werden, werden erfolglos abgebrochen.
• Drucken von VDP-Aufträgen über direkte Verbindung
VDP-Aufträge, die an die direkte Verbindung gesendet werden, werden an die Warteschlange „Drucken“ umgeleitet. (Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Dokument
Variabler Datendruck auf der CD-ROM mit der Anwenderdokumentation.)
• Drucken umfangreicher Aufträge mit rückläufiger Seitenfolge
Für die Ausgabe in rückläufiger Seitenfolge muss der komplette Auftrag vor Beginn der
Druckausgabe verarbeitet werden. Ein Auftrag, der zu groß für die Speicherung im
Arbeitsspeicher ist, wird zwar (in rückläufiger Seitenfolge) gedruckt; allerdings werden
die Seiten auf der Festplatte gespeichert.
• Exemplarweises Drucken umfangreicher Aufträge
Das exemplarweise Drucken wird aus dem gleichen Grund nicht unterstützt, aus dem
die rückläufige Seitenfolge nicht unterstützt wird. Aus diesem Grund wird für Aufträge,
die an die direkte Verbindung gesendet werden, die Option für das exemplarweise
Drucken deaktiviert.
• FreeForm Aufträge und folgende PPD-Optionen:
– Broschürenerstellung
– Separationen überdrucken
– Sichern für erneute Ausgabe
– Seitenfolge
– Duplexdruck
– Exemplarweise drucken
– Master-Datei erstellen
– Master-Datei verwenden
Seite 64
WebTools
Erstellen von Mailboxen
Wenn Sie mit der Komponente Configure der WebTools eine Mailbox für die Verwendung
von LDAP und der globalen Adressliste erstellen, müssen Sie den Benutzerdomänennamen
eingeben. Wenn Sie den Benutzerdomänennamen (z.B.<Domänenname>/:<Benutzer>) nicht
eingeben, erkennt der E-5000/E-3000 den Namen der Mailbox nicht.
Service Location Protocol (SLP)
SLP (Service Location Protocol) kann nicht mithilfe der Komponente Configure der
WebTools konfiguriert werden. Sie können SLP über das Kopiererdisplay konfigurieren.
Fenster mit EULA-Informationen
Wenn in der Komponente Configure der WebTools der Versuch scheitert, die Verbindung zu
PrintMe herzustellen, wird ein leeres Fenster angezeigt; in diesem Fenster werden ansonsten
die EULA-Informationen angezeigt. Sie können dieses Fenster ignorieren und es durch
Klicken auf „Abbrechen“ schließen.
Komponente Downloads der WebTools
Wenn Sie Windows-Software herunterladen, kann es geschehen, dass der Name der betreffenden Software nicht richtig angezeigt wird, wenn die Sprache von der Sprache abweicht,
die aktuell für den E-5000/E-3000 konfiguriert ist. In diesem Fall müssen Sie die benötigte
Software von der CD-ROM „Anwendersoftware (PS-Treiber)“ bzw. von der CD-ROM
„Anwendersoftware (Utilities)“ installieren.
Internet Explorer 7
Wenn Sie die Web Tools über Internet Explorer 7 ausführen, werden Sie möglicherweise
gezwungen, Internet Explorer zu beenden.
Online-Hilfe
Hilfedateien
Die Online-Hilfe für die Fiery Dienstprogramme wurde für Microsoft Internet Explorer v5.5
und neuere Versionen entwickelt. Wenn Sie zum Anzeigen der Online-Hilfe andere Browser
(z.B. Safari) oder frühere Versionen von Internet Explorer verwenden, kann es zu fehlerhaften
Darstellungen im Hilfetextfenster kommen.
Seite 65
Wenn Sie die Hilfedateien mit Microsoft Internet Explorer auf einem Computer anzeigen, auf
dem Windows XP Service Pack 2 installiert ist, kann es in folgenden Situationen geschehen,
dass die Hilfedateien nicht oder nicht richtig angezeigt werden:
• Wenn im Browser ein Popupblocker aktiviert ist, kann es geschehen, dass die
Hilfedateien abgeblockt werden. In diesem Fall müssen Sie den Popupblocker
vorübergehend deaktivieren.
• Wenn im Browser die erweiterte Option zum Anzeigen von Skriptfehlern aktiviert ist,
kann es geschehen, dass ein Fenster mit einer Warnung angezeigt wird, bevor die OnlineHilfe geöffnet und angezeigt wird. Sie können diese Warnung umgehen, indem Sie im
Dialogfenster „Internetoptionen“ auf der Registerkarte „Erweitert“ die Option „Skriptfehler anzeigen“ deaktivieren.
• Es ist außerdem möglich, dass in der Statusleiste eine Warnung angezeigt wird. Dieser
Fehler hat aber keine Auswirkung auf den Inhalt oder die Darstellung der Hilfedateien.
Safari
Wenn Sie die Hilfedateien mit Safari auf einem Mac OS X Computer anzeigen, kann es in
folgenden Situationen geschehen, dass die Hilfedateien nicht oder nicht richtig angezeigt
werden:
• Wenn Sie auf einem Mac OS X System im Browser Safari die Online-Hilfe für Hot
Folders anfordern, kann es geschehen, dass die Online-Hilfedateien nicht richtig geladen
werden und die Meldung erscheint, dass die Daten geladen werden, ohne dass aber die
Hilfeinformationen tatsächlich angezeigt werden. In diesem Fall müssen Sie Safari
beenden und die Hilfe neu anfordern. Falls sich das Problem dadurch nicht beheben
lässt, müssen Sie Internet Explorer v5.5 (oder eine neuere Version) für die Anzeige der
Hilfeinformationen verwenden.
• Wenn Sie auf einem Mac OS X Computer im Browser Safari die Online-Hilfe zur
Anwendung Command WorkStation anzeigen und darin den Cursor zu einem
bestimmten Element bewegen, kann es geschehen, dass rechts neben dem Element
eine Rahmenlinie eingeblendet wird.
• Wenn Sie die Version 1.2 oder 1.3 des Browsers Safari auf einem System unter
Mac OS X v10.3.x verwenden, werden im Startbildschirm der Online-Hilfe zur
Anwendung Command WorkStation die Optionen „Weiter“, „Zurück“ und „Im Inhalt
anzeigen“ falsch angezeigt. Dieses Problem tritt nicht auf, wenn Sie das Betriebssystem
Mac OS X v10.4.5 in Verbindung mit Safari v2.0.3 verwenden oder alternativ Internet
Explorer Version 5.5 (oder eine neuere Version) verwenden.
Seite 66
Windows
Darstellung der Registerkarte „Zubehör“
Bei einer fehlerhaften Darstellung der Druckereigenschaften im Druckertreiber für den
E-5000/E-3000 müssen Sie mithilfe des Objekts „Anzeige“ in der Windows-Systemsteuerung
die Auflösung oder die Farbqualität auf einen niedrigeren Wert setzen.
Speichern benutzerdefinierter Seitengrößen
Im E-5000/E-3000 Druckertreiber für Windows XP ist es nicht möglich, eine benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße für die spätere Verwendung zu definieren.
Mac OS X
Bildoffset beim Duplexdruck
Wenn Sie Bildoffseteinstellungen für einen doppelseitig zu druckenden Auftrag mit mehr als
zwei Seiten festlegen, kann es geschehen, dass das Druckbild der dritten Auftragsseite verzerrt
wird. Dieses Fehlverhalten, für das es derzeit keine Lösungsmöglichkeit gibt, wird durch den
Mac OS X Druckertreiber verursacht.
Medieneinstellungen „Schwer1“ und „Schwer2“ und Option „Heften“
Im Druckertreiber für Mac OS X können Sie für die Option „Medium“ die Einstellung
„Schwer 1“ oder „Schwer 2“, auch wenn die Option „Heften“ aktiviert wurde. Diese
Kombination von Optionseinstellungen wird aber nicht unterstützt.
Speichern eines Auftrags als PDF- oder PS-Datei
Wenn Sie für einen Auftrag Bildoffseteinstellungen festlegen und die doppelseitige Ausgabe
veranlassen, danach diesen Auftrag als PDF- oder als PostScript-Datei (PS) speichern und
anschließend drucken, wird der Auftrag einseitig und ohne Berücksichtigung der festgelegten
Bildoffseteinstellungen gedruckt. Wenn Sie den Auftrag mit den betreffenden Einstellungen
über den Druckertreiber direkt an den Druckserver senden, d.h. ohne ihn als PDF- oder PSDatei zu speichern, wird er wie erwartet unter Verwendung der festgelegten Einstellungen
ausgegeben.
Beheben von Druckoptionskonflikten im Druckertreiber für Mac OS X v10.4
Wenn Sie im Druckertreiber für Mac OS X v10.4 (speziell auf der Seite „Druckeroptionen“)
Druckoptionen ändern, werden Konflikte bei den Druckoptionen nicht korrekt aufgelöst.
Wenn Sie z.B. eine Einstellung für die Option „Broschürenerstellung“ wählen wollen, muss
zuvor die gewünschte Einstellung für die Option „Duplexdruck“ gewählt werden, damit
für die Option „Broschürenerstellung“ die richtigen Einstellungen angeboten werden. Das
bedeutet: Die für die Option „Broschürenerstellung“ angebotenen Einstellungen sind
abhängig von der Einstellung, die Sie für die Option „Duplexdruck“ wählen.
In früheren Mac OS Versionen wurden Konflikte bei den Druckoptionen automatisch
behoben. Führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, damit Konflikte zwischen Druckoptionen
auf den Seiten der Rubrik „Druckeroptionen“ behoben werden.
Seite 67
DRUCKOPTIONSKONFLIKTE
AUF DER SEITE
„DRUCKEROPTIONEN“ BEHEBEN
1 Öffnen Sie eine andere Seite.
Öffnen Sie beispielsweise die Seite „Zusammenfassung“, wenn aktuell die Seite
„Druckeroptionen“ geöffnet ist.
Wenn Sie zur Seite „Druckeroptionen“ zurückkehren, ergibt sich eine Diskrepanz zwischen
der gewählten Optionengruppe und den tatsächlich angezeigten Druckoptionen. Wenn Sie
z.B. zuletzt Änderungen in der Optionengruppe „Bild 1“ vorgenommen haben, werden darin
nun die Druckoptionen der ersten Optionengruppe angezeigt (z.B. „Finishing 1“).
2 Wählen Sie die Optionengruppe (z.B. „Bild 1“) erneut aus, um die angezeigten
Druckoptionen zu aktualisieren.
3 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Einstellungen für die Druckoptionen und drucken Sie
den Auftrag.
Einschränkungen beim Drucken
Nicht unterstützte Druckoptionen und Druckeinstellungen werden im Druckertreiber
für Mac OS X abgeblendet. Der folgenden Tabelle können Sie entnehmen, welche
Einschränkungen beim Drucken unter Mac OS X zu beachten sind.
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Finishing 2
Lochung
2er-Lochung
Lochen = Links, Rechts, Oben
3er-Lochung
Lochen = Links, Rechts, Oben
4er-Lochung
Lochen = Links, Rechts, Oben
4er-Lochung, gruppiert
Lochen = Links, Rechts, Oben
Auftragsinformationen
Dokumentenserver
Ein
Exemplarweise drucken = Aus
Layout 1
Broschürenerstellung
Rückenheftung
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Rückenheftung
(Bindung rechts)
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Klebebindung
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Klebebindung
(Bindung rechts)
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Seite 68
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Layout 2
Broschüreneinband Zufuhr
Autom. wählen
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Mehrzweckfach
Duplexdruck = Aus
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Papierfach 1
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Papierfach 2
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Papierfach 3
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Papierfach 4
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Papierfach 3 (LCT)
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Seite 69
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Layout 2 (Forts.)
Broschürentitelblatt Modus
Nur auf Vorderseite
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Nur auf Rückseite
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Auf Vorder- und
Rückseite
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Leer
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Broschürenabschlussblatt Modus
Nur auf Vorderseite
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Nur auf Rückseite
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Seite 70
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Layout 2 (Forts.)
Broschürenabschlussblatt –
Modus (Forts.)
Auf Vorder- und
Rückseite
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Leer
Duplexdruck = Aus / Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Sammelform Doppeldruck
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Medium 1
Medium 2
Zentrierung anpassen
X unten
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts) /
Klebebindung / Klebebindung
(Bindung rechts)
Bundzugabe
Normal
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Schwer
Duplexdruck = Nach links öffnen
Broschürenerstellung = Rückenheftung /
Rückenheftung (Bindung rechts)
Etiketten
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Folie
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Schwer 3
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Normal
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Recycling
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Farbe
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Spezial 1
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Spezial 2
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Spezial 3
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Geschäftsbriefpapier
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Medium
Erste Seite - Medium
Seite 71
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Medium 2 (Forts.)
Erste Seite - Medium
(Forts.)
Etiketten
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Erste Seite - Zufuhrfach =
Mehrzweckfach
Umschlagkarton
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Bondpapier
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Vorgedruckt
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Folie
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Erste Seite - Zufuhrfach =
Mehrzweckfach
Dünn
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Mittelschwer
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Schwer 1
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Schwer 2
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Schwer 3
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Erste Seite - Zufuhrfach =
Mehrzweckfach
Mehrzweckfach
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Papierfach 1
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Papierfach 2
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Papierfach 3
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Papierfach 4
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Papierfach 3 (LCT)
Erste Seite – Zufuhr = Ein
Leer
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Bedruckt
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Erste Seite – Zufuhrfach
Trennblatt
Seite 72
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Medium 2 (Forts.)
Trennblatt - Medium
Normal
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Recycling
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Farbe
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Spezial 1
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Spezial 2
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Spezial 3
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Geschäftsbriefpapier
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Etiketten
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt - Zufuhrfach =
Mehrzweckfach
Umschlagkarton
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt - Zufuhrfach = Autom. wählen
Bondpapier
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt - Zufuhrfach = Autom. wählen
Vorgedruckt
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt - Zufuhrfach = Autom. wählen
Folie
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt - Zufuhrfach =
Mehrzweckfach
Seite 73
Kategorie
Option
Einschränkung
Abhilfe
Medium 2 (Forts.)
Trennblatt – Medium
(Forts.)
Dünn
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Mittelschwer
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Schwer 1
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Schwer 2
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Schwer 3
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt - Zufuhrfach =
Mehrzweckfach
Mehrzweckfach
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Papierfach 1
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Papierfach 2
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Papierfach 3
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Papierfach 4
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Papierfach 3 (LCT)
Zufuhrfach = Mehrzweckfach
Medium = Folie
Trennblatt = Leer / Bedruckt
Trennblatt – Zufuhrfach
Seite 74
Hot Folders v2.x unter Mac OS 10.4.x
Bei Dateien, die lokal von einem Mac OS 10.4.x Computer oder von einem Speicherort im
Netzwerk aus an die Anwendung Hot Folders v2.x übergeben werden, wird in bestimmten
Fällen das Format der übergebenen Aufträge nicht erkannt, obwohl die Dateien korrekt und
gültig sind. Dieses Problem tritt in der Regel auf, wenn sich die Dateien in einem Netzwerkordner befinden, auf den über AFP (Apple Filing Protocol) zugegriffen wird. Dieses Problem
tritt nicht auf, wenn sich die Dateien in einem Netzwerkordner befinden, auf den über SMB
zugegriffen wird.
Sie können dieses Problem umgehen, wenn Sie für alle an einen überwachten Ordner
übergebenen Dateien die Schreib-/Leseberechtigung oder die Leseberechtigung einrichten.
• Wenn sich Ihre Dateien im Netzwerk befinden, müssen Sie sie auf Ihren lokalen
Computer kopieren, die Dateiberechtigungen ändern und danach die Dateien erneut
an die Anwendung Hot Folders übergeben.
Wenn Sie auf einem Mac OS Computer arbeiten, müssen Sie zunächst die Sperre der
Dateien aufheben und im Anschluss daran die Dateiberechtigungen ändern. Speichern
Sie die neuen Dateiattribute ohne Sperre, oder sperren Sie die Datei wieder und speichern
Sie danach erst die Attribute.
• Wenn sich die Dateien auf Ihrem lokalen Computer befinden, überprüfen und ändern
Sie gegebenenfalls die Dateiberechtigungen und übergeben Sie danach die Dateien an den
überwachten Ordner.
Remote Scan Version 5.3 und 5.4 unter Mac OS X
Unter Mac OS X können Sie das Anwendungsfenster von Remote Scan Version 5.3 oder 5.4
nur mithilfe der Maus schließen. Sie können die Anwendung nicht im Hauptmenü oder mit
der Tastenkombination „Befehl+Q“ beenden.
Weiterverarbeitungsoptionen unter Mac OS X
Bei einem Auftrag, der von einem Mac OS X Computer gesendet wird, kann es bei jeder
Kombination von Duplexdruck- und Hefteinstellungen dazu kommen, dass die Heftpositionen und die Ausrichtung der doppelseitig gedruckten Seiten nicht den Erwartungen
entsprechen. Im Falle einer solchen Abweichung können Sie die gewünschte Bildrichtung
mithilfe der Option „Ausrichtung überschreiben“ im Druckertreiber für den E-5000/E-3000
festlegen.
Eigene Seitengrößen
Die Maximalwerte für eine eigene (benutzerdefinierte) Seitengröße sind:
• Inch: 12" x 23,62"
• Millimeter: 304,9mm x 599,9 mm
Seite 75
Drucken unter Mac OS
Wenn Sie in einer Anwendung auf das Symbol „Drucken“ klicken, werden die Druckoptionen nicht richtig angezeigt. Wählen Sie daher „Drucken“ im Menü „Datei“.
Anwendung
Command
WorkStation
Abbrechen mehrerer Aufträge
Wenn Sie in der Anwendung Command WorkStation mehrere Aufträge gleichzeitig
abbrechen, kann der Abbruchvorgang unerwartet lange dauern.
Auch das Abbrechen von als Broschüren zu druckenden Aufträgen und von Aufträgen
mit einer sehr großen Anzahl von Seiten kann unerwartet lange dauern.
Vorschau während RIP-Verarbeitung
Wenn beim Setup des E-5000/E-3000 die Option „RIP-Vorschau“ aktiviert wurde, kann es
in der Anwendung Command WorkStation unerwartet lange dauern, bis ein abgebrochener
Auftrag aus der Liste „Aktive Aufträge“ entfernt wird und in der Liste „Gedruckte Aufträge“
erscheint.
Adobe PageMaker
Wenn Sie in der Anwendung Command WorkStation die Auftragseigenschaften eines
Auftrags anzeigen, der mithilfe der PPD-Datei für Adobe PageMaker erstellt wurde, kann es
geschehen, dass bestimmte in PageMaker festgelegte Werte nicht richtig angezeigt werden.
Druckgruppen
Druckgruppen werden nicht unterstützt, obgleich die Funktion in der Online-Hilfe der
Command WorkStation beschrieben wird. Die Druckgruppenfunktion wurde durch die
Funktion für die Anwenderauthentisierung ersetzt. Sofern diese Funktion beim Setup
des E-5000/E-3000 aktiviert wurde, kann die Authentisierung direkt im Druckertreiber
vorgenommen werden. Informationen zur Anwenderauthentisierung finden Sie in den
Dokumenten Konfiguration und Setup und Druckoptionen.
Sichern und Wiederherstellen von Zeichensätzen/Schriften
Mit der Anwendung Command WorkStation können Sie Sicherungskopien von Zeichensätzen/Schriften erstellen und wiederherstellen. Diese Funktion wird in der Online-Hilfe
der Anwendung Command WorkStation allerdings falsch beschrieben.
Seite 76
Beachten Sie die folgenden Punkte, bevor Sie Zeichensätze/Schriften sichern und
wiederherstellen:
• Sie können nur PostScript- Zeichensätze/Schriften sichern und wiederherstellen.
• Es werden immer alle Zeichensätze/Schriften gesichert oder wiederhergestellt. Sie können
keine einzelnen Zeichensätze/Schriften wählen.
• Sichern Sie die Zeichensätze/Schriften nicht auf der internen Festplatte, auf der sich die
Systemsoftware des E-5000/E-3000 befindet.
• Sie können gesicherte Zeichensätze/Schriften nur auf dem E-5000/E-3000 wiederherstellen, für den die Zeichensätze/Schriften ursprünglich gesichert wurden.
SICHERUNGSKOPIE
VON ZEICHENSÄTZEN/SCHRIFTEN ERSTELLEN ODER WIEDERHERSTELLEN
1 Starten Sie die Anwendung Command WorkStation und melden Sie sich als Administrator an.
2 Wählen Sie „Schriftenverwaltung“ im Menü „Server“.
3 Klicken Sie auf „Sichern“ bzw. „Wiederherstellen“.
4 Navigieren Sie im daraufhin angezeigten Fenster zu dem Ordner, in dem Sie die Zeichensätze/
Schriften sichern bzw. aus dem Sie eine Sicherungskopie wiederherstellen wollen.
5 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“
Wenn Sie in der Anwendung Command WorkStation für einen Duotone-Auftrag die Option
„Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ aktivieren und danach für diesen Auftrag die Option
„Verarbeiten und halten“ wählen, werden bei der Darstellung des Auftrags in ImageViewer
die Duotone-Farbinformationen des Auftrags nicht richtig wiedergegeben.
ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools bei Verbindung zu E-5000/E-3000 mit
Spanisch als Systemsprache
Wenn Sie auf einem Mac OS X Computer für die ColorWise Pro Tools die Verbindung zu
einem E-5000/E-3000 herstellen, für den Spanisch als Systemsprache konfiguriert ist, werden
bestimmte Menüoptionen fälschlicherweise in Französisch (nicht in Spanisch) angezeigt.
Externe
Verbindungen
Verbindung zu USB-Gerät
Es kann geschehen, dass nach dem Anschließen eines USB-Laufwerks der E-5000/E-3000
nicht mehr in den Status „Bereit“ zurückkehrt. Dies kann geschehen, wenn das betreffende
USB-Laufwerk unter Windows formatiert wurde, da der E-5000/E-3000 in diesem Fall
gelegentlich versucht, von diesem Laufwerk zu booten. Um dieses Problem zu beheben,
müssen Sie den ersten Sektor des Laufwerks löschen, ohne aber das Laufwerk zu formatieren.
Seite 77
Internetfax
Fehlende Fehlermeldung bei nicht unterstützten Auflösungen
Wenn Sie versuchen, ein Internetfax mit einer Auflösung von 100 dpi oder 600 dpi (dots per
inch) zu senden, gibt die Scansoftware keine Fehlermeldung mit dem Hinweis aus, dass diese
Auflösungen nicht unterstützt werden. Aktuell werden die Auflösungen „200 dpi“, „300 dpi“
und „400 dpi“ unterstützt.
Remote Scan
Größenbeschränkungen für Scandateien
Ein gescannter Auftrag darf eine maximale Dateigröße von 2 GB haben. Das Scannen einer
umfangreichen Vorlage, die zu einer Datei mit einer Größe über 2 GB führt, wird erfolglos
abgebrochen. Teilen Sie einen großen Scanauftrag in kleiner Teilaufträge, um Probleme zu
vermeiden.
Vorlagenmodus
Wenn Sie bei Verwendung von Remote Scan Einstellungen für den Vorlagenmodus festlegen,
ist Remote Scan möglicherweise nicht in der Lage, den Scanvorgang abzuschließen. Um in
diesem Fall den Scanvorgang abzuschließen, müssen Sie auf dem Kopiererdisplay die Taste
mit dem Nummernzeichen (#) drücken.
Einstellung für Bildmodus
Die folgende Tabelle ersetzt die entsprechende Tabelle im Abschnitt „Scannen über das
Kopiererdisplay“ im Dokument Dienstprogramme auf der CD-ROM mit der Anwenderdokumentation.
Scan über Kopiererdisplay
Element
Auswahl
Bildmodus
Schwarzweiß
Graustufen
Text
Remote Scan
Farbmodus
Bildmodus
Schwarzweiß
Text
Bild
Bild
Text/Bild
Text/Bild
Text (OCR)
Text (OCR)
Graustufen
Graustufen
Text
Bild
Text/Bild
Farbe
Bild
Text/Bild
Farbe
Bild
Text/Bild
Text
Seite 78
Netzwerkeinstellungen
DNS-Einstellungen
DNS-Einstellungen, die Sie über die Option „Setup“ in der Anwendung Command
WorkStation oder mit der Komponente Configure der WebTools festlegen, sind ungültig.
Die DNS-Einstellungen können nur direkt über das Kopiererdisplay konfiguriert werden.
Notas de la versión
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, versión 1.0
Este documento contiene información acerca de la versión 1.0 del software del
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000.
N OTA : En este documento se utiliza el término “E-5000/E-3000” para hacer referencia al
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000. El término “copiadora” se utiliza para hacer referencia
a la Unidad principal de copiadora.
Impresión
Nombres de archivo largos con PCL5c
Si imprime un documento de PCL5c que tiene un nombre de archivo largo, el nombre del
documento podría imprimirse en una página extra.
Conjuntos de terminación de Papeles mezclados con Insertar vacía
Si especifica conjuntos de terminación para cada capítulo en un trabajo de Papeles mezclados
engrapado y a continuación inserta una página vacía antes de cada capítulo seleccionado, el
trabajo se imprimirá con conjuntos de engrapado incorrectos. No utilice las opciones “Definir
cada capítulo como un conjunto separado” e “Insertar vacía” a la vez.
Actualización de las opciones instaladas en el controlador de impresora para
Windows 2000/XP
La lista Opciones instaladas no se actualiza correctamente en el controlador de impresora para
Windows 2000/XP si selecciona la opción “Actualizar el controlador Fiery al abrirlo”. Para que
se muestren correctamente las opciones instaladas en el controlador de impresora, haga clic en
Actualizar además de seleccionar la opción “Actualizar el controlador Fiery al abrirlo” en el
controlador de impresora.
Suavizado de imagen
Cuando se selecciona el valor Por omisión de impresora en la opción Suavizado de imagen, el
resultado es el mismo que si selecciona “Suavizado de imagen=No”.
Error de demasiados trabajos procesándose en la cola
Si el número de trabajos que se están procesando en la cola del E-5000/E-3000 se acerca al
máximo de 2.500, el E-5000/E-3000 no aceptará ningún trabajo adicional y se muestra un
mensaje de error.
Impresión de archivos grandes
Para imprimir archivos que tienen más de 4 GB, imprima por rangos de páginas, de forma
que el trabajo se separe en archivos independientes, cada uno de ellos con un tamaño de 2 GB
o menos.
Copyright 2006 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
Número de referencia: 45058080
30 de noviembre de 2006
Página 80
Trabajos de FreeForm con la opción Servidor de documentos
Para enviar un trabajo de FreeForm al Servidor de documentos en el E-5000/E-3000, debe
seleccionar el Servidor de documentos antes de crear el archivo maestro de FreeForm. Si no
lo hace, el trabajo no se imprime y se muestra un error en el Registro de trabajos.
Servidor de documentos
No puede almacenar documentos de tamaño 12 x 18 pulg. y tamaño personalizado mediante
Servidor de documentos.
EFI Impose en el Servidor de documentos
No puede guardar ningún trabajo con imposición en Servidor de documentos. El Servidor
de documentos no admite Impose.
Impresión al Servidor de documentos
El valor por omisión de Modo Calidad es Superfino. Cuando se envían datos al Servidor de
documentos para imprimir, si se utiliza el valor Superfino se ocupa mucho espacio de disco
duro. Puede que prefiera seleccionar en su lugar Fino o Grueso. Los valores de Modo Calidad
son los siguientes:
• Superfino: Gran cantidad de espacio de disco duro
• Fino: Cantidad media de espacio de disco duro
• Grueso: Cantidad pequeña de espacio de disco duro
Impresión de líneas finas
Es posible que las líneas finas de un documento no se impriman, aparezcan dentadas o tengan
un resultado diferente al previsto. Si tiene este problema, seleccione Texto en la opción
Difusión de la pestaña Calidad de la imagen del controlador de impresora.
Rearranque del sistema mientras la impresión está en proceso
Si intenta rearrancar el sistema mientras el E-5000/E-3000 está en proceso de impresión,
pueden producirse resultados inesperados. Espere hasta que la pantalla indique Libre antes
de rearrancar el sistema.
Desplazamiento de la imagen
El valor de Desplazamiento de la imagen no es válido cuando se utiliza el valor N por cara.
Engrapado con tamaños de papeles mezclados
El engrapado de tamaños de papeles mezclados sólo se admite en SR3020/SR3030
para el E-5000. Si utiliza este valor con otros terminadores, pueden producirse resultados
inesperados.
Página 81
Impresoras virtuales
Cuando se abren las propiedades del trabajo de una Impresora virtual, los valores de Papeles
mezclados no se muestran correctamente. Para confirmar o cambiar los valores de Papeles
mezclados, utilice Command WorkStation. Si la ventana Propiedades del trabajo de una
Impresora virtual se abre accidentalmente desde el cuadro de diálogo Impresoras virtuales,
pulse Cancelar para cerrar la ventana. No pulse Aceptar.
Creador de
cuadernillos
Impresión de tamaño Nobi con el Creador de cuadernillos
Con el Creador de cuadernillos, los trabajos con imposición no se imprimen correctamente en
un papel personalizado de tamaño Nobi. No se admiten los tamaños de papel personalizados.
Debe seleccionar un tamaño de papel disponible para este tipo de trabajo de impresión.
Impresión de cuadernillo estándar con diseño N por cara
La impresión de cuadernillo estándar no se admite con la impresión de diseño N por cara.
Imposición
Si especifica Papeles mezclados para los trabajos del Creador de cuadernillos, por ejemplo
Cuadernillo estándar, Pliego a pliego, Impresión doble e Impresión rápida, pueden producirse
resultados inesperados. Es posible que los trabajos de impresión del Creador de cuadernillos
no se engrapen o perforen correctamente. Las opciones de Creador de cuadernillos y 2 en
el centro pueden definirse de forma independiente. Si desea que el documento tenga una
imposición en la aplicación para que se engrape como un cuadernillo, seleccione el valor 2
en el centro en la opción de impresión Engrapar.
Datos de orientación horizontal con impresión Dúplex y valor Doble/Rápida
Cuando se selecciona el modo Dúplex y los datos de orientación horizontal tienen el valor
Doble/Rápida, la dirección de encuadernación de los trabajos de impresión será la opuesta a la
que ha seleccionado. Por ejemplo:
• Si se selecciona “Abrir hacia arriba”, el trabajo se imprime con la dirección “Abrir hacia
la izquierda”.
• Si se selecciona “Abrir hacia la izquierda”, el trabajo se imprime con la dirección “Abrir
hacia arriba”.
Con el valor Impresión doble, una solución temporal es utilizar la redefinición de orientación
de la pestaña Diseño del controlador de impresora.
Página 82
Limitaciones del Creador de cuadernillos
A continuación se indican las limitaciones del Creador de cuadernillos:
• Al insertar páginas vacías en un trabajo como resultado de la especificación de los valores
del Creador de cuadernillos, las páginas vacías se cuentan como páginas impresas en blanco
y negro.
• Las opciones Escala, Ajustar a página o Ajustar a tamaño de impresión (en la pestaña
Diseño de la ventana Propiedades del trabajo) no se aplican cuando se utilizan valores de
creador de cuadernillos para un trabajo.
• Si selecciona el valor Impresión rápida en Creador de cuadernillos, los valores de Portada
de cuadernillo no están disponibles.
• No es posible especificar valores de Creador de cuadernillos para un archivo PDF de Adobe
con valores de seguridad.
• Cuando se utilizan los valores de Creador de cuadernillos, no puede seleccionarse la opción
Eliminar fondo blanco de PPT de la pestaña FreeForm.
• La impresión de un trabajo grande con los valores de Impresión doble del Creador de
cuadernillos puede requerir mucho tiempo.
• Cuando se imprime un número alto de documentos con el Creador de cuadernillos puede
que el tiempo de impresión sea inesperadamente alto.
Limitaciones de la conexión Directa
Los trabajos, o la información relacionada con los trabajos, que se envían a la conexión
Directa no se guardan en el disco duro. Con la conexión Directa, los trabajos o los tramados
de página no pueden guardarse en el disco. Por lo tanto, no es posible realizar ninguna acción
que requiera acceso al disco. Estas operaciones incluyen:
• Almacenamiento de trabajos PDF
Los trabajos PDF deben guardarse en el disco ya que el intérprete debe tener acceso
aleatorio al archivo. La mayoría de los trabajos PDF no pueden procesarse como una
sucesión de datos como los trabajos PostScript. Los trabajos PDF enviados a la conexión
Directa desde Command WorkStation o el controlador de impresora son redirigidos a la
cola Impresión. Los trabajos PDF enviados a la conexión Directa desde LPR no funcionan
correctamente.
• Impresión en la conexión Directa de trabajos de impresión de datos variables (VDP)
Los trabajos de impresión de datos variables enviados a la conexión Directa son redirigidos
a la cola Impresión (para obtener más información, consulte Impresión de datos variables en
el CD de documentación del usuario).
Página 83
• Impresión con orden inverso de trabajos grandes
La impresión con orden inverso requiere que se procese el trabajo completo antes de
imprimir. Aunque el trabajo no quepa en la memoria, se imprime (en orden inverso) pero
las páginas se guardan en el disco.
• Clasificación de trabajos grandes
Por la misma razón la clasificación no se admite como impresión con orden inverso.
Recuerde que la clasificación se desactiva en los trabajos impresos en la conexión Directa.
• Trabajos de FreeForm, incluidas las siguientes opciones del PPD:
– Creador de cuadernillos
– Combinar separaciones
– Guardar reimpresión rápida
– Orden de páginas
– Dúplex
– Ordenar
– Crear Archivo maestro
– Utilizar Archivo maestro
WebTools
Creación de buzones
Debe incluir el nombre de dominio del usuario cuando cree un buzón desde Configurar
LDAP y la Libreta de direcciones global. Si no agrega el nombre de dominio del usuario,
por ejemplo, <Nombre de dominio>/:<Usuario>, el E-5000/E-3000 no reconoce el nombre
de buzón.
Protocolo SLP (Service Location Protocol)
No es posible configurar el protocolo SLP desde Configurar de WebTools.
Como solución temporal, configure el SLP desde el panel de pantalla de la copiadora.
Cuadro de diálogo de EULA (Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final)
Si no puede conectarse a PrintMe con Configurar de WebTools, aparece un cuadro de diálogo
de EULA (Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final) vacío. No tenga en cuenta este cuadro de
diálogo y haga clic en Cancelar.
Descargas de Web
Cuando descargue software de Windows, es posible que el nombre del software no se muestre
correctamente si el idioma es diferente de la configuración de idioma actual del E-5000/
E-3000. En este caso, instale el software requerido desde el CD de software del usuario
(Controladores de impresora PS) o el CD de software del usuario (Utilidades).
Página 84
Internet Explorer 7
Si utiliza WebTools en Internet Explorer 7, es posible que se fuerce la salida de
Internet Explorer.
Ayuda
Archivos de ayuda
Los archivos de ayuda para las utilidades del Fiery se han desarrollado para su uso con
Microsoft Internet Explorer v5.5 y posteriores. Si utiliza otros navegadores, como Safari,
o versiones anteriores de Internet Explorer, es posible que los archivos de Ayuda no se
muestren correctamente.
Con Microsoft Internet Explorer en una computadora Windows XP con el Service Pack 2,
los archivos de ayuda pueden no mostrarse o no hacerlo correctamente si se da alguna de
las situaciones siguientes:
• Si su navegador utiliza un bloqueador de elementos emergentes, éste puede bloquear
los archivos de Ayuda. Si éste es el caso, deshabilite temporalmente su bloqueador de
elementos emergentes.
• Si su navegador tiene la opción avanzada de Internet habilitada para mostrar notificaciones
cuando se producen errores de secuencia de comandos, es posible que aparezca una
ventana de advertencia antes de mostrar una página del archivo de ayuda. Para evitar que
aparezca la ventana de advertencia, desactive la opción “Mostrar una notificación sobre
cada error de secuencia de comandos” en la pestaña Opciones avanzadas del cuadro de
diálogo Opciones de Internet.
• También podría aparecer un mensaje de advertencia en la barra de estado, pero el
contenido del archivo de Ayuda no se ve afectado por este error.
Safari
Con Safari en sistemas Mac OS X, los archivos de Ayuda pueden no mostrarse o no hacerlo
correctamente si se da alguna de las situaciones siguientes:
• Cuando se inicia la Ayuda de Hot Folders mediante Safari en computadoras Mac OS X,
es posible que los archivos de Ayuda no se carguen correctamente, mostrando el mensaje
“Cargando...” sin que se produzca ningún resultado. Si sucede esto, salga de Safari y
reinicie los archivos de Ayuda. Si el problema persiste, utilice Internet Explorer v5.5
o posterior.
• Cuando se utiliza Safari en una computadora Mac OS X y se mueve el cursor a un
elemento de la Ayuda de Command WorkStation, es posible que aparezca una línea
de cuadro a la izquierda de la imagen.
• Cuando se utiliza Safari v1.2 o v1.3 en computadoras Mac OS X v10.3.x, el texto
“Adelante”, “Atrás” y “Mostrar en Contenido” se muestra incorrectamente en el panel
inicial de la Ayuda de Command WorkStation. Si sucede esto, utilice Mac OS X v10.4.5
10.4.5 con Safari 2.0.3 o Internet Explorer v5.5 o posterior.
Página 85
Windows
Visualización de la pestaña Accesorios
Si Propiedades de la impresora del controlador de impresora del E-5000/E-3000 no muestra
correctamente las propiedades de la impresora, reduzca la resolución y la calidad del color en
las propiedades de pantalla del panel de control de su computadora Windows.
Guardado de tamaños de papel personalizados
En el controlador de impresora del E-5000/E-3000 en Windows, los tamaños de página
personalizados no se admiten al crear plantillas para un uso posterior.
Mac OS X
Impresión dúplex con Desplazamiento de imagen
Cuando se utiliza la opción Desplazamiento de imagen con valores de impresión dúplex
(impresión a dos caras) en un trabajo de más de dos páginas, la imagen de la tercera página
puede aparecer deformada. Este problema es causado por el controlador de impresora para
Mac OS X y no hay solución temporal en este momento.
Tipos de papel Grueso 1 y Grueso 2 con engrapado
Puede seleccionar el Tipo de papel Grueso 1 y Grueso 2 cuando se selecciona el engrapado
desde el controlador de impresora para Mac OS X. Sin embargo, esta combinación de
impresión no se admite.
Guardar archivos PDF o PS
Cuando se utiliza el Desplazamiento de imagen con valores de impresión dúplex (impresión
a dos caras), se guarda el archivo como PDF o PostScript y a continuación se imprime el
archivo, el trabajo se imprime a una cara sin los valores de Desplazamiento de imagen. Si
imprime con estos valores en el controlador sin guardar el archivo como PS o PDF, el trabajo
se imprime con los valores correctos.
Resolución de los conflictos de opciones de impresión en el controlador de
impresora para Mac OS X v10.4
Cuando se cambian las opciones de impresión en el controlador de impresora para Mac OS X
v10.4, específicamente en el panel Características, los conflictos de opciones de impresión no
se solucionan adecuadamente.
Por ejemplo, para seleccionar un valor para la opción de impresión Creador de cuadernillos,
debe configurar la opción Dúplex (impresión a dos caras) con el valor Sí para que las opciones
de impresión de Creador de cuadernillos estén disponibles para su selección. Las opciones de
Creador de cuadernillos dependen de la opción Dúplex (impresión a dos caras).
En versiones anteriores de Mac OS, los conflictos de opciones de impresión se corregían
automáticamente. Para solucionar los conflictos de las opciones de impresión en el panel
Características, utilice el siguiente procedimiento:
Página 86
PARA RESOLVER LOS CONFLICTOS DE OPCIONES DE IMPRESIÓN EN EL PANEL CARACTERÍSTICAS
1 Seleccione un panel diferente.
Por ejemplo, si estaba en el panel Características, seleccione el panel Resumen.
Después de actualizar el panel Características, hay una no correspondencia entre el grupo
de características seleccionado y las opciones de impresión que se muestran. Por ejemplo,
si el último conjunto de características que modificó era Imagen 1, ahora se muestra con
las opciones de impresión del primer conjunto de características, Terminación 1.
2 Vuelva a seleccionar el grupo de conjunto de características (por ejemplo, Imagen 1) para
actualizar las opciones de impresión que se muestran.
3 Seleccione las opciones de impresión adecuadas e imprima el trabajo.
Limitaciones de impresión
El controlador de impresora para Mac OS X muestra atenuadas las opciones de impresión no
admitidas. Cuando imprima desde Mac OS X, consulte la siguiente tabla de restricciones.
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Terminación 2
Orificios de perforación
Dos orificios
Perforar = Izquierda, Derecha, Superior
Tres orificios
Perforar = Izquierda, Derecha, Superior
Cuatro orificios
Perforar = Izquierda, Derecha, Superior
Cuatro orificios
agrupados
Perforar = Izquierda, Derecha, Superior
Sí
Ordenar = No
Job Info
(Información
del trabajo)
Servidor de documentos
Página 87
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Diseño 1
Creador de cuadernillos
Folleto
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Folleto
(encuadern. derecha)
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Pliego a pliego
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Pliego a pliego
(encuad. dcha)
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Selección automática
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Diseño 2
Origen de portada cuadern.
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Bandeja de desvío
Dúplex = No
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Bandeja1
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Bandeja2
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Bandeja3
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Bandeja4
Dúplex = No, Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Página 88
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Diseño 2 (cont.)
Origen de portada cuadern.
(cont.)
Bandeja3 (LCT)
Dúplex = No, Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Modo portada delant. cuader.
Imprimir sólo
en anverso
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Imprimir sólo
en reverso
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Imprimir ambos
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Vacía
Dúplex = No, Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Modo contraportada cuadern.
Imprimir sólo
en anverso
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Imprimir sólo
en reverso
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Página 89
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Diseño 2 (cont.)
Modo contraportada cuadern.
(cont.)
Imprimir ambos
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Vacía
Dúplex = No o Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = N por
cara - Impresión doble
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Papel 1
Ajuste de centrado
Inferior en eje X
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto,
Folleto (encuadern. derecha), Pliego a
pliego o Pliego a pliego (encuad. dcha)
Ajuste de desplazamiento
Normal
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Grueso
Dúplex = Abrir hacia la izquierda
Creador de cuadernillos = Folleto o
Folleto (encuadern. derecha)
Etiquetas
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Transparencia
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Grueso 3
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel
Página 90
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Papel 2
Tipo de papel de 1a página
Normal
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Reciclado
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Color
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Especial1
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Especial2
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Especial3
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Membrete
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Etiquetas
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja introd. 1a página = Bandeja
de desvío
Tarjeta
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bond
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Preimpreso
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Transparencia
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja introd. 1a página = Bandeja
de desvío
Delgado
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Middle Thick
(Semigrueso)
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Grueso 1
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Grueso 2
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Grueso 3
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja introd. 1a página = Bandeja
de desvío
Bandeja de desvío
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja1
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja2
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja3
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja4
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja3 (LCT)
Introd. 1a página = Sí
Bandeja introd. 1a página
Página 91
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Papel 2 (cont.)
Usar hoja intercalada
Vacía
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Impresos
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Normal
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Reciclado
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Color
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Especial1
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Especial2
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Especial3
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Membrete
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Etiquetas
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc. = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo papel hojas intercalad.
Página 92
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Papel 2 (cont.)
Tipo papel hojas intercalad.
(cont.)
Tarjeta
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc. = Selección
automática
Bond
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc. = Selección
automática
Preimpreso
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc. = Selección
automática
Transparencia
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc. = Bandeja
de desvío
Delgado
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Middle Thick
(Semigrueso)
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Grueso 1
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Página 93
Categoría
Opción
Restricción
Solución temporal
Papel 2 (cont.)
Tipo papel hojas intercalad.
(cont.)
Grueso 2
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Grueso 3
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc. = Bandeja
de desvío
Bandeja de desvío
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja1
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja2
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja3
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja4
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja3 (LCT)
Bandeja de alimentación = Bandeja
de desvío
Tipo de papel = Transparencia
Usar hoja intercalada = Vacía o Impresa
Bandeja intr. hojas interc.
Página 94
Hot Folders v2.x en Mac OS 10.4.x
Es posible que Hot Folders v2.x en una computadora Mac OS 10.4.x local o una ubicación de
red no reconozca los formatos de archivo enviados, aunque el archivo sea correcto y válido.
Esto suele producirse si los archivos están en una carpeta de red a la que se accede a través del
protocolo AFP. Esto no sucede si se accede a los archivos que están en una carpeta de red a
través de SMB.
Como solución temporal, configure todos los archivos enviados de Hot Folders con los
permisos “Lectura y escritura” o “Lectura”.
• Si los archivos están en la red, muévalos a su computadora local, cambie los permisos de
archivo y a continuación reenvíe los archivos a Hot Folders.
Si está utilizando una computadora Mac OS, debe en primer lugar desbloquear y cambiar
los permisos de archivo. Guarde los nuevos atributos de archivo como desbloqueados o
cambie el archivo de nuevo a bloqueado y a continuación, guarde los atributos.
• Si sus archivos están en su computadora local, revise y modifique los permisos del archivo
según sea necesario y a continuación, envíe los archivos a Hot Folders.
Remote Scan versión 5.3 y 5.4 en Mac OS X
Para salir de Remote Scan versión 5.3 y 5.4 en una computadora Mac OS X, utilice el mouse
para cerrar la ventana de aplicación de Remote Scan. No es posible salir de la aplicación desde
el menú principal ni pulsando Comando+Q.
Terminación en Mac OS X
Es posible que la posición de engrapado y el sentido de la impresión dúplex no sean los
esperados cuando utiliza cualquier combinación de valores de impresión dúplex y engrapado
para un trabajo impreso en una computadora Mac OS X. Si sucede esto, especifique el sentido
de la imagen que desea en la redefinición de orientación del controlador de impresora del
E-5000/E-3000.
Impresión de tamaño personalizado
El tamaño personalizado máximo es el siguiente:
• Pulgadas: 12" x 23,62
• Milímetros: 304,9 mm x 599,9 mm
Impresión desde Mac OS
Cuando se imprime desde una aplicación haciendo clic en el botón Imprimir, no se muestran
las opciones de impresión. En este caso, seleccione Imprimir en el menú Archivo.
Página 95
Command
WorkStation
Cancelación de varios trabajos
Cuando se cancelan varios trabajos con Command WorkStation, es posible que tarde un
tiempo inesperadamente largo en completar el proceso de cancelación.
De igual forma, cuando se cancelan trabajos de Creador de cuadernillos o trabajos con
muchas páginas también puede ser necesario un tiempo inesperadamente largo para
completar el proceso de cancelación.
Previsualizar al procesar
Puede ser necesario un tiempo inesperadamente largo para cancelar un trabajo o moverlo de
Trabajos activos a Trabajos impresos en Command WorkStation cuando está habilitada la
opción Previsualizar al procesar en la Configuración del E-5000/E-3000.
Adobe PageMaker
Cuando las propiedades del trabajo de un trabajo impreso con el PPD de Adobe PageMaker se
abren en Command WorkStation, un valor configurado podría no mostrarse correctamente.
Grupos de impresión
La función Grupos de impresión no se admite, a pesar de que se describe en la Ayuda de
Command WorkStation. La función Grupos de impresión ha sido sustituida por
Autentificación de usuario, que se configura en el controlador de impresora, si está habilitada
en la Configuración del E-5000/E-3000. Para obtener información acerca de la
Autentificación de usuario, consulte Instalación y configuración y Opciones de impresión.
Copia de seguridad y restauración de tipos
Con Command WorkStation, puede realizar una copia de seguridad de los tipos y
restaurarlos. Esta función se describe incorrectamente en la Ayuda de Command
WorkStation.
Tenga en cuenta estas instrucciones generales antes de realizar una copia de seguridad de los
tipos o restaurarlos:
• Sólo puede realizar una copia de seguridad y restaurar los tipos PostScript.
• Se hace una copia de seguridad o una restauración de todos los tipos. No puede seleccionar
tipos concretos.
• No realice copias de seguridad de los tipos en la unidad de disco interna que también
contenga el software del sistema del E-5000/E-3000.
• Restaure los tipos sólo al mismo E-5000/E-3000 en el que se realizó originalmente la copia
de seguridad de los tipos.
Página 96
PARA REALIZAR UNA COPIA DE SEGURIDAD DE LOS TIPOS O RESTAURARLOS
1 Inicie Command WorkStation e inicie una sesión con privilegios de Administrador.
2 Seleccione Administrar tipos en el menú Servidor.
3 Haga clic en Copia de seguridad o Restaurar.
4 En la ventana que aparece, desplácese a la carpeta en la que desea realizar la copia de
seguridad de los tipos o restaurarlos.
5 Haga clic en Aceptar.
Sobreimpresión compuesta
Si selecciona un trabajo duotono en Command WorkStation y selecciona Sobreimpresión
compuesta y a continuación procesa y pone en espera el trabajo, la parte duotono del trabajo
aparece dañada si visualiza el trabajo desde ImageViewer.
ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools conectado al E-5000/E-3000 en español
Si inicia ColorWise Pro Tools y se conecta a un E-5000/E-3000 en español desde una
computadora Mac OS X, algunos elementos del menú se muestran en francés en lugar
de en español.
Conexiones
externas
Conexión de medios USB
Internet Fax
No hay mensajes de error para las resoluciones no admitidas
Es posible que el E-5000/E-3000 no regrese al estado Libre después de insertar una unidad de
medios USB. Esto puede producirse cuando la unidad USB ha sido formateada en Windows,
lo que a veces hace que el E-5000/E-3000 intente arrancar desde la unidad. Si sucede esto,
borre el primer sector sin formatear la unidad.
Cuando se envía un Internet Fax con 100 ppp o 600 ppp (puntos por pulgada), el software
de exploración no le alerta de que esas resoluciones no se admiten. Las resoluciones de
exploración admitidas actualmente son 200 ppp, 300 ppp o 400 ppp.
Remote Scan
Limitaciones del tamaño de exploración
El límite de tamaño de archivo de un trabajo explorado es de 2 GB. Si intenta explorar un
trabajo grande que genera un archivo de más de 2 GB, la exploración no funciona. Como
solución temporal, divida los trabajos de exploración grandes en lotes más pequeños.
Página 97
Modo división
Cuando se utilizan los valores de modo división en Remote Scan, es posible que Remote Scan
nunca complete la exploración. Para completar el trabajo de exploración, pulse la tecla # en el
panel de pantalla de la copiadora.
Valores Modo Imagen
La siguiente tabla sustituye la tabla suministrada en la sección “Exploración desde el panel de
control de la copiadora” de Utilidades en el CD de documentación del usuario.
Exploración del panel de control
de la Copiadora
Nombre del
elemento
Selección
Modo Imagen
Blanco y negro
Escala de grises
Texto
Remote Scan
Modo color
Modo Imagen
Blanco y negro
Texto
Imagen
Imagen
Texto/imagen
Texto/imagen
Texto (OCR)
Texto (OCR)
Escala de grises
Escala de grises
Texto
Imagen
Texto/imagen
Color
Imagen
Texto/imagen
Color
Imagen
Texto/imagen
Texto
Configuración
de la red
Valores de DNS
Los valores de DNS configurados desde la Configuración de Command WorkStation o
Configurar de WebTools no son válidos. Configure los valores de DNS en Configuración
en el panel de pantalla de la copiadora.
Versienotities
Color Controller E-5000/E-3000, versie 1.0
Dit document bevat informatie over de Color Controller E-5000/E-3000-software versie 1.0.
O PMERKING : De term “E-5000/E-3000” verwijst in dit document naar de Color
Controller E-5000/E-3000. Met de term “kopieermachine” wordt altijd de hoofdeenheid
van de kopieermachine bedoeld.
Afdrukken
Lange bestandsnamen met PCL5c
Wanneer u een PCL5c-document met een lange bestandsnaam afdrukt, is het mogelijk dat
de naam van het document op een extra pagina wordt afgedrukt.
Afwerkingssets voor gemengde media met Blanco invoegen
Als u afwerkingssets opgeeft voor elk hoofdstuk van een geniete taak met gemengde media
en vervolgens een blanco pagina invoegt voor elk geselecteerd hoofdstuk, wordt de taak met
verkeerde nietsets uitgevoerd. Gebruik de opties “Elk hoofdstuk definiëren als afzonderlijk
afwerkingsset” en “Blanco invoegen” niet tegelijk.
De installatieopties in het printerstuurprogramma van Windows 2000/XP updaten
De lijst Geïnstalleerde opties wordt in het printerstuurprogramma van Windows 2000/XP
niet correct geüpdatet als u “Fiery updaten bij openen” selecteert. Om de geïnstalleerde
opties in het printerstuurprogramma correct weer te geven, selecteert u in het printerstuurprogramma “Fiery updaten bij openen” en klikt u op Update.
Beeldverfijning
Wanneer u voor Beeldverfijning Standaardwaarde van Printer kiest, is het resultaat hetzelfde
als met de instelling “Beeldverfijning=Uit”.
Fout wegens te veel taken die op verwerking wachten
Als het aantal taken die in de wachtrij van de E-5000/E-3000 op verwerking wachten het
maximum van 2.500 nadert, zal de E-5000/E-3000 geen bijkomende taken aanvaarden en
wordt een foutmelding gegeven.
Grote bestanden afdrukken
Als u bestanden wilt afdrukken die groter zijn 4 GB, moet u dit doen per paginabereik, zodat
de taak wordt gesplitst in afzonderlijke bestanden met een maximale grootte van 2 GB.
Copyright 2006 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
Bestelnummer: 45058080
30 november 2006
Pagina 100
FreeForm-taken met de optie Documentenserver
Om een FreeForm-taak op de E-5000/E-3000 naar Documentenserver te sturen, moet u
Documentenserver selecteren voor u het FreeForm-model aanmaakt. Als u dit niet doet,
wordt de taak niet afgedrukt en verschijnt er een fout in het takenlogboek.
Documentenserver
U kunt geen 12" x 18" documenten en documenten met aangepast formaat bewaren met
Documentenserver.
EFI Impose op Documentenserver
U kunt een ingeslagen taak niet in Documentenserver opslaan. Impose wordt niet door
Documentenserver ondersteund.
Afdrukken naar documentenserver
De standaardinstelling van Beeldkwaliteit is Extra fijn. Wanneer u gegevens verstuurt naar
de Documentenserver om ze af te drukken, vergt de standaardinstelling Extra fijn veel ruimte
op de vaste schijf. U kiest wellicht beter Fijn of Grof. De waarden voor de instellingen van
Kwaliteitsmodus zijn de volgende:
• Extra fijn: Veel schijfruimte
• Fijn: Matige hoeveelheid schijfruimte
• Grof: Geringe hoeveelheid schijfruimte
Fijne lijnen afdrukken
Fijne lijnen in een document worden mogelijk niet afgedrukt, wordengekarteld afgedrukt of
leveren een onverwacht afdrukresultaat op. Als dit probleem optreedt, selecteert u Tekst voor
de optie Dithering op het tabblad Beeldkwaliteit van het printerstuurprogramma.
Het systeem rebooten terwijl afdrukken bezig is
Als u het systeem probeert te rebooten terwijl de E-5000/E-3000 bezig is met afdrukken,
kunnen er onverwachte resultaten optreden. Wacht altijd tot op het scherm Niet actief wordt
weergegeven voordat u het systeem opnieuw start.
Beeldverschuiving
De instelling Beeldverschuiving is ongeldig wanneer de instelling N-up (Katernen) wordt
gebruikt.
Pagina 101
Gemengde papierformaten nieten
Gemengde papierformaten nieten optie wordt alleen ondersteund op SR3020/SR3030
voor de E-5000. Als u deze instelling met andere afwerkingseenheden gebruikt, kunt u
u onverwachte resultaten krijgen.
Virtuele printers
Wanneer u de taakeigenschappen voor een virtuele printer opent, worden de instellingen
voor gemengde media niet correct weergegeven. Gebruik Command Workstation om
de instellingen voor gemengde media te bevestigen of te wijzigen. Als het venster
Taakeigenschappen voor een virtuele printer toevallig in het dialoogvenster Virtuele
printers wordt geopend, drukt u op Annuleren om het venster te sluiten. Druk niet op OK.
Boekje maken
Afdrukken op Nobi-formaat met Boekje maken
Met Boekje maken wordt een ingeslagen taak niet correct afgedrukt op aangepast papier op
Nobi-formaat. Aangepaste paginaformaten worden niet ondersteund. U moet voor dit type
van taak een beschikbaar papierformaat kiezen.
Afdrukken met Standaardboekje met N-up opmaak
Afdrukken met Standaardboekje met N-up opmaak wordt niet ondersteund.
Inslag
Als u de optie Gemengde media opgeeft voor taken met de optie Boekje maken, zoals Door
de rug geniet, Op de rug gesneden, Dubbele afdruk, en Snel afdrukken, kan dat leiden tot
onverwachte afdrukresultaten. Het kan zijn dat afdruktaken met de optie Boekje maken niet
juist worden geniet of geperforeerd. Boekje maken en 2 midden kunt u afzonderlijk instellen.
Als u het document dat wordt ingeslagen in een boekje wilt nieten, selecteert u alleen de
optie 2 midden onder de afdrukoptie Nieten.
Liggende gegevens met dubbelzijdig afdrukken en de instelling Dubbele afdruk/
Snel afdrukken
Als u de optie Dubbelzijdig afdrukken met Dubbele afdruk/Snel afdrukken selecteert voor
liggende gegevens, zal de bindrichting van de afdruktaken het tegengestelde zijn van wat
u hebt geselecteerd. Bijvoorbeeld:
• Als “Openen naar boven” geselecteerd is, wordt de taak afgedrukt in de richting
“Openen naar links”.
• Als “Openen naar links” geselecteerd is, wordt de taak afgedrukt in de richting
“Openen naar boven”.
Voor de instelling Dubbele afdruk kunt u het probleem oplossen door Afdrukstand negeren
te gebruiken op het tabblad Lay-out van het printerstuurprogramma.
Pagina 102
Beperkingen van Boekje maken
De volgende beperkingen gelden voor Boekje maken:
• Wanneer blanco pagina’s worden ingevoegd in een taak als gevolg van het opgeven van
instellingen voor Boekje maken, worden de blanco pagina’s geteld als afgedrukte zwartwitpagina’s.
• Schaal, Passend maken of Aanpassen (op het tabblad Lay-out van het venster
Eigenschappen voor document) zijn niet van toepassing wanneer instellingen voor
Boekje maken worden gebruikt voor een taak.
• Als u de instelling Snel afdrukken selecteert voor Boekje maken, zijn de instellingen
voor Boekjesomslag niet beschikbaar.
• Er kunnen geen instellingen voor Boekje maken worden opgegeven voor een Adobe
PDF-bestand met beveiligingsinstellingen.
• Wanneer u instellingen voor Boekje maken gebruikt, kan de optie Witte PPT-achtergrond
wissen op het tabblad FreeForm niet worden geselecteerd.
• Het afdrukken van een grote taak met de instelling Dubbele afdruk voor Boekje maken
kan lang duren.
• Wanneer u een groot aantal documenten afdrukt met Boekje maken, is het mogelijk dat
het afdrukken langer duurt dan u had verwacht.
Beperkingen van de directe verbinding
Taken, of informatie die verband houdt met taken, die naar de directe verbinding worden
verzonden, worden niet opgeslagen op de vaste schijf. Met de directe verbinding kunnen
taken of paginarasters niet worden opgeslagen op schijf. Daardoor zijn geen bewerkingen
mogelijk die toegang tot de schijf vereisen. Deze bewerkingen omvatten:
• In de wachtrij plaatsen van PDF-taken
PDF-taken moeten worden opgeslagen op schijf omdat het interpretatieprogramma
directe toegang moet hebben tot het bestand. De meeste PDF-taken kunnen niet
worden verwerkt als een gegevensstroom zoals PostScript. PDF-taken die naar
de directe verbinding worden verzonden vanuit Command WorkStation of het
printerstuurprogramma worden omgeleid naar de afdrukwachtrij. PDF-taken die
naar de directe verbinding worden verzonden via LPR worden niet uitgevoerd.
• Afdrukken van VDP-taken naar de directe verbinding
VDP-taken die naar de directe verbinding worden verzonden, worden omgeleid
naar de afdrukwachtrij. (Raadpleeg Variabele gegevens afdrukken op de cd met
gebruikersdocumentatie voor meer informatie.)
Pagina 103
• Grote taken afdrukken in omgekeerde volgorde
Als u wilt afdrukken in omgekeerde volgorde, moet u de volledige taak verwerken voor het
afdrukken. Als de taak te groot is voor het geheugen, wordt ze niettemin (in omgekeerde
volgorde) afgedrukt, maar worden pagina’s opgeslagen op schijf.
• Grote taken sorteren
Sorteren wordt niet ondersteund om dezelfde reden als het afdrukken in omgekeerde
volgorde. Houd er rekening mee dat Sorteren wordt uitgeschakeld voor taken die worden
afgedrukt naar de directe verbinding.
• FreeForm-taken, met de volgende PPD-opties:
– Boekje maken
– Scheidingen combineren
– Opslaan voor snel afdrukken
– Paginavolgorde
– Dubbelzijdig afdrukken
– Sorteren
– Model maken
– Model gebruiken
WebTools
Postvakken maken
Wanneer u in Configure een postvak maakt met LDAP en de Globale adreslijst, moet u de
domeinnaam van de gebruiker invullen. Als u de domeinnaam van de gebruiker niet toevoegt,
bijvoorbeeld, <Domeinnaam>/:<Gebruiker>, herkent de E-5000/E-3000 de naam van het
postvak niet.
Service Location Protocol
U kunt in de Configure Web Tool geen Service Location Protocol (SLP) instellen.
U kunt dit probleem omzeilen door SLP in te stellen via het scherm van de kopieermachine.
EULA-dialoogvenster
Als u met de Configure Web Tool geen verbinding kunt maken met PrintMe, verschijnt
een leeg dialoogvenster. Negeer dit dialoogvenster door op Annuleren te klikken.
Webdownloads
Wanneer u Windows-software downloadt, is het mogelijk dat de naam van de software
niet correct wordt weergeven, als de taal verschilt van de huidige taalconfiguratie van
de E-5000/E-3000. Installeer in dit geval de vereiste software van de cd User Software
(PS Printer Drivers) of cd User Software (Utilities).
Pagina 104
Internet Explorer 7
Als u WebTools gebruikt in Internet Explorer 7, is het mogelijk dat u gedwongen wordt
om Internet Explorer te sluiten.
Help
Helpbestanden
De helpbestanden voor de Fiery-hulpprogramma’s zijn ontwikkeld voor Microsoft Internet
Explorer v5.5 of later. Als u andere browsers, zoals Safari, of vorige versies van Internet
Explorer gebruikt, worden de helpbestanden mogelijk niet correct weergegeven.
Met Microsoft Internet Explorer op een Windows XP-computer met Service Pack 2 worden
de helpbestanden mogelijk niet of niet correct weergegeven in de volgende situaties:
• Als uw browser een pop-upblokkeertoepassing gebruikt, kan deze helpbestanden
blokkeren. In dit geval moet u de pop-upblokkeertoepassing tijdelijk uitschakelen.
• Als in uw browser de geavanceerde Internet-optie voor het weergeven van meldingen
over scriptfouten is ingeschakeld, verschijnt mogelijk een waarschuwingsvenster voordat
de pagina van het helpbestand wordt weergegeven. U kunt dit waarschuwingsvenster
vermijden door de optie “Melding van elke scriptfout weergeven” op het tabblad
Geavanceerd in het dialoogvenster Internet-opties uit te schakelen.
• Er kan ook een waarschuwingsbericht worden weergegeven in de statusbalk, maar deze
fout heeft geen invloed op de inhoud van het helpbestand.
Safari
Met Safari op Mac OS X-systemen is het mogelijk dat helpbestanden niet of niet correct
worden weergegeven in de volgende situatie:
• Wanneer u Hot Folders start met Safari op Mac OS X-computers, is het mogelijk dat de
helpbestanden niet correct worden geladen en dat de melding “Loading data...” (Gegevens
worden geladen) wordt weergeven terwijl er niets gebeurt. Sluit in dit geval Safari af en
start de helpbestanden opnieuw. Als het probleem aanhoudt, gebruikt u Internet
Explorer v5.5 of hoger.
• Wanneer u Safari gebruikt op een Mac OS X-systeem en de muis op een item in
Command WorkStation Help plaatst, kan links van de afbeelding een kaderlijn
verschijnen.
• Bij het gebruik van Safari v1.2 of v1.03 op Mac OS X-computers, worden de teksten
“Volgende”, “Vorige” en “Show in Contents” (In inhoud tonen) verkeerd weergegeven
in het eerste helpvenster van Command WorkStation.KL Als dit gebeurt, gebruikt u
Mac OS X 10.4.5 met Safari 2.0.3 of Internet Explorere v5.5 of later.
Pagina 105
Windows
Weergave van het tabblad Accessoires
Als de printereigenschappen van het E-5000/E-3000-printerstuurprogramma niet correct
worden weergegeven, vermindert u ook de resolutie en de kleurkwaliteit in de weergaveeigenschappen op het configuratiescherm van de Windows-computer.
Aangepaste papierformaten opslaan
In het E-5000/E-3000-printerstuurprogramma in Windows XP wordt een aangepast
papierformaat niet ondersteund voor het maken van sjablonen voor later gebruik.
Mac OS X
Beeldverschuiving met dubbelzijdig afdrukken
Als u op een -systeem de optie beeldverschuiving gebruikt met instellingen van meer dan
twee pagina’s voor dubbelzijdig afdrukken (duplex), kan de afbeelding op de derde pagina
vervormd zijn. Dit wordt veroorzaakt door het printerstuurprogramma van Mac OS X.
Er bestaat momenteel geen manier om het probleem te omzeilen.
Mediatype Thick1 en Thick2 met Nieten
U kunt Thick1 en Thick2 als mediatype selecteren wanneer Nieten geselecteerd is in het
Mac OS X-printerstuurprogramma. Deze combinatie wordt echter niet ondersteund.
PDF- of PS-bestanden opslaan
Wanneer u Beeldverschuiving instelt met instellingen voor dubbelzijdig afdrukken (duplex),
het bestand opslaat als PDF of PostScript (PS) en het vervolgens afdrukt, wordt de taak
enkelzijdig afgedrukt zonder de instellingen voor Beeldverschuiving. Als u afdrukt met de
instellingen van het stuurprogramma zonder het bestand op te slaan als PS of PDF, wordt
de taak afgedrukt met de juiste instellingen.
Conflicten tussen afdrukopties oplossen in het printerstuurprogramma
voor Mac OS X v10.4
Wanneer u afdrukopties wijzigt in het printerstuurprogramma voor Mac OS X v10.4, meer
bepaald in het deelvenster Printerfuncties, worden conflicten tussen afdrukopties niet goed
opgelost.
Als u bijvoorbeeld een instelling wilt selecteren voor de afdrukoptie Boekje maken, moet
de afdrukoptie Dubbelzijdig afdrukken worden ingesteld op Aan voordat de afdrukopties
van Boekje maken kunnen worden geselecteerd. De afdrukopties van Boekje maken zijn
afhankelijk van de afdrukoptie Dubbelzijdig afdrukken.
In vorige Mac OS-versies werden conflicten tussen afdrukopties automatisch opgelost.
Volg de onderstaande procedure om conflicten tussen afdrukopties in het deelvenster
Printerfuncties op te lossen.
Pagina 106
CONFLICTEN TUSSEN AFDRUKOPTIES OPLOSSEN IN HET DEELVENSTER PRINTERFUNCTIES
1 Selecteer een ander deelvenster.
Selecteer bijvoorbeeld het deelvenster Overzicht als u zich in het deelvenster Printerfuncties
bevond.
Nadat u het deelvenster Printerfuncties hebt vernieuwd, komen de geselecteerde
functiesetgroep en de weergegeven afdrukopties niet overeen. Bijvoorbeeld, als de laatste
functieset die u hebt gewijzigd Beeld 1 was, wordt deze nu weergegeven met de afdrukopties
voor de eerste functieset, bijvoorbeeld Afwerking 1.
2 Selecteer de Functiesets groep opnieuw (bijvoorbeeld, Beeld 1) om de weergegeven
afdrukopties te vernieuwen.
3 Selecteer de juiste afdrukopties en druk de taak af.
Pagina 107
Beperkingen op het afdrukken
Het Mac OS X-printerstuurprogramma geeft niet-ondersteunde afdrukopties in het grijs
weer. Raadpleeg de volgende tabel met beperkingen op het afdrukken onder Mac OS X.
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Afwerking 2
Perforaties
Twee gaten
Perforeren = Links, Rechts, Boven
Drie gaten
Perforeren = Links, Rechts, Boven
Vier gaten
Perforeren = Links, Rechts, Boven
Vier gaten gegroepeerd
Perforeren = Links, Rechts, Boven
Taakinfo
Documentenserver
Aan
Sorteren = Uit
Opmaak 1
Boekje maken
Door de rug geniet
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Door rug geniet
(rechts bind.)
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Op de rug gesneden
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Op rug gesn.
(rechts binden)
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Automatische
ladekeuze
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen naar
links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Opmaak 2
Boekjesomslagbron
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door
de rug geniet (rechts binden)
Handinvoer
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Lade1
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen
naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door
de rug geniet (rechts binden)
Lade2
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen
naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door
de rug geniet (rechts binden)
Pagina 108
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Opmaak 2 (vervolg)
Boekjesomslagbron
(vervolg)
Lade3
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen
naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door
de rug geniet (rechts binden)
Lade4
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, Openen naar
links Boekje maken = Op de rug gesnedenDubbele afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door
de rug geniet (rechts binden)
Lade3 (LCT)
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, Openen naar
links Boekje maken = Op de rug gesnedenDubbele afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door
de rug geniet (rechts binden)
Boekjesvooromslagmodus
Alleen op voorkant
afdrukken
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen
naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de
rug geniet (rechts binden)
Alleen op achterkant
afdrukken
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de
rug geniet (rechts binden)
Op beide kanten
afdrukken
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de
rug geniet (rechts binden)
Pagina 109
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Opmaak 2 (vervolg)
Boekjesvooromslagmodus
Blanco
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
(vervolg)
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door de
rug geniet (rechts binden)
Boekjesachteromslagmodus
Alleen op voorkant
afdrukken
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen naar
links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de rug
geniet (rechts binden)
Alleen op achterkant
afdrukken
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de rug
geniet (rechts binden)
Op beide kanten
afdrukken
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de rug
geniet (rechts binden)
Blanco
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Uit, of Openen naar
links
Boekje maken = Op de rug gesneden-Dubbele
afdruk
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de rug
geniet (rechts binden)
Aanpassing voor centreren
Onder X
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de rug
geniet (rechts binden), Op rug gesneden, of Op
rug gesneden (Rechts binden)
Aanpassing voor opkruipen
Normaal
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, Door de rug
geniet (rechts binden)
Dik
Dubbelzijdig afdrukken = Openen naar links
Boekje maken = Door de rug geniet, of Door de
rug geniet (rechts binden)
Pagina 110
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Media 1
Mediasoort
Etiketten
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Transparant
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Dik 3
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Normaal
Eerste pagina = Aan
Recycled
Eerste pagina = Aan
Kleur
Eerste pagina = Aan
Speciaal1
Eerste pagina = Aan
Speciaal2
Eerste pagina = Aan
Speciaal3
Eerste pagina = Aan
Met briefhoofd
Eerste pagina = Aan
Etiketten
Eerste pagina = Aan
Invoerlade eerste pagina = Handinvoer
Kaarten
Eerste pagina = Aan
Bankpostpapier
Eerste pagina = Aan
Voorgedrukt
Eerste pagina = Aan
Media 2
Mediasoort eerste pag.
Pagina 111
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Media 2 (vervolg)
Mediasoort eerste pag.
(vervolg)
Transparant
Eerste pagina = Aan
Invoerlade eerste pagina = Handinvoer
Dun
Eerste pagina = Aan
Middeldik
Eerste pagina = Aan
Dik1
Eerste pagina = Aan
Dik2
Eerste pagina = Aan
Dik3
Eerste pagina = Aan
Invoerlade eerste pagina = Handinvoer
Handinvoer
Eerste pagina = Aan
Lade1
Eerste pagina = Aan
Lade2
Eerste pagina = Aan
Lade3
Eerste pagina = Aan
Lade4
Eerste pagina = Aan
Lade3(LCT)
Eerste pagina = Aan
Blanco
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Afgedrukt
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Invoerlade eerste pagina
Achterblad gebruiken
Pagina 112
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Media 2 (vervolg)
Mediasoort achtervel
Normaal
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Recycled
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Kleur
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Speciaal1
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Speciaal2
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Speciaal3
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Met briefhoofd
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Etiketten
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel = Handinvoer
Kaarten
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel = Automatische ladekeuze
Bankpostpapier
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel = Automatische ladekeuze
Voorgedrukt
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel = Automatische ladekeuze
Transparant
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel = Handinvoer
Pagina 113
Categorie
Optie
Beperking
Oplossing
Media 2 (vervolg)
Mediatype achtervel
(vervolg)
Dun
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Middeldik
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Dik1
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Dik2
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Dik3
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel = Handinvoer
Handinvoer
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Lade1
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Lade2
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Lade3
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Lade4
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Lade3 (LCT)
Papierinvoer = Handinvoer
Mediasoort = Transparant
Achtervel gebruiken = Blanco of Bedrukt
Invoerlade achtervel
Pagina 114
Hot Folders v2 op Mac OS 10.4.x
Bestanden die op een lokale Mac OS 10.4.x-computer of netwerklocatie naar Hot Folders
worden verzonden, zullen de verzonden bestandsformaten misschien niet herkennen, ook
al is het bestand correct en geldig. Dit gebeurt courant wanneer de bestanden zich in een
netwerkmap bevinden die via het Apple Filing Protocol (AFP) wordt bereikt. Dit gebeurt
niet wanneer de bestanden zich in een netwerkmap bevinden die via SMB wordt bereikt.
Om dit probleem te omzeilen, stelt u alle verzonden Hot Folders-bestanden in met
machtigingen “Lezen en schrijven” of “Lezen”.
• Als uw bestanden zich op het netwerk bevinden, verplaatst u ze naar uw lokale computer,
wijzigt u de bestandsmachtigingen en verzendt u de bestanden opnieuw naar Hot Folders.
Als u op een Mac OS-computer werkt, moet u de bestandsmachtigingen eerst
ontgrendelen en wijzigen. Sla de nieuwe bestandsattributen op als ontgrendeld,
of vergrendel het bestand opnieuw en sla de attributen daarna op.
• Als uw bestanden zich op uw lokale computer bevinden, controleert en wijzigt
u de bestandsmachtigingen en verzendt u de bestanden opnieuw naar Hot Folders.
Remote Scan versie 5.3 en 5.4 op Mac OS X
Om Remote Scan versie 5.3 en 5.4 op een Mac OS X-computer af te sluiten, moet u de
muis gebruiken om het toepassingsvenster Remote Scan te sluiten. U kunt de toepassing niet
afsluiten via het hoofdmenu of door op Command+Q te drukken.
Afwerking in Mac OS X
Om het even welke combinatie van instellingen voor dubbelzijdig afdrukken en nieten voor
een taak die wordt afgedrukt vanaf een Mac OS X-computer kan een onverwachte nietpositie
en afdrukrichting opleveren. In dit geval geeft u de gewenste beeldrichting op in de
vervangende afdrukstandinstelling van het E-5000/E-3000-printerstuurprogramma.
Afdrukken op aangepast formaat
Het maximale aangepaste formaat is als volgt ingesteld:
• Inch: 12" x 23,62"
• Millimeter: 304,9mm x 599,9 mm
Afdrukken in Mac OS
Als u vanuit een toepassing afdrukt door te klikken op de knop Afdrukken, worden de
afdrukopties niet weergegeven. Kies in plaats daarvan de opdracht Afdrukken in het
menu Bestand.
Pagina 115
Command
WorkStation
Verscheidene taken annuleren
Wanneer u met Command WorkStation verscheidene taken annuleert, kan het
annulatieproces langer duren van u verwachtte.
Wanneer u taken met Boekje maken of taken met een groot aantal pagina’s annuleert, kan dit
eveneens langer duren dan u verwachtte.
Voorbeeld tijdens verwerking
Het kan onverwacht lang duren om een taak te annuleren of ze Actieve taken naar Afgedrukte
taken te verplatsen in Command WorkStation wanneer Voorbeeldweergave tijdens
verwerking ingeschakeld is in de Setup van E-5000/E-3000.
Adobe PageMaker
Wanneer de taakeigenschappen van een met Adobe PageMaker PPD afgedrukte taak in
Command WorkStation worden geopend, is het mogelijk dat een ingestelde waarde niet
correct wordt weergegeven.
Printergroepen
De functie Afdrukgroepen wordt niet ondersteund, hoewel ze in de online help van
Command WorkStation wordt vermeld. Afdrukgroepen is vervangen door Authenticatie
gebruiker. Deze functie wordt ingesteld in het printerstuurprogramma als ze in de Setup van
E-5000/E-3000 ingeschakeld is. Raadpleeg Configuratie en instellingen en Afdrukopties voor
meer informatie over de Authenticatie gebruiker.
Reserverkopieën van lettertypen maken en ze terugzetten
Met Command WorkStation kunt u een reservekopie van letertypen maken en ze terugzetten.
Deze functie wordt verkeerd beschreven in Command WorkStation Help.
Volg deze instructies om een reservekopie van lettertypen te maken en ze terug te zetten:
• Een reservekopie maken van PostScript-lettertypen en ze terugzetten.
• Van alle lettertypen wordt een reservekopie gemaakt, of ze worden hersteld. U kunt geen
afzonderlijke lettertypen selecteren.
• Maak geen reservekopie van lettertypen op een interne vaste schijf die ook software van de
E-5000/E-3000 bevat.
• Zet lettertypen alleen terug naar dezelfde E-5000/E-3000 waarop ze zich oorspronkelijk
bevonden.
Pagina 116
EEN RESERVEKOPIE MAKEN VAN LETTERTYPEN OF LETTERTYPEN TERUGZETTEN
1 Start Command WorkStation en meld u met beheerdersrechten aan.
2 Kies Lettertypen beheren in het menu Server.
3 Klik op Reservekopie maken of Terugzetten.
4 Ga in het venster dat verschijnt naar de map waar u de reservekopie van de lettertypen wilt
maken of waar de kopie die u wilt terugzetten zich bevindt.
5 Klik op OK.
Samengestelde overdruk
Als u een duotoontaak selecteert in Command WorkStation, Samengestelde overdruk
selecteert en de taak vervolgens verwerkt en blokkeert, lijkt het duotoongedeelte van de taak
beschadigd wanneer u de taak met Image Viewer bekijkt.
ColorWise Pro Tools
ColorWise Pro Tools verbonden met een Spaanse E-5000/E-3000
Als u ColorWise Pro Tools start en op een Mac OS X-computer verbinding maakt met een
Spaanse E-5000/E-3000, worden sommige menu-items in het Frans weergegeven in plaats
van in het Spaans.
Externe
verbindingen
Verbinding met USB-media
Internet Fax
Er wordt geen foutbericht weergegeven voor niet-ondersteunde resoluties
Het is mogelijk dat de E-5000/E-3000 niet naar Niet actief terugkeert nadat het USBmediastation aangesloten is. Dit kan gebeuren wanneer het USB-station in Windows
geformatteerd is, wat er soms toe leidt dat de E-5000/E-3000 vanaf het station probeert te
starten. Als dit gebeurt, moet u de eerste sector wissen zonder het station te formatteren.
Wanneer u een Internet Fax met 100 dpi of 600 dpi (dots per inch) verzendt, waarschuwt
de scansoftware u niet dat deze resoluties niet worden ondersteund. Momenteel worden de
scanresoluties 200 dpi, 300 en 400 dpi ondersteund.
Pagina 117
Remote Scan
Beperkingen voor het scanformaat
De bestandsgrootte voor een gescande taak is beperkt tot 2 GB. Als u een grote taak
probeert te scannen die resulteert in een bestandsgrootte van meer dan 2 GB, zal het scannen
mislukken. U kunt dit probleem omzeilen door grote scantaken te splitsen in kleinere delen.
Splitsmodus
Wanneer u instellingen voor Splitsmodus met Remote Scan gebruikt, is het mogelijk dat
Remote Scan de scan nooit voltooit. Om een scantaak te voltooien, drukt u op de toets # op
het scherm van de kopieermachine.
Instellingen van Afbeeldingsmodus
De volgende tabel vervangt de tabel in het gedeelte “Scanning from the copier control panel”
(Scannen vanaf het bedieningspaneel van de kopieermachine) in Hupprogramma’s op de cd
met gebruikersdocumentatie.
Scannen via het bedieningspaneel
van de kopieermachine
Itemnaam
Selectie
Afbeeldingsmodus
Zwart-wit
Grijswaarden
Tekst
Remote Scan
Kleurmodus
Afbeeldingsmodus
Zwart-wit
Tekst
Afbeelding
Afbeelding
Tekst/Afbeelding
Tekst/Afbeelding
Tekst (OCR)
Tekst (OCR)
Grijswaarden
Grijswaarden
Tekst
Afbeelding
Tekst/Afbeelding
Kleur
Afbeelding
Tekst/Afbeelding
Kleur
Afbeelding
Tekst/Afbeelding
Tekst
Pagina 118
Netwerkinstellingen
DNS-instellingen
DNS-instellingen die in de Setup van Command WorkStation of in WebTools Configure zijn
gekozen, zijn niet geldig. Kies de DNS-instellingen op het scherm van de kopieermachine.
G8786722
Fiery® Color Server
Glossary
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered
under Legal Notices for this product.
45055203
01 March 2006
GLOSSARY
3
GLOSSARY
This Glossary contains some terms that are industry concepts and may not be explicitly
referenced in the documentation set. The term “Print Server” refers to the controller from
EFI that processes jobs for your print device.
A
additive color model
A system in which colors are produced by combining red, green, and blue light (the additive
primaries). An RGB video monitor is based on an additive color model.
additive primaries
Red, green, and blue light used in additive color systems. When blended together in proper
amounts, these colors of light produce white.
AppleTalk
Network communication protocol designed by Apple Computer, Inc.
artifact
A visible defect in an image, usually caused by limitations in the input or output process
(hardware or software); a blemish or error.
Atlas PrintShop Mail-Fiery Version
A variable data printing application that supports FreeForm, FreeForm 2, and PostScript.
authoring tool
A software application used to create text or images, or to define layouts for documents.
B
banding
Visible steps between shades in a color gradient.
bit depth
Amount of information used for each pixel in a raster image. Black-and-white images require
only one bit per pixel. Grayscale images with 256 shades of gray require 8 bits (or 1 byte) per
pixel. Photographic quality color images can require 24 bits per pixel (RGB images) or 32 bits
per pixel (CMYK images).
GLOSSARY
4
Bitmap (BMP)
A graphics file format established by Microsoft; native to the Windows operating system.
bitmap (or raster)
An image made up of small squares arranged in a grid. Each square in the grid is a pixel.
The number of pixels per inch defines the resolution of a bitmap.
blasting
An undesirable effect that occurs when excess amounts of toner, possibly combined with
certain types of paper stock, cause objects in an image to spread beyond the boundaries
defined in the file.
brightness
Both the saturation and lightness of product color.
C
calibration
The process of adjusting the basic setting of a monitor, printer, or other device to standard
values in order to ensure uniform and consistent results over time. Calibration helps assure
predictable and consistent printing results.
calibration target (or calibration set)
A set of measurements that describe the expected density response of a printing device.
Calibration targets are associated with the output profile of the device.
CIE
The International Commission on Illumination, abbreviated as CIE from its French title
Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage, is an organization devoted to international
cooperation and exchange of information among its member countries on all matters relating
to the science and art of lighting. The CIE developed mathematical models to quantify light
sources, objects and observers as a function of wavelength, which led to the development of a
basic color space for plotting colors.
CIEbased colors (A, ABC, DEF, DEFG)
Device-independent color spaces that are produced by color management outside of the Print
Server, such as application software, operating systems, or printer drivers, and are applied at
the user’s computer.
CMS
See color management system.
GLOSSARY
5
CMYK
A subtractive color model that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (process colors), and is
used in color printing; a color model used in the printing of colors in four-color process
printing.
coated media
Media that is coated to enhance print quality. The coating allows the media to be printed
without allowing significant toner or ink absorption, thereby preventing blurriness or lack
of contrast.
color channel
A single-color image that can be edited separately from the other color channels in a color
space; for example, the red channel of an RGB image.
color gamut
See gamut.
color management system (CMS)
System used to match color across different input, display, and output devices.
color rendering dictionary
See CRD (Color Rendering Dictionary).
color separation
The process of separating a color image into the color components for printing: cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black. Also refers to the four sheets of film that result from the process
of separating a color image.
color space
A model for representing color in terms of measurable values, such as the amount of red,
green, and blue in an image. RGB and CMYK color spaces correspond to color devices
(monitors and printers, respectively). Other color spaces, such as CIE Lab, are based on
mathematical models and are device-independent (that is, not based on the color response of
a particular device). See gamut.
colorant
An ink, dye, toner, paint, or other pigment that modifies the color of media to which it
is applied.
ColorWise
See ColorWise color management.
ColorWise color management
An ICC-open color management solution, which is an easy-to-use system that addresses the
needs of both casual and experienced color management users.
GLOSSARY
6
component
In variable data printing, an element such as text, a graphic, or a photograph that is printed
on a page.
composite printer
Any output device that can print directly in color without first creating color separations.
A composite print can be used as an early proof of an offset print job.
Configuration page
A list of current settings for the configuration, or Setup, of the Print Server. Information on
the Configuration page includes network settings, amount of hard disk space, and default
print settings.
consumable
Material such as ink, toner, paper, or lubricants that must be replenished regularly in order for
the print device to function properly.
continuous tone (contone)
A photographic image that contains gradient tones from black to white (such as a 35mm
transparency or a photograph). Continuous tones cannot be reproduced in that form for
printing, but must be screened to translate the image into dots.
cover page
A page that the Print Server prints at the end of a job, summarizing information such as the
user’s name and number of pages.
CRD (Color Rendering Dictionary)
A feature that maintains the best possible translation of color from one color device to
another. A CRD is used by the color management system or the PostScript interpreter of the
Print Server when converting data between color spaces. The Print Server includes several
CRDs, each of which provides a different color rendering style.
Creo VPS (Variable Print Specification)
A variable data printing language.
custom color system
A system of named color swatches that can be matched on press using spot colors or
approximated using process colors. PANTONE and TruMatch are examples of custom
color systems.
custom page size
A user-defined page size used for printing. Custom sizes are defined in the printer driver.
GLOSSARY
7
D
DCS (Desktop Color Separation)
A data file standard that assists in making color separations with desktop publishing systems.
Five files are created: four color files (one each for C, M, Y, and K) and a composite color
preview file of the color image. DCS allows an image-editing application to perform color
separation and pass it through to final output with its integrity intact.
densitometer
An instrument commonly used in the graphic arts industry to measure density according to a
specified standard.
density
A measurement of the light-absorbing quality of a photographic or printed image.
desktop color separation
See DCS.
device-dependent colors
Colors directly related to their representation on an output device. Color values map directly
or via simple conversions to the application of device colorants, such as quantities of ink or
intensities of display phosphors. Device-dependent colors are controlled precisely for a
particular device, but the results may not be consistent between different devices. Examples of
device-dependent color spaces are DeviceRGB, DeviceCMYK, and DeviceGray.
device-independent colors
Colors described using a model based on human visual perception instead of being
device-specific.
DIC
A Japanese standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing.
Direct connection
A print connection on the Print Server, similar to the Print queue and Hold queue, except
that jobs are not spooled to the Direct connection; they are printed only as the Print Server
accepts data.
DNS (Domain Name System)
A set of protocols and services on a TCP/IP network that uses a distributed database for
translating names of network nodes into IP addresses. With DNS enabled on your network
and on the Print Server, users can access the Print Server (for example, to use WebTools) by
its DNS name instead of its IP address.
duplex
To print on both sides of a page.
GLOSSARY
8
E
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
A PostScript file format designed to be embedded in another PostScript stream.
Euroscale
A European standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing.
F
finishing
Processing printed output, for example, by stapling, folding, hole punching, or collating.
flexography
A printing technology that uses flexible raised-image plates. Flexography can be used to print
on non-flat materials such as cans.
four-color printer
A printing device that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink or toner.
FreeForm
A variable data printing technology that works with variable data printing solutions from EFI.
It allows data that is used many times in a variable data printing job to be processed just once,
enabling the print device to run at or near rated speed.
FreeForm 2
FreeForm 2 expands FreeForm technology by allowing you to determine page conditions and
rules for printing a job containing multiple master pages. Unlike FreeForm, FreeForm 2
requires a variable data printing application that specifically supports FreeForm 2.
G
gamma
A numeric value representing the relationship (gamma curve) between the input and output
values of a color device. If gamma equals 1, input values are mapped exactly to output values.
gamut
A range of colors. A device gamut is the range of colors that a print device can produce.
An image gamut is the range of colors in a particular image.
gamut mapping
The conversion of color coordinates from one device’s gamut to another, usually
accomplished with algorithms or look-up tables.
GLOSSARY
9
GCR
See gray component replacement.
GDI (Graphics Device Interface)
Graphics and display technology used by Windows computers. GDI applications rely on
GDI (rather than the PostScript language) to send text and pictures to a print device.
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)
A standard for bitmap graphics of up to 256 colors used for posting photographic images on
Internet or intranet pages; rarely used for professional printing.
gradient
A smooth transition between two different colors or two shades of a color.
Graphics Device Interface
See GDI.
Graphics Interchange Format
See GIF.
gravure
A printing technology that uses an etched cylinder that has been immersed in ink. The ink
that remains in the etched areas is applied to the paper. The non-etched surfaces of the
cylinder are non-printing areas.
gray component replacement (GCR)
A method for improving wet ink trapping and reducing ink costs in process color printing.
In shadow, midtone, and quarter-tone areas where all three process colors (C, M, Y)
overprint, the gray components of those colors are reduced and replaced by black.
H
halftoning
A method for representing an original continuous tone image using a pattern of dots, lines, or
other patterns.
Hold queue
A print connection on the Print Server. Jobs sent to the Hold queue are saved to the hard disk
on the Print Server, awaiting intervention from a user with proper access privileges.
GLOSSARY
10
HSB
A color model where each color is represented by its hue, saturation, and brightness
components; supported by most color applications.
HSL
A color model in which each color is represented by its hue, saturation, and lightness
components.
I
ICC profile
An industry standard color profile format developed by the International Color Consortium
(ICC) that describes the color capabilities, including the gamut, of a color device based on the
differences between an ideal and the current device. The ideal is often provided by the
manufacturer as a color reference file. ICC profiles are implemented on Mac OS computers
in ColorSync and on Windows computers in Image Color Matching (ICM). The Print Server
color management system, ColorWise, supports ICC profiles.
imageable area
The actual usable area on a page onto which the Print Server can print.
imagesetter
Raster-based film output device; a high-resolution laser output device that writes bitmapped
data onto photosensitive paper or film.
imposition
Grouping and arranging pages for efficient printing on larger sheets of paper, taking into
account the need to cut and bind the pages after printing.
installable option
An option, such as a finishing unit for the print device or a software option for the Print
Server. After you install a printer driver, you can take advantage of the additional features that
the installable option provides.
IP address
A 32-bit address in the form of four 8-bit numbers separated by periods; for example,
10.35.101.4. The IP address identifies a computer, the Print Server, or a network server on
the network.
GLOSSARY
11
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol)
A network protocol for printing over an intranet or the Internet.
IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange)
A data-transfer protocol used between the Print Server and NetWare networks.
J
job
A file consisting of PostScript or PCL commands and comments that describe the graphics,
sampled images, and text that should appear on each page of a document, and the printer
options that should be used in printing, such as media or finishing options.
job template
A group of print option settings that users can save in the Windows printer drivers and reuse
for other jobs in the future. Windows printer drivers allow more than one saved job template.
Although job templates are not available with the Mac OS printer drivers, users can save the
current group of settings.
JPEG
A graphics file format defined by the Joint Photographic Experts Group committee of
International Standards Organization (ISO); a standard for digital compression of still image
graphic data.
L
Lab
A uniform device-independent color space in which colors are located within a threedimensional rectangular coordinate system. The three dimensions are lightness (L), redness/
greenness (a) and yellowness/blueness (b). (Also referred to as L*a*b* and CIELab.)
LPD (Line Printer Daemon)
A service that you can enable on the Print Server to receive print jobs from UNIX
workstations.
GLOSSARY
12
M
master elements
Used in variable data printing with variable elements. Reusable data that is common across
copies of a document.
member printing
Requires you to enter a valid account name and password (or group name and password) in
the printer driver before the job can be printed. The administrator defines members and
groups.
metamerism
Phenomenon in which two colors composed of different combinations of light wavelengths
appear identical under a specific light source, but may look different under other light
sources. The colors are called “metamers.”
Mixed Media
A feature that allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media.
moiré
An undesirable pattern in images made using halftone screens. Moiré can be caused by the
improper line frequency of the screens, improper screen angles, improper alignment of
halftone screens, or by the combination of a halftone screen with patterns in the image.
N
named color
A color that is defined according to a custom color system. For example, PANTONE 107 C
is a named color; also referred to as a spot color.
O
office applications
Software applications commonly used for business purposes, including presentation,
spreadsheet, and word processing applications.
offset lithography
Printing in which ink is transferred from printing plates to a rubber blanket, and then from
the blanket to paper.
GLOSSARY
13
output
See output profile.
output profile
A file that describes the color characteristics of a printing device. The output profile is
associated with a calibration target that defines the expected density response of the
print device.
P
Pageflex Persona-Fiery Version
A variable content design application that supports PPML and PostScript. It uses PPML to
store and re-use variable data elements.
PANTONE System
One of the best known color specification systems used by designers and printers to
communicate color. Available in Coated, Uncoated, and Matte, each swatch book contains a
series of colors that can be referenced based on the assigned PANTONE notation.
PDF (Portable Document Format)
An open file format specification that describes text and graphics in documents.
phosphor
Material used in making computer monitors; phosphors glow and emit red, green, and blue
light when struck by an electron beam, thus creating an image.
photographic rendering
A color rendering style that preserves tonal relationships in images. Unprintable colors are
mapped to printable colors in a way that retains differences in lightness, sacrificing color
accuracy as necessary.
pixel
The smallest distinct element of a raster image. The term is a combination of the words
“picture” and “element.”
Point and Print
The method for automatically installing a Windows printer driver by connecting to the
Print Server over the network from a Windows computer.
postflight
A quality control tool for predicting how a job will be processed or for diagnosing problems
after a job is printed.
GLOSSARY
14
PostScript
A device-independent page description language that is used to print and display pictures and
text. PostScript 3 includes many enhancements to older versions of PostScript, including
improved image quality and color.
PPD (PostScript Printer Description)
A file containing information about particular PostScript capabilities of the print device.
The information in the PPD is presented via the printer driver.
PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language)
A variable data language.
prepress proof
A print made from a set of film separations or other file to simulate the results of printing.
A prepress proof is the last opportunity to catch problems before the print job goes to press.
presentation graphics rendering
A color rendering style that creates saturated colors but does not match printed colors
precisely to displayed colors. It is appropriate for bright saturated colors used in illustrations
and graphs.
print
The task of rendering, or imaging, a page or job on a print device.
Print queue
The standard print connection on the Print Server that processes jobs and prints them in the
order in which they are received.
Printer Control Language (PCL)
A page description language used to image the page and communicate with applications and
the print device.
printer description file
A file that contains information about the specific print options and settings of the Print
Server; used by the printer driver to display these options and settings. In most cases, the
printer description file is installed automatically when you install the printer driver.
printer driver
A computer program that formats the print job so that it can be sent to the Print Server
for processing.
printing group
See member printing.
process
Used interchangeably with the term “RIP” to refer to raster image processing.
GLOSSARY
15
process colors
The colors used in printing to simulate full-spectrum color images: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
blacK (CMYK).
profile
Systematically describes how a color maps to a particular space. By identifying a source profile
and an output profile, you initiate the appropriate workflow to maintain consistent color
values.
Q
QuickDraw
Graphics and display technology built into Mac OS computers. QuickDraw applications rely
on QuickDraw (rather than the PostScript language) to send text and pictures to the print
device.
R
raster image
Electronic representation of a page or image using a grid of points called pixels.
rasterization
The process of converting code that describes text and graphics into the format that is
understood by a printer’s “print engine” to print them on a page.
rendering intent
The style of color rendering, or gamut mapping, designed for a particular type of color job.
An example of a rendering intent is Photographic rendering (also referred to as Image
rendering or Contrast rendering), which is designed for photographic images.
resolution
The number of pixels per inch (ppi) in a bitmap image or the number of dots per inch (dpi)
that a device can render.
RGB
An additive color model that makes a range of colors by combining red, green, and blue light,
called the additive primaries. Commonly used to refer to the color space, mixing system, or
monitor in color computer graphics.
RIP
Acronym for raster image processing, which changes printer language commands (for
example, PostScript or PCL) into descriptions of each mark on a page. In common use as a
noun, a “raster image processor” (RIP) is the computer processor that performs this function.
The Print Server changes text and graphics commands in PostScript or PCL into
specifications for each dot of toner deposited on a page by the print device.
GLOSSARY
16
S
saddle stitch
Finishing option that stitches together printed output for booklets.
signature
Folded sheets to be trimmed and bound for making booklets.
simulation
See simulation profile.
simulation profile
The simulation profile describes the color characteristics of another print device, such as a
printing press, that you want the Print Server to simulate.
SMB (Server Message Block)
A network protocol used to share files and printers; also known as WINS. Users send print
jobs to the Print Server by communicating directly with it; that is, with no intervening
network server. TCP/IP must be enabled on the Print Server and on the network in order for
SMB to be enabled.
soft proof
An accurate color preview of a job displayed on the monitor.
solid color rendering
A color rendering style intended for use when color accuracy is crucial. Unprintable colors are
mapped to the closest printable colors. Solid color rendering does the best job of preserving
the saturation of displayed colors.
source color space
The color environment of the originating source of a colored element, including scanners and
color monitors.
source profile
A file used by a color management system to determine the characteristics of the color values
specified in a source digital image.
spectral light
The wavelengths of electromagnetic radiation emitted by a given light source that can be seen
by the human eye.
spectrophotometer
An instrument commonly used in the graphic arts industry to measure spectral light
according to a specified standard.
GLOSSARY
17
spool
Write to a disk. Refers to a PostScript or PCL print job saved to the Print Server hard disk in
preparation for processing and printing.
spot color
A color that is printed on its own separation plate when separations are specified. A spot color
is printed using a custom ink for that color, in contrast to process colors, which are printed
using combinations of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. (Also referred to as a named color.)
SPX (Sequenced Packet Exchange)
A data-transfer protocol used between the Print Server and NetWare networks.
Status T
A spectral response for graphic arts reflection densitometers defined by ANSI (American
National Standards Institute).
substrate
The material upon which a job is printed.
subtractive color model
A system in which color is produced by combining colorants such as paint, inks, or dyes
on media such as paper, acetate, or transparent film. All printing devices use the subtractive
color model.
subtractive primaries
Cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants used in subtractive color systems for color printing.
Combining the subtractive primaries produces darker colors. Black is added to the subtractive
primaries to compensate for deficiencies of the toners or inks, and for more efficient black
printing.
SWOP
The abbreviation for Specifications for Web Offset Publications. A standard of specifications
for separations, proofs, and color printing on a web offset press (not a sheet-fed press).
T
tab printing
Printing onto tab stock used to divide sections of a binder.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
A suite of protocols, including TCP, HTTP, and IPP, which are used to provide
communication across a network and between networks and include standards for how
computers communicate over the network.
GLOSSARY
18
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
A common format for exchanging raster graphics (bitmap) images between applications.
trapping
Printing technique in which some objects are printed slightly larger or smaller than you have
specified in an application in order to prevent white edges around these objects.
two-way communication
The manner by which the printer driver discovers options installed on the Print Server and
print device. Using the printer driver, the user polls the Print Server, and the Print Server
updates the printer driver with the list of options installed.
U
undercolor removal (UCR)
A method for improving wet ink trapping and reducing ink costs in process color printing.
In shadow areas where all three process colors (C, M, Y) overprint, the amounts of those
colors are reduced and replaced by black.
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)
A name that refers to a resource on the intranet or Internet; for example, http://www.efi.com.
V
variable data printing (VDP)
Uses digital printing technology that customizes printed communication by linking databases
that contain content. Typically used for personalized mailings; can also be used to create
attractive, highly customized documents.
variable elements
Used in variable data printing with master elements to refer to data that changes with each
customized copy of a document.
vector graphic
Graphic illustration created on computers where picture objects are defined mathematically as
lines or curves between points. These mathematical definitions are interpreted by an image
language such as PostScript. Vector images include artwork created with illustration
applications (such as Adobe Illustrator or Macromedia FreeHand) and page layout
applications (such as Adobe PageMaker).
GLOSSARY
19
W
white point
The color temperature of any white light source, typically expressed in degrees Kelvin
(for example, 6500 K, typical for the white of a monitor).
WINS (Windows Internet Name Services)
See SMB.
workflow
The path a print job follows from creation to destination. A workflow may originate with
an RGB scan imported to the client workstation and opened on the desktop in an image
processing application, such as Adobe Photoshop. After adjustments are made to the scanned
image, it is evaluated on a color proofing device for eventual color printing on the same device
or on a press.
X
Xerox VIPP (Variable data Intelligent PostScript Printware)
A page-description language (PDL) designed especially for printing variable data documents.
LEGAL NOTICES
1
LEGAL NOTICES
This product documentation is protected by copyright, and all rights are reserved. No part of it may be reproduced
or transmitted in any form or by any means for any purpose without express prior written consent from Electronics
for Imaging, Inc. (“EFI”), except as expressly permitted herein. Information in this document is subject to change
without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of EFI.
This product documentation is provided in conjunction with the EFI software (“Software”) and any other EFI
product described in this documentation. The Software is furnished under license and may only be used or copied
in accordance with the terms of the Software License Agreement set forth below.
Patents
This product may be covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
4,828,056, 4,917,488, 4,941,038, 5,109,241, 5,170,182, 5,212,546, 5,260,878, 5,276,490, 5,278,599, 5,335,040,
5,343,311, 5,398,107, 5,424,754, 5,442,429, 5,459,560, 5,467,446, 5,506,946, 5,517,334, 5,537,516, 5,543,940,
5,553,200, 5,563,689, 5,565,960, 5,583,623, 5,596,416, 5,615,314, 5,619,624, 5,625,712, 5,640,228, 5,666,436,
5,682,421, 5,745,657, 5,760,913, 5,799,232, 5,818,645, 5,835,788, 5,859,711, 5,867,179, 5,940,186, 5,959,867,
5,970,174, 5,982,937, 5,995,724, 6,002,795, 6,025,922, 6,035,103, 6,041,200, 6,065,041, 6,081,281, 6,112,665,
6,116,707, 6,122,407, 6,134,018, 6,141,120, 6,166,821, 6,173,286, 6,185,335, 6,201,614, 6,215,562, 6,219,155,
6,219,659, 6,222,641, 6,224,048, 6,225,974, 6,226,419, 6,238,105, 6,239,895, 6,256,108, 6,269,190, 6,271,937,
6,278,901, 6,279,009, 6,289,122, 6,292,270, 6,299,063, 6,310,697, 6,321,133, 6,327,047, 6,327,050, 6,327,052,
6,330,071, 6,330,363, 6,331,899, 6,340,975, 6,341,017, 6,341,018, 6,341,307, 6,347,256, 6,348,978, 6,356,359,
6,366,918, 6,369,895, 6,381,036, 6,400,443, 6,429,949, 6,449,393, 6,457,823, 6,476,927, 6,490,696, 6,501,565,
6,519,053, 6,539,323, 6,543,871, 6,546,364, 6,549,294, 6,549,300, 6,550,991, 6,552,815, 6,559,958, 6,572,293,
6,590,676, 6,606,165, 6,616,355, 6,633,396, 6,636,326, 6,637,958, 6,643,317, 6,647,149, 6,657,741, 6,660,103,
6,662,199, 6,678,068, 6,679,640, 6,707,563, 6,741,262, 6,748,471, 6,753,845, 6,757,436, 6,757,440, 6,778,700,
6,781,596, 6,786,578, 6,816,276, 6,825,943, 6,832,865, 6,836,342, 6,850,335, 6,856,428, 6,857,803, 6,859,832,
6,866,434, 6,874,860, 6,879,409, 6,885,477, 6,888,644, 6,905,189, 6,930,795, 6,950,110, 6,956,966, 6,962,449,
6,967,728, 6,974,269, 6,977,752, 6,978,299, RE33,973, RE36,947, RE38,732, D341,131, D406,117, D416,550,
D417,864, D419,185, D426,206, D439,851, D444,793.
Trademarks
ColorWise, Command WorkStation, DocBuilder Pro, DocStream, EDOX, EFI, Fiery, the Fiery logo, Fiery Driven,
the Fiery Driven logo, OneFlow, PrinterSite, PrintFlow, PrintMe, PrintSmith, PrintSmith Site, Prograph, Proteus,
and RIP-While-Print are registered trademarks of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. in the U.S. Patent and Trademark
Office and/or certain other foreign jurisdictions. Bestcolor is a registered trademark of EFI GmbH in the U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office.
ADS, AutoCal, Auto-Count, Balance, Build, ColorCal, Digital StoreFront, Estimate, Fiery Link, Fiery Prints, Fiery
Spark, FreeForm, Hagen, Intelligent Device Management, Logic, MicroPress, Printcafe, PSI, PSI Flexo, RIPChips,
Scan, SendMe, Splash, Spot-On, VisualCal, WebTools, the EFI logo, the Fiery Prints logo, and Essential to Print
are trademarks of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Best, the Best logo, Colorproof, PhotoXposure, Remoteproof, and
Screenproof are trademarks of EFI GmbH.
All other terms and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners, and are
hereby acknowledged.
Legal Notifications
APPLE COMPUTER, INC. (“APPLE”) MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE APPLE SOFTWARE. APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT,
GUARANTEE, OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF
THE USE OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS
NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
LEGAL NOTICES
2
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLE
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU. Apple’s liability to you for actual damages from any cause whatsoever, and regardless of the form of the
action (whether in contract, tort [including negligence], product liability, or otherwise), will be limited to $50.
PANTONE® Colors displayed in the Software or in the documentation may not match PANTONE-identified
standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc.
trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2001. Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of
PANTONE color data and/or software.
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (www.apache.org).
FCC Information
WARNING: FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Refer to the Class Compliance sticker affixed to the back of your Fiery (or, in the case of embedded systems, to the
sticker affixed to the print engine) to identify the appropriate classification (A or B, below) for this product.
Class A Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference,
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Industry Canada Class A Notice
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de Conformation Classe A de l’Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Class B Declaration of Conformity
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
In order to maintain compliance with FCC regulations, shielded cables must be used with this equipment. Operation
with non-approved equipment or unshielded cables is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception.
The user is cautioned that changes and modifications made to the equipment without the approval of the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Industry Canada Class B Notice
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de Conformation Classe B de l’Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
LEGAL NOTICES
3
RFI Compliance Notice
This equipment has been tested concerning compliance with the relevant RFI protection requirements both
individually and on a system level (to simulate normal operation conditions). However, it is possible that these RFI
Requirements are not met under certain unfavorable conditions in other installations. It is the user who is responsible
for compliance of his particular installation.
Dieses Gerät wurde sowohl einzeln als auch in einer Anlage, die einen normalen Anwendungsfall nachbildet, auf die
Einhaltung der Funkentstörbestimmungen geprüft. Es ist jedoch möglich, dass die Funkentstörbestimmungen unter
ungünstigen Umständen bei anderen Gerätekombinationen nicht eingehalten werden. Für die Einhaltung der
Funkentstörbestimmungen einer gesamten Anlage, in der dieses Gerät betrieben wird, ist der Betreiber
verantwortlich.
Compliance with applicable regulations depends on the use of shielded cables. It is the user who is responsible for
procuring the appropriate cables.
Die Einhaltung zutreffender Bestimmungen hängt davon ab, dass geschirmte Ausführungen benützt werden. Für die
Beschaffung richtiger Ausführungen ist der Betreiber verantwortlich.
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity)
This product complies with the following EU directives: 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC, and 93/68/EEC directives.
This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY.
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND ELECTRONICS FOR
IMAGING, INC. (“EFI”) REGARDING THE EFI SOFTWARE (“SOFTWARE”). BY INSTALLING,
COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THE
SOFTWARE AND YOU MAY RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE, WITH PROOF OF PAYMENT, FOR
A FULL REFUND TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS OF THE PURCHASE
DATE.
License
EFI grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software solely in accordance with the terms and conditions
of this License Agreement, solely as specified in the EFI product documentation, and solely with the product(s)
specified in the EFI product documentation (“Product(s)”).
The term “Software” as used in this License Agreement shall mean the EFI software (including software provided
by third-party suppliers) and all documentation, downloads, on-line materials, bug fixes, patches, releases, release
notes, updates, upgrades, technical support materials, and information regarding the EFI software. The terms and
conditions of this License Agreement shall apply to and govern your use of any such item to the extent that EFI
does not provide a separate or additional written license agreement for such item.
The Software is licensed, not sold. You may use the Software solely for the purposes described in the EFI product
documentation. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend, or otherwise distribute the Software or use the Software
in any time sharing, service bureau, or similar arrangement.
You may not make or have made, or permit to be made, any copies of the Software or portions thereof, except one
(1) backup or archive copy for the purposes permitted in this License Agreement; provided, however, that under no
circumstances may you make or have made, or permit to be made, any copies of any portion of the Software that is
included on any portion of the controller board or hardware of a product. Any copies of the Software that you are
permitted to make pursuant to this Agreement must contain the same copyright and other proprietary notices that
appear on or in the software. You agree not to localize, translate, disassemble, decompile, decrypt, reverse engineer,
discover the source code of, modify, create derivative works of, or in any way change any part of the Software.
Intellectual Property Rights
You acknowledge and agree that all rights, title, and interest, including all intellectual property rights, in and relating
to the Software, all EFI Products, and all copies, modifications, and derivative works thereof, are solely owned by and
shall remain with EFI and its suppliers. Except for the express limited license granted in this License Agreement, no
right or license of any kind is granted. You receive no rights or license under any patents, copyrights, trade secrets,
trademarks (whether registered or unregistered), or other intellectual property. You agree not to adopt, register, or
attempt to register any EFI trademark or trade name or any confusingly similar mark, URL, internet domain name,
or symbol as your own name or the name of your affiliates or products, and agree not to take any other action which
impairs or reduces the trademark rights of EFI or its suppliers.
LEGAL NOTICES
4
Confidentiality
The Software is confidential, proprietary information of EFI and its suppliers and you may not distribute or disclose
the Software. You may, however, permanently transfer all of your rights under this License Agreement to another
person or legal entity provided that: (1) such a transfer is authorized under all applicable export laws and regulations,
including the laws and regulations of the United States, including the United States Export Administration
Regulations; (2) you transfer to the person or entity all of the Software (including all copies, updates, upgrades,
media, printed documentation, and this License Agreement); (3) you retain no copies of the Software, including no
backup, archival, or other copies, however stored; and (4) the recipient agrees to all of the terms and conditions of
this License Agreement.
Termination
Unauthorized use, copying, or disclosure of the Software, or any breach of this License Agreement will result in
automatic termination of this license and will make available to EFI other legal remedies. In the event of termination,
you must destroy all copies of the Software and all component parts thereof. All provisions of this License Agreement
relating to confidentiality of the Software, disclaimers of warranties, limitation of liability, remedies, damages,
governing law, jurisdiction, venue, EFI’s intellectual property rights, and Adobe software shall survive any
termination of this license.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer
EFI warrants that the Software, if used as specified in the EFI product documentation, will perform substantially
in accordance with the EFI product documentation for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt.
EFI makes no warranty or representation that the Software will meet your specific requirements, that the operation
of the Software will be uninterrupted, secure, fault-tolerant, or error free, or that all defects in the Software will be
corrected. EFI makes no warranty, implied or otherwise, regarding the performance or reliability of any other
Products or services or any third party products (software or hardware) or services. THE INSTALLATION OF ANY
THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED BY EFI WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY.
USE, MODIFICATION, AND/OR REPAIR OF THE SOFTWARE OR AN EFI PRODUCT OTHER THAN
AS AUTHORIZED BY EFI WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY. FURTHER, THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS
VOID IF A PROBLEM WITH THE SOFTWARE ARISES FROM ACCIDENT, ABUSE, MISAPPLICATION,
ABNORMAL USE, VIRUS, WORM, OR SIMILAR CIRCUMSTANCE.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS
LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE (“LIMITED WARRANTY”), EFI MAKES AND YOU
RECEIVE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE, ANY
PRODUCT AND/OR ANY SERVICES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY
OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION. EFI AND ITS
SUPPLIERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, REPRESENTATIONS, AND
CONDITIONS, INCLUDING THOSE OF SECURITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. THERE IS NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE AND/OR ANY
PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, FAULT-TOLERANT, SECURE, OR ERROR-FREE. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY,
AND THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS, RELATING TO ANY AND ALL
SOFTWARE, PRODUCTS, SERVICES, AND/OR APPLICABLE WARRANTIES SHALL BE, AT EFI’S
OPTION, (1) TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THE LIMITED
WARRANTY; OR (2) PROVIDE A REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID (IF ANY) FOR THE SOFTWARE THAT
DOES NOT MEET THE LIMITED WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION, EFI AND
ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL PROVIDE NO REFUNDS, RETURNS, EXCHANGES, OR REPLACEMENTS.
Limitation of Liability
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOU AGREE THAT THE ENTIRE
LIABILITY OF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS FOR ALL CLAIMS RELATED TO ANY SOFTWARE, PRODUCT,
SERVICES, AND/OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION
(WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, UNDER STATUTE, OR OTHERWISE), SHALL BE LIMITED
TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU, IF ANY, FOR THE EFI SOFTWARE. YOU AGREE THAT SUCH
AMOUNT IS SUFFICIENT TO SATISFY THE ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT
AND THAT SUCH A LIABILITY IS A FAIR AND REASONABLE ESTIMATE OF ANY LOSS AND
DAMAGE LIKELY TO BE SUFFERED IN THE EVENT OF ANY WRONGFUL ACT OR OMISSION BY
EFI AND/OR ITS SUPPLIERS. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
LEGAL NOTICES
5
IN NO EVENT SHALL EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR COST OF PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE SOFTWARE, PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, LOST PROFITS OR DATA, THIRD PARTY
CLAIMS, OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, RELIANCE, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, RELATED TO
ANY SOFTWARE, PRODUCT, SERVICES AND/OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. THIS LIMITATION
SHALL APPLY EVEN IF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. YOU AGREE THAT THE PRICE OF THE EFI SOFTWARE REFLECTS THIS
ALLOCATION OF RISK. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS
OF LIABILITY AND DISCLAIMERS FORM AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT, WITHOUT WHICH EFI WOULD NOT HAVE LICENSED THE EFI SOFTWARE TO
YOU.
BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW SOME OR ALL OF THE EXCLUSIONS AND/OR
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY HEREIN, SOME OR ALL OF THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS AND
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
You are hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation located at 345 Park Avenue,
San Jose, CA 95110-2704 (“Adobe”) is a third-party beneficiary to this License Agreement to the extent that this
License Agreement contains provisions which relate to your use of any software, font programs, typefaces, and/or
trademarks licensed or supplied by Adobe. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are
enforceable by Adobe in addition to EFI. ADOBE WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER TO YOU
FOR ANY ADOBE SOFTWARE OR TECHNOLOGY LICENSED HEREUNDER.
Export Restrictions
The Software and EFI Products are subject to the export laws and regulations of the United States, including the
United States Export Administration Regulations. The license granted to you herein is conditioned upon your
compliance with all applicable export laws and regulations, including the export laws and regulations of the United
States. You represent and agree that you will not use, disclose, distribute, transfer, export, or re-export any portion of
the Software or any EFI Product in any form in violation of any applicable export laws and regulations, including the
export laws and regulations of the United States.
Adobe Software
The Software may contain the following Adobe Systems Incorporated (“Adobe”) materials: (a) software included
as part of the printing system, including PostScript® software, Font Programs (digitally-encoded machine-readable
outline data encoded in special format and in encrypted form used to produce various typefaces) and other Adobe
software (collectively, “Printing Software”), and (b) other software which runs on a computer system for use in
conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”). The following terms are applicable to the materials
provided by Adobe:
1. Printing Software. You may use the Printing Software (in object code form only) (i) on a single output device
that contains an embedded controller; OR (ii) for Printing Software residing on a host computer, on up to the
authorized number of central processing units (“CPUs”) for which you are licensed, for imaging to the licensed
output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. You may not change the name of any driver software
file or driver software icon without consent of EFI. You may use Roman character Font Programs and Adobe Type
Manager® to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on
up to five (5) computers for use with the Printing Software.
2. Host Software. You may install the Host Software in a single location on a hard disk or other storage device on
one (or the authorized number of) computer(s) for which you are licensed (“Permitted No. of Computers”), and,
provided that the Host Software is configured for network use, install and use the Host Software on a single file server
for use on a single local area network for either (but not both) of the following purposes: (i) permanent installation
onto a hard disk or other storage device on the Permitted No. of Computers; or (ii) use of the Host Software over
such network, provided the use of the Host Software does not exceed the Permitted No. of Computers. You may
make one backup copy of the Host Software (which shall not be installed or used).
You are hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation located at 345 Park Avenue, San
Jose, CA 95110-2704 (“Adobe”) is a third-party beneficiary to this License Agreement to the extent that this License
Agreement contains provisions which relate to your use of any software, font programs, typefaces, and/or trademarks
licensed or supplied by Adobe. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are enforceable by
Adobe in addition to EFI. ADOBE WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER TO YOU FOR ANY ADOBE
SOFTWARE OR TECHNOLOGY LICENSED HEREUNDER.
LEGAL NOTICES
6
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set
forth in FAR 12.212 or DFARS 227.7202-3 - 227.7202-4 and, to the extent required under U.S. federal law, the
minimum restricted rights as set out in FAR 52.227-14, Restricted Rights Notice (June 1987) Alternate III(g)(3)
(June 1987) or FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987). To the extent any technical data is provided pursuant to the Agreement,
such data is protected per FAR 12.211 and DFARS 227.7102-2 and to the extent explicitly required by the U.S.
Government, is subject to limited rights as set out in DFARS 252.227.7015 (November 1995) and DFARS
252.227-7037 (September 1999). In the event that any of the above referenced agency regulations are modified or
superseded, the subsequent equivalent regulation shall apply. The name of the Contractor is Electronics for Imaging,
Inc.
Governing Law and Jurisdiction
The rights and obligations of the parties related to this License Agreement will be governed in all respects by the laws
of the State of California exclusively, as such laws apply to contracts between California residents performed entirely
within California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and any other
similar convention does not apply to this License Agreement. For all disputes related to the Software, Products,
Services, and/or this License Agreement, you consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction and venue of the state
courts in San Mateo County, California and the federal court for the Northern District of California.
General
This Agreement is the entire agreement held between us and supersedes any other communications or advertising
with respect to the Software, Products, Services, and any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement.
If any provision of the License Agreement is held invalid, such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent
necessary to be enforceable and the other provisions in this License Agreement shall continue in full force and effect.
If you have any questions, see the EFI web site at www.efi.com.
Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
303 Velocity Way
Foster City, CA 94404
USA
Copyright © 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. All rights reserved.
Part Number: 45054231
24 January 2006
Download PDF
Similar pages